Panasonic Mobile Communications 208015A UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID User Manual Part 1 of 2

Panasonic Mobile Communications Development of Europe Ltd UMTS/ GSM Cellular Mobile with Bluetooth® and RFID Part 1 of 2

Contents

User Manual Part 1 of 2

P-08A
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
ISSUE DATE: ‘09.6
NAME:
PHONE NUMBER:
MAIL ADDRESS:
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Before Using the Handset
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Phonebook
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Security Settings
Camera
i-mode/Full Browser
i-αppli/i-Widget
Map/GPS Function
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
Mail
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
1Seg
Data Management
Music
Convenient Functions
Character Entry
Network Services
PC Connection
Overseas Use
Appendix/Troubleshooting
Index/Quick Manual
DOCOMO W-CDMA・GSM/GPRS System
Thank you for selecting the “docomo STYLE series P-08A”.
Before or during use of the P-08A, make sure that you read this manual and the
separate manuals for other optional devices thoroughly so that you can use the
P-08A correctly.
If you feel any inconvenience in reading the manual, contact the docomo
Information Center listed on the back page of this manual.
The P-08A is designed to be your close partner. Treat it carefully at all times to
ensure long-term performance.
●Because the FOMA terminals use radio waves, they cannot be used in places
where radio waves do not reach, such as inside tunnels, underground, or in
buildings; or the outside where radio waves are weak or out of the FOMA
service area. They may not be used in the high-rise buildings even when the
antennas are unobstructed. You may also experience interruption of calls
even when using without moving while the radio waves are strong enough for
the three antennas to appear on the display.
●Use the FOMA terminal carefully to avoid disturbing other people when in
public, or in crowded or quiet places.
●Since the FOMA terminals use radio waves as the medium of
telecommunication, calls may be tapped by the third party.
However, the W-CDMA・GSM/GPRS system automatically supports tapping
prevention, so your conversation will be incomprehensible to the third party,
because it is recognized as mere noise.
●The FOMA terminals change your voice into digital signals and send them to
the other party. In places where the radio waves are weak, the digital signals
may not be converted correctly, and in such a case, the voice may sound
different from the actual original voice.
●
The user hereby agrees that the user shall be solely responsible for the result of
the use of SSL/TLS. Neither DOCOMO nor the certifiers as listed herein make any
representation and warranty as for the security in the use of SSL/TLS. In the event
that the user shall sustain damage or loss due to the use of SSL/TLS, neither
DOCOMO nor the certifiers shall be responsible for any such damage or loss.
Certifiers: VeriSign Japan K.K., Cybertrust Japan Co., Ltd., GlobalSign K.K.,
RSA Security Japan Ltd., SECOM Trust Systems Co., Ltd., and
Comodo CA Ltd.
●This FOMA terminal supports FOMA Plus-Area and FOMA High-Speed Area.
●The FOMA terminal can be used only via the FOMA network provided by
DOCOMO and in DOCOMO’s roaming area.
●It is recommended that you make separate notes of the information (such as
Phonebook entries, schedule events, text memos, record messages, voice
memos, movie memos) stored in the FOMA terminal and keep them in a safe
place. Note that we cannot be held responsible for the unlikely event of loss of
the stored contents due to a malfunction, repair, change of your model, or
other mishandling of the FOMA terminal.
●You are advised to save your important data files to the microSD card. If you
have a personal computer, you can transfer and save the information such as
Phonebook entries, mail messages, schedule events, and others to the
personal computer by using DOCOMO keitai datalink.
Before using your FOMA terminal
For Using This Manual
This FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (page 114).
If you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display,
some menu configurations change according to the usage
frequency depending on the type of the menu. Further, some menu
numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply.
You can download the latest information about this manual
from the following DOCOMO website:
・User’s Manual (PDF file) Download
(http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/support/manual/index.html)
※The URL and the content of the website might be modified
without notice.
1
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
In this manual, illustrations and symbols are used in the explanations so
that you can correctly and easily use the FOMA terminal.
pThe most operating procedures and displays in this manual are described with the
default settings of the “Mat Black” (see page 466) handset. However, the following
settings are changed.
・“Display setting” → “Stand-by display”: OFF
・“Display setting” → “Clock” → “Stand-by clock” → “Position”: Pattern 1
・“Color theme setting”: White
・“Menu icon setting”: Normal
・“Disp. call/receive No.” → “Font color”: Black
pDisplays and illustrations described in this manual are for reference. The actual ones
might differ.
pIn this manual, “Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli which supports the IC card function” is
described as “Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli”.
pNote that “P-08A” is referred to as “FOMA terminal” in this manual.
pIn the operating procedures of this manual, key operations are described with
simplified key icons.
pThe functions which use a microSD card are described in this manual; however, you
need to obtain a microSD card separately to make these functions available. See
page 360 for the microSD card.
Viewing/Searching This Manual By the following search methods, you can find pages where your desired
functions and services are described:
How to Refer to This Manual
Search from the index when you know the names of functions or services.
Search from keywords for the functions you frequently use or the functions that are
convenient if you can know any.
Search from the tabs printed on the cover.
See the next page for details.
Search from the contents that categorize functions.
Search from here to use the main functions.
Search from the function list.
Quick Manual gives you a clear, brief description about basic functions. You can take it
when you go out. Further, Quick Manual “For Overseas Use” is attached, so refer to it
when you use the FOMA terminal overseas.
From the Index
From Easy Search
From the Tabs on the Cover
From the Contents P.6
From the Main Functions P.8
From the Function List P.466
From Quick Manual P.550
It is prohibited to copy all or part of this manual without permission.
The instructions contained in this manual may be changed without notice.
2
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
How to search for “Alarm” is explained here as an example of search method.
Additional guidance . . . . . . . . . . 450
Address link function . . . . . . . . . . . 210
After-sales services . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Alarm setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Answer setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
From the Index
P.540
Search for a function or a service
name as shown on the right.
Search for the function you
frequently use or that is
convenient if you know any as
shown on the right.
Other things you can do
To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 114
To scan QR codes or bar codes ...................................... <Bar Code Reader> 243
To listen to music .................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 276
To check your location and area information .................<Map/GPS Function> 324
To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 362
To exchange information using infrared rays.........<Infrared Communication> 376
To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock.....................................<Alarm> 396
To use the FOMA terminal as a calculator .................................. <Calculator> 410
To use the FOMA terminal overseas ........................<International Roaming> 452
To update software programs........................................... <Software Update> 517
Go to page 394
where “Alarm”
is explained.
From Easy Search
P.4
i-αppli/i-Widget
Map/GPS Function
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Data Management
Music
Convenient Functions
Character Entry
Network Services
PC Connection
Overseas Use
Appendix/Troubleshooting
From the Tabs on the
Cover
Cover page
Search for the function you want
to set in the order of “Cover”
→ “First page of Chapter”
→ “Description page” as shown
on the right.
3
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
396
Convenient Functions
You can set Alarm to alert you at the specified time with an alarm tone,
animation and illumination. You can store up to 12 alarms.
1mStationeryAlarmHighlight an
alarm and press l( )
Do the following operations.
2Press l( ).
+m-4-4
<Alarm>
Using Alarm
Alarm You can set whether to validate or invalidate the alarm.
ON or OFF
Time Enter the time for sounding the alarm.
pYou cannot set the same time as the time set for the stored
alarm.
Tone Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pIf you set “Step”, the alarm tone is silent for about three
seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three
seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
Prefer manner
mode
You can set the alarm tone which sounds at the specified time
during Manner Mode.
ON or OFF
ON. . . . . Sounds at the same volume as set for “Alarm volume”.
OFF. . . . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
The icon appears on the Stand-by display.
“ ” . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time).
“ ” . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only.
pIf you set “Alarm” of a schedule event/ToDo item to “OFF”, the icon is not displayed.
Function Menu while Alarm is Displayed
Edit Go to step 1 of “Using Alarm” on page 396.
Detail You can display the stored alarm contents.
Set this You can validate the stored alarm.
YES
pYou can validate also by pressing Oo( ).
Set all You can validate all the stored alarm.
YES
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter you Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pIf the alarm tone sounds during a call, press any key to stop it. Once again press any
key to end the alarm including Snooze. If the other party on the phone hangs up, an
alarm including Snooze ends.
pDuring a call, the alarm tone sounds at the level set for “Volume” (earpiece volume).
pTurn off the FOMA terminal after setting “Auto power ON” to “OFF” when you are near
electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is
prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
When you set an alarm for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, and “ToDo”
Note: The page above is a sample.
Menu number
(See page 34)
Function name
You can find this in
Index.
Operating
procedure
(See page 32)
Reference display
(Characters and settings
are for reference.)
Options and their
explanations
Items shown on the
display
(Some items cannot
be executed.)
Operation and
supplementary
explanation for each
item
Operations related to
the function and
explanations for
supplementary
operations
Chapter title
You can
search by
chapter.
Cautions or
references for using
each function
Lower sub-menu item
of the Function menu
4
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
To retrieve a desired function with simple words, refer to the following:
Easy Search
To know convenient functions for making calls
To/Not to notify your phone number to the other party
....................................................................................<Caller ID Notification> 46
To switch to a videophone call during a voice call
...........................................................................<Switch to Videophone Call> 51
To change a volume level of the other party’s voice ....................... <Volume> 66
To put a call on hold during a call.................................................... <Holding> 67
To do the following when you cannot answer calls
To put an incoming call on hold before answering ......................... <On Hold> 67
To convey the message that you need to refrain from talking on the phone
.....................................................................Using Public Mode (Drive Mode) 68
....................................................................... Using Public Mode (Power Off) 68
To record voice/video messages.......................... <Record Message Setting> 69
To change melody or illumination
To adjust the ring volume ........................................................ <Ring Volume> 66
To change ring tones according to callers...................... <Add to Phonebook> 88
To change ring tones........................................................ <Select Ring Tone> 102
To know incoming calls by vibrator .................................................<Vibrator> 104
To mute the keypad sound................................................... <Keypad Sound> 105
To activate Manner Mode...................................................... <Manner Mode> 106
To change colors/lighting patterns of Call indicator for incoming calls
.................................................................................................. <Illumination> 115
To change/know display settings
To know the meaning of marks (icons) on the display .....................<Display> 27
To change the Stand-by display (Wallpaper) ...................... <Display Setting> 109
To display a calendar on the Stand-by display ..............................<Calendar> 109
To change the menu display .......................................... <Menu Icon Setting> 114
To change the font size .................................................... <Font Size Setting> 118
To make full use of mail
To send Deco-mail ...................................................................... <Deco-mail> 145
To send images ....................................................................... <Attachments> 152
To sort and save mail automatically ..............................................<Auto-sort> 171
To make full use of camera
To shoot with the flash/photo light...........<Flash Setting/Photo Light Setting> 236
To change the shooting size...................................................... <Image Size> 237
To save to the microSD card ...........................................................<Store In> 238
To display shot images......................................................... <Picture Viewer> 334
5
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
※1 This is a pay service.
※2 This is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis.
To use the FOMA terminal with a sense of security
To lock the FOMA terminal from away when it gets lost
......................................................................................... <Omakase Lock>※1125
To keep Phonebook entries from prying eyes ......................... <Secret Mode> 133
To reject calls without a caller ID ..............................<Call Setting without ID> 135
To reject calls from the phone numbers that are not
in the Phonebook ............................................................ <Reject Unknown> 136
To separately store Phonebook and other data
files in preparation for their erasure.................... <Data Security Service>※2137
To make full use of 1Seg
To watch 1Seg programs ...................................................... <Activate 1Seg> 249
To record 1Seg programs.................. <Record Video> <Record Still Images> 256
To set TV Timer/Timer Recording for 1Seg programs
.......................................................................<TV Timer> <Timer Recording> 257
To change settings of video and audio ...................................<User Settings> 262
Other things you can do
To reduce the battery consumption .............................. <Power Saver Mode> 112
To scan QR codes or bar codes ...................................... <Bar Code Reader> 241
To listen to music .................................................................. <MUSIC Player> 274
To check your location and area information.................<Map/GPS Function> 322
To use the microSD card ...................................................... <microSD Card> 360
To exchange information using infrared rays.........<Infrared Communication> 374
To use the FOMA terminal as an alarm clock.....................................<Alarm> 394
To use the FOMA terminal as a calculator ..................................<Calculator> 408
To use the FOMA terminal overseas ........................<International Roaming> 450
To update software programs........................................... <Software Update> 515
To update security ......................................................... <Scanning Function> 520
pThe operating procedures for frequently used functions are summarized in Quick
Manual. (See page 550)
6
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Contents
Viewing/Searching This Manual . . . . .1
Easy Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Main Functions of P-08A. . . . . . . . . . . .8
Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Standard Accessory Kit and Main
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Before Using the
Handset
21
Part Names and Functions, Display, Desktop Icon,
Selecting Menu, Guide, UIM (FOMA Card), Battery,
Charging, Power ON/OFF, Select Language,
Set Time, World Time Watch, Caller ID Notification,
Own Number, etc.
Voice/
Videophone Calls/
PushTalk
47
Making a Call/Videophone Call, Call Records,
Chaku-moji, Receiving a Call/Videophone Call, Volume,
Ring Volume, Public Mode, Record Message Setting,
Chara-den, Making a PushTalk Call,
Receiving a PushTalk Call, PushTalk Phonebook, etc.
Phonebook
87
Available Phonebooks,
Add to Phonebook (FOMA terminal/UIM),
Group Setting, Search Phonebook, Edit Phonebook,
Delete Data, No. of Phonebook, 2-touch Dial,
Voice Dial
Sound/Screen/
Light Settings
101
Select Ring Tone, Vibrator, Speed Selector Sound,
Manner Mode, Display Setting, Backlight,
Menu Icon Setting, Kisekae Tool, Set to Machi-chara,
Illumination, Font, etc.
Security Settings
121
Security Codes, Change Security Code,
Releasing PIN Lock, Lock All, Omakase Lock,
Self Mode, Personal Data Lock, Keypad Dial Lock,
Secret Mode, Call Setting without ID, Reject Unknown,
Reset Settings, Initialize, etc.
Mail
141
i-mode Mail, Deco-mail, Decome-Anime, Template,
Attachments, Mail Auto-receive, Receive Option,
Check New Messages, Message R/F,
Early Warning “Area Mail”, Chat Mail, SMS, etc.
i-mode/
Full Browser
189
i-mode, iMenu, My Menu, Change i-mode Password,
Full Browser, Last URL, Enter URL, Bookmark,
Screen Memo, Download, Upload, i-mode Settings,
Certificate, etc.
i-motion/Movie/
i-Channel/i-concier
217
i-motion/Movie, Download i-motion/Movie,
Movie Auto Play Setting, i-Channel, i-concier
Camera
225
Before Using Camera, Still Image Shoot,
Moving Picture Shoot, Settings for Shooting,
Setting Image Size/Image Quality, Bar Code Reader
1Seg
245
1Seg, Before Using 1Seg, Channel Setting,
Activate 1Seg, i-αppli Program Guide,
Data Broadcasting, TVlink, Recording 1Seg,
TV Timer/Timer Recording, User Settings
Music
265
Music&Video Channel, Set Program,
Playing/Operating Programs, Playing Music,
Saving Music Files, MUSIC Player, Playlist
7
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
i-αppli/i-Widget
285
i-αppli, i-αppli Download, i-αppli Run, iαppli Settings,
Starting i-αppli Automatically, iαppli Call,
i-αppli Stand-by Display, iαppli Data, i-Widget,
Start Widget Appli
Osaifu-Keitai/
ToruCa
309
Osaifu-Keitai, iC Transfer Service, IC Card Content,
IC Card Lock, Check IC Owner, ToruCa,
Receive ToruCa Files, ToruCa Viewer,
ToruCa File List/Detailed ToruCa File Display,
ToruCa Settings
Map/GPS Function
321
Using GPS Function, Position Location,
Map/GPS Compatible i-αppli, Provide Location,
Notify of Location, Location History, GPS Settings
Data Management
331
Picture Viewer, i-motion Player, Movie Player,
Video Player, Chara-den, Machi-chara, Melody Player,
Kisekae Tool, microSD Card, Voice Recorder,
PDF Viewer, etc.
Convenient
Functions
389
Multiaccess, Multitask, Reading Aloud,
Auto Power ON/OFF, Alarm, Schedule, ToDo,
Multi Key Long Press Setting, Own Number, Call Data,
Calculator, Bluetooth Function, Check Settings, etc.
Character Entry
421
Character Entry, Mode 1 (5-touch), Common Phrases,
Cut/Copy/Paste, Own Dictionary, Learned Words,
Download Dictionary, Mode 2 (2-touch),
Mode 3 (NIKO-touch)
Network Services
431
Check New Messages, Voice Mail, Call Waiting,
Call Forwarding, Nuisance Call Blocking,
Caller ID Request, Dual Network, Service Numbers,
Remote Control, Multi Number, 2in1, OFFICEED, etc.
Overseas Use
449
Outline of International Roaming (WORLD WING),
Available Services, Confirmation for Using,
Making a Call at the Country You Stay,
Receiving a Call, 3G/GSM Setting,
Set Roaming Guidance, Network Services, etc.
PC Connection
459
Available Data Communication,
Before Using Data Communication,
Setup Flow for Data Transfer (OBEX™ Communication),
Setup Flow for Data Communication, AT Command,
CD-ROM, DOCOMO Keitai Datalink
Appendix/
Troubleshooting
465
Function List, Options and Related Devices,
Troubleshooting, Error Messages, Warranty and
After-sales Services, i-mode Fault Diagnosis Site,
Software Update, Scanning Function, Main Specifications,
SAR, Export Administration Regulations, etc.
Index/
Quick Manual
539
Index, Quick Manual,
Quick Manual “For Overseas Use”
8
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Main Functions of P-08A
◆i-concier P.222
i-concier is a service that enables you to receive useful information from a character
(Machi-chara image) on the Stand-by display and download schedule event
(i-schedule) files for your convenience.
Downloaded i-schedule events or ToruCa files are automatically updated to the latest
information, and the address information of shops/companies, etc. is automatically
added to the Phonebook.
◆i-αppli Call P.302
i-αppli call is a useful function for online games that enables your content provider or
third party to give notice to your opponent to start the specified corresponding
application.
◆International Roaming P.293, P.450
Your FOMA terminal, phone number, and mail address are available overseas (3G/
GSM areas are supported).
Further, “日英版／日中版 しゃべって翻訳 for P (J-E/J-C Speech Translation for
P)”, which translates words into English or Chinese if you talk in Japanese, and into
Japanese if in English or Chinese, is pre-installed.
◆Display Battery P.43
You can check detailed battery level by 100 steps.
◆i-Widget P.306
i-Widget is a useful function that enables you to easily access the tools and
commonly-used contents (Widget Appli) such as a calculator, clock, TV program list,
and stock prices information.
By launching the i-Widget display, you can check your desired latest information at a
glance.
◆i-mode P.190
You are now enabled to check websites more easily for information by enhanced
operational performance, and to enjoy various moving picture contents as Flash®
Video and Windows Media® Video are supported.
◆1Seg P.246
You can watch 1Seg programs of the terrestrial digital broadcasting for mobile
objects. By Moblie W-Speed, the outline of images are automatically corrected so
that you can watch more smooth videos of 1Seg programs. Also, the light sensor
automatically adjusts the backlight in accordance with the ambient brightness, and
the LCD AI compensates the image quality in accordance with the brightness.
◆Bluetooth Function P.412
The wirelessly-connected FOMA terminal and a Bluetooth device enable you to talk
or listen to music while you are carrying the FOMA terminal in your bag.
◆Impressive Liquid Crystal Display
You can display still images and moving pictures in the Full Wide VGA (480 dots x
854 dots) display of approx. 3.1 inches and can enjoy watching 1Seg programs on
the impressive display.
Moreover, you can use the side key to shoot still images and moving pictures with
horizontal wide display just like using a digital camera.
◆Feel＊Mail P.176
Animation of 45 characters and illumination reproduce the atmosphere of mail
messages. Pleasant animation appears and illumination lights according to the
contents of mail message.
9
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
◆Speed Selector P.25
By the rotating operation, you can scroll displays and select items quickly. Further, in
various situation, you can comfortably operate functions such as volume adjustment
during music playback or during a call, and zoom adjustment for when shooting with
the camera.
◆Swing Slide P.24
When you slide to open, the display slightly comes up to your side, so it is easy to see
and you feel the naturally-angled touch when putting it on your face during a call.
◆Recv. Mail/Call at Open P.111
When a missed call or new mail message is found, just open the FOMA terminal to
display the detailed Missed Call display or the Inbox list.
◆View Blind P.113
You can make the display hard to see from an angle. You can use the FOMA
terminal without concern for others’ eyes.
◆Camera P.226
You can use approximate 8,100,000 pixels of high-precision camera to shoot still
images and moving pictures. Further, owing to Intelligent Auto, you can shoot still
images in a mode that is most suitable for your photographing scene, and can detect
the outline of a person’s face to automatically focus on his or her face.
Further, you can use a flare of flash or photo light when you are in a dim place for
shooting.
◆Voice Recorder P.380
You can record your voice as a substitute for taking notes. You can repeatedly play it
back, so it is convenient to record the proceedings at a meeting, etc.
◆Chaku-moji P.54
◆Videophone P.48
◆i-mode mail/Deco-mail/Deco-mail pictogram P.142, P.145, P.332
◆i-αppli/Mega i-αppli/Intuitive Games P.286
◆High-Speed Communication Supported P.460
◆Chaku-uta Full®/Uta-hodai/Music&Video Channel P.266, P.272, P.274
p“Chaku-uta Full” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc.
◆MUSIC Player P.274
◆GPS P.322
◆Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa P.310, P.312
◆Kisekae Tool P.114, P.359
◆Respective Network Services P.431
◆Security Settings P.121
10
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Before using the FOMA terminal, read these safety precautions carefully so that
you can use it correctly.
After reading the precautions, keep them in a safe place.
■Be sure to observe these safety precautions because they are designed to
protect you or those around you from causing injury and to avoid unnecessary
damage to the property.
■The symbols below indicate the levels of danger or damage that can be caused
if the particular precautions are not observed.
Precautions
Danger This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
will almost certainly cause death or serious
injury.
Warning This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
poses a risk of causing death or serious
injury.
Caution This symbol indicates that incorrect handling
poses a risk of causing injury or damage to
the product or property.
ALWAYS FOLLOW THESE DIRECTIONS
■The following symbols show specific directions:
■“Safety Precautions” are divided into the following six sections:
General precautions for FOMA terminal, batteries, adapters, and UIM... P.11
Precautions for FOMA terminal ................................................................. P.12
Precautions for batteries ............................................................................ P.14
Precautions for adapters............................................................................ P.15
Precautions for UIM.................................................................................... P.16
Notes on using near electronic medical equipment.................................. P.16
Denotes things not to do. (Prohibition)
Denotes not to disassemble.
Denotes not to touch with wet hands.
Denotes not to use where it could get wet or not to wet it.
Denotes mandatory instructions (matters that must be complied
with).
Denotes to pull the power plug out of the outlet.
Don’t
Do not
d
i
sasse
m
b
l
e
Not wet
hands
Avoid
Water
Do
Pull the
power plug
out
11
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Do not use, store or leave the
FOMA terminal and its
accessories in places with a high
temperature such as near fire or
places exposed to direct sunlight,
or in cars under the blazing sun.
The devices could be deformed or
malfunction, or the battery may leak,
overheat, burst, or catch fire, thus resulting
in the deterioration of performance and
shortening of the life of devices.
Also, part of the case could get heated,
causing bare skin burns.
Do not disassemble, modify or
solder the FOMA terminal or
accessories.
Accidents such as fire, injury, or electric
shock, or malfunction may result. The
battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not wet the FOMA terminal or
accessories.
If liquids such as water or pet urine get
onto them, overheating, electric shock,
fire, malfunction, injury or others may
result. Pay attention to the place of use
and the way of handling.
With your FOMA terminal, use the
batteries and adapters specified
by NTT DOCOMO, INC.
If you use any type of battery or adapter
other than the specified one, your FOMA
terminal, battery or other accessories
may leak, overheat, burst, catch fire or
malfunction.
General precautions for FOMA
terminal, batteries, adapters, and UIM
Danger
Don’t
Do not
disassemble
Avoid
Water
Do
Do not place the batteries, the
FOMA terminal, adapters, or UIM
in cooking appliances such as
microwave ovens or
high-pressure containers.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. The FOMA terminal or the
adapter may overheat, smoke, or catch
fire, or its circuit parts may become
damaged.
Do not throw the FOMA terminal
or accessories, or subject them
to severe shocks.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
Be careful not to let
electroconductive materials (metal
pieces, pencil leads etc.) contact
with the charging terminal or
connector terminal. Also, make
sure that those are not entered into
the inside of the FOMA terminal.
Short-circuit could cause fire or
malfunction of the FOMA terminal.
When you are in a place such as a
gas station where flammable gas
is generated, turn off the FOMA
terminal, and never do charging.
Otherwise, catching fire may
result.
Ensure that you use Osaifu-Keitai with
the FOMA terminal turned off when you
are in the vicinity of the gas station.
(When IC Card Lock is set, turn off the
power with the lock released.)
Warning
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Do
If odor, overheat, discoloration,
or deformation is detected during
use, battery charge, or storage,
immediately observe the
following:
1. Pull the power plug out of the
outlet or cigarette lighter socket.
2. Turn off the power to the FOMA
terminal.
3. Remove the battery pack from
the FOMA terminal.
If you use the FOMA terminal and its
accessories as they are, overheat, burst,
or catching fire could result or the
battery could leak.
Do not place the FOMA terminal
or accessories on unstable
locations such as wobbly tables
or slanted locations.
The FOMA terminal or accessories may
fall, resulting in injury or malfunction.
Do not store in humid or dusty
places, or in high temperature
environments.
Malfunction may result.
If children use the FOMA terminal or
accessories, a guardian should
explain the safety precautions and
correct operations. The guardian
should also make sure that the
instructions are followed during use.
Otherwise, injury may result.
Keep out of the reach of babies
and infants.
Accidental swallowing or injury may
result.
Caution
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Do
12
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Be especially careful when you
use the FOMA terminal for a long
time with the adapter connected.
If you use i-αppli programs, talk on the
videophone, watch 1Seg programs and
so on for a long time during charging,
the temperature of the FOMA terminal,
battery pack, or adapter might rise.
If you directly touch the part of high
temperature continuously, redness,
itching, rash, or low-temperature bare
skin burns may result depending on your
physical conditions or predisposition.
Do not directly point the infrared
data port at someone’s eyes
during transmission.
His/her eyes may possibly be affected.
Other infrared devices may operate
erroneously if the infrared data port is
pointed at them during transmission.
Do not shine the flash/photo light
close to eyes.
Doing so can damage eyesight. Also,
accidents such as injury might occur if
someone is startled or dazzled by the
light.
Precautions for FOMA terminal
Warning
Do
Don’t
Don’t
Do not put the FOMA terminal in
the place where it could be
affected by an expanded airbag,
e.g., on the dashboard.
If the airbag expands, the FOMA
terminal could hit you and others,
causing accidents such as injury and the
FOMA terminal could malfunction and
become damaged.
If you have any implanted
electronic medical equipment, do
not place your FOMA terminal in
a chest pocket or inner pocket.
If the FOMA terminal is positioned close
to electronic medical equipment, it may
cause that equipment to malfunction.
Do not allow liquids such as
water, or foreign materials such
as metal pieces or flammable
materials to get into the UIM or
microSD card slot of the FOMA
terminal.
Fire, electric shock or malfunction may
result.
Do not turn on the flash/photo
light to drivers of cars, and others.
It disturbs driving, and accidents may
result.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Turn off the FOMA terminal in
places where use is prohibited
such as in airplanes and hospitals.
Otherwise, electronic devices and
electronic medical appliances may be
adversely affected. If the Auto Power
ON function is set, deactivate the
setting, then turn the power off.
For use inside medical facilities, make
sure that you comply with their
regulations. You may be punished for
using the FOMA terminal in airplanes,
which is prohibited by law.
When talking with the FOMA
terminal set to Hands-free, be
sure to keep the FOMA terminal
away from your ear.
Further, when you play games or
play back music with the
earphone/microphone
connected, adjust the sound
volume to moderate volume.
The excessive sound volume impairs
your hearing.
Further, accidents may result due to the
hardness of hearing of surrounding
sound.
For those with weak heart
conditions, the vibrator and ring
volume must be adjusted carefully.
Those functions may cause an effect on
the heart.
If thunder starts to rumble while
you are using the FOMA terminal
outdoors, house the antenna,
turn off the power and move to a
safe place.
Otherwise, you could be struck by
lightning or suffer an electric shock.
Do
Do
Do
Do
13
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Turn off the FOMA terminal when
near electronic devices using
high-precision control or weak
signals.
The FOMA terminal may possibly cause
these devices to malfunction.
※
Electronic devices that may be affected:
Hearing aids, implanted cardiac
pacemakers, implanted defibrillators,
other medical electronic devices, fire
alarms, automatic doors and other
automatically controlled devices. If you
use an implanted cardiac pacemaker,
implanted defibrillator or any other
electronic medical device, consult the
manufacturer or retailer of the device for
advice regarding possible effects from
the radio waves.
If the display part or camera lens
is broken, be careful about
broken glasses or the exposed
interior of the FOMA terminal.
Plastic panels are used for the surfaces
of the display part and camera lens so
that glasses do not easily get scattered,
however, pay attention not to
erroneously touch the broken part or
interior. Otherwise, injury may result.
Do
Do
Do not swing the FOMA terminal
by its antenna or strap.
The FOMA terminal may hit you or
persons around you, and accidents such
as injury or malfunction and damage
may result.
Do not use in places crowded
with people.
The antenna may hit against others,
causing an accident such as injury.
Do not use the FOMA terminal
with the damaged antenna.
If the damaged antenna comes in
contact with your skin, an accident such
as a burn or injury could be caused.
When using the motion tracking,
ensure that you check around
you for safety, securely take hold
of your FOMA terminal, and do
not swing to an extent more than
necessitated.
The motion tracking is the function to
incline or swing the FOMA terminal for
operation. If you excessively swing your
FOMA terminal, it might happen that it
hits against persons or objects, resulting
in critical accidents or damage.
When a metallic strap is attached
to your FOMA terminal, be careful
that it does not hit against
persons or objects when using
the motion tracking.
Accidents such as injury or malfunction
and damage may result.
Caution
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
If you erroneously break the
display part and then crystal
liquid gets leaked, never take or
suck the liquid to or into your
mouth, or apply to skin.
If the crystal liquid gets into the
eyes or mouth, immediately rinse
it out with clean water and then
seek medical attention.
When it adheres to your skin or
clothes, immediately wipe it away
with alcohol etc., and then rinse it
out with water and soap.
Otherwise, the loss of eyesight or injury
to your skin may result.
Do not bring your ears close to
the speakers while a ring tone
sounds or a melody is played
back from the FOMA terminal.
Otherwise, your hearing could be
impaired.
Electronic devices in some types
of cars can be affected by use of
the FOMA terminal.
For safety’s sake, make sure not to use
the FOMA terminal inside such cars.
Don’t
Don’t
Do
14
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Itching, rash or eczema may be
caused depending on your
physical conditions or
predisposition. If an abnormality
occurs, stop using the FOMA
terminal immediately, and then
seek medical attention.
Metals are used for the following parts:
Be careful not to get your finger
or a strap caught in the parts
when you close or open the
FOMA terminal.
Accidents such as injury or damage may
result.
When you watch a 1Seg program,
watch in a place bright enough
taking a certain distance from the
display.
Otherwise, your visual acuity could be
reduced.
Where it is used Material Finishing
Charging terminal Phosphor
bronze
Gold-plated finish with
nickel-plated ground
Slide rail SUS304 Fluorine coating
Metal
part of
the 1Seg
antenna
Top Brass Tin-and-cobalt-plated
finish with
nickel-plated ground
Middle SUS304 —
Hinge at
bottom
part
SUS304 Tin-and-cobalt-plated
finish with
nickel-plated ground
Screw at
bottom
part
Brass Nickel-plated
Metal part of the
speed selector
PC Evaporated aluminum
Shutter/
PushTalk key
Do
Do
Do
■Check the description on the label of the
battery pack for the type of battery.
Do not let any metal object such
as a wire come in contact the
battery terminals. Also do not
carry or store the battery together
with any metal objects like a
necklace.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not use excessive force to
attach the battery to the FOMA
terminal even when you cannot
attach it successfully. Also,
check that the battery is the right
way round when you attach it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not throw the battery into fire.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Do not pierce it with nails, hit it
with a hammer, or step on it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst or
catch fire.
Precautions for batteries
Description Type
Li-ion Lithium-ion battery
Danger
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
If the battery fluid gets into your
eyes, do not rub them. Flush your
eyes with clean water and seek
medical attention immediately.
Otherwise, the loss of eyesight may
result.
When any abnormality due to
external shock such as the
deformation or scratches by
dropping is found on the battery
pack, immediately stop using it.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
If charging is not completed at
the end of the specified charging
time, stop charging.
Otherwise, the battery may leak,
overheat, become damaged or catch
fire.
Immediately stop using the FOMA
terminal and keep it away from
fire if the battery leaks or emits
an odor
.
The leaked battery fluid may ignite,
causing fire or burst.
Be careful that your pets do not
bite into the battery pack.
The battery may leak, overheat, burst, or
catch fire. Also, malfunction or fire may
result.
Warning
Do
Don’t
Do
Do
Do
15
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
An exhausted battery should not
be disposed of with other waste.
The battery may catch fire or damage
the environment. After insulating the
battery terminals with tape, take the
unneeded battery to a handling counter
such as a docomo shop or dispose of it
in accordance with local waste disposal
regulations.
Do not charge the wet battery.
The battery pack may overheat, catch
fire, or burst.
If the battery fluid comes in
contact with skin or clothes,
immediately stop using, then
rinse it out thoroughly with clean
water.
Skin injury may result.
Do not use a damaged adapter
cord or power cord.
Electric shock, overheating or fire may
result.
Do not use the AC adapter and
desktop holder in steamy places
such as a bathroom.
Electric shock may occur.
Caution
Precautions for adapters
Warning
Don’t
Don’t
Do
Don’t
Don’t
The DC adapter is for use only in
a negative (-) grounded vehicle.
Do not use it in a positive (+)
grounded vehicle.
Fire may result.
If it starts to thunder, do not
touch the FOMA terminal and
adapter.
You might be struck by lighting or suffer
an electric shock.
Never short-circuit the charging
terminal when the adapter is
plugged into the power outlet or
cigarette lighter socket. Also,
never touch the charging terminal
with fingers or other bare skin.
Fire, malfunction, electric shock or injury
may result.
Place the adapter and desktop
holder on a stable location while
charging. Do not cover or wrap
the adapter and desktop holder in
cloth or bedding.
The FOMA terminal may drop off, or the
adapter and desktop holder may
overheat, causing fire or malfunction.
Do not place something heavy on
the adapter cord and power cord.
Electric shock or fire may result.
Do not touch the adapter cord or
power outlet with wet hands.
Electric shock may result.
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Don’t
Not wet
hands
Use the adapter at the specified V
AC.
If you use it at a wrong voltage, fire or
malfunction may result. When using the
FOMA terminal overseas, use FOMA
AC adapter available overseas.
AC adapter: 100 V AC
DC adapter: 12/24 V DC
[For negative (-) grounded vehicles only]
AC adapter available overseas: 100 V to
240 V AC
[Connect only to household AC outlet]
If a fuse of the DC adapter has
blown, replace it with a specified
fuse.
If you use an unspecified fuse, fire or
malfunction may result. For the specified
fuse, refer to each instruction manual.
Keep the power plugs dust-free.
Otherwise, fire may result.
When pulling the AC adapter into
the power outlet, firmly plug it in,
taking care not to contact with
metal straps or the like.
Otherwise, electric shock, short-circuit or
fire may result.
Do
Do
Do
Do
16
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
When removing the adapter out
of the outlet or cigarette lighter
socket, do not forcibly pull the
adapter cord or power cord,
instead take hold of the power
plug and then pull.
If you pull the plug out by the cord, the
cord may be damaged, which could
result in electric shock or fire.
When the adapter is not to be
used for a long period of time,
unplug the power cord from the
outlet.
Otherwise, electric shock, fire, or
malfunction may result.
If liquids such as water get in the
adapter, unplug the power cord
immediately from the outlet or
cigarette lighter socket.
Otherwise, electric shock, smoke or fire
may result.
Before cleaning, pull the power
plug out of the outlet or cigarette
lighter socket.
Otherwise, electric shock may result.
Be careful not to touch the cut
surface of the UIM (IC portion)
when removing it.
You may hurt your hand or fingers.
Precautions for UIM
Caution
Do
Pull the
power plug
out
Pull the
power plug
out
Pull the
power plug
out
Do
■The description below meets “Guidelines on
the Use of Radio-communication Equipment
such as Cellular Telephones – Safeguards for
Electronic Medical Equipment” by the
Electromagnetic Compatibility Conference
Japan.
Comply with the following in
hospitals or health care facilities:
pDo not carry the FOMA terminal into
operating rooms, intensive care units
(ICU) or coronary care units (CCU).
pTurn off the FOMA terminal in hospital
wards.
pIf there is any electronic medical
equipment near you, turn off the
FOMA terminal even when in a
location such as a lobby.
pComply with any regulations of
hospital and health care facilities
instructing you not to use or carry in a
mobile phone.
pIf the Auto Power ON function is set,
deactivate the setting, then turn the
power off.
Turn off the FOMA terminal in
crowded areas such as inside
trains during rush hour, as
someone with an implanted
cardiac pacemaker or implanted
defibrillator may be near you.
Operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can
be affected by radio waves.
Notes on using near electronic
medical equipment
Warning
Do
Do
If you use an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted
defibrillator, use the mobile
phone 22 cm or more away from
an implanted cardiac pacemaker
or implanted defibrillator.
Operation of an implanted cardiac
pacemaker or implanted defibrillator can
be affected by radio waves.
Patients using electronic medical
equipment other than implanted
cardiac pacemakers or implanted
defibrillators (outside medical
establishments for treatment at
home, etc.) should check the
influence of radio waves upon the
equipment by consulting its
manufacturer.
Operation of electronic medical
equipment can be affected by radio
waves.
■Do not wet the equipment.
The FOMA terminal, battery, adapter, and UIM are not
waterproofed. Do not use them in environments, which
are high in humidity such as in bathrooms, and do not
allow them to get wet from rain. Furthermore, if carrying
them against your body, they become moist due to
perspiration and the internal parts may become
corroded, causing malfunction. If the parts are found to
have been damaged due to exposure to the liquids, any
repairs will not be covered by warranty, or repairs may
not be possible. This may be repaired at a cost if
repairs are possible.
Handling Precautions
General notes
Do
Do
17
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for
cleaning glasses to clean the equipment.
pThe screen of the FOMA terminal sometimes has a
special coating so that they are easier to see. If you
rub it roughly with a dry cloth, it might be scratched.
Take care of the way of handling, and use only a dry,
soft cloth such as the one for cleaning glasses. If the
screen is left with water drop or stain adhered, smear
may be generated or the coating might peel off.
pDo not use alcohol, thinner, benzene, detergent or
other solvents for cleaning, otherwise the printing
may be removed or discoloration may result.
■Occasionally clean the terminals of the
equipment using a dry cotton swab, etc.
The soiled terminals deteriorate the connection and
might cause power discontinuity or incomplete
charging. Wipe the terminals with a cotton swab, etc.
Take care not to damage the terminals when cleaning
them.
■Do not place the FOMA terminal near an air
conditioner outlets.
Condensation may form due to rapid changes in
temperature, and this may corrode internal parts and
cause malfunction.
■Do not apply excessive force onto the FOMA
terminal and battery pack.
If you put the FOMA terminal in a bag along with many
other articles or sit with the FOMA terminal in a clothes
pocket, the display, internal circuitry and the battery
pack could be damaged or malfunction. Also, if an
external device is left connected to the connector
terminal (earphone/microphone terminal), the
connector could be damaged, or malfunction.
■Carefully read each instruction manual
attached to the FOMA terminal, adapter, or
desktop holder.
■Do not rub or scratch the display part with
metals.
Doing so might cause damage to the part, resulting in
trouble or malfunction.
■Avoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
The FOMA terminal should be used within a temperature
range of 5°C to 35°C and a humidity range of 45% to 85%.
■The FOMA terminal, if operated near land-line
phones, television sets, radios or other
devices that are in use, may affect them. You
should operate your FOMA terminal as far
away from such equipment as possible.
■It is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored in the FOMA
terminal and keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
■Do not drop the FOMA terminal or subject it to
strong impacts.
Malfunction or damage may result.
■Do not insert an external device to the
connector terminal (earphone/microphone
terminal) at a slant when connecting, and do
not pull it out when it is inserted.
Malfunction or damage may result.
■Make sure that nothing, such as a strap, gets
caught between the parts of the FOMA
terminal when you close it.
Otherwise, malfunction or damage may result.
■The FOMA terminal becomes warm during
use or charging but this is not an abnormality.
Use the FOMA terminal as it is.
■Do not leave the camera in places exposed to
direct sunlight.
Pixels may be discolored or burns may result.
Notes on handling the FOMA terminal
■Usually, put the cover of the connector
terminal and microSD card slot to use the
FOMA terminal.
Dust or water might enter into the FOMA terminal,
causing malfunction.
■Do not use the FOMA terminal with the back
cover left removed.
The battery pack might come out, or malfunction or
damage may result.
■Do not put a label or sticker on the back of the
display part of the FOMA terminal.
They may be caught in when you open/close the FOMA
terminal, and malfunction or damage may result.
■While you are using the microSD card, never
take it off or turn off the power to the FOMA
terminal.
Data may be erased or malfunction may result.
■Do not place magnetic cards or similar
objects near the FOMA terminal or between
phone parts.
Magnetic data on cash cards, credit cards, telephone
cards and floppy disks, etc. may be deleted.
■Do not bring magnetic substances close to
your FOMA terminal.
Strong magnetic items might cause in erroneous
operation.
■Batteries have a limited life.
Though it varies depending on the usage state, you are
advised to replace the battery if its usable time is
extremely short even when you fully charge it. Make
sure that you buy the specified battery.
■Charge the battery in a place with an
appropriate ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C.
Notes on handling batteries
18
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Make sure that the battery is charged when
you use the FOMA terminal for the first time
or have not used it for a long period of time.
■The usable time of the battery differs
depending on the usage environment or its
remaining life.
■Depending on how the battery pack is used, it
might swell as its operating life becomes
short, but this is not a problem.
■Note the following points when you store a
battery pack over a long period:
pStorage in a fully charged state (the state immediately
after charging is completed)
p
Storage with no battery power left (the state you cannot
turn on the power of the handset due to battery drain)
These may lower the battery pack’s performance and
shorten its operating life.
You are advised to store the battery pack in the state of
two or three bars of battery icon indication as a guide
for when you store it for a long period.
■Charge the battery in a place with an
appropriate ambient temperature of 5°C to
35°C.
■Charge the battery where:
pThere is very little humidity, vibration, and dust.
pThere are no land-line phones, television sets or
radios nearby.
■While you are charging, the adapter may
become warm. This is not a malfunction, so
you can keep on using.
■Do not use the DC adapter for charging the
battery when the car engine is not running.
The car battery could go flat.
■When using the power outlet having the
disengaging prevention mechanism, observe
the instructions given in that instruction
manual.
Notes on handling adapters
■Do not give a strong shock. Also, do not
deform the charging terminal.
Malfunction may result.
■Be careful not to get your finger or the
adapter cord caught in the parts when you
house the stand of the desktop holder.
Accidents such as injury or damage may result.
■Never use more force than necessary when
inserting/removing the UIM.
■The UIM may become warm during use, but
this is not a sign of a malfunction. Continue
using it as it is.
■The warranty does not cover damage caused
by inserting the UIM into some other types of
IC card reader/writer.
■Always keep the IC portion clean.
■Use a dry soft cloth such as the one for
cleaning glasses to clean the equipment.
■It is recommended that you make separate
notes of the information stored on the UIM
and keep such notes in a safe place.
We take no responsibility for any loss of the stored data
items.
■For the environmental protection, bring any
unneeded UIMs to a handling counter such as
a docomo shop.
■Avoid using in extremely high or low
temperatures.
■Do not damage, carelessly touch, or
short-circuit the IC.
Data might be lost or malfunction may result.
Notes on handling the UIM
■Do not drop the UIM or subject it to strong
impacts.
Malfunction may result.
■Do not bend the UIM or place something
heavy on it.
Malfunction may result.
■Into the FOMA terminal, do not insert the UIM
with a label or sticker pasted.
Malfunction may result.
■As the security for communication using the
Bluetooth function, the FOMA terminal
supports the security function that meets the
Bluetooth Specification. However, the
security may not be sufficient depending on
the configuration. Take care of the security
for communication using the Bluetooth
function.
■Note that even if any leak of data or
information occurs while making connection
using the Bluetooth function, we take no
responsibility.
■With the FOMA terminal, you can use the
following: Headset, Hands-Free, Audio,
Dial-up Communication, Object Push, and
Serial Port. With Audio, you might be able to
use Audio Video Remote Control. (Only with
the compatible Bluetooth devices)
Notes on using Bluetooth function
19
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
■Radio frequencies
The radio frequencies the Bluetooth function
of the FOMA terminal uses are as follows:
■Cautions on Using Bluetooth Devices
Bluetooth operates at radio frequencies assigned to
the in-house radio stations for mobile object
identifiers that have to be licensed and are used in
production lines of a factory, specific unlicensed low
power radio stations, and amateur radio stations
(hereafter, referred to “another radio station”) in
addition to scientific, medical, industrial devices, or
home electric appliances such as microwave ovens.
1. Before using this product, make sure that
“another radio station” is not operating nearby.
2. If radio interference between this product and
“another radio station” occurs, move immediately
to another place or turn off power to avoid
interference.
3. For further details, contact “docomo Information
Center” on the back page of this manual.
2.4 FH 1
2.4 : Indicates radio facilities that use 2400 MHz
frequencies.
FH : Indicates the modulation system is the FH-SS
system.
1 : Indicates that a supposed coverage distance is
10 meters or less.
: Indicates that all radio frequencies 2400 MHz
through 2483.5 MHz are used, and that the
frequencies for mobile object identifiers shall
not be avoided.
■The FeliCa reader/writer function on the
FOMA terminal uses very weak radio waves
which do not require to be licensed as radio
stations.
■The FeliCa reader/writer is operated on the
13.56 MHz frequencies. When you use
another reader/writer nearby, take enough
distance between your FOMA terminal and
the reader/writer. Further, ensure that there
are no radio stations that use the same
frequencies.
■Do not use the modified FOMA terminal.
Using a modified FOMA terminal infringes the
Radio Law.
The FOMA terminals are granted technical regulations
conformity certification as the specified radio equipment
under the Radio Law and bear a “technical conformity
mark ” on the nameplate as evidence of conformity.
Unscrewing the FOMA terminal and modifying internal
components void the technical regulations conformity
certification. Do not use the FOMA terminal in this state,
which infringes the Radio Law.
■Be especially careful not to operate the FOMA
terminal while driving.
You will be imposed punishment if you use the mobile
phone in your hand while driving. If you answer a call
out of necessity, tell the caller with Hands-free that you
will call him/her back, park your car to somewhere safe,
and then dial.
■Use the Bluetooth functions in Japan only.
The Bluetooth functions on the FOMA terminal have
been authorized in compliance with the radio
transmission standards in Japan.
You might be imposed punishment if you use them
overseas.
Notes on handling the FeliCa reader/
writer
Caution
■Use the FeliCa reader/writer functions in
Japan only.
The FeliCa reader/writer functions on the FOMA
terminal have been authorized in compliance with the
radio transmission standards in Japan.
You might be imposed punishment if you use them
overseas.
20
Easy Search/Contents/Precautions
Other Options → Page 500
Standard Accessory Kit and Main Options
<Basic package> <Main Options>
pP-08A Handset
(With Warranty and Back Cover P36)
pP-08A CD-ROM
The PDF versions of “Manual for PC Connection”
and “Kuten Code List” are included.
pFOMA AC Adapter 01/02
(With Warranty and Instruction Manual)
pInstruction Manual
Quick Manual included (See page 550)
pBattery Pack P19 pDesktop Holder P33
(With Instruction Manual)
NTT ドコモ
21
Before Using the Handset
Part Names and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Opening/Closing FOMA Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Navigation Displays and Key Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Main Key Operations from the Stand-by Display . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Viewing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Using Icons on Desktop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Desktop Icon> 29
i-Widget Display and Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Displaying Description of Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Icons> 32
Selecting Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
When You Forget Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Guide> 37
Using UIM (FOMA Card) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Attaching/Removing Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Checking Battery Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Battery Level> 42
Turning Power ON/OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Power ON/OFF> 43
Switching to English Display . . . . . . . . . . .<Select Language> 44
Configuring Initial Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Initial Setting> 44
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Set Time> 45
Displaying World Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <World Time Watch> 46
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Caller ID Notification> 46
Checking Your Own Phone Number . . . . . . . .<Own Number> 46
Before Using the Handset
22
Part Names and Functions
■For using earphone
Connect an optional connector-terminal-compatible earphone. When using a
connector-terminal-non-compatible earphone, use an optional plug adapter for connection.
pWhen inserting or pulling the plug adapter, take hold of the plug for the handset side and insert or pull
it straight. Be careful not to take hold of the cover of the connector terminal and plug for the handset
side together when you pull it out.
pThe Earphone Plug Adapter for External connector terminal 01 (option) can be connected with a
triple pole mini plug only. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the Earphone Plug Adapter
for External connector terminal 01.
Flat plug of the
Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch
Earphone terminal (Flat-plug)
Example for connecting the Flat-plug
Earphone/Microphone with Switch (option)
Plug for the
handset side
!
"
#
$
23
Before Using the Handset
Light sensor
・For sensing brightness (See page 112)
pDo not cover the light sensor with your hands or do
not put a sticker on it. Doing so might disable you to
detect the brightness.
Earpiece
・For listening to the other party’s voice
Display
(See page 27)
l Mail key
m Menu key
d Start key/Hands-free key
・For making/receiving calls (See page 48 and page 62)
・For talking with Hands-free (See page 61)
r Clear key/i-Widget key
・For returning to the previous operation
・For clearing entered text or a phone number
Microphone
・For speaking to the other party
Inside camera
・For shooting photos of yourself (See page 226)
・For displaying your face during a videophone call
o Speed selector
・For operation of function or menu (See page 25)
Call/Charging indicator
・Flickers for incoming calls/mail and during a call.
(See page 115)
・Lights in red during charging.
・Lights/Flickers when you shoot with the camera.
pThe flickering pattern and color tone of the illumination
might look different depending on the FOMA terminal
you use.
i i-mode key/i-αppli key
c Camera key/1Seg key
h Power/End key
・For ending calls
・For ending respective functions
・For turning on the power (for at least one second)/
For turning off the power (for at least two seconds)
(See page 43)
Numeric keys
・For entering phone numbers and text
Connector terminal
・For connecting the AC adapter (option), DC adapter
(option), FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/
02 (option), or Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option), etc.
pIntegrated terminal for connecting earphone or for
charging, etc.
1Seg antenna
・For receiving 1Seg broadcasting (See page 247)
Outside camera
・For shooting portraits and/or landscapes
(See page 226)
・
For catching sight of persons and/or landscapes
during a videophone call
Infrared data port
・Used for infrared communication and the infrared
remote control. (See page 374 and page 378)
f mark
・The IC card is mounted.
pUse the IC card function placing this mark over the
scanning device. You cannot dismount the IC card.
(See page 311)
FOMA antenna
pThe FOMA antenna is embedded in the handset. Do
not cover the antenna with your hand for better
communication.
Speaker
・For sounding ring tones
・For listening to the other party’s voice when
Hands-free is activated (See page 61)
Flash/Photo light
・Lights/Flickers when you shoot with the camera.
・Used for shooting in a dark place. (See page 236)
microSD card slot
・For inserting microSD card (See page 360)
Back cover
・Remove this when attaching/removing the battery
pack and UIM. (See page 37 and page 39)
pDo not peel off the sticker on the back of the back
cover. If you peel it off, you might not be able to read
and write the IC card.
Charging terminal
x Multi key
!< Side ▲ key
・For scrolling up page by page
"> Side ▼ key
・For scrolling down page by page
#p Shutter key/PushTalk key
・For making/receiving PushTalk calls
(See page 79 and page 82)
pYou can focus on a subject by pressing half way when
shooting with the camera. (See page 235)
$Strap hole
24
Before Using the Handset
Hold the FOMA terminal with both hands to slide the display upward/
downward.
Take care not to touch the keys when you open or close the FOMA
terminal. Key operation errors may result.
pYou can answer a call just by opening the FOMA
terminal during ringing. Also, you can end or hold a call
by closing the FOMA terminal during calling. (See
page 65)
pWhen a missed call or new mail message is found,
you can display the detailed Missed Call display or the
Inbox list just by opening the FOMA terminal. (See
page 111)
Opening/Closing FOMA Terminal
Information
pWhen you open/close the FOMA terminal while a confirmation display for selecting
“YES/NO” is shown, the confirmation display may be cleared.
When you want to execute the operation shown on the vertical display,
press the corresponding key as below.
pWhile the horizontal display is shown, you can operate in the same way as on the
vertical display depending on the function.
■Basic display examples and key assignments
Navigation Displays and Key Operations
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the l key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the m key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the Oo key.
Indicates the direction in which you can scroll
and select items with the Mo key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the c key.
Indicates the operation you can perform with
the i key.
25
Before Using the Handset
■Operating speed selector
Depending on the display being shown, you can select items and move
the cursor by rotating the speed selector in the same way as you press
Mo.
pThe following operations are also available:
・Adjusting earpiece volume, ring volume, etc. (see page 66
Operating by Rotating Speed Selector
Zo
・Moves the cursor or highlighted
display up. (Press and hold to scroll
continuously.)
・Scrolls the page up.
Vo
・Moves the cursor to the right.
・Scrolls forward page by page.
(Press and hold to scroll
continuously.)
Oo
・Fixes the operation.
Co
・Moves the cursor to the left.
・Scrolls back page by page. (Press
and hold to scroll continuously.)
Xo
・Moves the cursor or highlighted
display down. (Press and hold to
scroll continuously.)
・Scrolls the page down.
Scrolling pages
Selecting items Selecting pictograms, etc.
Moving a cursor
Rotating direction Operation example
・Adjusting zoom magnification when shooting with the camera (see page 234)
・Adjusting volume during music playback, etc. (see page 277)
・Switching the displayed still images (see page 335)
・Adjusting volume during playback of i-motion files, during playback of movie files, etc.
(see page 342)
You can set whether to validate the rotating operation of the speed
selector.
1mSet./ServiceOther settings
Speed selector settingON or OFF
You can set whether to show the operation for such as pressing Zo, Xo,
Co, and Vo, when you rotate the speed selector from the Stand-by
display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayKey guidance
ON or OFF
When you rotate the speed selector from the Stand-by display,
the operation for such as pressing Zo, Xo, Co, and Vo are
shown. (See page 26)
pThe key guidance is shown regardless of “Speed selector
setting”.
Information
pThe rotating operation is not valid in Power Saver Mode.
pThe rotating operation may not be valid depending on the function.
Speed Selector Setting
Information
pDepending on the i-αppli program, the speed selector might not be operable even
when “ON” is set.
Key Guidance
When “ON” is set
26
Before Using the Handset
From the Stand-by display, you can execute the following actions by
operating each key:
Main Key Operations from the Stand-by
Display
Key
operation Press the key for a short time Press and hold the key for at least
one second
*Oo
Shows the display for selecting an
icon, etc. on the Stand-by display.
(See page 31, page 69, page 109)
Switches Key Lock on/off.
(See page 132)
*ZoShows the Channel list.
(See page 221) —
*XoShows the Search Phonebook
display. (See page 93)
Shows the registration display for the
Phonebook entries. (See page 88)
*CoShows the Received Call list.
(See page 53)
Shows the Received Address list.
(See page 170)
*VoShows the Redial list. (See page 52) Shows the Sent Address list.
(See page 169)
+lShows the Mail menu.
(See page 160)
Executes Check New Messages.
(See page 155)
+i
Shows the iMenu. (See page 190) Shows the Software list.
(See page 287)
Shows the i-mode menu.
(See page 190)
+mShows Main Menu. (See page 32) Sets/Releases IC Card Lock.
(See page 312)
+cActivates the camera in Photo Mode.
(See page 230) Starts 1Seg. (See page 249)
-dMakes a call. (See page 48) Accesses a voice dial entry.
(See page 99)
-hShows/Clears the icons, etc. on the
Stand-by display. (See page 110)
Turns off the power. (Press and hold
the key for at least two seconds)
(See page 44)
+rExecutes i-Widget. (See page 306) Resets Main Menu. (See page 115)
-0Enters “0”. Enters “+”.
-1Enters “1”.
Measures your current location and
executes the GPS function.
(See page 322)
-2Enters “2”.
-3Enters “3”.
-4Enters “4”. Sets/Releases Secret Mode.
(See page 133)
-5Enters “5”. Switches the backlight on/off.
(See page 112)
-6Enters “6”. Sets/Releases Personal Data Lock.
(See page 127)
-7Enters “7”.
-8Enters “8”. Switches View Blind on/off.
(See page 113)
-9Enters “9”.
-aEnters “:”. Activates/Deactivates Public mode
(Drive mode). (See page 68)
-sEnters “#”. Activates/Deactivates Manner Mode.
(See page 106)
.xShows the Multitask Menu.
(See page 392)
Activates a function set by Multi Key
Long Press Setting. (See page 404)
Switches menu functions.
(See page 392)
.<
Switches between the i-αppli
Stand-by display and normal i-αppli
program. (See page 304)
Activates/Deactivates Manner Mode
with the FOMA terminal closed.
(See page 106)
Activates 2in1 with the FOMA
terminal opened. (See page 442)
.>Plays back a record message/voice
memo. (See page 71)
Plays back a videophone record
message/movie memo.
(See page 71)
.pShows the PushTalk Phonebook list.
(See page 83)
Activates MUSIC Player.
(See page 275)
Key
operation Press the key for a short time Press and hold the key for at least
one second
27
Before Using the Handset
Viewing Display
 
 
%
$
#
"
!
Battery level (estimate) (See page 42)
Radio waves reception level (estimate)
Strong Weak
You are out of the FOMA service area or
radio waves do not reach.
During Self Mode (See page 126)
During i-mode (See page 190)
During i-mode communication (See page 190)
During packet communication (The icon differs
depending on the communication status.)
During PushTalk communication (See page 79)
You get out of the service area while
Network Search Mode is set to “Manual”.
(See page 455)
During SSL/TLS communication (See page 190)
(pink) Unread i-mode mail or an SMS message
exists. (See page 154 and page 186)
(dark blue)
The area for i-mode mail and SMS
messages in the FOMA terminal is full.
(See page 154 and page 186)
The area for SMS messages on the UIM
(FOMA card) is full.
(pink) Unread mail exists, and the area for SMS
messages on the UIM (FOMA card) is full.
(dark blue)
Both the FOMA terminal and UIM (FOMA
card) are full.
Area Mail exists. (See page 179)
(yellow)
Unread Messages R/F exist.
(See page 176)
(dark blue)
The area for Messages R/F in the FOMA
terminal is full. (See page 177)
(pink) i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center.
(See page 155)
(dark blue)
The box for i-mode mail at the i-mode
Center is full. (See page 154)
(yellow)
Messages R/F are held at the i-mode
Center. (See page 177)
(dark blue)
The box for Messages R/F at the i-mode
Center is full. (See page 177)
i-mode mail is held at the i-mode Center
while Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”.
(See page 155)
New i-concier information exists.
(See page 223)
An i-αppli call you did not reply to exists.
(See page 303)
During a voice call
During a videophone call
During 64K data communication
During measuring the current location
(See page 322)
Location Request Set. is set to “ON” or
“Reject numbers unset”, and it is within the
validity period. (See page 328)
Location Request Set. is set to “ON” or
“Reject numbers unset”, and it is out of the
validity period. (See page 328)
A microSD card is inserted.(See page 361)
Data is being read to/written from the
microSD card.
A write-protected microSD card is inserted.
(See page 361)
The inserted microSD card cannot be used.
(See page 361)
A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in microSD Mode.
(See page 369)
A microSD card is inserted, and the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option) is connected in MTP Mode.
(See page 369)
(blue) A Bluetooth device is connected.
(See page 415 and page 417)
(black) A Bluetooth device is connected and power
consumption is low. (See page 415)
Before Using the Handset
28
pFor the horizontal display, icons appear at the lower right
of the display.
pThe clock at the upper right of the display (at the lower
right of the horizontal display) does not appear when the
icon or is displayed.
During Lock All (See page 124)
During Personal Data Lock (See page 127)
During Keypad Dial Lock (See page 131)
During Secret Mode or Secret Data Only
(See page 133)
During IC Card Lock (See page 312)
Both Keypad Dial Lock and Personal Data
Lock are set.
Both Keypad Dial Lock and Secret Mode/
Secret Data Only are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Lock All are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Personal Data Lock
are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Keypad Dial Lock
are set.
Both IC Card Lock and Secret Mode/Secret
Data Only are set.
IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and
Personal Data Lock are simultaneously set.
IC Card Lock, Keypad Dial Lock, and Secret
Mode/Secret Data Only are simultaneously
set.
Type of in-use network (See page 451)
You are in the OFFICEED area.
(See page 447)
Timer Lock ON At Close is set.
(See page 128)
During Key Lock (See page 132)
While Key Lock is temporarily released
(See page 132)
During Multitask (See page 391)
Multiple functions are activated.
(See page 391)
While watching a 1Seg program
(See page 249)
During recording of a 1Seg program
(See page 256)
During recording of a 1Seg program by
Timer Recording (See page 260)
During pause of 1Seg program recording
(See page 256)
During music playback (See page 275)
During music pause (See page 275)
During infrared communication
(See page 374 and page 378)
The FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (option) is connected in
Communication Mode.
The FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (option) is connected in
microSD Mode. (See page 369)
During talk or communication through a
USB Hands-free compatible device
(See page 61)
A USB Hands-free compatible device is
connected. (See page 61)
A USB Hands-free compatible device is
connected in microSD Mode. (See page 61)
Vibrator is set to other than “OFF”.
(See page 104)
Ring Volume is set to “Silent” or
Mail/Msg. Ring Time is set to “OFF”.
(See page 66 and page 106)
During Manner Mode (See page 106)
Remote Monitoring is set to “ON”.
(See page 77)
During Public mode (Drive mode)
(See page 68)
The call cost has exceeded the specified
limit. (See page 408)
An alarm is set.
(See page 260 and page 395)
A Music&Video Channel program is booked.
(See page 266)
Backlight is set to “OFF”. (See page 112)
View Blind is set to “ON”. (See page 113)
Backlight is set to “OFF” and View Blind is
set to “ON”.
!
USB Mode Setting is set to “microSD
mode”. (See page 369)
USB Mode Setting is set to “MTP mode”.
(See page 369)
"
∼ ・ Voice mail messages for Number B are held
at the Voice Mail Center in Dual Mode of
2in1. (See page 446)
#∼ ・ Voice mail messages are held at the Voice
Mail Center. (See page 432)
$∼The number of record messages
(See page 69)
%∼The number of videophone record
messages (See page 69)
Information
pSome characters and symbols on the display might be
modified or abbreviated.
pThe color liquid crystal display uses high-precision
production technology. The slightest change in the
environment or other factors may result in unlit or
permanently lit pixels, but this is not a manufacturing
defect.
29
Before Using the Handset
■Operation when a status icon is selected
<Desktop Icon>
Using Icons on Desktop
Status icon Notification icon
Desktop icon
Shows the display for Vibrator. (See page 104)
Shows the display for Ring Volume. (See page 66)
Shows the display for Manner Mode Set. (See page 108)
Shows the display for Remote Monitoring. (See
page 77
)
Shows the display for releasing Public mode (Drive mode).
(See page 68)
Shows the display for Notice Call Cost. (See page 408)
Shows the list of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, TV Timer, or Timer Recording.
(See page 257, page 258, page 394, page 398 or page 401)
Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 266)
Shows the display for Backlight. (See page 112)
Shows the display for View Blind. (See page 113)
Shows the display for “Set./Service” → “Display”.
Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 369)
∼ ・ Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages.
(See page 433)
∼ ・ Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages.
(See page 433)
∼Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 69, page 71, page 104 and page 406)
∼Shows the display for Rec. Msg/Voice Memo.
(See page 69, page 71, page 104 and page 406)
■Operation when a notification icon is selected
Missed call
Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 53)
Missed call to Number B of 2in1
Shows the Missed Call list. (See page 53)
Record message
Shows the Record Message list. (See page 71)
Videophone record message
Shows the Videophone Record Message list. (See page 71)
New i-mode mail or SMS
Shows the Inbox list. (See page 159)
New chat mail
Starts Chat Mail. (See page 183)
New Message R/F
Shows the Message R/F list. (See page 177)
i-αppli did not start automatically
Shows the i-αppli Auto Start Info. (See page 302)
i-αppli call you did not reply to
Shows the i-αppli call logs. (See page 303)
A ToruCa file is received from a scanning device
Shows the ToruCa File list. (See page 316)
A security error occurred on the i-αppli Stand-by display
Shows the Security Error History. (See page 289)
Success in downloading a Music&Video Channel program
Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 266)
Failure in downloading a Music&Video Channel program
Activates Music&Video Channel. (See page 267)
Missed alarm
Shows the contents of the alarm that could not be notified. (See page 396)
Missed TV timer
Shows the contents of the TV timer that could not be notified.
(See page 261)
30
Before Using the Handset
■Operation when a desktop icon is selected
Timer recording was completed
Shows the contents and results of the timer recording. (See page 261)
Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center
Shows the display for playing back Voice Mail messages. (See page 433)
The Phonebook could not be updated by Data Security Service
Shows the update display for Data Security Service. (See page 137)
Provide Location was executed automatically
Shows Location History. (See page 326)
Provide Location could not be executed automatically
Shows Location History. (See page 326)
You did not respond to a location provision request
Shows Location History. (See page 326)
Software Update is needed
Starts Software Update. (See page 517)
Software Update was executed
Shows the Update Completion display or the reason for not completing.
(See page 518)
Software rewriting is possible
Shows the rewriting confirmation display. (See page 516)
Pattern data was updated automatically
Shows the updated result. (See page 521)
The FOMA terminal and a personal computer are connected by the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
Shows the display for USB Mode Setting. (See page 369)
Charging stopped midway
Shows the message to the effect that charging stopped automatically.
(See page 42)
Shows the dialing display with the phone number entered.
(See page 48 and page 79)
Shows the site of that URL. (See page 190)
Shows the site of that URL by Full Browser. (See page 192)
Shows the Message Composition display with the mail address entered.
(See page 142)
Shows the SMS Composition display with the mail address entered.
(See page 185)
※ When the original data is deleted or overwritten, the desktop icon is disabled.
Starts the i-αppli program.※ (See page 287)
Shows it on the Picture viewer.※ (See page 334)
Plays it back by the i-motion player.※ (See page 342)
Plays it back by the Video player.※ (See page 350)
Plays it back by the Chara-den player.※ (See page 353)
Plays it back by the Melody player.※ (See page 356)
Shows it on the PDF viewer.※ (See page 381)
Shows it on the ToruCa viewer.※ (See page 314)
Shows the Bookmark Folder list. (See page 200)
Shows the Private menu. (See page 403)
Shows the Still Image list for the storage location folder of the camera.
(See page 334)
Shows the list of Alarm. (See page 394)
Shows the Calendar display. (See page 398)
Shows the ToDo list. (See page 401)
Shows the list of Text Memo. (See page 408)
Shows the calculator. (See page 408)
Shows the display for 使いかたナビ (Guide). (See page 37)
Shows the Bar Code Reader menu. (See page 241)
Shows the Ir Data Receiving display. (See page 377 and page 378)
Shows the Camera menu. (See page 230 and page 233)
Shows the Bluetooth Function Selection display.
(See page 415, page 417, and page 419)
Starts Voice Recorder. (See page 380)
Shows the i-concier display. (See page 223)
Shows the Music&Video Channel display. (See page 268)
Starts MUSIC Player. (See page 274)
Shows the Viewer display. (See page 249)
Starts i-αppli Program Guide. (See page 254)
31
Before Using the Handset
You can paste up to 15 desktop icons of such as phone numbers, mail
addresses, etc.
1Select “Add desktop icon” from the Function menu of
the item to be pasted YES
pIf the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous mail are
found or the multiple destination addresses are found when you operate from the
Function menu of the detailed mail display, select a mail address or phone
number to be pasted.
1PressOo.
2Use Mo to highlight an icon, and press Oo( ).
pUp to five “Desktop icons”
are displayed. If there are
six or more icons, “ ” and
“ ” are displayed.
pA “Notification icon” is
deleted when each function
is executed. To delete all
“Notification icons”, press
and hold r for at least one second from the display in step 1.
Paste Icons to Desktop
Information
pYou may not be able to paste the URL to the desktop depending on the site.
pWhen the URL title exceeds 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters, the excess is
deleted. If no title exists, up to 22 half-pitch characters of the URL excluding “http://” or
“https://” is displayed.
pSome files and data might not be pasted to the desktop.
Proceed to Respective Functions from Icons on Desktop
When a record message
icon is selected
1mSet./ServiceDisplay
Desktop icon
The list of desktop icons pasted to the desktop is
displayed.
2Select the icon whose details are to be displayed.
pYou can show the Function menu also by pressing i( ), while highlighting an
icon from the Stand-by display.
Information
pWhen the notification icon of “Messages are held at the Voice Mail Center” ( )
appears while you are overseas, you cannot operate the Voice Mail function from the
notification icon. Follow the steps of “Operate Voice Mail Service at the Country You
Stay” on page 458.
+m-6-3
Check Details of Desktop Icon
Desktop Icon list
Function Menu of the Desktop Icon List
Add to desktop Put a check mark for the function to be added
l( )
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
However, the number of characters for the title displayed when
you highlight the icon is up to 11 full-pitch/ 22 half-pitch
characters from the beginning of the title.
Sort Select a desktop iconUse Bo to change the order
Oo( )
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above steps.
l( )YES
long press set. See page 404.
32
Before Using the Handset
From the i-Widget display, you can simultaneously start multiple Widget
Appli programs and show them on a list.
Widget Appli
You can show a Widget Appli program.
You can show the Widget Appli operation display by
selecting it.
Navigation displays
Navigations corresponding to the key operations are
indicated.
pYou can randomly change the display order of Widget
Appli programs by pressing i[シャッフル (Shuffle)]
from the i-Widget display.
pSee page 306 for detailed operations of i-Widget.
The symbols on the display (such as , , and ) are called icons. You
can check the meanings of them on the display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayIcons
Use Mo to highlight an icon.
Reset desktop The desktop icons are reset to the default.
YES
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
i-Widget Display and Operations
+m-3-6
<Icons>
Displaying Description of Icons
i-Widget display
Press m of the FOMA terminal to show Main Menu and then execute,
set, or check respective functions. In this manual, the way to call up
functions from Main Menu is described as a standard method.
Menus are classified by functions. (See page 466)
pSome functions can be selected also by the operation other than pressing m. In this
case, the operation by the easier way is described.
pThis FOMA terminal supports Kisekae Tool (see page 114). If you use Kisekae Tool to
change the design of the Menu display, some menu configurations change according
to the usage frequency depending on the type of the menu.
Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not apply.
■Scroll Selection
Main Menu is composed of 12 main menu icons indicating each function.
pIf you select a main menu icon, the Sub-menu Item Selection display appears. If you
further select a sub-menu item, the Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display appears.
pBy repeating selecting, you can set and check the function.
■Menu Number Selection
You can display some functions by pressing m + menu number (see page 466).
■Multitask is Supported
pYou can simultaneously use some functions in Main Menu. (See page 391)
Selecting Menu
33
Before Using the Handset
In this manual, the description of the speed selector operation (selection
of top/bottom/left/right, and press of Oo after selecting/entering a
function item) is omitted. Scroll selection is explained below using the
example of selecting the function “Quality alarm”:
Scroll Selection
Description Example of Steps
1
Main menu icon Sub-menu item Function name of lower sub-menu item
Items which appear on the display
No tone. . . . . . . . . Does not sound.
High tone. . . . . . . . High alarm sounds.
Low tone. . . . . . . . Low alarm sounds.
mSet./ServiceTalkQuality alarmSelect an alarm.
Select “Set./Service” from Main Menu. Main Menu at purchase differs depending on the
body color. (See page 471)
Select a main menu icon from the menu function
1
pPress *Mo to highlight the icon. Press and hold *Mo to scroll
the icons continuously.
pIf you have not touched any key for 15 seconds, the
Stand-by display returns.
+m
*Mo
*Oo
Main Menu
34
Before Using the Handset
Select “Talk” from “Set./Service”.
Select “Quality alarm” from “Talk”.
Select a sub-menu item from the menu function
2
Select a desired lower sub-menu item (function)
*Oo
pThe highlighted item is the currently
selected one.
pPress *Xo to highlight the item
below, and *Zo to highlight the item
above.
pPress and hold *Bo to scroll the
items continuously.
pPress *No to scroll page by page.
3
*Oo
p
Press
*Xo
to highlight the item below,
and
*Zo
to highlight the item above.
p
Press and hold
*Bo
to scroll the items
continuously.
p
When the items are listed over
multiple pages, the total number of
pages and the current page number
are shown at the upper right of the
display.
Some menu items have even more detailed menus.
The example below shows how to set “Low tone” for “Quality alarm”.
Menu Number Selection is explained below using the following example:
Set or check the function
4
Menu Number Selection
Description Example of Menu Number
*Oo
pThe highlighted item is the currently
selected one.
pPress *Xo to highlight the item
below, and *Zo to highlight the item
above.
pPress and hold *Bo to scroll the
items continuously.
Menu number
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly Disconnecting
+m-7-5
35
Before Using the Handset
From the Stand-by display, press m75.
Simple Menu is a menu focusing on only basic functions for easy
operation. By setting “Menu icon setting” to “Simple menu”, you can
show the Simple Menu by pressing m from the Stand-by display.
pSome operating procedures or items which appear on the display in Simple Menu differ
from the ones described in this manual.
pSee “Simple Menu Function List” on page 486 for the contents of Simple Menu.
Call up the function using the menu number
1
Simple Menu
+m-7-5
If you press i when “ ” is shown at the lower right of the display,
the Function menu including selectable items such as “Save”, “Edit”,
and “Delete” appears in each operation. The contents of the Function
menu depend on the display from which you show the Function menu.
pWhen the items are listed
over multiple pages, the total
number of pages and the
current page number are
shown at the upper right of
the Function Menu display.
In this manual, the operation of the Function menu is described as
follows:
Function Menu
Description Example for Function Menu
+i
Delete all You can delete all files.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Item displayed in the Function menu
Operating procedures after selecting
an item in the Function menu
36
Before Using the Handset
An actual operation is done as follows:
Press the numeric key corresponding to the
displayed item number.
When menu items are listed over multiple pages, you can show the previous/next page
by pressing Bo with the uppermost/lowermost item highlighted. You can press No to
scroll through page by page. When / is displayed on the display, you can
scroll through page by page also by pressing m( )/c( ).
pDepending on the display being shown, such as lower sub-menu items, you might be
able to scroll through page by page also by pressing </> instead of No.
To select an item quickly <Direct selection>
Item scroll
Press +i( ).
Use *Mo to highlight
“Delete all” and press
*Oo( ).
Enter your Terminal
Security Code and press
*Oo( ).
Use *Bo to highlight
“YES” and press
*Oo( ).
Item number
With the functions you can select multiple items, put a check
mark for check boxes to select them.
Each time you press
Oo
( ), you can switch
“ ”
and
“ ”
.
With some functions, you can put or clear check marks at a time by pressing
i( )
and selecting “Select all/Release all”
or by pressing
m(/)
.
p
“ ”
is placed to the selected item depending on the function.
The Lower Sub-menu Item Selection display is shown. When you press h, the
Stand-by display returns (except during Multitask). The Stand-by display or the former
display automatically returns depending on the function.
Press h. The contents of the setting are abandoned and the Stand-by display or the
former display returns. The confirmation display appears asking whether to abandon the
setting contents depending on the function. You can press r to return to the previous
operation.
Press Bo to highlight “YES” or “NO”, then press Oo( ).
Check box
After finishing the operation
To cancel the operation midway
When the “YES/NO” selection display appears
For Reset Settings
37
Before Using the Handset
You can search for the functions you want to know and use, and then
check the operating methods. You can execute some functions from
“
使いかたナビ
(Guide)”. This function is available in Japanese Mode only.
1mステーショナリー
(Stationery)
使いかたナビ
(Guide)
Select an item.
おすすめ機能 (Recommendable functions)
. . . Displays the recommendable functions. Go to step 3.
キーワード検索 (From keywords)
. . . Enter keywords and retrieve. Go to step 2
機能一覧検索 (From Function list)
. . . Retrieves from the function list. Go to step 3.
検索履歴 (Search history)
. . . Displays up to 30 search histories. Go to step 3.
pHighlight each item and press l( ); then the
detailed operating methods are displayed.
pThe 使いかたナビ
(Guide) display appears also by selecting the 使いかたナビ
(Guide) icon “ ” pasted on the desktop at purchase.
pYou can store “使いかたナビ (Guide)” for Multi Key Long Press Setting. (See
page 404)
2Enter a keyword.
Up to 50 search results are displayed.
pYou can enter up to 24 full-pitch/48 half-pitch characters.
3Select a functionSelect an item.
機能の説明 (Description) . . . . . . . .Displays explanations for the function.
操作のしかた (How to operate) . . .Displays the operating method.
この機能を使う (Operate function)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Executes the function. Operate each function.
pFor some functions, press Oo( ) several times for selection.
pYou can display explanations about the function also by pressing l( )
while highlighting the function.
pTo delete search history, press i( ) and select “1件削除 (Delete this)” or
“全削除 (Delete all)”, then select “YES”.
<Guide>
When You Forget Key Operation The UIM is an IC card that holds your information such as phone
numbers. It can hold data such as Phonebook entries and SMS
messages as well. By sharing a UIM, you can operate multiple FOMA
terminals for multiple purposes.
You cannot use the FOMA terminal for communication such as voice and
videophone calls, i-mode, sending/receiving mail, or packet
communication unless the UIM is inserted.
For details on how to use the UIM, refer to the UIM instruction manual.
When inserting or removing the UIM, take care not to accidentally touch
or scratch the IC.
You need to turn off the power and then remove the battery before you
insert the UIM. (See page 39)
■Inserting
1With the golden IC surface
downward, push the UIM slowly
to the end while pressing the
surface of it.
■Removing
1While sliding the UIM, pull it out
slowly.
Using UIM (FOMA Card)
Insert/Remove
Cut
38
Before Using the Handset
You can set two security codes, PIN1 and PIN2, for a UIM. (See page 122)
The FOMA terminal has the UIM security function (UIM restriction
function) as a security function to protect your data files.
If you obtain data files by the method below with the UIM inserted, UIM
security function is automatically set to them.
・When downloading images or melodies and so on, from sites or
Internet websites
・When receiving i-mode mail with file attachments
The data files with the UIM security can be browsed, played back, started,
edited, attached to mail, or transferred via infrared rays only when the
UIM used for obtaining is inserted. When the UIM used for obtaining the
data or files is not inserted, or when another UIM is inserted, these
functions are not operable.
pIn the explanation hereafter, the UIM used to obtain data and files is referred to
as “your UIM” and other UIMs as “another person’s UIM”.
Information
pMake sure that you insert/remove the UIM with the FOMA terminal closed and held in
your hand.
pTake care not to force the UIM into place because this can break it.
pTake care not to lose the UIM once you remove it.
pWhen you replace your UIM (except during Omakase Lock), you need to enter the
four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When you enter
the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter the
incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.)
Security Code
Security Function of UIM
pWhen the UIM is not inserted or when another person’s UIM is inserted, the following
types of data and files are displayed with the restrictions symbol, “ ”:
・Videophone record messages ・Movie memos ・Screen memos
・Templates ・i-αppli programs ・Images
・i-motion files ・Chara-den images ・Melodies
・Machi-chara images ・Kisekae Tool files ・PDF files
・Chaku-uta®/Chaku-uta Full® music files ・Downloaded dictionaries
・Files attached or pasted to i-mode mail in the Inbox
・Files attached to i-mode mail in the Outbox/Draft (except the data shot or edited
with the FOMA terminal)
・Messages R/F with files (melodies or images) attached or pasted
・Images inserted into Deco-mail text
※This function applies to the pre-installed i-αppli programs, Chara-den images,
Deco-mail pictograms, etc. if they are reinstalled (upgraded) from a site.
※“Chaku-uta” is a registered trademark of Sony Music Entertainment Inc.
pThe preview image for the data file with the UIM security appears as
shown on the right.
♪
♪
♪
♪
♪
If the UIM used for
obtaining data files
or mail messages is
inserted, you can
browse/play back the
data files with the UIM
security.
♪
♪
♪
♪
♪
Unless the UIM used
for obtaining data files
or mail messages is
inserted, you cannot
browse/play back the
data files with the UIM
security.
Your UIM
Another
person’s UIM
Replacing UIMs
39
Before Using the Handset
If you use the blue UIM with your FOMA terminal, note that following
specifications differ from those of the green/white UIM:
Information
pWhen the UIM security is set for data files, you cannot set them for the functions such
as “Display setting” and “Select ring tone” when another person’s UIM is inserted.
pWhen the data files with the UIM security is set for “Display setting” or “Select ring
tone”, the FOMA terminal works with their default settings if you remove your UIM or
replace it with another person’s UIM. Also, a Machi-chara image is cleared. If you
insert your UIM again, your settings are enabled again.
pThe UIM security function is not set for the data files received using the infrared
communication function or data transmission (OBEX™ communication) function and
the still images/moving pictures shot or edited with the FOMA terminal.
pEven when another person’s UIM is inserted, you can move/delete data files with the
UIM security.
pThe settings of the following functions are stored on the UIM:
・SMS validity period ・SMS center setting ・Select language
・PLMN setting ・PIN1 code, PIN2 code ・PIN1 code entry set
・Validating/Invalidating DOCOMO Certificate 1 and user certificate
Types of UIM (FOMA Card)
Functions UIM Reference
(blue)
(green/white)
Number of digits of the phone number
that can be stored in the UIM Phonebook 20 max. 26 max. 89
Operation of user certificate to use
FirstPass Not available Available 213
Use of WORLD WING Not available Available 450
Use of Service Numbers for “DOCOMO
repair counter” and “General inquiries
<docomo Information Center>”
Not available Available 439
Use the FOMA terminal’s dedicated Battery Pack P19.
■Attaching
1While pressing the “ ” part of
the back cover in the direction A,
slide the back cover (2 mm or
more) in the direction B to
unlock and remove it.
pSecurely hold the FOMA terminal not to let it
open and then remove the back cover.
2
With the arrow mark facing up, fit
the tab side of the battery pack to
the FOMA terminal securely, and
then push the battery pack into
the direction B while pressing it
against the direction A.
■WORLD WING
WORLD WING is the DOCOMO FOMA international roaming service that enables
you to use the current phone number overseas for making and receiving calls using
the UIM (green/white) and service compatible mobile phone.
pYou do not need to subscribe to WORLD WING if you have subscribed to the FOMA
service after September 1, 2005. If you offered that you did not need WORLD WING
at the time you signed up for the FOMA service, or when you have midway canceled
WORLD WING, you are required to take the procedures to newly subscribe to
WORLD WING.
pIf you have signed up for the FOMA service before August 31, 2005, and have not
yet subscribed to WORLD WING, you are required to subscribe to it.
pThis service is not available with some billing plans.
pIf you lose your UIM (green/white) or have it stolen overseas, immediately contact
DOCOMO to take the steps necessary for suspending the use of the UIM. For
inquiries, see “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual. Note
that you are still charged the call and communication fees incurred after you lose it or
have it stolen.
Attaching/Removing Battery Pack
Arrow mark
40
Before Using the Handset
3Put the back cover to the FOMA
terminal as illustrated, and while
pressing the whole part of back
cover downward, slide it in the
direction of the arrow to attach it.
pConfirm there is no gap between the back
cover and the FOMA terminal.
■Removing
1Remove the back cover
following the step 1 of
“■Attaching”, and take hold of
the projection of the battery pack
to lift it up.
Projection
Information
pMake sure that you turn off the power, hold the closed FOMA terminal in your hand,
and then attach/remove the battery pack. Also, take care not to press the one-push
open button when you attach/remove the battery pack.
pIf you try to force the battery pack into place, you could damage the UIM or the
terminal part of the FOMA terminal.
Use the FOMA terminal’s dedicated Battery Pack P19.
Life of battery pack
pBattery packs are consumables. The usable time shortens slightly each time they are
charged.
pWhen the usable time of the battery pack becomes half the time it was purchased,
replacing is recommended because the battery pack is nearing the end of its life.
Depending on the use conditions, the battery pack may swell as it nears the end of its
life, but this is not a problem.
pThe life of the battery pack may shorten if you use i-αppli programs, talk on the
videophone, watch 1Seg programs and so on for a long time during charging.
Charging
pFor details, refer to the instruction manuals for the FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 (option),
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use (option), and FOMA DC Adapter 01/02 (option).
pThe FOMA AC Adapter 01 supports 100 V AC only. The FOMA AC Adapter 02 and
FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use support from 100 V AC through 240 V AC.
pThe shape of the plug for the AC adapter is for 100 V AC (for domestic use). To use the
AC adapter that supports from 100 V AC through 240 V AC overseas, you need to
have a conversion plug adapter that is compatible with the voltage of the country you
stay. Do not use a transformer for overseas travel to charge the battery pack.
pEven during charging, you can still answer calls if the FOMA terminal is turned on. This
will consume the charged amount so that charging will take longer. Also, the standby
time or talk time might be shorter if you charge the battery pack with your FOMA
terminal open.
pIf you have a long time videophone call during charging, the temperature in the FOMA
terminal may rise and charging may be suspended. In such a case, wait for a while and
try charging again.
pRemove and insert the connector slowly and carefully, without using unnecessary
force.
pDo not remove the battery pack during charging.
Charging
To prevent damage to the environment, bring used battery
packs to a docomo service counter, a docomo agent or a
recycle center.
Li-ion 00
41
Before Using the Handset
Do not charge for long periods of time (several days) with the FOMA
terminal turned on.
pIf you leave the FOMA terminal powered on for long periods of time during charging,
you may not be able to use the FOMA terminal for long duration as expected and the
low battery alarm may sound soon, because the FOMA terminal receives the power
from the battery pack after charging is completed. If this happens, charge the battery
pack correctly. When charging the battery pack again, first remove the FOMA terminal
from the AC adapter (or desktop holder) or DC adapter and then set it again.
Estimated usable time for battery pack (The usable time for the battery pack
varies with the charging time and the remaining life of the battery pack.)
※The continuous talk time is the estimated time that the FOMA terminal can be used for
calls when radio waves can be sent and received normally.
※The 1Seg watching time is the estimated time for when radio waves can be received
normally with the Stereo Earphone Set 01 (option) connected.
※The continuous standby time is the estimated time for when radio waves can be
received normally. The talk/communication time and standby time could be about half
of the estimate and 1Seg watching time could be shorter depending on the charge
level of the battery pack, function settings, other ambient conditions such as
temperature, and the status of radio waves in the area (weak or no radio waves, for
instance). When you use i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and
standby time will be shorter. Further, even if you do not make calls or not execute
i-mode communication, the talk/communication time and standby time will be shorter if
you watch 1Seg programs, compose i-mode mail, start up a downloaded i-αppli
program or the i-αppli Stand-by display, execute data communication or Multiaccess,
use the camera, play back i-motion files, movie files or music, or use Bluetooth
connections.
※The continuous talk time and the continuous standby time may be shortened
depending on the network environment in the country you stay.
Continuous
standby time
FOMA/3G
3G/GSM setting
[3G]
In motion: Approx. 390 hours
3G/GSM setting
[Auto]
Standstill: Approx. 620 hours
In motion: Approx. 370 hours
GSM
3G/GSM setting
[Auto]
Standstill: Approx. 270 hours
Continuous
talk time
FOMA/3G Voice call: Approx. 200 minutes
Videophone call: Approx. 110 minutes
GSM Voice call: Approx. 260 minutes
1Seg watching time Approx. 220 minutes
(when Mobile W-Speed is OFF:
Approx. 270 minutes)
(in ECO Mode: Approx. 380 minutes)
※
The continuous standby time for standstill is the average number of hours you can use the
FOMA terminal in standstill status when it is closed and can receive radio waves normally.
※The continuous standby time for in motion is the average number of hours you can
use the FOMA terminal in the combined status of “standstill” “moving” and “out of the
service area” when it is closed, in an area where it can receive radio waves normally.
Estimated time for charging battery pack
※The charging time is an estimate of time for when empty battery pack is charged with
the FOMA terminal turned off. The charging time will be longer if you charge the
battery pack with the power of the FOMA terminal turned on.
AC adapter Approx. 120 minutes DC adapter Approx. 120 minutes
Charge with AC Adapter and Desktop Holder
1Plug the connector of AC
Adapter (option) horizontally
with its engraved side facing
down into the connector
terminal of the Desktop Holder
(option).
2Pull out the AC Adapter's plug,
and plug it into a household
power socket of 100 V AC.
Call/Charging
indicator
Desktop Holder
Engraved surface
(down side)
AC Adapter
Stopper
Power
socket
Lock claw
AC
Adapter’s
plug
Connector
42
Before Using the Handset
3Put the bottom of the FOMA terminal into the stopper of
the desktop holder (A) to fit the head to the lock claw,
and then depress the FOMA terminal until it clicks (B).
Check that the Call/Charging indicator lights in red.
When the Call/Charging indicator flickers, dismount the AC adapter and battery
pack from the FOMA terminal and then re-mount them for charging.
If the symptom persists, troubles with the AC adapter, desktop holder or battery
pack may be involved, so consult a handling counter such as a docomo shop.
pThe charging confirmation tone (see page 105) sounds when charging starts and
ends. However, it does not sound when the power is off or during Manner Mode
or Public mode (Drive mode).
pBe sure to set the FOMA terminal firmly onto the desktop holder. Also, be careful
that the connector cover or a commercial strap is not caught between the FOMA
terminal and desktop holder.
4When charging is completed, hold the desktop holder
with fingers and lift up the head of FOMA terminal to
remove.
pUnplug the AC adapter from the power socket when you are not going to use it for
a long time.
■Indicator and display during charging and when charging is completed
pWhen the FOMA terminal is turned off, the battery icon does not appear.
If you start charging with the battery flat, the Call/Charging indicator might not light
immediately; however, charging itself has started.
pWhen charging automatically stops for safety, “ ” might be displayed on the
desktop.
■Stand
pStanding up the desktop holder to put the FOMA terminal with a slope makes easier to
watch 1Seg programs, etc. For details, refer to the instruction manual for the desktop
holder.
Call/Charging indicator Battery icon
Charging Lights in red Blinks
Charging completed Off Lights
Insert the connector with the engraved surface
facing up until it clicks. Pull straight the connector
out while pressing the release buttons.
pTo charge the battery, place the cover of the
connector terminal as illustrated. Pull out the
cover of the connector terminal to direction A,
and turn it as direction B.
※
Check the facing direction (front or rear) of the
AC adapter plug and then insert or pull it
horizontally into or out of the FOMA terminal.
Malfunction could result if you try to pull it
forcibly.
■DC adapter (option)
With the DC adapter, you can use a cigarette lighter socket (12 V/24 V) of cars to
charge the FOMA terminal with the battery pack attached.
For details, refer to the instruction manual for the FOMA DC Adapter 01/02.
When you turn on the FOMA terminal, an estimate of the battery level is
indicated. It is indicated by icons when you set “Battery” of “Display
setting” to “Icon”, and it is indicated in percent figures when you set it to
“Numerals”.
pCharge the battery pack when it is almost empty.
When charging only with the AC adapter
Engraved
surface
Release
buttons
Cover
Information
pIf the fuse blows off when charging with the DC adapter, be sure to use a 2A fuse. The
2A fuse is consumables, so purchase at auto parts stores in your neighborhood.
<Battery Level>
Checking Battery Level
Battery level Icon display Numerals display
Almost full ∼
Slightly low ∼
Getting low ∼
Fairly low ∼
Almost empty ∼
43
Before Using the Handset
You can check an estimate of the battery level by the display and sound.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsBattery
Battery level
pThe estimate of the battery level is indicated in percent figures below the
pictograms.
pThe pictogram disappears in about three seconds.
pThe battery level tone does not sound during Manner Mode or when you set
“Keypad sound” to “OFF”.
When the battery runs out, the display on the right appears and
the low battery alarm sounds for about 10 seconds. To stop
this alarm, press any key other than < and >. About one
minute later, the FOMA terminal will be turned off.
pDuring a call, a beeping tone from the earpiece notifies you of
the low battery. About 20 seconds later your call will be cut
and then one minute later the FOMA terminal will be turned
off.
pThe low battery alarm may sound when the battery level becomes about 10 percent or
less.
Information
pDepending on the usage state, the battery level indication might significantly vary.
Check Estimate of Battery Level by Display and Tone
Almost full
Five beeps
Slightly low
Four beeps
Getting low
Three beeps
Fairly low
Two beeps
Almost empty
One beep
※Almost empty.
Charge the battery pack.
When the battery is running out
Recharge Battery
display
1Press and hold h for at least one
second.
After the Wake-up display (see page 110) is displayed,
the Stand-by display appears.
pIt may take a while for the Wake-up display to appear.
pIf Set Time is set, the current date and time are shown.
pWhen “ ” is displayed, the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area or in the place where the radio waves
do not reach. Move to a location where “ ”
disappears.
Enter the four- to eight-digit Terminal Security Code after turning on the power. When
you enter the correct Terminal Security Code, the Stand-by display appears. If you enter
the incorrect Terminal Security Code five times in succession, the power turns off.
(However, you can turn on the power again.)
Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN1 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the
correct PIN1 code, the Stand-by display appears. See page 122 for PIN1 code.
Enter the four- to eight-digit PIN2 code after you turn on the power. When you enter the
correct PIN2 code, the Stand-by display appears. If you press r or h without
entering the correct PIN2 code, “Auto reset setting” is set to “OFF” and the Stand-by
display appears. See page 122 for PIN2 code.
<Power ON/OFF>
Turning Power ON/OFF
Turn Power On
Stand-by display
When your UIM is replaced (except during Omakase Lock)
When “PIN1 code entry set” of “UIM setting” is set to “ON”
When “Auto reset setting” of “Notice call cost” is set to “ON”
(except during Omakase Lock)
44
Before Using the Handset
The mail messages “Welcome ドコモ動画 (Welcome DOCOMO moving
picture )” and “緊急速報「エリアメール」のご案内 (Introduction of Early Warning
“Area Mail”)” have been saved by default. Press Oo twice or perform step 1 of “Display
Mail from Inbox” on page 158 to show the Inbox list.
1Press and hold h for at least two seconds.
The exit display appears and the power turns off.
pYou cannot turn on the power immediately after turning off the power. Wait a few
seconds.
1m
設定／サービス
(Set./Service)
ディスプレイ
(Display)
バイリンガル
(Select language)
Japanese (
日本語
) or English (
英語
)
p
The following functions are different between Japanese display and English display:
Check Welcome Mail
Information
pEach entry display appears in the order of “PIN1 code” → “Terminal Security Code”
→ “PIN2 code”.
Turn Power Off
+m-1-5
<Select Language>
Switching to English Display
Functions Japanese English
“Clock” of Display Setting
→ “Stand-by clock” → “Day of week”
Available Not available
使いかたナビ (Guide) Available Not available
Voice Guidance Available Not available
Information
pWhen you insert the UIM, the “バイリンガル (Select language)” setting is stored on
the UIM.
If the date and time, Terminal Security Code, Keypad Sound, Speed
Selector Sound, Location Request Set., or Font Size Setting is not set, the
Initial Setting display appears when you turn on the power. You can set
the initial settings also from each menu function separately.
1Turn on the powerYES
pWhen the display for entering your Terminal Security
Code, PIN1 code, or PIN2 code appears, follow the
operation on page 43.
2Set the date and time.
You can select “Auto time adjust ON” or “Auto time adjust OFF” for setting the time.
(See page 45)
3Set your Terminal Security Code.
You can set your Terminal Security Code required for setting functions.
(See page 122)
1. Enter “0000”Enter your new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits)
YES
4Set Keypad Sound.
You can set whether to make a keypad sound. (See page 105)
5Set Speed Selector Sound.
You can set the sound for when you rotate the speed selector. (See page 105)
6Set Location Request Set..
You can set whether to notify your current location for when a GPS location
provision request arrives. (See page 328)
<Initial Setting>
Configuring Initial Setting
45
Before Using the Handset
7Set the size of characters.
You can set the size of characters on the display at a time. (See page 118)
You can select whether to correct the time automatically or set it
manually. The time is set/displayed on the 24-hour basis.
1mSet./ServiceClockSet time
Auto time adjust ON or Auto time adjust OFF
Auto time adjust ON
. . . .Corrects the date/time automatically. The setting is completed.
When the time cannot be corrected automatically such as when “ ” is
displayed and the date/time has not been set, the Manual Time Setting
display appears. Follow step 2 to set the date/time.
Auto time adjust OFF
. . . .Sets the date/time manually.
pWhen “Notice call cost” is set to “ON”, you need to enter your Terminal Security
Code.
Information
pWhen an unset function is found, the Initial Setting display for the unset function
appears each time you turn on the power.
pThe completed settings are valid even when total setting is interrupted by an incoming
call or canceled by pressing -h or -r midway.
pWhen the power is automatically turned on by alarm notification, the Initial Setting
display does not appear even if there is any unset function.
pWhen you finish the initial settings, the confirmation display appears telling that
updating software is executed automatically. This display appears only at the first
time, and after that, does not appear until you execute Reset Settings or Initialize.
+m-3-1
<Set Time>
Setting Date and Time
2Enter year, month, date and time.
Use Mo to move the cursor and enter numbers by the
numeric keys.
pTo enter one-digit numeral for the date and time, enter
two digits beginning with “0” as in “01” through “09”.
pHighlight “Time zone” and press l( ) to set the
time zone. Use Mo to select a region and press Oo( ).
This function corrects the time of the FOMA terminal according to the clock information
obtained from the network when you turn on the power.
The time is corrected when you show the Stand-by display with “Auto time adjust ON”
set.
If the time is not corrected for a while after you turn on the power, turn it off and then on
again.
p
Some few second errors might occur. You might not be able to correct the time depending
on the radio wave conditions, or the i-
α
ppli program set for the i-
α
ppli Stand-by display.
pWhen you receive the clock information overseas and the time difference correction
information differs from the previously received one, “Time is adjusted” is displayed and
the time difference is corrected automatically. Press “OK” to update the time and show
Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, sent/received mail messages and others in local
time.
pDepending on the overseas carrier, the time difference might not be correctly adjusted.
In such a case, set a time zone manually.
About date/time correction function
Information
pUnless Set Time is set, the functions which use the clock such as Schedule do not
work correctly. Further, the date/time for redial items and received call records are not
stored.
pThe set time is retained even when the battery pack is replaced, however, it might be
reset if the battery pack is left removed for a long time. In that case, charge the FOMA
terminal and then perform the clock setting.
pWhen “Time zone” is set to other than “GMT +9” or the time difference is corrected
overseas, the sub clock (Japanese date/time, etc.) is displayed on the Stand-by
display.
pThis function supports clock settings from 00:00 on January 1, 2009 through 23:59 on
December 31, 2037.
46
Before Using the Handset
You can display the time of the specified area on the Stand-by display.
1mSet./ServiceClockWorld time watch
ON or OFF
Use Mo to select an area and press Oo( ).
You can advance the time displayed for the overseas country you stay
and for a region of World Time Watch by one hour.
1mSet./ServiceClockSummer timeON or OFF
You can set the FOMA terminal to send your phone number to the called
party’s phone when dialing. Your phone number is important
information, so take utmost care when notifying your phone number.
This function is available only when the other party’s phone supports
Caller ID.
<World Time Watch>
Displaying World Time
Information
pWorld Time Watch does not appear when “Display setting” → “Clock” → “Stand-by
clock” → “Position” is set to “OFF”, or when you use the FOMA terminal overseas.
Summer Time
<Caller ID Notification>
Notifying the Other Party of Your Phone
Number
You can set whether to notify your caller ID on the network.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesCaller ID notification
Do the following operations.
pYour phone number (own number) is stored on the UIM.
1mPhonebookOwn number
You can press No to switch the tabs.
pSee page 405 for storing/displaying personal data.
+m-1-7
Set Caller ID Notification to Network
Activate/Deactivate Activate or Deactivate
Check setting You can check the setting contents of “Activate/Deactivate”.
Information
p“Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID notification” is also valid for making a PushTalk call.
+m-0
<Own Number>
Checking Your Own Phone Number
Own Number display
Phone number tab
List tab
Information
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can switch between Number A and Number B by pressing
*Oo( ) from the Own Number display. “ ” appears for Number A, and “ ”
appears for Number B.
pWhen you replace a UIM with another one while using 2in1, 2in1 Setting is
deactivated. For using 2in1, activate 2in1 Setting.
47
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Making Calls/Videophone Calls
Videophone Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Making a Call/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Switching a Voice/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Using Call Records. . . . . . . . . <Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls> 52
Using Chaku-moji . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chaku-moji> 54
Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for Each Call . . . . . . . . . <186/184> 56
Sending Touch-tone Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Pause Dial> 57
Making International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <WORLD CALL> 58
Setting for International Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . <International Dial Assist> 59
Storing Numbers to be Added to the Beginning of a Phone Number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Prefix Setting> 60
Making a Call Specifying a Sub-address . . . . . . . <Sub-address Setting> 60
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reconnect Signal> 60
Making Voice Clear According to Surrounding Noise . . . <Shikkari Talk> 61
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make Voice Clear . . . <Noise Reduction> 61
Slowing Down the Other Party’s Speaking Speed . . . . . . . <Yuttari Talk> 61
Switching to Hands-free. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Hands-free> 61
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . <In-Car Hands-free> 61
Receiving Calls/Videophone Calls
Receiving a Call/Videophone Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Switched between a Call and a Videophone Call by the Other Party . . . 64
Setting Response of Key Operation for Answering Incoming Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Answer Setting> 64
Setting Response for when Opening FOMA Terminal while Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Setting when Opened> 65
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA Terminal during a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Setting when Closed> 65
Adjusting Earpiece Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Volume> 66
Adjusting Ring Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Ring Volume> 66
When You cannot/could not Answer a Voice/Videophone Call
Putting a Call on Hold when You cannot Answer Immediately
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <On Hold> 67
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Holding> 67
Setting Hold Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Hold Tone Setting> 67
Using Public Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
When You could not Answer an Incoming Call . . . . . . . . <Missed Calls> 69
Recording Voice/Video Messages when You cannot Answer a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Record Message Setting> 69
Recording a Message when You cannot Answer an Incoming Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Quick Record Message> 70
Playing/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice Memo/Videophone Record
Messages/Movie Memos
. . . . . . . . . .<Play/Erase Messages> <Play/Erase Videophone Messages> 71
Making Full Use of Videophone Calls
Using Chara-den . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Useful Functions for Videophone Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Setting Hands-free Videophone . . . . . . . . <Hands-free with Videophone> 75
Setting Image Quality for Videophone Calls . . . . . . . <Visual Preference> 75
Changing Image Displays for Videophone Calls . . . . . . . <Select Image> 75
Redialing as a Voice Call when a Videophone Call cannot be Connected
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Voice Call Auto Redial> 76
Setting for Switching a Voice/Videophone Call during a Call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Notify Switchable Mode> 76
Selecting Response to Incoming Videophone Calls during i-mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Videophone while Packet> 76
Using Videophone Calls by Interfacing to External Devices . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Checking inside of a Room when You are Out . . . . <Remote Monitoring> 77
PushTalk
PushTalk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Making a PushTalk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Adding a Member during a PushTalk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Receiving a PushTalk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Adding Entries to PushTalk Phonebook
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Store in PushTalk Phonebook> 83
Making a Call from PushTalk Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Deleting PushTalk Phonebook Entries
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Delete from PushTalk Phonebook> 85
Setting for Making/Receiving a PushTalk Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
48
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You and the other party can talk viewing each other’s images.
DOCOMO videophones conform to 3G-324M, standardized by the international
standard 3GPP. You cannot connect to the videophone that uses a different format.
p3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project):
This is the regional standards organization for developing common technical
specifications for third-generation mobile telecommunication systems (IMT-2000).
p3G-324M:
This is the international standard for the third generation of mobile videophones.
pP-08A supports only 64 kbps communication speed of the videophone.
You cannot talk on the videophone at 32 kbps communication speed.
■Display during videophone calls
…Received image (The other party’s image through the
camera or substitute image)
…Sent image (Image through your camera or substitute
image)
…Call duration
※1 When voice sending fails, the other party cannot hear your voice.
When voice receiving fails, you cannot hear the other party’s voice.
※2 When image sending fails, the sent image is not displayed at the other end.
When image receiving fails, the received image is not displayed.
When voice or image sending/receiving fails, it does not recover automatically. You need
to make a videophone call again.
Videophone Calls
…Status
: Voice sending/receiving
(gray): Voice sending/
receiving failed※1
: Image sending/receiving
(gray): Image sending/
receiving failed※2
: Camera image sending
: Still image sending
: Chara-den talking
: Hands-free activated
: AV output
: Bluetooth
communicating
: Portrait
: Close-up
: Landscape
: Night Mode
: Chara-den Whole
Action Mode
: Chara-den Parts Action
Mode
: DTMF Transmission
Mode
1Enter the other party’s phone number,
starting with the city code.
pWhen 27 or more digits are entered, the lower 26 digits
only are displayed.
pTo store an entered phone number in the Phonebook,
press m( ). Go to step 2 on page 92.
pEven when you are dialing within the same area, you
need to enter the city code before the phone number.
2
Press d or Oo( ).
p“ ” blinks during dialing, and lights during a call.
Making a Call/Videophone Call
When Making a Voice Call
49
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Press l( ).
p“ ” blinks during dialing and lights during the call.
pPress m during a videophone call to switch between
the image through your camera and substitute image
for sending to the other party.
3Press h to end the call after talking.
When Making a Videophone Call
The digital communication
charging starts from this
display.
Information
pIf you hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see page 438), follow the steps of
“To notify your caller ID” on page 57 to enter “186” and redial.
pWhen an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, you can hear the other party’s
voice from the earphone. (See page 410)
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during a call, the FOMA terminal works in accordance
with the setting of “Setting when closed”. (See page 65)
pYou can press numeric keys to send touch-tone signals during a call. During a
Chara-den call, you need to switch to DTMF Transmission Mode. (See page 74)
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can make a call after selecting Number A or Number B.
(See page 444)
<For Voice Calls>
pYou can make a voice call also by pressing -d and then entering the party’s phone
number. If you enter a wrong number, press -h to clear the display and then redial.
The other party’s name and icon are displayed if the party’s phone number and name
are stored in the Phonebook. However, the image is not displayed even if it is stored in
the Phonebook.
pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name
that comes first in the search order (see page 94) is displayed.
pThe phone number instead of the name is displayed when you make a call during
Personal Data Lock or to the party stored as secret data in the Phonebook.
Each time you press r, the digit on the far right is cleared. If you press and hold r
for at least one second, all the digits are cleared and the Stand-by display returns.
pPress No to move the cursor to the digit you want to clear, and then press r to clear
it. To clear all the digits on and to the right of the cursor, press and hold r for at least
one second.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by “Hands-free
w/ V. phone”. (See page 75) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner
Mode regardless of “Hands-free w/ V. phone”.
pWhen you make a videophone call with substitute image, note that you will still be
charged for the digital communication, not the voice calls.
pIf you make a videophone call at 110/119/118 from the FOMA terminal, it is
automatically dialed out as a voice call.
pDuring a videophone call, you can send a Chara-den image to the other party instead
of the image through your camera. (See page 72)
pThe international videophone call is available using the DOCOMO international call
service “WORLD CALL”. (See page 58)
Display when dialing
If you entered a wrong phone number
Information
50
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The reason why it could not be connected is displayed. (The displayed reason might not
be the same as the actual reason depending on the type of the other party’s phone and
contract for network services.)
If a videophone call could not be connected
Messages Reasons
Check number, then
redial
You have dialed a non-existent phone number.
Busy The other party is busy. (Depending on the receiver’s
phone, this message might be displayed during packet
communication as well.)
Busy with packet
transmission
The packet communication is progress at the other end.
Out of service area/power
off
The other party’s phone is out of the service area or turned
off.
Set caller ID to ON Your caller ID is not notified. (when dialing “visualnet”, etc.)
Your call is being
forwarded
During forwarding
Redial using voice call The other party activates Call Forwarding Service but the
forwarding destination phone does not support videophone
calls.
Upper limit has been
exceeded
Connection failed
The upper limit for the plan with the limit function (Type
Limit, Family Wide Limit) is exceeded.
Please make your call
from the i-mode web page
You did not make a videophone call from the IP (Information
Provider) site among i-mode official sites (at dialing to
V-live).
Connection failed Redial after setting “Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID
notification” to “Activate”.
pThis may appear in the case other than above.
If “Voice call auto redial” is set to “ON”, and a videophone call is not connected, a voice
call is automatically made.
pVideophone calls cannot be connected to the phones that do not support the
videophone function, or to the phones that are out of the service area or turned off even
if they are videophones. If you have set “Voice call auto redial” to “ON” and attempt to
dial a phone that does not have the videophone function, the number will be redialed
as a voice call. However, this operation might not work if you call the phone connected
with ISDN-synchronous 64K or the ISDN videophone that does not support 3G-324M
(as of April 2009), or if you dial the wrong number. Note that you could be charged for
the communication.
Auto-redialing
Function Menu while Entering Phone Number
Notify caller ID See page 56.
Prefix numbers See page 60.
Int’l dial assist See page 59.
Select image See page 76.
Multi number You can select a phone number to be notified to the other party.
(See page 441.)
Add to phonebook See page 92.
Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone number
set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 142.
Chaku-moji See page 55.
51
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You (caller) can switch between a voice call and a videophone call. This
function is available for the mobile phones that can switch between a
voice call and a videophone call.
When the other party’s phone has a function to switch between the calls,
“ ” is displayed on your phone and you can switch from the voice
call to videophone call.
1During a voice callc( )Change
pWhen you select an image
to be sent to the other
party, select “Select
image”. Go to step 2 on
page 76.
pWhen “Cancel” is selected,
the FOMA terminal cancels
switching and returns to the
voice call.
pWhile switching, the voice
guidance is played back.
Switching a Voice/Videophone Call
Switch from a Voice Call to a Videophone Call
When the other party’s phone has a function to switch between calls, you
can switch from a videophone call to a voice call by selecting “CHG to
voice call” from the Function menu.
1During a videophone calli( )
CHG to voice callYES
pSelect “NO” on the
confirmation display to stop
switching and to resume
the videophone call.
pWhile switching, the voice
guidance is played back.
Switch from a Videophone Call to a Voice Call
Information
pYou can switch between a voice call and a videophone call repeatedly.
pWhen i-mode or packet communication is in progress, the communication is
disconnected and then the voice call is switched to the videophone call.
pWhen packet communication is in progress at the other end, the message to the
effect that the communication cannot be switched is displayed and the voice call
continues without switching to the videophone call.
pYou cannot switch from a voice call to a videophone call while “Multi calling” is
displayed during a call if you have signed up for Call Waiting Service.
pIt takes about five seconds to switch. Switching may take a longer time depending on
the radio wave conditions.
p
Depending on how the caller’s phone is working or on the radio wave conditions, switching
between a voice call and a videophone call may fail and the connection may be cut off.
pIf you switch between a voice call and a videophone call during a call, the call duration
and call cost are counted respectively for each call. You are not charged while
“Changing” is displayed.
pYou cannot switch between a videophone call and a voice call unless “Notify
switchable mode” on page 76 is set to “Indication ON” at the other end.
pWhen you switch from a videophone call to a voice call, Hands-free is deactivated.
52
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The FOMA terminal can store the other party’s phone number and date/
time you have dialed or received. You can call back to the other party.
■Redial
Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored in
total, and the older record of dialing to the same phone number is deleted. However, the
dialing by PushTalk is retained in Redial separately from that of the voice call or
videophone call even if you dial to the same phone number.
■Dialed Calls
Up to 30 records of dialed voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored in
total, and up to 30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total as
well. The older records of dialing to the same phone number are also retained.
■Received Calls
Up to 30 records of incoming voice calls, videophone calls and PushTalk calls are stored
in total, and up to 30 records of 64K data and packet communications are stored in total
as well. The older records coming from the same phone number are also retained.
pWhen a call is switched between a voice call and a videophone call, the call of the type
that is dialed/received first is stored.
pWhen more than 30 calls are dialed, the older records are automatically deleted. Even
if you turn off the FOMA terminal, call records are not deleted.
pWhen you use 2in1, up to 30 records for Number A and up to 30 records for Number B
are stored respectively regardless of the mode.
■Icons for Redial, Dialed Calls, and Received Calls
<Redial> <Dialed Calls> <Received Calls>
Using Call Records
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of voice call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of videophone call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of PushTalk
/※Dialed and received group calls/missed group calls of PushTalk
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of PushTalk via server’s
phonebook
Voice/Video messages are recorded on Record Message
Incoming calls of Remote Monitoring
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international call
/※Dialed and received calls/missed calls of international videophone
call
Dialed calls of 64K data communication
※ The unchecked missed call icons are highlighted.
1
Press Vo.
mPhonebookDialed/recv. calls
Dialed calls
The list for call records is displayed.
pFor redial items of PushTalk, press Oo( ) to
show the Redial list of the group. Highlight a party and press p to make a
PushTalk call. If you do not highlight any party and press p, you can make a
group call.
pPress m( ) to display the Sent Address list.
2Select a call record.
The detailed display for the call record is displayed.
pWhen the other party is stored in the Phonebook, the
phone number, name, and icon are displayed. If the
same phone number is stored with multiple names in
the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in the
search order (see page 94) are displayed.
/※Received calls/missed calls of 64K data communication
Dialed calls of packet communication
/※Received calls/missed calls of packet communication
Received calls of 64K data communication and packet
communication when no external device is connected
Received Chaku-moji message
Records with time difference corrected
Records for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
Use Redial/Dialed Calls
When Using Redial
When Using Dialed Calls
For Redial
For Redial
53
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1Press Co.
pYou can display the Received Call list also by
mPhonebookDialed/recv. callsReceived calls
All calls or Missed calls.
All calls . . . . . . All the records including missed calls
Missed calls. . . The records of missed calls only
In Dual Mode of 2in1, the number of missed calls for
Number A and Number B is displayed respectively.
(If unchecked missed calls are found, the number of them is displayed.)
pFor received call records of PushTalk, press Oo( ) to show the Received
Call list of the group with “★” mark added to the caller. Highlight a party and
press p to make a PushTalk call. If you do not highlight any party and press p,
you can make a group call.
pPress m( ) to display the Received Address list.
2Select a received call record.
pThe other party’s phone number is displayed if it is
provided. If that phone number is not stored in the
Phonebook but recorded as a voice call in Redial,
“Callback” is displayed.
If this caller is stored in the Phonebook, the phone
number, name, and icon are displayed.
If the same phone number is stored with multiple names
in the Phonebook, the name and icon that come first in
search order
(see page 94) are displayed. If there is a call for packet communication, the
sender’s access point name (APN) is displayed.
When the other party’s phone number is not notified, the reason for no caller ID is
displayed.
pFor missed calls, the ring time is displayed on the right of the received date/time.
pWhen a Chaku-moji message is received, it is displayed.
Press d to make a voice call. You can make a voice call also by pressing
Oo( ) from the detailed display. Press l( ) to make a videophone call
and press p to make a PushTalk call.
Use Received Calls
Received Call list
Detailed Received
Call display
To make a call to a displayed redial item, dialed call record, or
received call record
Information
pYou can make a voice call to the most recently dialed or received number by pressing
-d from the Stand-by display and then *No.
p“Callback” is not displayed for incoming videophone calls and Pushtalk calls.
pWhen you make/receive a call with an additional number of Multi Number, the stored
name for the additional number is displayed below the phone number on the detailed
display. If you store a phone number for “Number setting” of “Multi number”, the
phone number is displayed as well.
pDialed call records of 64K data communication are not stored when you use a
Bluetooth device.
pEven if you make a voice call (or videophone call) to the phone number in a received
call record with a Chaku-moji message displayed, the received message is not sent.
pWhen a call comes in from a party who uses a dial-in phone number, a different
phone number might be displayed.
Function Menu while Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls is Displayed
Notify caller ID See page 56.
Prefix numbers See page 60.
Int’l dial assist See page 59.
Select image See page 76.
2in1 dial You can select a phone number to be notified to the other
party in Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 444)
Multi number You can select a phone number to notify the other party. (See
page 441)
Chaku-moji See page 55.
Search location You can access the site of “イマドコかんたんサーチ
(imadoco kantan search)”.
YES
Add to phonebook See page 92.
pYou can store the phone number in the Phonebook also by
pressing m( ) from the detailed display. Go to
step 2 on page 92.
Add to PushTalk
54
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Store in P-Talk PB YES
Store P-Talk group Select a group.
pWhen members who are not stored in the PushTalk
Phonebook are found, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to store them.
Enter a group name.
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
Mail
Compose message You can compose a mail message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 142.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 185.
Ring time
[Received Call list only]
You can display the ring time for missed calls. Even if you
have set “Missed calls display” of “Ring time” to “Not display”,
the missed calls which stopped ringing within the ring start
time and their ring times are displayed.
Change font size You can switch font sizes for Redial, Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, Sent Address, and Received Address. (See “Dialed/
recv. calls” on page 118)
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
Sent address
[Redial/Dialed Calls only]
See page 169.
Received address
[Received Calls only]
See page 169.
Delete
Delete this YES
When making a voice call or videophone call, you can send your text
message to tell the subject during calling.
pFor details on Chaku-moji or compatible models, refer to DOCOMO website or “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
pThe sending end is charged, but the receiving end is not charged.
A Chaku-moji message is displayed below a caller. The
Chaku-moji message is stored in Received Calls as well.
pThe Chaku-moji message is displayed only during ringing. It
is not displayed during a call.
pEven when a Chaku-moji message comes in within the ring
start time set by “Ring time”, it is received and recorded in
Received Calls.
pThe Chaku-moji message is not displayed during Lock All, Omakase Lock, or Personal
Data Lock. However, you can check the Chaku-moji message from Received Calls
after the lock is released.
Delete selected Put a check mark for redial items, dialed call records, or
received call records to be deletedl( )YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Store in P-Talk PB>
pYou cannot store from the call record for the party who is not stored in the Phonebook.
<Store P-Talk group>
pYou cannot store in a PushTalk group unless all the members are stored in the FOMA
terminal’s Phonebook.
<Delete>
pIf you execute “Delete all” from the Function menu of Redial/Dialed Calls, all records
in both Redial and Dialed Calls are deleted. Even if you execute “Delete this” or
“Delete selected” of Redial, the records are not deleted from Dialed Calls and they are
retained. To delete the dialed call records, delete them from the Function menu while
“Dialed calls” is displayed.
<Chaku-moji>
Using Chaku-moji
When a message is received
55
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can store up to 10 Chaku-moji messages in the Message list.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Create message
Highlight <Not stored> and press l( )
Enter a message.
pTo edit a stored message, highlight it and press l( ).
pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they are pictograms,
symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i
( )
Chaku-moji
Do the following operations.
3Press d or Oo( ).
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
pThe Chaku-moji message being sent is displayed while you are dialing.
Store Messages
Make a Call with a Message
Create message You can create a Chaku-moji message just before dialing.
Enter a message.
pYou can enter up to 10 characters regardless of whether they
are pictograms, symbols, or full-pitch/half-pitch characters.
pThe Chaku-moji message created using this function is not
stored in the Message list.
Select message From the Message list, you can select a stored message.
Select a message.
Sent messages From the Sent Message list, you can select a Chaku-moji
message to be sent. Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages only
are stored in the Sent Message list. If you send the same
Chaku-moji message, the older one also remains. When the
number of sent Chaku-moji messages exceeds 10, the
messages are deleted from the oldest one.
Select a sent message.
Up to 10 sent Chaku-moji messages are stored in Sent Messages, and
you can check for the other party’s phone number and the date/time the
Chaku-moji messages were sent. Older messages sent to the same
phone number are also retained.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, up to 10 latest records for Number A and Number B can be
displayed in total.
1mSet./ServiceNW services
Chaku-mojiSent messages
. . . . Chaku-moji message successfully sent
. . . . Chaku-moji message unsuccessfully sent
. . . . . . . Chaku-moji message for Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
pWhen the transmission result is not displayed, “ ” or “ ” is not
displayed.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result might not be
displayed correctly.
Information
pWhen a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other party’s phone, “Transmission
completed” is displayed, and you are charged a transmission fee.
pWhen a Chaku-moji message does not arrive at the other party’s phone such as when
the other party’s phone is not a Chaku-moji compatible mobile phone or the call is not
allowed by “Message disp. settings” at the receiving end, “Transmission failed” is
displayed. In this case, you are not charged a transmission fee.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the transmission result may not be
displayed at the sending end even if a Chaku-moji message has arrived at the other
party’s phone. In this case, you are charged a transmission fee.
pEven if you make a call sending a Chaku-moji message, the Chaku-moji message is
not displayed and you are not charged a transmission fee (the call is not recorded in
Received Calls at the receiving end) when the other party’s phone is out of the service
area, turned off, during Public mode (Drive mode), or the ring time for Record
Message Setting is set to 0 seconds. Also, the transmission result is not displayed at
the sending end.
pWhen a videophone call is not connected and automatically dialed as a voice call, the
Chaku-moji message is resent as well.
pChaku-moji does not support PushTalk.
pYou cannot send/receive Chaku-moji messages overseas.
Sent Messages
56
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
2Select a sent message.
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the
Phonebook, the phone number, name, and icon are
displayed.
You can set how incoming Chaku-moji messages are displayed.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Message disp. settingsSelect an item.
Display all messages . . . . Displays Chaku-moji messages from all callers.
Numbers stored in PB . . .Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the callers
stored in the Phonebook.
Calls with callerID. . . . . . .Displays Chaku-moji messages only from the caller
notifying his/her phone number.
Hide all messages. . . . . . .Does not display Chaku-moji messages.
Function Menu while “Sent Messages” is Displayed
Store You can store a sent Chaku-moji message in the Message list.
<Not stored>
pYou can store also by pressing l( ).
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Message Display Settings
Information
pWhen you set to “Numbers stored in PB”, you cannot receive Chaku-moji messages
from the callers stored in the Phonebook B in A Mode of 2in1 (and vice versa).
You can set how your FOMA terminal works for incoming Chaku-moji
messages for when “Setting when opened” is set to “Answer”.
1mSet./ServiceNW servicesChaku-moji
Prefer Chaku-mojiON or OFF
ON . . . . Does not answer by opening the FOMA terminal during ringing, so you
can check a Chaku-moji message.
OFF . . . Answers by opening the FOMA terminal while it is ringing.
Each time you dial out, you can set whether to notify your caller ID.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i( )Notify caller ID
Don’t notify or Notify caller
pTo release “Notify caller ID”, select “Cancel prefix”. Whether to notify or not
follows the setting for “Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID notification”.
You can select whether to notify the other party of your phone number
also by entering “186”/“184” before the other party’s phone number.
Prefer Chaku-moji
<186/184>
Setting Caller ID to Send/Not to Send for
Each Call
Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call
Set “Notify/Not Notify” by Entering “186/184”
57
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1186→Destination phone numberd or Oo( )
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
1184→Destination phone numberd or Oo( )
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call.
You can send touch-tone signals from your FOMA terminal to use
services such as reserving tickets, checking bank balance, etc.
You need to store a number string to be sent as a touch-tone signal in the
Pause Dial list. If you have inserted a pause (p), you can send a number
string breaking at the point where the pause is inserted.
1mSet./Service
Other settings
Pause dial
l
( )
pWhen a number string is already stored, it is displayed.
pTo delete a stored pause dial, press i( ) and select “Delete”, then select
“YES”.
To notify your caller ID
Not to notify your caller ID
Information
pWhen you make a call and hear the guidance requesting your caller ID (see
page 438), follow the steps of “To notify your caller ID” to enter “186” and redial.
pWhen you make a PushTalk call, “Notify caller ID” is valid, but “notify/not notify” by
adding “186”/ “184” is invalid.
pYou cannot set “Caller ID notification” while “ ” is displayed.
+m-8-4
<Pause Dial>
Sending Touch-tone Signals
Store Pause Dial
2Enter a number string.
pEnter the pause (p) by pressing and holding a for at least one second.
pYou can use only 0 through 9, s, a to enter a number string and the
pause (p).
pYou can enter up to 128 digits.
pYou cannot enter a pause (p) at the beginning and end of a number string, or
enter it consecutively.
1mSet./Service
Other settings
Pause dial
Oo
( )
Enter a phone number
d
or
Oo
( )
A voice call is made. Once the line is connected, a number string stored in Pause
Dial is displayed up to the first pause (p).
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can
retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo.
pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co
or from Redial by pressing Vo.
2Check that the line is connectedd or Oo( )
A number string up to the first pause (p) is sent, and a number string up to the next
pause (p) is displayed.
A number string up to the pause (p) is sent each time you press d or
Oo( ).
When you have finished sending the last number, the “Talking” display appears.
pTo send multiple pieces of a number string at a time, press and hold Vo for at
least one second, and select “Send at one time”.
Send Pause Dial
Information
pDuring a call, you can send a number string also by displaying the Function menu of
the Pause Dial display.
pSome devices on the receiving end cannot receive signals.
pYou cannot send a number string with pauses during a videophone call.
58
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
WORLD CALL is the international call service available from DOCOMO
mobile phones.
When you have signed up for FOMA service, you have contracted to use
“WORLD CALL” (except those who have applied not to use it).
pYou can make calls to about 240 countries and regions.
pThe WORLD CALL charges are added to your monthly bill for FOMA service.
pThe application/monthly fee is free of charge.
pThe service is not available with some billing plans.
pContact “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual for inquiries
about WORLD CALL.
pWhen using international carriers other than DOCOMO, contact them.
pThe caller ID might not be notified, or might not be displayed correctly depending on
the carrier. In this case, you cannot make a call by using Received Calls.
You can make international videophone calls to users of the specified 3G mobile phone
carriers overseas and FOMA users. Press l( ) instead of d or Oo( )
in the steps of “Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call”. (See page 58)
pFor the information about connectable countries and telecommunications carriers, refer
to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [International Services]” or the DOCOMO Global
Service website.
pImages sent from the other party may blur on your FOMA terminal or you may not be
able to connect, depending on the other party’s phone used for the international
videophone call.
<WORLD CALL>
Making International Calls
About international videophone calls
When you enter a phone number for dialing or storing it in the
Phonebook, press and hold 0 for at least one second to enter “+”. You
can use “+” to make international calls without entering an international
call access code.
pIf you set “Auto assist setting” of “Int’l dial assist” to “ON”, an international call access
code of “IDD prefix setting” is automatically entered.
10(for at least one second)
Enter numbers in order of country/area code
→area code (city code)→destination phone number
d or Oo( )Dial
p
When the area code (city code) begins with “0”, enter it except for the “0”. However,
include “0” when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy.
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
pWhen you select “Dial with orig. No.”, you can make a call without adding an
international call access code.
1Enter numbers in order of 010→country/area code
→area code (city code)→destination phone number
d or Oo( )
pYou can make an international call also by entering 009130→010
→country/area code→area code (city code)→destination phone number.
p
When the area code (city code) begins with “0”, enter it except for the “0”. However,
include “0” when making a call to some countries or regions such as Italy.
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
Use “+” to Make an International Call
Enter a Phone Number to Make an International Call
59
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can make a call adding a country/area code or international call
access code to a phone number. (Except for some countries and regions,
if the phone number starts with “0”, the “0” at the beginning is
automatically deleted.)
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i( )Int’l dial assist
Select a country/area name
Select a name of International call access code
d or Oo( )
pPress l( ) to make an international videophone call.
pWhen the beginning of the phone number is “+”, the display for selecting a
country/area name is not displayed.
pWhen “Japan” is selected as a country/area name, the display for selecting a
name of International call access code is not displayed.
You can set whether to replace “+” at the beginning of a phone number
with an international call access code for when you make an international
call from Japan.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
Auto assist settingON or OFF
Select a country/area name
Select a name of International call access code.
pWhen no country/area code or international call access code is stored, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to store it. Select “YES” and go to
step 2 of “Country/Area Code” on page 59 for a country/area code, and go to
step 2 of “IDD Prefix Setting” on page 59 for an international call access code.
International Dial Assist
<International Dial Assist>
Setting for International Calls
Auto Assist Setting
You can store up to 27 country/area codes to be added for making
international calls from overseas.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
Country/Area Code
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l( ).
pIf you select a stored country/area name, you can check the stored contents.
2Enter a country/area name Enter a country/area code.
pYou can enter a country/area name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter a country/area code of up to 5 digits. But you cannot use #, :, and
+.
You can store up to three international call access codes to be added to
the beginning of a phone number for making an international call.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingInt’l dial assist
IDD prefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l( ).
pIf you select the stored item, you can check the stored contents.
2Enter a nameEnter an international call access code.
pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter an international call access code of up to 16 digits.
Country/Area Code
IDD Prefix Setting
Function Menu while Country/Area Code /IDD Prefix
Setting is Displayed
Edit Go to step 2 of “Country/Area Code” on page 59 for Country/Area
Code, and go to step 2 of “IDD Prefix Setting” on page 59 for IDD
Prefix Setting.
pYou can edit the item also by pressing l( ).
Delete this YES
60
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can store prefix numbers such as international call access codes or
“186”/“184” and add them to the phone number for dialing. You can store
up to seven prefix numbers.
1mSet./ServiceNetwork settingPrefix setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l( ).
pIf you select a stored prefix, you can check the stored contents.
pTo delete a stored prefix, press i( ) and select “Delete this” or “Delete
all” then select “YES”. If you select “Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal
Security Code.
2Enter a nameEnter a prefix number.
pYou can enter a name of up to 8 full-pitch/16 half-pitch characters.
pYou can enter a prefix number of up to 16 digits. The keys for entry are limited to
0 through 9, s and a.
You can add a prefix number to the beginning of phone number when
you make a call.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Delete this> <Delete all>
pYou cannot delete the country/area code or international call access code set by
“Auto assist setting”.
<Prefix Setting>
Storing Numbers to be Added to the
Beginning of a Phone Number
Prefix Numbers
2i( )Prefix numbersSelect a name
d or Oo( )
pPress l( ) to make a videophone call and press p to make a PushTalk
call.
pFor making a PushTalk call, adding a prefix number such as “186” or “184” to the
beginning of the phone number is disabled.
You can set whether to regard the numbers after “:” of a phone number
as a sub-address to access the specified phones or data terminals.
pThe sub-address is a number assigned to identify each ISDN terminal connected to an
ISDN line. It is also used for selecting contents on “V-live”.
1mSet./ServiceOther settings
Sub-address settingON or OFF
You can set an alarm that sounds until a voice call, videophone call, or
PushTalk communication is reconnected after disconnected owing to
bad radio wave conditions.
1mSet./ServiceTalkReconnect signal
Select an alarm.
<Sub-address Setting>
Making a Call Specifying a Sub-address
Information
pEven if you set “Sub-address setting” to “ON”, “:” at the top of phone numbers and
“:” immediately after the prefix number or “186”/“184” are not regarded as
sub-address mark-off symbols.
+m-7-7
<Reconnect Signal>
Setting Alarm for Reconnecting
61
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The volume of the other party’s voice is turned up according to the
surrounding noise during a call. This setting is effective only when the
other party’s voice is output from the earpiece.
1mSet./ServiceTalkShikkari TalkON or OFF
The noise sent to the other party is reduced according to the surrounding
noise during a call.
1mSet./ServiceTalkNoise reductionON or OFF
1During a voice callm( )
While Yuttari Talk is activated, “ ” is displayed.
pPress m( ) again to return to the normal speed.
Information
p
The reconnectable time differs depending on the usage status and radio wave conditions.
An estimate is about 10 seconds and the call charge is applied also for that duration.
pWhile you are disconnected, no sound is transmitted to the other party.
<Shikkari Talk>
Making Voice Clear According to
Surrounding Noise
+m-7-6
<Noise Reduction>
Reducing Surrounding Noise to Make
Voice Clear
<Yuttari Talk>
Slowing Down the Other Party’s Speaking
Speed
Information
pYuttari Talk is effective only during a current voice call. The speaking speed returns to
normal one when you end the call, switch calling parties during Multi calling, or switch
from the voice call to a videophone call.
When you switch to Hands-free, sound such as the other party’s voice is
audible over the speaker.
1During a call, dialing, or connectingd
When Hands-free is activated, “ ” is displayed.
pPress d again to deactivate Hands-free.
pThe sound volume during a Hands-free call follows the setting specified by
“Volume” (earpiece volume).
pYou can switch to Hands-free even during Manner Mode. Also, you will still hear
voice through the speaker even when you activate Manner Mode during a
Hands-free call.
You can make or receive voice calls from a Hands-free compatible device
such as In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option) or a car navigation system by
connecting with your FOMA terminal.
You can connect your FOMA terminal to a Hands-free compatible device
using two ways of connections as follows:
pConnect using a cable (USB connection):
To use/charge via the In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 (option), you need to have the FOMA
In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 (option).
pConnect using Bluetooth (wireless):
To connect to a Bluetooth communication compatible Hands-free device, you need to
register and connect it to the FOMA terminal.
※For how to operate Hands-free compatible devices, refer to the respective instruction
manuals.
<Hands-free>
Switching to Hands-free
Information
pWhile an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, you cannot hear voice through
the speaker even if you switch to Hands-free.
pKeep the FOMA terminal well away from your ear during a Hands-free call. Otherwise
you could affect or damage your hearing.
pTalk into the FOMA terminal within a distance of about 50 cm.
<In-Car Hands-free>
Using Hands-free Compatible Devices
62
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1When you receive a call, the ring tone
sounds and the Call/Charging indicator
flickers.
pTo vibrate the FOMA terminal for incoming calls, set
“Phone” or “Videophone” of “Vibrator” to other than
“OFF”.
pWhile the phone is ringing for a videophone call,
“Incoming V.phone” is displayed. However, while
ringing for a voice call, this kind of indication is not
displayed.
p“ ” is displayed at the upper left of the phone
number for incoming international calls.
Information
pTo connect using a cable (USB connection), set “USB mode setting” to
“Communication mode”.
p“ ” appears while you are talking or communicating using a USB Hands-free
compatible device.
p“ ” might appear while the FOMA terminal is connected to a USB Hands-free
compatible device, and “ ” while “USB mode setting” is set to “microSD mode”,
depending on the Hands-free device connected.
pThe display or ring tone for incoming calls follows the settings of the FOMA terminal.
pWhen the sound is set to output from a Hands-free compatible device, the ring tone
sounds from that device even when Manner Mode is activated or “Ring volume” of the
FOMA terminal is set to “Silent”.
pThe receiving operation in Public mode (Drive mode) follows the setting of “Public
(Drive) mode”.
pThe receiving operation while Record Message is activated follows the setting of
“Record message setting”.
pWhen the sound is set to output from the FOMA terminal, the operation for when the
FOMA terminal is closed during a call follows the setting of “Setting when closed”.
When the sound is set to output from a Hands-free device, the communication state
does not change regardless of “Setting when closed” even if you close the FOMA
terminal.
Receiving a Call/Videophone Call
Chaku-moji message
(See page 54)
2
Press d or Oo( ) to answer
the call.
Press d
or
Oo
( )
to answer
the videophone call.
You can send the image through your camera to the
other party.
When you press m( ) to answer the videophone
call, the substitute image is sent to the other party.
(Substitute image answering)
pPress m during a videophone call to switch between
the image through your camera and substitute image
for sending to the other party.
3Press h to end the call after talking.
For Answering a Voice Call
For Answering a Videophone Call
Information
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during a call, the FOMA terminal works in accordance
with the setting of “Setting when closed”. (See page 65)
63
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
pYou might hear beeps (in-call ring tone) during a call.
If you have signed up for any of Voice Mail Service, Call Waiting Service, or Call
Forwarding Service and set “Arrival call act” to “Answer”, the beeps (in-call ring tone)
will sound for another incoming call, enabling you to do the following operations:
Voice Mail Service
. . . . Transfer the call to the Voice Mail Service Center. (See page 434)
Call Waiting Service
. . . . Put your current call on hold and answer the incoming call. (See page 434)
Call Forwarding Service
. . . . Transfer the call to the registered forwarding destination. (See page 437)
pYou can set “Reject unknown” not to accept calls from the phone numbers that are not
stored in the Phonebook.
<For Videophone Calls>
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated during a videophone call as
“Hands-free w/ V. phone” has been set to “ON”. (See page 75) However, Hands-free
is deactivated during Manner Mode regardless of “Hands-free w/ V. phone”.
pEven if Call Forwarding Service is set to “Activate”, the call is not forwarded unless the
forwarding destination is a phone compatible with the videophone conforming to
3G-324M (see page 48). Check the phone you are forwarding the call to and then
activate the service. The videophone caller does not hear the guidance to the effect
that the call is forwarded. (The message to the effect that the call is to be forwarded
appears, depending on the receiver’s FOMA terminal.)
pIf a videophone call comes in from the phone number to be rejected by Nuisance Call
Blocking Service, the video guidance for Call Rejection is played back and the call is
disconnected.
pYou can send a Chara-den image to the other party instead of the image through your
camera. (See page 72)
Information
When a caller’s phone number is provided
The phone number is displayed. If that phone number is not stored in the Phonebook but
recorded in Redial, “Callback” is displayed.
If the caller’s name, phone number, and image are stored in the Phonebook, the name,
phone number, and icon (or image) are displayed.
p“Callback” is not displayed for incoming videophone calls and Pushtalk calls.
pIf the same phone number is stored with multiple names in the Phonebook, the name
that comes first in the search order (see page 94) is displayed.
pThe phone number but not the name is displayed during Personal Data Lock.
However, when “Phonebook available” is set to “Accept” for “Customize” of Personal
Data Lock, the name is displayed even during Personal Data Lock.
pFor a forwarded call, the forwarder’s phone number is displayed below the caller. (It
might not be displayed in the case of some forwarders.)
pWhen you receive a call to an additional number of Multi Number, the stored name for
the additional number is displayed below the caller. (With a forwarded call, you can
press c( ) to switch to display of the forwarder.)
When a caller’s phone number is not provided
The reason for no caller ID is displayed. (See page 135)
Display for incoming calls
Function Menu while a Call is Ringing
Call rejection You can disconnect the call without answering.
Call forwarding See page 437.
Voice mail See page 434.
64
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
When you have set “Notify switchable mode” to “Indication ON”, a caller
(the other party) can switch between a voice call and a videophone call.
pYou (receiving end) cannot switch between a voice call and a videophone call.
1The display for switching to a
videophone call appears during a voice
call.
YES . . . Sends the image through your camera to the
caller.
NO . . . . Sends a pre-installed substitute image to the
caller.
pWhile switching, the message to that effect is displayed
and the voice guidance is played back.
When the caller (the other party) switches a videophone call to a voice
call, the message telling that the call is being switched appears, the voice
guidance is played back, and then the call is switched to a voice call.
Switched between a Call and a
Videophone Call by the Other Party
Switched from a Voice Call to Videophone Call by the
Other Party
Switched from a Videophone Call to Voice Call by the
Other Party
You can set to start talking (Any key answer) or to stop the ring tone
(Quick silent) by pressing a key besides d, Oo, m (for videophone
call), or p (for PushTalk call) for when a call or PushTalk call comes in.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callAnswer setting
Select a key operation.
Any key answer
You can start talking by pressing any key shown below:
pWhen receiving a videophone call, you can start talking by pressing d, Oo or
m.
Quick silent
The following are the keys you can press to stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice
guidance:
When “Setting when opened” is set to “Keep ringing”, you can stop the ring tone,
vibrator or voice guidance also by opening the FOMA terminal. Even if you stop it,
the other party still hears a ringback tone.
pAfter you stop the ring tone, vibrator or voice guidance, you can start talking by
pressing d, Oo, m (for videophone calls), or p (for PushTalk calls).
+m-5-8
<Answer Setting>
Setting Response of Key Operation for
Answering Incoming Calls
Voice call※1※2d, Oo, 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c※3, No,
<
PushTalk call d, Oo, p, 0 through 9, a, r, l, c, Bo, <
Voice call※1※20 through 9, a, s, r, m, c※3, No, <
Videophone call※20 through 9, a, s, r, c※3, No, <
PushTalk call 0 through 9, a, r, l, c, Bo, <
65
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
OFF
You can start talking by pressing a key shown below:
※1 You can activate Any Key Answer or Quick Silent also by pressing l when
five record messages have already been recorded.
※2 During Key Lock, you can activate Any Key Answer and Quick Silent by
pressing and holding < for at least one second.
※3 While “ ” is displayed, you cannot activate Any Key Answer or Quick
Silent by pressing c.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
Setting when openedSelect an incoming type
Keep ringing or Answer
Keep ringing. . .You can keep the incoming call ringing.
Answer . . . . . . .You can answer the incoming call. For videophone calls, the still
image set for “Substitute image” of “Select image” is sent to the
other party.
Voice call d, Oo
Videophone call d, Oo, m
PushTalk call d, Oo, p
Information
pWhile an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, you can press the switch to
start talking, regardless of “Answer setting”. (See page 411)
<Setting when Opened>
Setting Response for when Opening
FOMA Terminal while Ringing
1mSet./ServiceTalkSetting when closed
Phone/VideophoneSelect an item.
Continue . . . . . .The call is continued. The setting is completed.
Hold . . . . . . . . . .The other party hears the hold tone set for “Holding tone” of “Hold
tone setting”. For videophone calls, the still image set for
“Holding” of “Select image” is displayed.
End the call. . . .The call is finished. This is the same operation as pressing h
during a call. The setting is completed.
2Speaker ON or Speaker OFF
Speaker ON. . . . . The hold tone sounds from the speaker.
Speaker OFF. . . . The hold tone does not sound from the speaker.
1mSet./ServiceTalkSetting when closed
PushTalkSpeaker call or End the call
+m-1-8
<Setting when Closed>
Setting Response for when Closing FOMA
Terminal during a Call
Set Response for when Closing FOMA Terminal during a
Voice Call/Videophone Call
Set Response for when Closing FOMA Terminal during
PushTalk
Information
pThis function is disabled when an earphone/microphone (option) is connected. The
communication state does not change even if you close the FOMA terminal.
66
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1mSet./ServiceTalkVolumeUse Bo or </> to
adjust the earpiece volume.
Adjust the earpiece volume to Level 1 (minimum) through Level 6 (maximum).
pYou can adjust the volume by pressing Zo or </> during a voice call and
calling, Bo or </> during a videophone call and PushTalk call, and by
pressing and holding Zo (for at least one second) while you are entering a
phone number. Press Bo or </> within two seconds to adjust it.
<Volume>
Adjusting Earpiece Volume
Information
pThe earpiece volume adjusted during a call is retained even after the call ends.
pWhen you adjust the earpiece volume, the sound volume during a Hands-free call or
speaker call for PushTalk is also adjusted.
You can adjust the ring volume for incoming calls and mail.
1mSet./ServiceSoundRing volume
Select an incoming type
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pThe following icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while “Ring volume” is
set to “Silent”:
: Set for “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”.
: Set for “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
: Set for “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”, and for “Mail”, “Chat mail”,
“MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
pIf you have set “Step”, the ring tone is silent for about three seconds, and then the
volume steps up every three seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
pWhile the phone is ringing for a voice call or videophone call, you can adjust the
ring volume by pressing Bo. However, you cannot adjust the ring volume in the
following cases:
・When “Ring volume” is set to “Step”
・When “Answer setting” is set to “Quick silent” and you stop the ring tone or
voice guidance
・During Manner Mode
・When a call is cut off within the ring start time specified by “Ring time”
+m-5-0
<Ring Volume>
Adjusting Ring Volume
67
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1During ringingh
The FOMA terminal makes three rapid beeps for confirmation and the call is put on
answer-hold (On Hold).
pThe confirmation tone does not sound during Manner Mode or when “Ring
volume” is “Silent”.
pThe other party hears the hold tone set for “On hold tone” of “Hold tone setting”.
For videophone calls, the still image set for “On hold” of “Select image” is
displayed.
2Press d or Oo( ) to release hold and answer
the call.
pIf “Answer setting” is set to “Any key answer”, you can release hold of voice calls
by pressing any key of 0 through 9, a, s, r, m, c, Mo, <, >,
l, or i.
pIf a videophone call is on hold, the image through your camera is sent to the other
party by pressing d or Oo( ) to release hold. If you press m( )
to release hold, the substitute image is sent.
1During a callOo ( )
pThe other party hears the hold tone set for “Holding tone” of “Hold tone setting”.
For videophone calls, the still image set for “Holding” of “Select image” is
displayed.
pYou can put the call on hold by closing the FOMA terminal during the call if you
have set “Setting when closed” to “Hold”.
<On Hold>
Putting a Call on Hold when You cannot
Answer Immediately
Information
pThe caller is charged for the call even during answer-hold (On Hold).
pIf you press -h during answer-hold (On Hold), the call will be disconnected.
<Holding>
Putting a Call on Hold during a Call
2Press d or Oo( ) to release hold and answer
the call.
pWhen you have put a voice call on hold, you can release the hold also by
pressing r.
pIf a videophone call is on hold, the image through your camera is sent to the other
party by pressing d or Oo( ) to release hold. If you press m( )
to release hold, the substitute image is sent.
pYou can release hold also by opening the FOMA terminal.
You can set the guidance the other party hears while a call is put on hold.
1mSet./ServiceTalkHold tone setting
On hold tone or Holding toneSelect a hold tone.
Tone 1/2 . . The caller hears the pre-installed guidance in Japanese.
RHAPSODY ON A THEME OF
. . . . . . . . . . The caller hears the melody. You can set this for “Holding tone” only.
Voice announce
. . . . . . . . . . The caller hears the sound recorded by “Voice announce”. If it has
not been recorded, this is not displayed.
pPress l( ) to play back a hold tone. Press r to end the demo
playback.
Information
pThe caller is charged for the call even while the call is on hold.
pIf a new call comes in while the current call is put on hold, the hold (Holding) is
released.
<Hold Tone Setting>
Setting Hold Tone
68
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Public mode is an auto-answer service that puts importance on manners
in public spaces. Once you activate Public mode, the guidance is played
back telling that you cannot answer the call as you are currently driving
or in a place where you should refrain from speaking on the phone (a
train, bus, movie theater, etc.). Then the call is disconnected.
pVoice Mail Service※1, Call Forwarding Service※1, and Caller ID Display Request
Service※2 work taking priority over Public mode.
※1 If a ring time is set to other than 0 seconds for incoming calls, the service works
after the Public mode guidance.
※2 When the other party notifies you of the phone number, Public mode works.
pPublic mode does not work to the calls from the party set to be rejected by Nuisance
Call Blocking Service.
1Press and hold a for at least one second.
Public mode is activated and “ ” is displayed.
When a call comes in, the guidance “The person you are calling is currently driving
or in an area where cell phone should not be used. Please try again later.” is played
back for incoming calls.
pTo deactivate Public mode, perform the same operation. Then, Public mode is
deactivated and “ ” disappears.
Using Public Mode
Using Public Mode (Drive Mode)
Information
pYou can activate/deactivate Public mode only from the Stand-by display. You can
activate/deactivate Public mode even when “ ” is displayed.
pYou can make calls as usual even during Public mode.
pIf you make an emergency call at 110/119/118, Public mode is released.
pWhen Public mode and Manner Mode are activated simultaneously, Public mode has
priority.
pIf a “User unset” call comes in while “Caller ID request” is set to “Activate”, the Caller
ID Request guidance is played back. (The Public mode guidance is not played back.)
pYou cannot use this function during data communication.
・Even when a call comes in, the ring tone does not sound. The “Missed call” icon
appears on the display and the call is stored in “Received calls”. The guidance is
played back to the caller to the effect that you are currently driving or in an area where
mobile phones should not be used. Then the call is disconnected. When a PushTalk
call comes in, no answer is made and the message “Connection failed” appears on the
caller’s display. For the talk among three or more members, the message to the effect
that you are driving is conveyed to them.
However, when the power is off or “ ” is displayed, the caller hears the
out-of-service area guidance instead of the Public mode guidance.
・The ring tone does not sound and the Call/Charging indicator does not flicker even
when mail or a message comes in. In addition, the set vibrator does not work.
・The ring tone for 64K data communication, alarm tone, charging confirmation tone, the
ring tone for i-αppli call and effect tone at the start of i-Widget do not sound, and a
melody while an i-αppli program is running is not played back.
・The tickers of i-Channel are not displayed.
・See page 68 for how Public mode (Drive mode) and each network service work for
incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated.
Public mode (Power off) is an auto-answer service that puts importance
on manners in public spaces. Once you activate Public mode (Power off),
the guidance is played back telling that you cannot answer the call as
you are currently in a place where the power should be turnd off
(hospital, airplane, around priority seat in a train, etc.). Then the call is
disconnected.
1Enter “:25251”d
Public mode (Power off) is set. (Nothing is changed on the Stand-by display.)
After setting Public mode (Power off) and turning off the power, the guidance “The
person you are calling is currently in an area where use is prohibited. Please try
again later.” is played back for incoming calls.
pTo release Public mode (Power off), dial “:25250”.
pTo check the setting for Public mode (Power off), dial “:25259”.
When Public mode (Drive mode) is activated
Using Public Mode (Power Off)
69
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The setting stays activated until you dial “:25250” to deactivate Public mode (Power
off). You cannot deactivate the setting just by turning on the power.
The guidance is played back to the caller telling that you are currently in a place where
you should turn off the power. Then the call is disconnected. When a PushTalk call
comes in, no answer is made and the message “Connection failed” appears on the
caller’s display. For the talk among three or more members, the message to the effect
that you do not participate is conveyed to them.
The Public mode (Power off) guidance is played back even when you are out of the
service area or out of reach of radio waves.
・See page 68 for how Public mode (Power off) and each network service work for
incoming calls when they are simultaneously activated.
When you could not answer calls (Missed calls), the “Notification icon”
appears on the Stand-by display. You can check Received Calls by
selecting the icon.
1OoOo( )
pPress h or r to return
to the former display.
pWhen multiple icons are
found, use Mo to highlight
an icon and press
Oo( ).
When Public mode (Power off) is activated
<Missed Calls>
When You could not Answer an Incoming
Call
Notification icon
By activating Record Message, you can play back an answer message to
incoming calls and record callers’ voice/video messages when you
cannot answer them even if you have not signed up for Voice Mail
Service.
You can record up to five messages for voice calls and up to two
messages for videophone calls. Each message can be recorded for up to
20 seconds.
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Record message settingON or OFF
Select an answer message.
pPress l( ) to play back the answer message. Press r to end the
demo playback.
pWhen “Japanese 1”, “Japanese 2”, or “English” is set, a beep sounds after
playing back the answer message to the other party. If “Voice announce” is set,
the beep does not sound.
2Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter from “000” through “120” in three digits.
pYou cannot set the same ring time for Remote Monitoring, Auto Answer Setting
and Record Message Setting. Set a different time for each.
pWhile Record Message is activated, “ ”∼“ ” (the number of recorded
messages for voice calls) and “ ”∼“ ” (the number of recorded messages
for videophone calls) are displayed.
+m-5-5
<Record Message Setting>
Recording Voice/Video Messages when
You cannot Answer a Call
Activate Record Message
70
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
For videophone calls, the still image set for “Preparing” of
“Select image” is displayed on the other party’s display while
playing back the answer message, and the still image set for
“Record message” of “Select image” is displayed while
recording.
pTo answer a call while the answer message is being played
back or a voice/video message is being recorded, press
d or Oo( ).
For videophone calls, press d or Oo( ) to send
the image through your camera, or press m( ) to
send a substitute image.
You can answer a call also by pressing the switch on an
earphone/microphone (option). For videophone calls, the image through your camera
is sent to the other party.
Incoming calls when Record Message Setting is set to “ON”
Incoming Call Playing back the
answer message
Recording a voice/
video message
The ring time
elapses
Displaying an icon on the
desktop (See page 29)
Information
pRecord Message does not work when “ ” is displayed.
pWhen Public mode (Drive mode) and Record Message are simultaneously activated,
the former has priority and the latter does not work.
pThe priority order of answer messages is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook entry” →
“Group setting” → “Record message setting”.
pIf “Voice announce” selected as an answer message is deleted, the answer message
will be set to “Japanese 1”.
Even if a call comes in while Record Message is not activated, you can
record the caller’s voice/video message just for that incoming call.
1During ringingl( ) or >
The caller will hear the answer message and then can leave you a voice/video
message.
pDuring Key Lock, press and hold > for at least one second.
pRecord Message does not work when five messages for voice calls and two
messages for videophone calls have already been recorded. Also if you press >
while a PushTalk call is arriving, Record Message does not work and Manner
Mode is set.
pWhen Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service is set at the same time as
Record Message, the priority depends on the ring time set for Voice Mail Service or
Call Forwarding Service. To give Record Message priority, set the ring time for
Record Message Setting shorter than that for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding
Service. Even when you do this, Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service works
if there are already five record messages for voice calls and two record messages for
videophone calls.
pYou cannot receive a call from a third party while a voice/video message is being
recorded. The third party will hear the busy tone.
<Quick Record Message>
Recording a Message when You cannot
Answer an Incoming Call
Information
71
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase msg.
Select a record message or voice
memo.
A beep sounds and playback starts.
pOn the Record Message list, recorded items are indicated by “★”.
pIt is played back at the volume set for “Volume” (earpiece volume).
pWhen playback ends, a double-beep sounds and the message “Playing” is
cleared from the display.
pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during
playback. When a caller’s phone number is provided, it is displayed. If the caller is
stored in the Phonebook, his/her name is also displayed.
However, the name is not displayed and the phone number only is displayed in
the following cases:
・When you play back a record message from the caller stored as secret data in
Normal Mode
・When you play back a record message for Number A in B Mode (or vice versa)
while using 2in1
pIf the caller’s phone number is displayed during playback, you can make a voice
call to that phone number by pressing d. Press l( ) to make a
videophone call and press p to make a PushTalk call.
From the Stand-by display, press > to play back the latest record message. When
record messages are not recorded, a voice memo is played back.
+m-5-5
<Play/Erase Messages>
<Play/Erase Videophone Messages>
Playing/Erasing Record Messages/a Voice
Memo/Videophone Record Messages/
Movie Memos
Play Back/Erase Record Messages/a Voice Memo
Record Message list
To play back using .>
Each time you press > during playback, messages are played back in the following
order: the next new record message → the oldest record message → a voice memo.
Press Oo( ) or r.
1mLifeKitRec. msg/voice memo
Play/Erase VP msg.
Select a videophone record message
or movie memo.
pOn the Videophone Record Message list, recorded
items are indicated by “★”.
pIt is played back at the same volume of the playback
sound of i-motion files.
pThe date and time the message/memo was recorded are displayed during
playback.
From the Stand-by display, press and hold > for at least one second to play back the
latest videophone record message. When videophone record messages are not
recorded, the latest movie memo is played back.
Press Oo( ) or r.
To skip to next message
To cancel playback midway
Play Back/Erase Videophone Record Messages/Movie Memos
Videophone Record
Message list
To play back using .>
To cancel playback midway
Function Menu of the Record Message List/Videophone
Record Message List
Play You can play back the message.
Erase this YES
pYou can erase the message/memo also by pressing
i( ) during playback.
72
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can set up for sending a Chara-den image to the other party.
pSee page 353 for Chara-den images.
You can set a Chara-den image to be sent to the other party for making a
videophone call.
1Chara-den display/Chara-den listl( )
Enter the destination phone number and press l( ) to make a
videophone call.
pWhen the other party’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, you can
retrieve it selecting from the Search Phonebook display by pressing Bo.
pYou can search for the phone number also from Received Calls by pressing Co
or from Redial by pressing Vo.
Erase rec. msg. You can erase all record messages from the Record Message
list, and can erase all videophone record messages from the
Videophone Record Message list.
YES
Erase movie memo
[Videophone Record
Message list only]
You can erase all movie memos.
YES
Erase all You can erase all record messages and a voice memo from the
Record Message list, and can erase all videophone record
messages and movie memos from the Videophone Record
Message list.
YES
Using Chara-den
Set by Call
Information
pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
“Setting by call” → “Setting for Phonebook entry” →“Group setting” → “Select image”.
You can set a Chara-den image for “Substitute image” of “Select image”.
1Chara-den display/Chara-den list/Chara-den Recording
displayi( )Substitute image
pFrom the Chara-den list, you can set it also by pressing m( ).
You can perform settings for a Chara-den call. These settings are
effective only for during a videophone call.
1During a Chara-den calli( )
Chara-den setupDo the following operations.
Substitute Image
Chara-den Setup
Switch Chara-den Select a Chara-den image.
pIf you switch Chara-den images, the action mode switches to
Whole Action Mode.
Action list You can display the list for actions that you can operate.
pHighlight an action and press Oo( ) to execute the
action. Press l( ) to check the details of the action.
pYou can display the Action list also by pressing a.
Change action You can switch the action mode between Whole Action Mode
( ) and Parts Action Mode ( ).
pYou can switch modes also by pressing l.
SW substitute img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to
the still image set for “Pre-installed” of “Select image”.
SW orig. subst. img. You can switch a substitute image to be sent to the other party to
the still image set for “Original” of “Select image”.
At videophone
start-up
Whole Action
Mode
73
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can switch images to be sent to the other party from through the
inside camera to through the outside camera.
1During a videophone calll( )
pPress l( ) again to switch to the image through the inside camera.
pThe setting here is effective only for the current videophone call.
You can switch images to be sent to the other party from the image
through your camera to the still image or Chara-den image set as the
substitute image.
See page 353 for Chara-den.
1During a videophone callm( )
The substitute image is sent to the other party.
“ ” is displayed while the still substitute image is being sent, and “ ” is
displayed if you have set a Chara-den image as a substitute image (during a
Chara-den call).
pPress m( ) again to switch from the substitute image to the image
through your camera.
Useful Functions for Videophone Calls
Switching Cameras
At videophone start-up Inside camera
Send Substitute Images
Information
pThe priority order of substitute images to be sent to the other party is as follows:
“Setting by call” → “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group setting” → “Select image”.
Note that “Setting for Phonebook entry” and “Group setting” are disabled when a
videophone call comes in without notifying the caller ID.
pEven when you make a videophone call sending a substitute image, you are charged
for the digital communication.
You can switch the display locations of the received image and the sent
image.
1During a videophone call, press c( ).
pEach time you press
c( ), the displays
switch.
Switch Image Display Positions
+c
c
+cc
74
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can adjust the magnification for the camera image to be sent to the
other party. During a videophone call, the maximum magnification is
about 1.9 times for the inside camera and about 6.9 times for the outside
camera.
1During a videophone call
Use No to adjust the magnification.
pThe former zoom setting returns when the videophone call ends.
Zoom
At videophone start-up WIDE
Function Menu during Videophone Call
CHG to voice call See page 51.
Photo light You can turn on the photo light while sending the images
through the outside camera.
ON or OFF
Talk on BT/Phone You can set whether to communicate through the FOMA
terminal or a Bluetooth device. (See page 417)
Send DTMF tone/
DTMF tone OFF
During a Chara-den call, you can switch to the DTMF
Transmission Mode that enables you to enter the data from
the numeric keys and to send DTMF (touch-tone signals). You
can operate it only during a Chara-den call.
p“Send DTMF tone” is displayed when the mode is not DTMF
Transmission Mode and “DTMF tone OFF” is displayed in
DTMF Transmission Mode.
pIn DTMF Transmission Mode, you cannot operate the action
of Chara-den images.
pThe DTMF tone may not be received depending on the
device of a receiving end.
V.phone settings
Visual preference See page 75.
At videophone
start-up
OFF
Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the camera image to be sent
to other party to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
White balance You can adjust the colors of the camera image to be sent to
the other party, to make the colors look more natural.
Select an item.
Fine weather. . . . . . For talking outdoors in fine weather
Cloudy weather . . . For talking in cloudy weather or in the
shade
Automatic. . . . . . . . For adjusting white balance
automatically
Light bulb . . . . . . . . For talking under incandescent light
Color mode set You can switch the color tone of the camera image to be sent
to the other party.
Select a color tone.
Night mode You can lengthen the camera’s exposure time to make the
camera image to be sent clear in a dark place.
ON or OFF
Focus You can set the focus for the outside camera during a
videophone call.
Close-up or Landscape
pThe focus for the inside camera is fixed to “Portrait” (suitable
mode to shoot portraits), so you cannot change the setting.
Chara-den setup See page 72.
Backlight You can select whether to light the display constantly or light
for about 15 seconds after an operation.
Constant light or 15 seconds light
LCD AI See page 113.
Own number You can display your phone number.
Key guide You can display the guide of key operation during a
videophone call.
At videophone
start-up
0
At videophone
start-up
Automatic
At videophone
start-up
Normal
At videophone
start-up
OFF
At videophone
start-up
Landscape
75
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can set whether to switch to Hands-free automatically for when a
videophone call starts.
1mSet./ServiceVideophone
Hands-free w/ V. phoneON or OFF
pSee page 61 for the operation while Hands-free is activated and how to switch to
Hands-free.
You can set the quality of the received image on the display.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneVisual preference
Select an image quality.
p“Prefer motion spd” is effective when there is motion in an image. When there is
little motion, the quality becomes better if you set to “Prefer img qual”.
pIf you operate from the Function menu during a videophone call, the setting is
effective only for the current videophone call.
<Hands-free with Videophone>
Setting Hands-free Videophone
<Visual Preference>
Setting Image Quality for Videophone
Calls
Information
pIf the radio wave conditions weaken during a videophone call, the image may appear
like a mosaic.
You can set an image to be sent to the other party.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneSelect image
Select an item.
On hold . . . . .Sets an image for during answer-hold (On hold).
Holding . . . . .Sets an image for while a call is on hold (Holding).
Substitute image
. . . . . . . . . . . .Sets a substitute image (still image or Chara-den) for when the
camera is off.
Record message
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets an image while recording a record message.
Preparing . . .Sets an image for while playing back an answer message.
Movie memo
. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets an image for while recording a movie memo.
2Select an image.
Pre-installed . . . For sending a pre-installed still image to the other party.
Original . . . . . . . For sending an appropriate message with a still image stored
using “Set display”.
Chara-den . . . . . For sending a Chara-den image selected by “Substitute image”
from the Function menu while a Chara-den image is displayed.
(See page 72)
(Displayed only when “Substitute image” has been selected in
step 1.)
pPress l( ) to play back a demo to check the still image or Chara-den
image.
pTo change the setting of “Original” or “Chara-den”, press i( ), select
“Change setting”, then select a still image or Chara-den image. If you have
selected “Original”, select a still image after selecting a folder.
<Select Image>
Changing Image Displays for Videophone
Calls
Information
pEven if you delete the still image selected from “Original”, that still image is displayed
to the other party. To change, set by “Change setting” or “Set display”.
76
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can set an image to be sent to the other party for making a
videophone call.
1Enter a phone number
or
call up the detailed display of a Phonebook entry, redial
item, dialed call record, or received call record.
2i( )Select imageMy side or Chara-den
pThe setting is completed when you select “My side”.
pTo cancel the setting by call, select “Release”. The setting is completed.
3Select a Chara-den image.
If a videophone call cannot be connected, it will be automatically redialed
as a voice call.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneVoice call auto redial
ON or OFF
Set by Call
<Voice Call Auto Redial>
Redialing as a Voice Call when a
Videophone Call cannot be Connected
Information
pThe charges for calls once switched to voice calls are billed at the rates for the voice
calls.
pVoice Call Auto Redial does not work when a videophone call cannot be connected
such as when the line is busy or the other party’s phone is in Public mode (Drive
mode). However, Voice Call Auto Redial works when you make a videophone call to a
phone that does not support the videophone function.
You can let the other party know that your FOMA terminal can switch
between a voice call and a videophone call.
This function is set to “Indication ON” at the time of contract. When
“Notify switchable mode” is set to “Indication ON”, the caller can switch
between the videophone call and voice call.
pYou cannot operate “Notify switchable mode” when you are out of the service area or
radio waves do not reach, or during a call.
1mSet./ServiceVideophone
Notify switchable modeDo the following operations.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
V.phone while packetSelect an item.
V.phone priority
. . . Shows the Videophone Call Receiving display. When you answer the
videophone call, packet communication is disconnected.
Packet downld priority
. . . Rejects the videophone call and continues the communication.
V.phone answerphone
. . . Connects the incoming videophone call to the Voice Mail Service Center.
Call forwarding
. . . Forwards the incoming videophone call to the forwarding destination.
<Notify Switchable Mode>
Setting for Switching a Voice/Videophone
Call during a Call
Indication ON YESOK
Indication OFF YESOK
Check indication You can check the setting of the function.
OK
<Videophone while Packet>
Selecting Response to Incoming
Videophone Calls during i-mode
77
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can operate your FOMA terminal from an external device such as
your personal computer for making or receiving videophone calls by
connecting them using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(option).
To use this function, you need to install a videophone application
program on a dedicated external device or personal computer, and
further, you need to prepare equipment (commercial item) such as an
earphone/microphone or USB compatible web camera.
pFor operating environments for a videophone application program and how to set or
operate it, refer to the instruction manual or other literature for an external device.
pYou can use “ドコモテレビ電話ソフト (DOCOMO Videophone Software)” as the
application program that supports this function.
You can download “ドコモテレビ電話ソフト (DOCOMO Videophone Software)”
from the DOCOMO website.
Information
pIf you have not signed up for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, “Packet
downld priority” works even if you set to “V.phone answerphone” or “Call forwarding”.
Using Videophone Calls by Interfacing to
External Devices
Information
pYou cannot make a videophone call from the external device during a voice call.
pWhen you have signed up for Call Waiting Service, an incoming videophone call from
an external device during a voice call is recorded as a missed call in Received Calls.
The same applies for an incoming voice call, videophone call, and 64K data
communication during a videophone call from an external device.
You can use the inside camera of the FOMA terminal as a monitoring
camera to observe the remote location from a phone that has the
videophone function based on 3G-324M. While “Remote monitoring” is
set to “ON”, the FOMA terminal automatically starts Remote Monitoring
when it receives a videophone call from a phone number stored as
“Other ID” of “Remote monitoring”.
1mSet./ServiceVideophoneRemote monitoring
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
pTo release Remote Monitoring, select “Set”, then select “OFF”.
2Other ID<Not recorded>
Enter a phone number.
pTo change, select the stored phone number.
pYou can enter up to five phone numbers of up to 26
digits by using numerals, #, :, and +.
pTo return to the setting display for Remote Monitoring, press r from the Other
ID list after storing phone number.
3Ring timeEnter a ring time (seconds).
pYou can enter the time from “003” through “120” in three digits until Remote
Monitoring starts after receiving a videophone call.
pYou cannot set the same ring time for Remote Monitoring, Auto Answer Setting
and Record Message Setting. Set a different time for each.
4SetON
pWhen receiving videophone calls from the phone numbers stored as “Other ID”,
the FOMA terminal automatically answers to start Remote Monitoring after the
ring time elapses.
p“ ” is displayed while this function is set to “ON”.
pYou cannot set to “ON” in Manner Mode.
<Remote Monitoring>
Checking inside of a Room when You are
Out
Other ID list
78
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1Make a videophone call from a stored phone number.
After the ring time set for “Remote monitoring” elapses, Remote Monitoring
automatically starts.
pThe image through the receiving end’s camera appears and the sound comes
out of the speaker.
pYou cannot set Voice-only Remote Monitoring.
pMake a videophone call notifying your caller ID. If the caller ID is not notified,
Remote Monitoring will not start and the call will be handled as an ordinary
incoming videophone call.
2Remote Monitoring ends when the calling end or
receiving end presses h.
Press d or Oo( ) before the FOMA terminal answers a videophone call
automatically. If you press m( ), the videophone call starts sending the
substitute image to the other party.
pWhen a remote monitoring call comes in, “Setting when opened” is disabled.
pIf you press h when a remote monitoring call comes in, the call will be cut and
Remote Monitoring will not start.
Function Menu of the Other ID List
Look-up address You can call up a phone number in the Phonebook, Dialed Calls,
or Received Calls to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook
. . .Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number.
Dialed calls
. . .Highlight a phone number and press Oo( ).
Received calls
. . .Highlight a phone number and press Oo( ).
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
Information
<Delete this> <Delete all>
p
If you delete all phone numbers stored as “Other ID”, “Remote monitoring” is set to “OFF”.
Perform Remote Monitoring
For answering a videophone call without starting Remote
Monitoring at the receiving end
pYou may be imposed punishment according to the law and rule (such as the
nuisance prevention ordinance) if you use the FOMA terminal to give a
remarkable nuisance and misdeed to the public.
Information
pWhen your FOMA terminal is used for the receiving end, an image through the caller’s
camera appears, and sound comes out. (You cannot switch to a substitute image.)
pRemote Monitoring does not start during Manner Mode and Public mode (Drive
mode). However, it starts even during Lock All.
pWhen Remote Monitoring is set to “ON” and a videophone call comes in from the
phone number set as “Other ID”, Remote Monitoring starts after the set ring time,
even when “Ring time”, “Auto answer setting”, or “Record message setting” is set and
regardless of their ring times.
pWhen Remote Monitoring is not performed, it is recorded in Received Calls as a
missed videophone call.
pIf an earphone/microphone (option) is connected when a remote monitoring call
comes in, the ring tone sounds from both the earphone and the speaker, even when
“Headset usage setting” is set to “Headset only”.
pThe ring tone for Remote Monitoring sounds. (You cannot change the ring tone for
Remote Monitoring.)
The ring tone sounds at the volume set for “Videophone” of “Ring volume”, but at
“Level 2” if you have set “Step”, “Level 1” or below. The color is “Gradation”, and its
lighting pattern is “Standard”, regardless of the Incoming Illumination setting.
pYou cannot put incoming remote monitoring calls on answer-hold (On Hold).
pIf you set both Call Forwarding Service and Remote Monitoring, and give priority to
Remote Monitoring, set its ring time shorter than that for Call Forwarding Service.
p
To use Call Forwarding Service for Remote Monitoring, store the phone number of
dialing side as “Other ID” and set a 3G-324M videophone as the forwarding destination.
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you
when shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped
mobile phones.
79
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
This service provides you a pleasurable group calls among multiple
parties (two to five persons including yourself). The participants can
speak by turns by pressing the PushTalk key.
※You are charged a PushTalk communication fee each time you press the PushTalk
key (speak).
pFor details on PushTalk or compatible models, refer to DOCOMO website or “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
■PushTalkPlus※
This service enables you to have a PushTalk call with up to 20 persons including you.
You can use the shared Phonebook on the network, and can check the members for
their status, thus PushTalk becomes more useful.
※You need to subscribe separately.
pFor details such as how to operate, refer to the booklet which is supplied at
subscription.
1Enter the other party’s phone number
p
When you are dialing, a confirmation tone for starting a
PushTalk call sounds for a few seconds, and then the
same ringback tone as the voice (videophone) call
sounds.
pYou can make a group call to multiple persons using
the PushTalk Phonebook. (See page 83 and page 84)
PushTalk
Making a PushTalk Call
2When the other party answers, talk
while pressing p.
When the other party answers, a confirmation tone for
starting communication sounds.
p“ ” blinks during dialing and lights during
communication.
pWhen you get the talker’s right, the talker’s right
obtained tone sounds. The other party hears your voice
only while you are pressing p and having the talker’s
right. When you release p, the talker’s right is
released, and a confirmation tone sounds.
pYou cannot get the talker’s right and an error tone
sounds even if you press p when another member has
it.
pPress l( ) or press i( ) and select “Add member” to add a
member. Go to step 1 on page 81.
3Press h to end the communication after talking.
A tone to notify the disconnection of communication sounds at the other end.
pWhen a call you made is a group call, the PushTalk communication itself
continues even if you press h, and “Disconnected” appears on each member’s
display and a confirmation tone sounds. However, when all the members cannot
communicate due to “Disconnected”, “No PT Func”, etc., the PushTalk
communication itself ends.
Information
pThe talker is charged a communication fee from when he/she presses .p and the
talker’s right obtained tone sounds.
pYou cannot make emergency calls at 110/119/118 from PushTalk.
pThe duration you can talk per talker’s right is limited. The talker’s right release notice
tone sounds before the limited time arrives, and the talker’s right is released. In
addition, the PushTalk communication itself ends when no one gets the talker’s right
in a certain period of time.
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by “Hands-free w/
PushTalk”. (See page 86) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode
regardless of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk”.
pThe FOMA terminal works according to “Setting when closed” if you close it during
communication. You can set also by pressing +i( ) and selecting “Set. when
closed”. (See page 65)
80
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can use the PushTalk Phonebook or Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls to
communicate with multiple members.
While making or receiving a PushTalk group call, the group name and the members in
the group are displayed. Press No to confirm other members. When a call is received
with the other party’s phone number not provided, “User unset” is displayed.
Use Redial/Dialed Calls/Received Calls to make a PushTalk call while the PushTalk
communication continues among other members.
pIf the PushTalk communication has already been finished, your call is dialed as a new
PushTalk call.
pWhether to notify others of your phone number when you make PushTalk calls follows
the setting for “Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID notification” (see page 46). However,
when you set “Notify caller ID” from the Function menu for dialing, or when “Notify”/
“Not notify” is displayed in the detailed Redial/Dialed Call/Received Call display, each
of those settings will work.
pWhen you make a PushTalk call with your phone number notified, your phone
number as well as all members’ phone numbers are notified to all members including
added members. When you make a PushTalk call without notifying your phone
number, “User unset” appears in the caller’s and member’s fields on the displays of all
the members including added members. Your phone number is very important
information, so take the utmost care to notify others of it.
pIf you make a PushTalk call during i-mode communication, the i-mode communication
is disconnected.
pYou cannot use PushTalk by Number B of 2in1.
Making/Receiving a PushTalk group call
Re-participating or participating midway in PushTalk
communication
Information
■Display while dialing/communicating
The phone number of the member who has the talker’s
right is displayed, and the state of the talker’s right is
displayed in color of the round icon at the upper left.
When the name of that member, phone number, and
image are stored in the Phonebook, his/her name and
image are displayed. However, when you cannot receive
a member’s information correctly, “?” is displayed.
During group
communication
Color of the
round icon at the
upper left
State of the talker’s rights
Blue Calling
Green You can get the talker’s right.
Blinking in green You have the talker’s right.
Blinking in yellow Another member has the talker’s right.
Blinking in green
and red
The talker’s right will be released automatically in a few seconds
because it has long been retained (A release notice tone
sounds).
81
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
The corresponding state※ of each member is shown.
※
The corresponding states other than “Calling” and “Connected” are displayed only
for the PushTalk communication among three or more members.
The number of times you have got the talker’s right is the total of the number of “ ”
and the number shown in “ ”. When 999 times are exceeded, the counting is
reset to 0.
Display Corresponding state of members
Calling Calling to the member
Connected Has participated in the PushTalk call.
No PT Func The destination phone does not support PushTalk.
Not avail. The destination phone is out of the service area or turned off.
Busy A voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk communication is in
progress at the member.
i-mode communication is in progress at the member who has
given priority to i-mode by “i-mode arrival act”.
ID Request You made a call without notifying of your caller ID to the member
who has activated “Caller ID request”.
Driving The member has activated Public mode (Drive mode).
PublicMode The member has activated Public mode (Power off), and is out of
the service area or the power is turned off.
Disconnected You have dialed a non-existent number.
The state is other than above: the member does not answer, has
ended the PushTalk call, or does not use a DOCOMO mobile
phone.
You can make a PushTalk call to another member during PushTalk
communication and add that member to the communication.
You can add a person to the members by accessing the PushTalk
Phonebook, Phonebook, or Dialed Calls/Received Calls, or by directly
entering a phone number.
You can add up to five members (including yourself), and can repeat
adding up to that number.
pMembers can be added from the calling end only.
pYou can add even the members who use the PushTalk compatible models which do
not have this function.
pIf you have already made a call to four members, you cannot add a new member
though you can call up a member who has exited the call again.
pThe added members are not stored in Redial/Dialed Calls.
1During PushTalk communicationl( )
Do the following operations.
Adding a Member during a PushTalk Call
View PushTalk PB You can call up a PushTalk Phonebook entry to make a PushTalk
call. (See page 84)
Instead of pressing p, press l( ) to call.
pPress c to switch between the PushTalk Phonebook list and
PushTalk Group list.
View phonebook You can call up a Phonebook entry to make a PushTalk call.
Call up a Phonebook entryHighlight a phone number
and press l( ).
Direct input You can enter a phone number to make a PushTalk call.
Enter a phone numberl( )
View call records You can call up Dialed Calls/Received Calls to make a PushTalk
call.
Dialed calls or Received callsSelect a record
Select a phone numberl( )
Information
pThe caller cannot add members if he/she uses a PushTalk compatible model which
does not have this function.
82
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1When a PushTalk call comes in,
“PushTalk call” is displayed, the ring
tone sounds, and the Call/Charging
indicator flickers.
p“PushTalk group call” is displayed for an incoming
group call.
pTo reject a call, press i( ) during ringing and
select “Call rejection”. You can reject the call also by
pressing h.
2Press p to answer a PushTalk call
Talk while pressing p.
pYou can answer also by pressing d or Oo( )
instead of p.
pWhen you get talker’s right, the talker’s right obtained
tone is played back. The other party hears your voice
only while you are pressing p and having the talker’s
right. When you release p, the talker’s right is released
and a confirmation tone sounds.
pYou cannot get the talker’s right and an error tone
sounds, even if you press p when another member
has it.
p“Setting when opened” and “Record message setting”
become invalid.
pFor a member who uses a PushTalk compatible model which does not have this
function, the members added during PushTalk communication are not shown and a
confirmation tone does not sound.
Receiving a PushTalk Call
Information
3Press h to end the communication after talking.
A tone for confirming the end of communication sounds at the other end.
pWhen a call you received is a group call, the PushTalk communication itself
continues even if you press h, and “Disconnected” appears on each member’s
display and a confirmation tone sounds. However, when all the members cannot
communicate due to “Disconnected”, “No PT Func”, etc., the PushTalk
communication itself ends.
Information
pThe talker is charged a communication fee from when he/she presses .p and the
talker’s right obtained tone sounds.
pThe duration you can talk per talker’s right is limited. The talker’s right release notice
tone sounds before the limited time arrives, and the talker’s right is released. In
addition, the PushTalk communication itself ends when no one gets the talker’s right
in a certain period of time.
pJust after purchase, Hands-free is automatically activated by “Hands-free w/
PushTalk”. (See page 86) However, Hands-free is deactivated during Manner Mode
regardless of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk”.
pThe FOMA terminal works according to “Setting when closed” if you close it during
communication. You can set also by pressing +i( ) and selecting “Set. when
closed”. (See page 65)
pYou cannot use “On hold” or “Holding” for PushTalk.
pWhen you received a PushTalk call from the phone number you set for “Call rejection”
or “Reject unknown”, “Disconnected” is replied. When you have activated “Caller ID
request”, “ID Request” is replied.
pA PushTalk call that comes in during a voice call, a PushTalk call that comes in during
Public mode (Drive mode), and a voice call (when “PushTalk arrival act” is set to other
than “Answer”), a videophone call, data communication, or a PushTalk call that
comes in during PushTalk communication are recorded as missed calls in Received
Calls.
pA PushTalk call that comes in during a videophone call or during data communication
does not work and is not recorded in Received Calls.
pAfter you finish PushTalk communication or when you cannot answer to a PushTalk
call, you can use a received call record to make a PushTalk call and to re-participate
or participate midway in the communication so long as the PushTalk communication
continues among other members. If the PushTalk communication among other
members has already been finished, your call is dialed as a new PushTalk call.
pWhen a caller adds members during PushTalk communication, the added members
are not stored in Received Calls.
83
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
From the items stored in a FOMA terminal’s Phonebook entry, you need
to store a name (reading) and a phone number in the PushTalk
Phonebook. You can store up to 1,000 entries in the PushTalk
Phonebook.
1pm( )
Do the following operations.
pYou can store also by selecting <New>.
pIf you store multiple phone numbers from a Phonebook
entry, the phone number previously stored in the
PushTalk Phonebook is overwritten.
pSee page 86 for how to respond to the PushTalk call during i-mode communication.
pWhen a PushTalk call comes in during Lock All or Omakase Lock, “ ” appears
after the lock is released.
<Store in PushTalk Phonebook>
Adding Entries to PushTalk Phonebook
Information
PushTalk
Phonebook list
View phonebook You can access an entry already stored in the FOMA terminal’s
Phonebook and store it in the PushTalk Phonebook.
Call up a Phonebook entrySelect a phone numberYES
Direct input You can store the entry in the PushTalk Phonebook after storing it
in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
PhoneSelect a storing method.
New . . . Go to step 2 on page 88.
Add . . . Go to step 3 on page 92.
pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook
entry, press l( ) and select the phone number you
want to store in the PushTalk Phonebook. The “★” mark is
added to the phone number that has already been stored in the
PushTalk Phonebook.
You can store PushTalk Phonebook entries in groups. You can store up
to 19 members per group and create up to 10 groups.
1PushTalk Phonebook list
c( )
pPress c( ) to show the PushTalk Phonebook
list.
2Select a groupm( )
Put a check mark for members to be stored
l( )
pYou can store also by
selecting “<Edit group
members>” from the Group
Member list.
View call records You can access a dialed call record or received call record to
store it in the PushTalk Phonebook. You cannot store in the
PushTalk Phonebook from the dialed/received call record of the
party who is not stored in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
Dialed calls or Received callsSelect a record
Select a phone numberYES
Information
pIn the PushTalk Phonebook, you cannot store the Phonebook entries set to B by
Phonebook 2in1 Setting.
Store in Group
PushTalk Group list
Group Member list Group Member
Selection display
Function Menu of the Group Member Selection Display
Members to store You can display only members applied with a check mark.
pPress Oo( ) to store the members to the group.
84
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
You can make a group call to up to four members using the PushTalk
Phonebook or PushTalk group.
1PushTalk Phonebook list
Put a check mark for members you
want to make a call to
p or l( )
pPress c( ) to show the PushTalk Group list.
pWhen you do not check any members, the call is made
to the highlighted member.
1PushTalk Group listSelect a group.
pSelect a group and press p or l( ) to make a
call to all the members in the group.
pPress c( ) to show the PushTalk Phonebook
list.
Search Select a search method.
Reading? . . . See page 93.
Group?. . . . . See page 93.
Select a member.
You can display the Group Member Selection display with the
searched members selected.
Making a Call from PushTalk Phonebook
PushTalk
Phonebook list
Information
pWhen all the members cannot communicate due to “Disconnected”, “No PT Func”,
etc., the PushTalk communication ends.
Make a Call from PushTalk Group
PushTalk Group list
2Put a check mark for members you
want to make a call to
p or l( )
pWhen you do not check any members, the call is made
to the highlighted member.
Group Member list
Information
pWhen five or more members are stored in a group, you cannot make a call to all the
members by selecting the group.
Function Menu of the PushTalk Phonebook List/PushTalk
Group List/Group Member List
Members to call When the PushTalk Phonebook list or Group Member list is
displayed, you can display the checked members only.
pPress p or Oo( ) to make a PushTalk call.
pPress i( ) to select “Notify caller ID” and then you can
select whether to notify your phone number. When “Cancel
prefix” is selected, the FOMA terminal works according to the
setting by “Caller ID notification”.
Search PushTalk
PB
[Phonebook list only]
Select a search method.
Reading? . . . See page 93.
Group? . . . . . See page 93.
Select a member.
You can display the PushTalk Phonebook list with the searched
members selected.
Store in P-Talk PB
[Phonebook list only]
See page 83.
DEL from P-Talk PB
[Phonebook list only]
See page 85.
85
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
Edit group members
[Group list/Member
list]
You can edit the members in the group.
Go to step 2 on page 83.
Edit group name
[Group list only]
Enter a group name.
pYou can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32 half-pitch characters.
DEL from PT group
[Group list only]
See page 85.
DEL group
members
[Member list only]
See page 85.
Sound setting See page 86.
Vibration setting See page 86.
Auto answer set. See page 86.
Ring time setting See page 86.
Hands-Free See page 86.
Set. when closed See page 65.
i-mode arrival act See page 86.
P-Talk arrival act See page 86.
Network connection You can connect to the network to use PushTalkPlus. This is
available only when you have singed up for PushTalkPlus.
(See page 79)
1PushTalk Phonebook listi( )
DEL from P-Talk PBDo the following operations.
1PushTalk Group listi( )DEL from PT group
YES
1Group Member listi( )DEL group members
Do the following operations.
<Delete from PushTalk Phonebook>
Deleting PushTalk Phonebook Entries
Delete this Select a deleting method.
DEL from P-Talk PB
. . . Deletes an entry in the PushTalk Phonebook only. Does not
delete the entry in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
DEL from all PBs
. . . Deletes an entry in both the PushTalk Phonebook and
FOMA terminal’s Phonebook.
YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pThe FOMA terminal’s Phonebook entries are not deleted.
Delete from PushTalk Group
Delete Group Members
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pEven when you delete PushTalk groups or group members, the PushTalk Phonebook
entries and FOMA terminal’s Phonebook entries are not deleted.
86
Voice/Videophone Calls/PushTalk
1mSet./ServicePushTalk
Do the following operations.
Setting for Making/Receiving a PushTalk
Call
Auto answer setting
Select an item.
ON. . . . . Automatically answers immediately after receiving
regardless of “Ring time setting”.
OFF. . . . Does not answer automatically.
Ring time setting Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter two digits from “01” through “60”.
p“Disconnected” is displayed at the other end after the ring time
has elapsed.
Hands-free w/
PushTalk
You can set whether to hear the other party’s voice from the
speaker or from the earpiece for when PushTalk communication
starts.
ON or OFF
pSee page 61 for how the FOMA terminal works while
Hands-free is activated and how to switch to Hands-free during
communication.
PushTalk arrival act Select an item.
Voice mail . . . . . . . Connects an incoming voice call to the
Voice Mail Service Center.
Call forwarding . . . Forwards an incoming voice call to the
forwarding destination.
Call rejection . . . . . Rejects an incoming voice call and does not
answer.
Answer. . . . . . . . . . Shows the Voice Call Receiving display.
Sound setting You can set a pattern for the confirmation tones which sound
during PushTalk communication.
Select a pattern.
Vibration setting You can set whether to be notified by vibration for when you try to
get the talker’s right or when a member’s state changes to
“Connected”.
ON or OFF
You can set whether to show the PushTalk Call Receiving display for
when a PushTalk call comes in during i-mode communication.
1m
i-mode
i-mode settings
Common settings
i-mode arrival act
Select an item.
PushTalk preferred . . . .Ends i-mode communication and brings up the PushTalk
Call Receiving display.
i-mode preferred . . . . . . Rejects receiving a PushTalk call and continues i-mode
communication. The call is not recorded in Received
Calls.
Information
<Auto answer setting>
pWhen you set to “ON”, calls are automatically answered even when the FOMA
terminal is closed regardless of “Setting when closed”.
pWhen you set to “ON”, calls are automatically answered after switching to Hands-free
regardless of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk”. However, the FOMA terminal works following
the setting of “Hands-free w/ PushTalk” if you open the FOMA terminal after you
answer a call with the FOMA terminal closed.
pWhen you set to “ON”, the ring tone, vibrator, Call/Charging indicator, and backlight
do not work. Calls are not automatically answered during Manner Mode.
<PushTalk arrival act>
pIf you press -h for an incoming voice call while “Answer” is set, the Call Receiving
display appears after you finish the PushTalk communication, and then you can
answer the voice call. To continue the PushTalk communication, press +i( )
and select “Call rejection”, “Call forwarding”, or “Voice mail”.
<Sound setting>
pIn the “Simple” mode, some confirmation tones (talking right obtained tone, etc.)
during PushTalk communication become silent.
i-mode Arrival Act
87
Phonebook
Phonebooks Available for FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Storing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . .<Add to Phonebook> 88
Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail Address in Phonebook
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Setting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Group Setting> 92
Making a Call from Phonebooks . . . . . . . <Search Phonebook> 93
Editing Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Edit Phonebook> 97
Deleting Phonebook Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Delete Data> 98
Checking Phonebook Storage Status. . . . <No. of Phonebook> 98
Making a Call with a Few Keys Operation . . . . . <2-touch Dial> 98
Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice . . . . . . . . <Voice Dial> 99
88
Phonebook
You can use two types of Phonebooks, namely the Phonebook in the
FOMA terminal itself, and the Phonebook on the UIM.
Phonebooks Available for FOMA Terminal
FOMA terminal UIM
Number of entries 1,000 entries 50 entries
Contents of Phonebook
Basic item
Name (Reading) ○ ○
Group 19 groups 10 groups
Phone number 4 phone numbers 1 phone number
Phone number icon ○—
Mail address 3 mail addresses 1 mail address
Mail address icon ○—
Address ○—
Location information ○—
Birthday ○—
Memo ○—
Image 100 images —
Memory No. From 000 to 999 —
Setting item
Ring tone ○
—
Vibrator ○
Illumination ○
Picture ○
Chara-den 100 Chara-den
images
Mail ring tone ○
Mail vibrator ○
Mail illumination ○
Answer message ○
Restrictions
Restrict dialing
○—
Call rejection
Call acceptance
Call forwarding
Voice mail
Secret code ○—
Storage in Secret Mode or
Secret Data Only ○—
○: Can be stored. —: Cannot be stored.
pYou can set your UIM into another FOMA terminal and use the UIM Phonebook
entries.
You can store Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal (Phone) or on the
UIM.
1Xo(for at least one second)Phone or UIM
The Edit Name display appears. Go to step 2 and enter a name.
2Do the following
operations.
pYou can press No to switch
between the “Basic item” tab and
“Settings” tab for the FOMA
terminal’s Phonebook.
Contents of Group
Name ○ ○
Ring tone
○—
Vibrator
Illumination
Picture
Chara-den
Mail ring tone
Mail vibrator
Mail illumination
Answer message
<Add to Phonebook>
Storing Phonebook Entries
FOMA terminal UIM
For the FOMA
terminal
For the UIM
89
Phonebook
Name You can enter the name of the person or company in kanji,
hiragana, katakana, alphabetic characters, or numerals.
Enter a name.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 16 full-pitch/32
half-pitch characters. You can enter pictograms and symbols as
well.
pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 10 full-pitch characters/21
half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana
characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 10
characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or
half-pitch characters.
Reading You can enter the reading in half-pitch katakana, alphabetic
characters, or numerals.
Edit the reading.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can enter up to 32 half-pitch
characters. You can enter half-pitch symbols as well.
pFor the UIM, you can enter up to 12 full-pitch characters/25
half-pitch alphanumeric characters. (Half-pitch katakana
characters cannot be entered.) When the entry contains both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters, you can store up to 12
characters from the beginning regardless of full-pitch or
half-pitch characters.
pIf the displayed reading is acceptable, you do not need to edit it.
However, depending on the characters entered for names or
entering method, they are not reflected in the reading.
p
If you enter “
ゎ
(reduced size)” or “
ヮ
(reduced size)” for a name,
“
ワ
(half-pitch, regular size)” (for the FOMA terminal) and “
ワ
(regular size)” (for the UIM) are displayed in the reading field.
Group In the FOMA terminal, 19 groups are available. On the UIM, 10
groups are available.
Select a group.
pWhen the storage is completed with no group selected, the
Phonebook entry is stored in “No setting”.
Phone number
You can store up to four phone numbers per Phonebook entry in the
FOMA terminal. You can set an icon for each phone number to
categorize mobile phone numbers, office phone numbers, and so on.
You can store only one phone number per Phonebook entry on the
UIM.
Enter a phone number.
pEnter from the city code for the phone numbers.
pYou can enter up to 26 digits. However, you can enter up to 20
digits for blue UIMs.
pPress and hold a for at least one second to insert a pause (p)
into the phone number you store. However, you cannot insert
the pause (p) to the beginning of phone number or insert it
consecutively. The pause (p) inserted to the end of phone
number is not stored.
pIf you insert “:” in the middle of a phone number, you cannot
make a call. However, the phone number is recorded in Redial
or Dialed Calls.
pYou can store the phone number which includes “#” such as
that for information service as well.
Select an icon.
pIf you have stored a phone number in the FOMA terminal,
another “ <Phone number>” will appear in the
Add-to-Phonebook display. To store another phone number,
select “ <Phone number>”.
Mail address You can store up to three mail addresses per Phonebook entry in
the FOMA terminal. You can set an icon for each mail address to
categorize mobile phone addresses, home addresses, and so on.
You can store only one mail address per Phonebook entry on the
UIM.
Enter a mail address.
pThe mail address can consist of up to 50 half-pitch alphabets,
numerals or symbol characters.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”,
store the phone number only.
pFor the FOMA terminal, you can set a secret code as well. (See
page 97)
Select an icon.
p
If you have stored a mail address in the FOMA terminal, another
“ <Mail address>” will appear in the Add-to-Phonebook display.
To store another mail address, select “ <Mail address>”.
90
Phonebook
Address Enter a ZIP codeEnter a postal address.
pYou can enter up to 7 digits for the zip code.
pYou can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100 half-pitch characters for the
postal address. Further, you can enter pictograms as well.
pYou cannot enter “〒” or “-” (hyphen) in the zip code.
Location
information
Select an item.
By position loc.
. . .Measures the current location (see page 322) and store the
location information. After checking the location information,
press Oo( ).
From loc. history
. . .Select a piece of location information from Location History
(see page 326) and store it.
Attach from image
. . .Stores the location information from an image. Select a
folder, then the image.
From own number
. . .Stores the location information from “Own number”. Enter
your Terminal Security Code and press Oo( ).
pTo delete the stored location information, select “Delete location
info”.
Birthday Enter a birthday.
pYou can enter the birthday from January 1, 1800 through
December 31, 2099.
pYou can check the birthday from Schedule. (See page 398)
Memo Enter a memo.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Further, you can enter pictograms as well.
Image The stored still image is displayed when you call up the
Phonebook entry.
Select an item.
Select image . . . You can store a still image in Data Box.
Shoot image . . . You can store the shot still image.
Perform step 2 through step 3 on page 230.
pTo release the stored still image, select “Release image”.
pThe size of a still image you can store is Stand-by (480 x 854) or
smaller and up to 500 Kbytes in JPEG format or GIF format.
pIf you store a still image larger than 72 x 54 dots, it is displayed
shrunk on the detailed Phonebook display.
pIf you store a still image larger than 240 x 180 dots, it is
displayed shrunk on the Call Receiving display.
pWhen “Disp. PH-book image” is set to “ON”, the stored still
image is displayed for an incoming call. However, when another
image is stored for “Picture”, that image is preferentially
displayed for the incoming call.
Memory No. Enter a memory number.
pEnter a three-digit number of “000” through “999”.
pThe lowest empty memory number “010” through “999” is
entered in advance.
If “010” through “999” are all occupied, the lowest empty
memory number from “000” through “009” is entered.
Ring tone You can set a ring tone for when a voice call or videophone call
comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone
Go to step 2 on page 102.
pTo release the stored ring tone, select “Release ring tone”.
Vibrator You can set a vibration pattern for when a voice call or
videophone call comes in from the person stored in the
Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern.
pTo release the stored vibrator, select “Release vibrator”.
91
Phonebook
Illumination You can set an illumination pattern for when a voice call or
videophone call comes in from the person stored in the
Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect an item.
pTo release the stored illumination, select “Release illumination”.
Picture You can set an image to be displayed for when a call comes in
from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select pictureSelect a type of imageSelect a folder
Select an image.
pTo release the stored image, select “Release picture”.
Chara-den The stored Chara-den image is displayed as a substitute image
for videophone calls with the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select Chara-denSelect a Chara-den image.
pTo release the stored Chara-den image, select “Release
Chara-den”.
Mail ring tone You can set a ring tone for when a mail message comes in from
the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select ring tone
Go to step 2 on page 102.
pTo release the stored mail ring tone, select “Release ring tone”.
Mail vibrator You can set a vibration pattern for when a mail message comes
in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select vibratorSelect a vibration pattern.
pTo release the stored mail vibrator, select “Release vibrator”.
Mail illumination You can set an illumination pattern for when a mail message
comes in from the person stored in the Phonebook.
Select illuminationSelect an item.
pTo release the stored mail illumination, select “Release
illumination”.
3Press l( ).
pIf you have not entered any name, “ ” is not displayed and you cannot
store the entry.
When the low battery alarm sounds
The Phonebook entry you are editing is saved automatically. The confirmation display
appears asking whether to resume editing when you continue editing after charging the
battery or when you operate step 1 on page 88 and select the storage location for the
interrupted Phonebook entry after changing to a charged battery.
Recall. . . . You can resume editing the Phonebook entry.
New . . . . . You can edit a new Phonebook entry. In this case, the interrupted data is
retained. If you execute “Add to phonebook” after storing the new Phonebook
entry, the confirmation display appears again.
pOnly the most recently interrupted entry is retained.
pIf you resume editing the data but then cancel editing without storing it, that data will be
abandoned. Once you recall the data, be sure to store it.
If you receive a call or mail
You can respond it leaving the edited data as it is, thanks to the Multitask function.
To return to the Phonebook Edit display, press and hold x for at least one second to
switch the menu. You can return to the Phonebook Edit display also by ending the call or
mail function.
Answer
message
You can set an answer message for Record Message by
Phonebook entry.
Select answer messageSelect an answer message.
pTo release the stored answer message, select “Release answer
message”.
Phonebook entries while editing
92
Phonebook
You can store the displayed or selected phone number, mail address,
and still image in the FOMA terminal’s or UIM’s Phonebook.
1Call up/Select an item to be storedi( )
Add to phonebook
pWhen you operate from the detailed mail display, select “Store” from the Function
menu and then select “Add to phonebook”.
pTo store the address of the sender (or of another recipient of simultaneous mail)
of the received mail or the destination address of the sent mail into the
Phonebook, select “Store” from the Function menu and then select “Store
address”. If the addresses of the sender and another recipient of simultaneous
mail are found or the multiple destination addresses are found, select a mail
address or phone number to be stored.
pTo store a still image in the Phonebook, select “Set display” from the Function
menu and then select “Phonebook”.
pWhen “Add to phonebook” is displayed on the Scanned Code Result display for
Bar Code Reader, select “Add to phonebook”; then other information in the
scanned code besides the phone number or mail address is entered into each
field.
Storing Displayed Phone Number/Mail
Address in Phonebook
Operation Storable items
While a phone number is entered Phone number
While a redial item, dialed call record, or received call
record is displayed Phone number
While Sent Address or Received Address is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While a site or screen memo is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While the text of Message R/F or mail is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While the data scanned by Bar Code Reader is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While a ToruCa file is displayed Phone number/Mail address
While your current location is displayed Location information
While the location history is displayed Location information/
Phone number/Mail address
While a registered LCS client is displayed Name/Phone number
While the Still Image list or a still image is displayed Still image
2Phone or UIMSelect a storing method.
New . . . Go to step 2 on page 88.
Add . . . Adds data to the existing Phonebook entry. When storing data on the
UIM, “Overwrite” is displayed.
3Select a search methodSearch the Phonebook
Select a Phonebook entry to be storedOo( )
The phone number or mail address is entered automatically.
pSee step 2 on page 88 to edit other items in the Phonebook entry.
pWhen you store into the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, you can remain the
original entry and store a new entry into a different location by changing the
memory number.
4l( )YES
pIf you store the entry in the UIM Phonebook, select “Overwrite” to overwrite the
original entry, or select “Add” to store it as a new entry.
You can utilize the Phonebook by sorting the entries by group such as
“Company” or “Friend”, or by your interest such as “Baseball” or
“Ceramic art”. You can set a ring tone, vibration pattern, or illumination
by group.
1mPhonebookGroup setting
pThe groups on the UIM are indicated by “ ”.
pTo reset the group names and respective settings by group, which have already
been stored, press i( ), select “Reset group”, and then select “YES”.
Information
pThe Phonebook entry does not store the information of “Notify caller ID” included in
Redial/Dialed Calls. To set Caller ID Notification, add “186”/“184” to the phone
number and store it.
pCharacters that cannot be stored may be replaced by spaces or deleted, and then
stored.
pYou may not be able to store the information from some sites into the Phonebook.
<Group Setting>
Setting Groups
93
Phonebook
2Highlight a group and press l( )
Select an item to be setSet the contents.
pWhen you select “ Group name”, enter a group name. You can store up to 10
full-pitch/21 half-pitch characters. However, you can store only up to 10
characters (regardless of full-pitch or half-pitch characters) when you enter both
full-pitch and half-pitch characters for a UIM group name.
pSee step 2 on page 88 for the operations of the other items. However, you cannot
set for groups on the UIM.
pSelect a stored group, or press i( ) and select “Check setting” to check
its settings. However, you cannot check the settings of the groups on the UIM.
3Press l( ).
You can retrieve stored Phonebook entries by eight search methods.
1XoDo the following operations.
pThe display for the same search method as the
previous one appears once you have carried out a
search. Press r to show the Search Phonebook
display.
pYou can show the Search Phonebook display also by
mPhonebookSearch phonebook.
<Search Phonebook>
Making a Call from Phonebooks
Search Phonebook
display
All? You can show all Phonebook entries.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 94)
Reading? You can enter the reading of the other party’s name from the first
character and search. You do not need to enter the full reading.
Enter a part of the readingBo
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 94)
2Select an entryd or Oo( )
pWhen the entry contains multiple phone numbers, or when you searched by “Mail
address?”, press Mo from the detailed display to select a phone number.
pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l( ) or PushTalk call by
pressing p.
Group? You can show Phonebook entries stored in a specified group.
Select a group.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 94)
pIf you press i( ) on the Group list, the Function menu
for “Group setting” is displayed.
Memory No.?
[FOMA terminal only]
You can search for the entry by the memory number assigned
when it was stored in the Phonebook.
Enter the memory number.
pEnter from “000” through “999” in three digits.
p
The tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook list. (See page 94)
pFrom the Stand-by display, you can press d and then press
Bo to display the Memory No. Dial display. From there you can
make a voice call by entering the memory number of the phone
number.
Name? You can enter the other party’s name from the first character and
search. You do not need to enter the full name.
Enter a part of the nameBo
Phone number? You can enter a part of the other party’s phone number and
search. You can search for the entry even from the middle of
phone number.
Enter a part of the phone numberBo
pYou can display the Phonebook list also by entering a part of
the phone number from the Stand-by display or the “Talking”
display, and pressing Bo.
Mail address?
You can enter a part of the other party’s mail address and search.
You can search for the entry even from the middle of mail address.
Enter a part of the mail addressBo
2-touch dial?
[FOMA terminal only]
You can show the list of Phonebook entries in memory number
000 through 009.
pPhonebook entries not yet stored or being set with secret are
displayed as ＜−−−＞.
94
Phonebook
The Phonebook entries are searched in the order of readings you entered for storing, as
follows:
“Space at the beginning of the reading”
→
“Japanese syllabary (
ア、イ、ウ、エ、オ、... ン
)”
→
“Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z)”
→
“Numerals (0 through 9)”
→
“Symbols”
→
“No reading”.
For “All?” and “Reading?”, searching is done in the following order:
“Japanese syllabary (
ア、イ、ウ、エ、オ、... ン
)”
→
“Alphabet (A, a, B, b, ...Z, z)”
→
“Space
at the beginning of the reading”
→
“Numerals (0 through 9)”
→
“Symbols”
→
“No reading”.
※The Memory No. Search searches in the order of the memory numbers.
When you search from “All?”, “Reading?”, “Group?”, or
“Memory No.?”, the tabs appear on the top of the Phonebook
list. With “All?” and “Reading?”, the entries are sorted by every
column of reading, with “Memory No.?” by every 100 of the
memory number, and with “Group?” by every group.
Press No to display the Phonebook entries in the tab at left or
right. However, when there are 12 or more Phonebook entries
in a tab, pressing m( ), c( ), or </> brings up the previous or next
page.
pAfter you search by “Reading?”, you can move the cursor to the “ア” through “ワ”, “英”,
and “他” tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press
the same numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to display the “ナ” tab. Each time you press 5, the cursor
moves to the top of “ニ” “ヌ” and so on.
pAfter you search by “Group?”, you can move the cursor to the top of each column in the
tab by pressing each numeric key from the list. When you successively press the same
numeric key, you can move the cursor within the same column.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the top of the “ナ” column. Each time you
press 5, the cursor moves to the top of “ニ” “ヌ” and so on.
Information
pIn a search method other than “Group?” and “2-touch dial?”, enter nothing and press
*Bo; then you can search all through the Phonebook.
p
When no Phonebook entry is found that matches the condition you entered by
“Reading?” or “Memory No.?”, the entry that is the closest to the condition is displayed.
Search order
About Phonebook List
Phonebook list
pAfter you search by “Memory No.?”, you can move the cursor to the “000~” to “900~”
tab by pressing each numeric key from the list.
<Example>Press 5 to move the cursor to the “500~” tab.
pYou can make a voice call to the phone number stored for the name highlighted on the
Phonebook list, by pressing d. Also, press l( ) to make a videophone call
and press p to make a PushTalk call. When multiple phone numbers are stored for
the name, the one stored first will be dialed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored on the UIM, “ ” is displayed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored with i-concier information, “ ” is displayed.
p“ ” appears for the Phonebook entries set to A by Phonebook 2in1 Setting, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook entries set to B, and “ ” appears for the Phonebook
entries set to common data. (Only in Dual Mode)
pWhen you refer to the Phonebook from a GPS compatible i-αppli program, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook entries which contain the location information.
Use No to highlight a tab, then the detailed contents are displayed.
pFor the Phonebook entry stored
on the UIM, “ ” is displayed on
the memory number field.
pWhen Notify Caller ID is set to
“Notify caller”, “ ” appears,
and when set to “Don’t notify”,
“ ” appears.
pUnder the still image, “ ”
appears for the Phonebook
entries set to A by Phonebook
2in1 Setting, “ ” appears for
the Phonebook entries set to B,
and “ ” appears for the
Phonebook entries set to
common data. (Only in Dual
Mode)
pWhen a Phonebook entry contains the setting for Multi Number or Chaku-moji, the set
contents are displayed in the Item list/Phone Number display.
Item list
The first stored phone number, mail address, postal address, birthday, and memo are
displayed. When i-concier information is stored, a postal address, URL, and memo
obtained from i-concier are displayed instead of a postal address, birthday, and memo.
Phone number
About the detailed display
Detailed Phonebook
display (Item list)
Group
Reading
Name
Memory No.
Still image
Notify caller ID
95
Phonebook
Mail address
pWhen you select the item, you can compose an i-mode mail message with that mail
address entered into the address field.
Personal information
pWhen you select a postal address, the GPS compatible i-αppli program set by “Select
map” of “GPS settings” starts to show the map. When you highlight a postal address
and press l( ), the full display appears.
pWhen you select the location information, the Function menu of the location information
appears. (See page 323)
pWhen you select a memo or still image, the full display appears.
i-concier information
pWhen you select a postal address, the GPS compatible i-αppli program set by “Select
map” of “GPS settings” starts to show the map. When you highlight a postal address
and press l( ), the full display appears.
pYou can display a site or Internet website when you select a URL, select “i-mode
Browser” or “Full Browser”, and then select “YES”. When you highlight a URL and
press l( ), the full display appears.
pWhen you select a memo, the full display appears.
pIf you have not subscribed to i-concier, the i-concier information tab does not appear.
Settings
pWhen you select each item, a demo is played back.
Press Oo( ) or r to end the demo.
Function Menu of the Phonebook List
New You can store a new Phonebook entry.
Go to step 1 on page 88.
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the
Phonebook entry attached.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
Search location You can access the site of “イマドコかんたんサーチ
(imadoco kantan search)”.
YES
Move/copy
Copy to microSD See page 362.
Connect to Center See page 137.
Sort You can change the display order.
Select a type of order.
pYou can sort Phonebook entries in reverse order by
selecting “Ascending” or “Descending”.
pYou cannot sort on the Phonebook list with tabs
displayed.
Change font size You can switch font sizes for the Phonebook and on the
displays within “Phonebook settings”, etc.
(See “Phonebook” on page 118)
Send Ir/ trans/BT
Send Ir data
Send phonebook See page 377.
Send all phonebook See page 378.
transmission
Send phonebook See page 379.
Send all phonebook See page 379.
Send to Bluetooth
Send phonebook You can send the Phonebook entry using Bluetooth
communication.
Select a Bluetooth device to be sentYES
pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to search.
pSee page 415 for registering and connecting Bluetooth
devices.
Send all phonebook You can send all Phonebook entries using Bluetooth
communication.
Select a Bluetooth device to be sent
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pWhen “Session number setting” of “Bluetooth settings” is
set to “ON”, enter your Terminal Security Code and then
a session number.
pWhen no Bluetooth devices are registered, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to search.
pSee page 415 for registering and connecting Bluetooth
devices.
96
Phonebook
Delete data See page 98.
Set secret/Release secret You can activate/deactivate Secret for the Phonebook
entry.
pIf you select “Set secret” in ordinary mode (not in “Secret
mode” or “Secret data only”), enter your Terminal
Security Code.
Information
<Send to Bluetooth>
pYou cannot send Phonebook entries from the UIM.
pSee page 412 for the Bluetooth function.
Function Menu of the Detailed Phonebook Display
Notify caller ID See page 56.
Prefix numbers See page 60.
Int’l dial assist See page 59.
Select image See page 76.
2in1 dial You can select a phone number to notify the other party in
Dual Mode of 2in1. (See page 444)
Multi number You can select a phone number to be notified to the other
party. (See page 441)
Chaku-moji See page 55.
Search location See page 95.
Edit data
Edit phonebook Go to step 1 on page 97.
Sort phone number/
Sort mail address
Select a phone number or mail address
Use Bo to change the orderOo( )
pFrom the detailed display, press No to highlight an
item to be sorted. The items you can select from the
Function menu differ depending on the highlighted
item.
pTo change the order in succession, repeat the above
steps.
l( )
Store in P-Talk PB You can store the phone number in the PushTalk
Phonebook.
Move/copy
Copy to UIM See page 410.
Copy to microSD See page 362.
Copy to phone See page 410.
Connect to Center See page 137.
Copy item
Copy name You can copy the name of Phonebook entry.
Copy phone number/
Copy mail add./
Copy address/
Copy location info/
Copy birthday/
Copy memo/Copy URL
You can copy each item of Phonebook entry.
pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight an item
to be copied. The items can be selected in the Function
menu differ depending on the highlighted item.
Mail
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the
mail address.
Go to step 3 on page 142.
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the
Phonebook entry attached.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message to send to the phone
number set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 185.
Change font size You can switch the font size for the Phonebook and on the
displays within “Phonebook settings”, etc.
(See “Phonebook” on page 118)
Restrictions See page 134.
97
Phonebook
Secret code You need to add the recipient’s secret code when sending
i-mode mail to anyone who has registered a secret code.
Once you set the secret code for the mail address in the
Phonebook entry, it will be added automatically whenever
you send mail to that address.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSet code
pFrom the detailed display, press Mo to highlight a phone
number or mail address to be set with a secret code.
pTo check the secret code, select “Check code”.
pTo release the secret code, select “Release code”.
Enter a four-digit secret codeYES
pIn the Function menu, “Secret code” is indicated by “★”,
after it is set.
pEnter a four-digit number for secret code. You cannot set
“0000”.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
Send Ir/ trans/BT
Send Ir data
Send phonebook See page 377.
Send all phonebook See page 378.
transmission
Send phonebook See page 379.
Send all phonebook See page 379.
Send to Bluetooth
Send phonebook See page 95.
Send all phonebook See page 95.
1Detailed Phonebook displaym( )
Select an item to be editedEdit the contents.
pSee step 2 on page 88 for how to edit the Phonebook entry.
pEven if you edit the Phonebook entry in the FOMA terminal (Phone), you can
remain the original contents in the original location and store the edited contents
in the different location by changing the memory number.
2l( )YES
pIf you edited the UIM Phonebook entry, select “Overwrite” to overwrite the original
contents, or “Add” to save the contents as a new entry.
Delete data See page 98.
Set secret/Release secret See page 96.
Information
<Secret code>
pYou cannot set secret codes for UIM Phonebook entries.
pThe secret code can be added only when the recipient’s mail address is in the form of
“phone number” or “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”. It cannot be added to any other
form of mail address.
pIf you have stored the mail address as “phone number＋secret code@docomo.ne.jp”,
you cannot reply to mail messages from the party of that mail address. After changing
the mail address to “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, set the secret code.
<Edit Phonebook>
Editing Phonebook Entries
98
Phonebook
1Detailed Phonebook displayi( )Delete data
Do the following operations.
1Phonebook listi( )Delete data
Do the following operations.
<Delete Data>
Deleting Phonebook Entries
Delete from the Detailed Phonebook Display
Phone number/
This item
YES
pHighlight an item to be deleted by pressing Mo from the
detailed display.
pYou cannot delete information obtained by i-concier.
This phonebook YES
Delete from the Phonebook List
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for Phonebook entries to be deleted
l( )YES
pYou can check or uncheck entries all at once by pressing
i( ) and selecting “Select all in tab/Select all/Release
all in tab/Release all”.
pPerform the same operation as that of “Delete all” when you
have selected all Phonebook entries including secret ones.
Delete all in tab You can delete all the Phonebook entries for the displayed tab.
YES
Delete all You can delete all Phonebook entries including secret entries.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
Information
pWhen you delete a Phonebook entry that is stored in the PushTalk Phonebook, the
PushTalk Phonebook entry is also deleted.
1mPhonebookNo. of phonebook
Phone
Phonebook . . .The number of Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA terminal
(Phone)
Secret . . . . . . .The number of Phonebook entries stored as secret data
(Displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only)
Image. . . . . . . .The number of Phonebook entries in which still images are stored
Chara-den . . . .The number of Phonebook entries in which Chara-den images are
stored
PushTalk . . . . .The number of Phonebook entries stored in the PushTalk
Phonebook
Voice dial. . . . .The number of Phonebook entries set as voice dial entries
Rest . . . . . . . . . : The number of phone numbers that can still be stored
: The number of mail addresses that can still be stored
UIM
Phonebook . . .The number of Phonebook entries stored on the UIM
When the entry is stored in memory number “000” through “009” in the
FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, you can dial the phone number just by
pressing the lowest one digit of memory number and d.
1Numeric key (0 to 9)d or Oo( )
pYou can make a videophone call by pressing l( ) or a PushTalk call by
pressing p.
<No. of Phonebook>
Checking Phonebook Storage Status
Information
pWhen you use 2in1, the number of Phonebook entries for the mode in use is
displayed. (See page 445)
<2-touch Dial>
Making a Call with a Few Keys Operation
99
Phonebook
Just vocalize the other party’s voice dial name and then the Phonebook
entry is accessed for making a call.
You can store up to 100 voice dial entries selecting from among the
Phonebook entries stored in the FOMA terminal (Phone).
1mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Voice dial setting<New>
pYou can edit the stored voice dial name by pressing l( ). Go to step 3.
pTo delete the stored voice dial entry, press i( ) and select “Delete” or
“Delete all” and then select “YES”.
2Search the PhonebookSelect a Phonebook entry.
The display for search method you used last time appears.
pThe “★” mark is added to the Phonebook entry stored in the Voice Dial list.
3Enter a voice dial name.
pYou can enter up to 22 half-pitch katakana characters.
pThe reading (katakana only) of the Phonebook entry is displayed as the voice dial
name. Correct the name to the easy-to-identify words.
Information
pWhen the Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, the first phone number
will be dialed.
pWhen you set “Restrict dialing” to a Phonebook entry of memory number 000 through
009, set it to the first phone number in the Phonebook entry.
pWhen you store a Phonebook entry of memory number from 000 through 009 as
secret data, make a call to that entry in Secret Mode or Secret Data Only.
<Voice Dial>
Accessing Phonebook Entries by Voice
+m-2-6
Voice Dial Setting
By your voice, you can access the Phonebook entry you set in the Voice
Dial list. When “Read aloud settings” is set to “ON” and “Voice dial” is
checked, the operation is guided by the voice guidance.
1d(for at least one second)
As soon as the voice recognition start tone sounds,
vocalize the voice dial name.
Start vocalizing within four seconds after the voice recognition start tone sounds.
Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed.
pYou cannot change the volume of the voice recognition start tone. The voice
recognition start tone does not sound during Manner Mode.
pIf you say the word “ボイス設定 (Boisusettei)”, the display of “Voice settings”
appears. (See page 100)
pWhen “Auto voice dial” is set to “ON”, the display for Auto Voice Dial appears
after the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry. Then about two seconds later,
the FOMA terminal automatically dials out.
2
Highlight a detected result and press
d
or
Oo
( ).
The first phone number in the selected Phonebook entry is dialed.
pYou can show the detailed Phonebook display by pressing l( ).
Highlight a phone number and press d or Oo( ) to make a voice call.
Also, you can make a videophone call by pressing l( ) or a PushTalk
call by pressing p.
Information
pThe voice dial name set by this function is effective only for calling up a voice dial
entry. For the voice guidance function, the reading (name) stored in the Phonebook is
read aloud.
pWhen multiple similar voice dial names are stored or when the voice dial name is
short, the recognition rate lowers and a wrong voice dial entry (Phonebook entry)
might be accessed. In this case, rename the existing voice dial name and store it.
pYou cannot store “ボイスセッテイ (Boisusettei)” as a voice dial name.
Dial from Phonebook by Voice
100
Phonebook
You need to set “Voice headset dial” to “ON” and open the FOMA
terminal in advance.
1Press and hold the switch of the earphone/microphone
(option) for at least one second.
2Perform the operations of “Dial from Phonebook by
Voice” on page 99.
pYou can make a call also by pressing the switch of the earphone/microphone
instead of pressing d or Oo.
You need to set “Voice headset dial” to “ON” in advance, and connect
with the Bluetooth device using the Headset service or Hands-free
service.
pFor using the Hands-free service, the Bluetooth device needs to support a voice
recognition function.
1Press the switch of the Bluetooth device.
2Access a voice dial entry following the voice guidance.
Once the voice is recognized as a voice dial entry, the detected result is displayed.
pThe FOMA terminal automatically dials out about two seconds after the voice
guidance informing of dialing finishes.
Information
pWhen you vocalize, keep your mouth away from the microphone about 10 cm. If your
voice is too distant, it may be difficult to recognize your voice.
pPronounce the voice dial name as clearly as possible.
pBefore and after voice production, avoid making the sounds unrelated to the voice dial
name such as clearing your throat, clicking your tongue, noisy breathing or other
noise.
pVocalize in quiet, noise-free locations.
pWhile vocalizing, do not put your fingers over the microphone, or press or brush the
keys.
To access a voice dial entry using an earphone/microphone
To access a voice dial entry using a Bluetooth device
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsVoice settings
Do the following operations.
Voice Settings
Auto voice dial You can automatically make a call to the phone number
accessed by voice.
ON or OFF
Voice headset dial You can access the voice dial entries by using an earphone/
microphone (option) or Wireless Earphone Set 02 (option).
ON or OFF
Read aloud settings See page 392.
Read aloud volume See page 393.
Read aloud speed See page 393.
Read aloud output See page 393.
Read aloud valid
set.
See page 393.
101
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Sound Settings
Changing Ring Tone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Select Ring Tone> 102
Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or Melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Melody Effect> 103
Informing You of an Incoming Call by Vibration . . .<Vibrator> 104
Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone . . . <Voice Announce> 104
Changing Ringback Tone . . . . . . . . . . . <Melody Call Setting> 104
Setting Keypad Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Keypad Sound> 105
Setting Speed Selector Sound . . . . <Speed Selector Sound> 105
Setting Charging-start/end Tones. . . . . . . . . <Charge Sound> 105
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly Disconnecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Quality Alarm> 105
Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail/Message Ring Time> 106
Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Headset Usage Setting> 106
Muting Tones from FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . <Manner Mode> 106
Selecting Manner Mode Type . . . . . . . . . .<Manner Mode Set> 107
Screen/Light Settings
Changing Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Display Setting> 109
Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook while Ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Display Phonebook Image> 111
Displaying Arrival Information by Opening FOMA Terminal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Received Mail/Call at Open> 111
Setting Lights for Display and Keypad . . . . . . . . . . <Backlight> 112
Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically . . . . . . . . .<LCD AI> 113
Making Display Hard to See from People Around
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <View Blind> 113
Setting Quality of Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Image Quality> 113
Setting Color Combination for Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Color Theme Setting> 113
Setting Displays for Main Menu. . . . . . . . . <Menu Icon Setting> 114
Using Kisekae Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Kisekae Tool> 114
Setting Machi-chara Image . . . . . . . . . . . .<Set to Machi-chara> 115
Setting Color and Others of Call/Charging Indicator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Illumination> 115
Changing Character Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Font> 117
Changing Font Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Font Size Setting> 118
Setting Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
102
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set a ring tone for each incoming type.
If you select an i-motion file, the i-motion file is played back with sound
for incoming calls/messages. (Chaku-motion)
pThe ring tone is the PCM sound source, chord of 128 tones, and ADPCM compliant.
pSee “Add to Phonebook” on page 88 for setting a ring tone by Phonebook entry, and
see “Group Setting” on page 92 for setting it by group.
■Ring Tone List (pre-installed)
+m-1-3
<Select Ring Tone>
Changing Ring Tone
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
Pattern 1 ー ー
Pattern 2 ー ー
Pattern 3 ー ー
Pattern 4 ー ー
Pattern 5 ー ー
Minimal Techno※Minimal Techno ー
Gentle Morning Gentle Morning ー
HEIGH HO // SNOW
WHI
HEIGH HO // SNOW
WHITE AND THE
SEVEN DWARFS /INST
Composer:
CHURCHILL FRANK E
SONATINE※SONATINE
Composer:
WOLFGANG AMADEUS
MOZART
PARADE OF THE
WOODEN※
PARADE OF THE
WOODEN SOLDIERS
Composer:
JESSEL LEON
SUMMERTIME SUMMERTIME Composer:
GERSHWIN GEORGE
SOMEDAY MY PRINCE
WI
SOMEDAY MY PRINCE
WILL COME
Composer:
CHURCHILL FRANK E
PEER GYNT SUITE NR
1
PEER GYNT SUITE NR
1 OP 46/
MORGENSTEMNING
Composer:
GRIEG EDVARD HAGERUP
Old Type Phone ー ー
Steelpan ー ー
KIRAKIRA ー ー
Minimal※ー ー
Magical Stick※ー ー
Smart Beep ー ー
※3D sound is supported. See page 103 for 3D sound.
(Note) The names of lyricists and composers are described conforming to the JASRAC
website.
Whole part of long titles may not be displayed due to restriction of the display
size.
■i-motion (pre-installed)
※© 2009 GROOVISIONS
1mSet./ServiceSoundSelect ring tone
Select an incoming type.
pSelect an item and press l( ) to check the contents actually played
back or displayed.
2Select ring toneSelect a type of ring tone.
Melody . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a melody as a ring tone.
MUSIC. . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a Chaku-uta Full® music file as a ring tone.
imotion . . . . . . . . . Sets an i-motion file as a ring tone. (Chaku-motion/
Chaku-uta®)
Voice announce . . . Sets the sound recorded by “Voice announce” as a ring
tone. The setting is completed.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sets a ring tone off. The setting is completed.
3Select a folderSelect a ring tone.
pIf you select “MUSIC” in step 2, select “Fullsong ring tone” or “Point ring tone”.
(See page 280)
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Ukulele ー ー
Waterdrop ー ー
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
Display Title Name of Lyricist/Composer
Animals※Animals ー
103
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Information
pYou can set the Call Receiving display by selecting “Phone” or “Videophone”, and
then by selecting “Select calling disp.”. Go to step 2 on page 110.
pYou can set the Mail Receiving display by selecting “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR” or
“MessageF”, and then by selecting “Select receiving disp.”. Go to step 2 of “Set
Stand-by Display” on page 109.
pThe priority order of ring tones is as follows: “Read aloud settings” → “Setting for
Phonebook entry” → “Group setting” → “Select ring tone” (“Select ring tone” of “Multi
number” when a call comes in to the additional number, and “Ring tone set. for No. B”
of “2in1 setting” when a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1).
pThe ring tone or images set at purchase might be played back or displayed for
incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and
“Display setting”.
pSee “imotion info” to check whether the i-motion file can be set for a ring tone.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a mail ring tone, you can
press -r or others to stop the ring tone.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back taking priority over “Display setting”. However, if you
set a voice-only i-motion file for the ring tone, the image set by “Display setting” is
displayed.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for “Select calling disp.”, the
i-motion file is played back taking priority over this function for incoming calls.
However, if you set an i-motion file containing only video for “Select calling disp.”, the
ring tone selected for this function is played back for incoming calls.
pYou cannot set an i-motion file which contains video for “PushTalk” or “i-concier”.
pWhen different types of mail — i-mode mail, SMS messages, chat mail, or Messages
R/F — are received at the same time, the priority order of ring tone as follows: “Chat
mail” → “i-mode mail/SMS” → “MessageR” → “MessageF”. If you receive the same
type of mail simultaneously, the ring tone corresponding to the mail you have received
last works.
pFor melodies downloaded, attached to mail, or prohibited from being attached to mail
or being output from the FOMA terminal, a playing part may be specified in advance.
When a play-part-specified melody is set for a ring tone, only the specified part is
played back.
You can set whether to add stereophonic sound effects to the playback
tone of i-motion files, melodies, ring tones, and effect tones.
1mSet./ServiceSoundMelody effect
Do the following operations.
3D Sound is a function that creates stereophonic sound and spatially-moving sound
through the use of the Stereo Earphone Set. 3D Sound compatible i-αppli games, ring
tones, and i-motion files enable you to enjoy live-like feeling of sounds.
+m-6-4
<Melody Effect>
Setting Sound Effects of Ring Tone or
Melody
Stereo&3DSound You can play back 3-dimensional sound from the Stereo
Earphone Set (option). This is effective for the i-αppli effect tones
or ring tones.
ON or OFF
Position to play You can set the play start position of the melody that has been set
for the ring tone or alarm tone.
Select an item.
Play all. . . . . . . . Plays back from the beginning of the melody.
Play portion . . . Plays back from the start position set for the
melody.
3D Sound
Information
pStereognostic sense might differ depending on the person. If you feel strange, switch
“Stereo&3DSound” to “OFF”.
104
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the vibrator to notify you of incoming calls and mail.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callVibrator
Select an incoming typeSelect a vibration pattern.
pWhen “Melody linkage” is set, the FOMA terminal vibrates in time with the
vibration pattern stored in the melody.
pWhile selecting a vibration pattern, you can check the selected vibration.
However, you cannot check the vibration when you select “Melody linkage”.
pThe following icons are displayed on the Stand-by display while “Vibrator” is set to
other than “OFF”:
: You set “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”.
: You set “Mail”, “Chat mail”, “MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
: You set “Phone”, “PushTalk”, or “Videophone”, and set “Mail”, “Chat mail”,
“MessageR”, “MessageF”, or “i-concier”.
+m-5-4
<Vibrator>
Informing You of an Incoming Call by
Vibration
Information
pThe priority order of vibrators is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group
setting” → “Vibrator”.
pEven when “Melody linkage” is set, the FOMA terminal vibrates with “Pattern 2” if an
i-motion file or melody with no vibration pattern is set for the ring tone.
pBe careful not to leave the FOMA terminal on a desk or similar places with the vibrator
activated; when a call comes in, the FOMA terminal might move and fall by vibration.
You can set the sound recorded with the FOMA terminal for a ring tone
(including a ring tone for Number B of 2in1), On-hold tone/Holding tone,
alarm for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, and “TV timer”, and answer
message for Record Message.
You can record only one item for about 15 seconds.
1mLifeKitRec.msg/voice memoVoice announce
Record
pTo suspend recording midway, press Oo( ), h, or r. The contents
recorded to that point are saved.
pThe tone beeps about 5 seconds before the recording time (for about 15
seconds) ends. When recording ends, the tone beeps twice, and the former
display returns.
pThe recording is suspended when a call comes in, when an alarm for “Alarm”,
“Schedule”, “ToDo”, “TV timer”, or “Timer recording” sounds, or when you switch
displays using Multitask while recording. (The contents recorded to that point are
saved.)
pTo play back the recorded sound, select “Play”. To suspend playback midway,
press Oo( ), h, or r.
pTo erase the recorded sound, select “Erase”, then select “YES”.
Melody Call is a service that enables you to change the ringback tone
phone the callers hear to a melody you like.
For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [Network Services]”.
pMelody Call is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis.
1m
Set./Service
Incoming call
Melody Call setting
YES
Operate following the instructions on the display.
+m-5-5
<Voice Announce>
Using Recorded Sound as Ring Tone
<Melody Call Setting>
Changing Ringback Tone
105
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceSoundKeypad soundON or OFF
1mSet./ServiceSoundSpeed selector sound
Select a pattern.
pWhile selecting a pattern, you can check the selected sound.
Information
pMelody Call is not available for incoming videophone calls and PushTalk calls.
pWhen you select “YES” from the confirmation display asking whether to connect to the
site, the line is connected to the i-mode site. You are not charged a packet
communication fee for connecting to the site for settings, however, you are charged
for connecting to the IP site, i-mode menu site, and free melody corner.
+m-3-0
<Keypad Sound>
Setting Keypad Sound
Information
pYou cannot change the volume for keypad sound.
pIf you set this function to “OFF”, the battery level tone (see page 43) and respective
warning tones do not sound.
pThe keypad does not make a sound when you press .</.>, while the phone is
ringing, during playback of an i-motion file, or during playback of a movie file.
<Speed Selector Sound>
Setting Speed Selector Sound
Information
pYou cannot change the volume for speed selector sound.
pThe speed selector does not make a sound while the phone is ringing, during a call, or
during playback of an i-motion file, or during playback of a movie file.
The confirmation tone sounds twice when charging starts/ends.
1mSet./ServiceSoundCharge soundON or OFF
When a call is nearly disconnecting midway due to bad radio wave
conditions, an alarm sounds to inform you right before disconnection.
1mSet./ServiceTalkQuality alarm
Select an alarm.
No tone . . . . . Does not sound.
High tone. . . . High alarm sounds.
Low tone . . . . Low alarm sounds.
<Charge Sound>
Setting Charging-start/end Tones
Information
pYou cannot change the volume for charge sound.
pThe charging confirmation tone does not sound when the power is turned off, when a
display other than the Stand-by display is shown or during Manner Mode or Public
mode (Drive mode).
+m-7-5
<Quality Alarm>
Sounding Alarm when a Line is Nearly
Disconnecting
Information
pYou might be disconnected without hearing an alarm if radio wave conditions
deteriorate suddenly.
106
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set the duration of the ring tone which sounds for incoming
i-mode mail, SMS messages, Chat mail, Messages R/F, and i-concier
information.
1mSet./ServiceSoundMail/Msg. ring time
Select a type of mail or messageON or OFF
Enter a ring time (seconds).
pEnter in two digits from “01” through “30”.
You can set from where you sound the ring tone and alarm for when you
connect an earphone/microphone (option).
1mSet./ServiceSoundHeadset usage setting
Headset and speaker or Headset only
+m-6-8
<Mail/Message Ring Time>
Setting Ring Time for Mail and Messages R/F
+m-5-1
<Headset Usage Setting>
Sounding Ring Tone from Earphone Only
Information
pEven when you set to “Headset only”, the ring tone sounds from both the earphone
and speaker about 20 seconds after ringing starts. However, the tone does not sound
from the speaker but sounds from the earphone only even after 20 seconds have
elapsed if the tone sounds for the operations other than incoming calls, incoming mail,
and alarm notification.
pEven when you set to “Headset only”, the tone sounds from the speaker when any
earphone/microphone is not connected or at the start of shooting with the camera.
Just by pressing a key, you can set to mute the tones from the FOMA
terminal, such as a ring tone and keypad sound .
You can use “Manner mode set” to select Manner Mode functions from
three types; “Manner mode”, “Super silent”, or “Original”.
While “Manner mode” or “Super silent” is activated, or while “Mic
sensitiv.” is set to “Up” in “Original”, you can talk softly on the phone but
your voice can still be heard clearly at the other end.
1Press and hold s for at least one second.
Manner mode selected in “Manner mode set” is set.
pDuring a call or while calling, you can activate Manner Mode by pressing and
holding s for at least one second. While a PushTalk call is arriving, you can
activate Manner Mode by pressing >.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, you can activate Manner Mode by pressing
and holding < for at least one second.
pDuring Manner Mode, “ ” is displayed. The settings you selected for “Manner
mode set” are also displayed.
: Indicates that “Vibrator” will work to notify events.
/ / : Indicate that “Ring volume” has been set to “Silent”.
pIn the following cases, the tone sounds from the earphone when an earphone/
microphone is connected, and from the speaker when it is not connected, regardless
of this setting:
・While watching a 1Seg program
・During playback of a video file
・During playback of an i-motion file
・During playback of a movie file
・During playback of a melody
・While an i-αppli program is running
・During playback of a music file by MUSIC Player
・During playback of a Music&Video Channel program
pDo not wind the cord of the earphone/microphone around the FOMA terminal.
pThe FOMA terminal may pick up noise if you take the cord of the earphone/
microphone close to the FOMA terminal during a call.
<Manner Mode>
Muting Tones from FOMA Terminal
Information
107
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Press and hold s for at least one second. During a call or calling, two beeps sound
and the message that is released appears.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, you can release Manner Mode also by pressing
and holding < for at least one second.
Information
pEven if
you activate Manner Mode, the shutter sound and focus lock tone of the camera
sound.
pIn Manner Mode, if you try to play back a melody, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. Select “YES” to play back the melody at the volume set
for “Phone” of “Ring volume”. If the setting is “Silent” or “Step”, the volume is Level 2.
pIn Manner Mode, if you do the following operations, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play back voice or music.
・Watching a 1Seg program
・Playing back a video file
・Playing back an i-motion file
・Playing back a movie file
・Playing back a music file by MUSIC Player
・Playing back a Music&Video Channel program
Select “YES” to play it back at the volume set for each player. When you change the
volume level, it is played back at the set volume for the next time.
pWhen an earphone/microphone (option) is connected, the sound comes out of the
earphone. The confirmation display asking whether to play back sound or music files
during Manner Mode does not appear. Further, the playback tone does not sound
from the speaker even if you unplug the earphone/microphone while playing back
sound or music files by each player.
pWhen “Phone” of “Ring volume” is set to “Silent” and you play back a melody attached
to a received mail message during Manner Mode, the melody does not sound from
the earphone even when an earphone/microphone (option) is connected.
To release Manner Mode
You can select one of three types of operations for Manner Mode.
■Operations during Manner Mode
+m-2-0
<Manner Mode Set>
Selecting Manner Mode Type
Manner
Mode
Super
Silent Original
Record message Set value of
Record message ON or OFF
Vibrator※1ON ON or OFF
Phone volume Silent Silent through Level 6 and step①
Mail volume Silent Silent through Level 6 and step②
Alarm volume※2Silent Silent through Level 6 and step
Memo tone ON OFF ON or OFF③
Keypad sound OFF ON or OFF④
Speed selector sound OFF Pattern 1 through Pattern 3 and OFF
Microphone sensitivity Up Normal or Up
Low voltage alarm tone
(Low battery alarm) OFF
ON or OFF
When “LV alarm tone” is set to “ON”, it
works with the same set value as
①
.
※3
Confirmation tone for
selecting ring tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①・②
.
On hold tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Holding tone Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※5
ToruCa-received tone and
ToruCa failed-to-receive tone
Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
Confirmation tone for
recording voice announce ON OFF Works with the same set value as ③.
Battery level tone Silent Silent
Voice recognition start tone Silent Silent
Playback tones of attached
melody Silent Silent
Effect tones of
Decome-Anime Silent Silent
Warning tones Silent
Works with the same set value as
④
.
Schedule alarm Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
ToDo alarm Silent Works with the same set value as ①.
TV timer alarm Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※6
108
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
※1 Vibrator works for the ring tones and alarm tones for “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”,
“TV timer” and “Timer recording”.
The vibration pattern is the same one as you set on page 104. However, if the
pattern you set on page 104 is “OFF”, “Pattern 2” applies.
※2 When “Prefer manner mode” on page 395 is set to “OFF”, the tone sounds at the
volume set for Alarm.
※3 The tone sounds at Level 1 when ① is “Silent”.
※4 The tone sounds at Level 2 when ① is “Step”.
※5 The tone sounds at Level 1 when ① is not “Silent”.
※6 When “Prefer manner mode” on page 258 is set to “OFF”, the tone sounds at the
volume set for TV Timer.
※7 The tone does not sound when ① is “Step”.
Timer recording alarm Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※7
Shutter sound/focus lock
tone of the camera Level 4 Level 4
Confirmation tone for
selecting a shutter sound OFF
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Switching to Hands-free by
“Hands-free w/ V. phone” or
“Hands-free w/ PushTalk”
OFF OFF
Read aloud volume Silent Silent
Effect tones of Flash movies
Silent Silent
Effect tones at the start of
i-Widget
Silent
Works with the same set value as
①
.
※4
Manner
Mode
Super
Silent Original You can select from among standard “Manner mode” to inform you of
incoming calls or mail by the vibrator, “Super silent” to erase sounds
including confirmation tones from the earpiece, or “Original” to
customize operations.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callManner mode set
Manner mode, Super silent or Original
Do the following operations.
Record msg. ON or OFF
pEven if you select “ON”, the ring time is fixed to about 13
seconds and cannot be changed when “Record message
setting” on page 69 is set to “OFF”.
pSee page 69 for Record Message Setting.
Vibrator You can set the FOMA terminal to vibrate for incoming calls and
mail.
ON or OFF
pSee page 104 for Vibrator.
Phone vol. You can adjust the ring volume for incoming voice calls,
videophone calls and PushTalk calls.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 66 for Ring Volume.
Mail vol. You can adjust the ring volume for i-mode mail, SMS messages,
Messages R/F, and i-concier information.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 66 for Ring Volume.
Alarm vol. Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pSee page 394 for Alarm.
Memo tone You can set the FOMA terminal to sound a confirmation tone
when a record message is played back, a voice memo is
recorded or played back, and a movie memo is recorded.
ON or OFF
Keypad sound ON or OFF
pSee page 105 for Keypad Sound.
109
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
2Press l( ).
You can set the Stand-by display which appears on the display. On the
Stand-by display, you can randomly show the images in a specified
folder, and set moving pictures shot by the FOMA terminal or i-motion
files downloaded from sites for the Stand-by display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Stand-by displaySelect a type of image.
pWhen you select “Calendar/schedule”, select a display format, and then select
“BG image ON” or “BG image OFF”. When you select “BG image OFF”, the
setting is completed.
pWhen you select “Random display”, select a folder and then select “Every hour”
or “Every day” for the switching interval of the Stand-by display. The setting is
completed.
pWhen you select “iαppli display”, select an i-αppli program. The setting is
completed.
2Select a folderSelect an image.
pOn the Stand-by display, the image smaller than the display is shown in
equivalent dimensions or enlarged to fit to the display size, depending on the
image size.
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Selector sound Select a pattern.
pSee page 105 for Speed Selector Sound.
Mic sensitiv. Normal or Up
LV alarm tone ON or OFF
pSee page 43 for LV Alarm Tone (low battery alarm).
+m-5-6
<Display Setting>
Changing Displays
Set Stand-by Display
You can display schedule events of the day (up to 10) or
calendar in the set format on the Stand-by display. You can
check the schedule events or calendar and can set schedule
events (see page 397) with ease.
You can access the schedule events or calendar by pressing
Oo. Highlight an item to be operated and press Oo( )
from the Stand-by display.
pWhen you select a schedule event, you can confirm the
previous or next schedule events by pressing Bo.
You can display the detailed schedule display by pressing
Oo( ).
pWhen you select the calendar, you can display the previous or next calendar by
pressing Mo.
You can set a schedule event by pressing Oo( ).
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display.
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The image stopped such as by pressing h during
playback of a Flash movie is displayed as the Stand-by display.
pWhen a Flash movie which shows a clock or the like is set, the date/time is not updated
during pause. When you play back the Flash movie by pressing h, the date/time is
corrected.
pIf you set a Flash movie containing a progressive type FLV file, the FLV file is not
played back.
It is played back when you display the Stand-by display, press h from the Stand-by
display, or open the FOMA terminal. The first frame is displayed as the Stand-by display.
pPress Bo or </> during playback to adjust the volume.
Press Oo, l, i, m, c, No, r, d, p or h to end the playback.
pIf you play back an i-motion file during Manner Mode, the sound is not played back.
When Calendar/Schedule is set
When an original animation or animation GIF is set
When a Flash movie is set
When an i-motion file is set
For
“Calendar+schedule”
110
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Press h from the Stand-by display.
Calendar, schedule events, status icons, notification icons, and desktop icons are
cleared. Press h again to show the icons and others.
When a Flash movie is set for the Stand-by display, however, the following operations
are performed:
・When you press h during playback of a Flash movie, the playback pauses.
Press h again to clear the icons and others.
You can set an image or message to be displayed for when the power is
turned on.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Wake-up displaySelect a type of image.
pIf you select “Message”, enter a message. You can enter up to 50 full-pitch/100
half-pitch characters.
pIf you select “My picture” or “imotion”, go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on
page 109.
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Not to display icons on the Stand-by display
Information
pThe schedule list shows the today’s schedule events whose start time has not come,
and the today’s schedule events set as “All day”. Holidays are not displayed.
pSome i-motion files might not be correctly displayed.
pYou cannot set a still image larger than the Stand-by (480 x 854) or in excess of 500
Kbytes for the Stand-by display.
pWhen a folder selected for “Random display” includes images which cannot be set for
the Stand-by display, pre-installed images might be displayed.
pYou cannot set some images or i-motion files for the Stand-by display or for Random
display. Also, some images may not be displayed with correct display direction.
pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back.
pWhen you show the Stand-by display, the Flash movies such as a clock and the
animation GIF files stop moving after a certain period of playback.
Set the Wake-up Display
You can set an image for the Dialing/Call Receiving display, Mail
Sending/Mail Receiving display, and Checking display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Select a type of display.
pWhen “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” is selected, select “Select calling
disp.”.
pWhen “Mail receiving” is selected, select “Select receiving disp.” and go to step 2
of “Set Stand-by Display” on page 109.
pIf you select “Dialing”, “Videophone dialing”, “Mail sending”, “Check new
messages”, or “Mail/msg. rcpt result”, go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on
page 109.
pSelect “Incoming call”, “Videophone incoming” or “Mail receiving” and press
l( ) to check the contents actually displayed or played back.
2Select a type of image.
Go to step 2 of “Set Stand-by Display” on page 109.
Information
pYou cannot set some images or i-motion fles for the Wake-up display. Also, some
images may not be displayed with correct display direction.
pThe sound of Flash movies cannot be played back.
Set Displays for Dialing/Calling and Others
Information
pWhen you select “Incoming call”, “Videophone incoming”, or “Mail receiving”, select
“Select ring tone” to set the ring tone. Go to step 2 on page 102.
pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: “Setting for Phonebook
entry” → “Group setting” → “Disp. PH-book image” → “Display setting”. However,
when “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” of “Read aloud settings” is set to
“ON”, the default image is displayed.
The same order applies if a call comes in to Number B while using 2in1. However,
when you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion) by “Ringtone set. for No. B”, it is played back as Chaku-motion, taking
priority over this function.
111
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set indications/images for battery icons.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay settingBattery
Select an item.
Numerals . . . The estimate of the battery level is indicated in percent figures.
Select a font color.
Icon . . . . . . . . The estimate of the battery level is indicated by icons. Select
images after selecting a folder.
You can set images for antenna icons.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Antenna iconSelect a folderSelect an image.
pYou cannot change icons such as “ ” or “ ”.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for a ring tone
(Chaku-motion), it is played back for incoming calls, taking priority over this function.
However, if you set a voice-only i-motion file, the image set by this function is
displayed.
pWhen you set an i-motion file containing video and sound for “Select calling disp.”, the
i-motion file is played back taking priority over “Select ring tone” of “Incoming call” for
incoming calls. However, if you set an i-motion file containing only video for “Select
calling disp.”, the ring tone selected for “Select ring tone” of “Incoming call” is played
back.
pThe images or ring tone set at purchase might be displayed or played back for
incoming calls or messages, depending on the combination of this function and
“Select ring tone”.
pYou cannot set some images for “Display setting”. Also, some images may not be
displayed with correct display direction.
pThe sound of Flash movies is not played back.
Set Battery Icon
Information
Information
pThe image you can set for battery icons of “Icon” is a GIF image of 70 x 25 dots.
(A battery icon is composed of an image of 14 x 25 dots.)
Set Antenna Icon
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay setting
Icon colorColor or Monochrome
pYou cannot change the battery icon and antenna icon.
If the caller ID notified by the caller matches the phone number stored in
the Phonebook, the still image stored in the Phonebook is displayed.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming call
Disp. PH-book imageON or OFF
When you have a missed call, new mail message, new chat mail message,
or new Message R/F, the detailed Missed Call display/Inbox list/Chat Mail
display/Message R/F list is displayed at opening the FOMA terminal.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayRecv. mail/call at open
ON or OFF
Information
pThe image you can set for antenna icons is a GIF image of 44 x 50 dots.
(An antenna icon is composed of an image of 22 x 25 dots.)
Show Icons in Color/Monochrome
<Display Phonebook Image>
Displaying an Image Stored in Phonebook
while Ringing
Information
pThe priority order of displays for call receiving is as follows: “Picture for Phonebook
entry” → “Picture for group” → “Image for Phonebook entry” → “Display setting”.
However, when “Incoming call” or “Videophone incoming” of “Read aloud settings” is
set to “ON”, the default image is displayed.
<Received Mail/Call at Open>
Displaying Arrival Information by Opening
FOMA Terminal
112
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceDisplayBacklight
Do the following operations.
Information
pWhen newly received messages and missed calls are found, the detailed Missed Call
display appears.
pWhen a new mail message, chat mail, Message R/F are simultaneously received, the
messages are displayed in the order of the chat mail message, i-mode message,
Message R, and Message F.
+m-7-0
<Backlight>
Setting Lights for Display and Keypad
Lighting You can set whether to light the backlight in ordinary time.
ON or OFF
pIf you set to “OFF”, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.
Also, you can set whether to activate Power Saver Mode for the
display.
ON (Power saver mode) or OFF (Constant light)
Enter a light time (seconds).
pEnter from “060” through “999” in three digits.
Charging Standard or Long time light
Standard
. . . . . . . . . Lights during charging in the same setting as
it lights in ordinary time.
Long time
light
. . . When 15 seconds elapse without any
operation during charging, the backlight
switches to Level 1, and when 3 hours
elapse, it switches to Power Saver Mode.
pWhen an AC adapter (option) or another device is connected,
the backlight lights following the setting of this function even
after charging is completed.
Area You can set the range the backlight lights in.
LCD+Keys or LCD
Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the backlight for the display to
Level 1 (dark) through Level 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pWhen “Auto setting” is set, the backlight set by “Area” is
automatically adjusted according to the ambient brightness that
has been detected by the light sensor.
Press and hold 5 for at least one second.
pWhile an i-αppli program is running or you are entering characters, you cannot switch
the backlight on/off by pressing and holding 5 for at least one second. Also,
depending on the Decome-Anime message or Flash movie, you may not be able to
switch the backlight on/off while it is displayed.
Soft light You can set whether to light the backlight softly for the display.
ON or OFF
pEven if you set to “OFF”, the backlight might light softly for some
functions.
To switch the backlight on/off by pressing one key
Information
pWhen “Lighting” is set to “ON”, the backlight stays lit while a call is coming in and the
area specified by “Area” lights for about 15 seconds when you turn on the power,
touch the keys, or open the FOMA terminal. The backlight stays lit while the camera is
activated, during playback of an i-motion file, or during playback of a movie file. When
“OFF” is set, it does not light. However, it stays lit during a moving picture shoot
regardless of the “Lighting” setting.
pSee page 74 for Backlight during a videophone call.
pSee page 262 for Backlight for while watching a 1Seg program.
pWhen you display the text of i-mode mail or Messages R/F, the lighting time varies
according to the length of the text.
pIf “Power saver mode” is set to “ON (Power saver mode)” and the specified time
elapses without doing any operations, the FOMA terminal switches to Power Saver
Mode and the display goes off. However, the FOMA terminal might not switch to
Power Saver Mode depending on the function in use.
pWhen an i-motion file is set for the Stand-by display, the Stand-by display changes to
Power Saver Mode after ending the playback and a standby time elapses.
pThe display appears when you operate the FOMA terminal, receive a call, or receive
i-Channel tickers. However, the receiving display does not appear when you receive a
call in Public mode (Drive mode).
pIf you press the switch of an earphone/microphone (option) in Power Saver Mode, the
Power Saver Mode is released but the operation such as dialing is not made.
However, if you press and hold the switch of the earphone/microphone for at least one
second during a call (except Multi calling), the Power Saver Mode is released and the
call ends.
113
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set whether to automatically adjust the brightness of the display
backlight and to compensate the image quality according to that
brightness during playback of i-motion files/movie files, Music&Video
Channel programs, or video files, during a videophone call, or while
watching a 1Seg program.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayLCD AION or OFF
pIf you operate the setting from the Function menu during a videophone call or
watching a 1Seg program, the setting is effective only for the current videophone
call or 1Seg program.
You can adjust the contrast of the display so that it is hardly viewed from
a slanted angle.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayView blindON or OFF
Select a contrast.
pWhen “ON” is set, “ ” appears on the Stand-by display.
p
While selecting a contrast level, you can check the selected contrast on the display.
Press and hold 8 for at least one second.
pWhile an i-αppli program is running, a PDF file is displayed, or you are entering
characters, you cannot switch View Blind on/off by pressing and holding 8 for at
least one second. Also, depending on the Decome-Anime message or Flash movie,
you may not be able to switch View Blind on/off while it is displayed.
<LCD AI>
Adjusting Quality of Display Automatically
Information
pIf you set to “ON”, the brightness is adjusted within the level specified for “Brightness”
of “Backlight”. The brightness is adjusted also while you are selecting a menu item.
pThis function is disabled during Play Background.
<View Blind>
Making Display Hard to See from People
Around
To switch View Blind on/off by pressing one key
1mSet./ServiceDisplayImage quality
Select an item.
Normal. . . . . Normal image quality
Vivid. . . . . . . Vivid image quality
Dynamic . . . Dynamic image quality in which motion is emphasized
You can set the display color pattern of characters, backgrounds, and so on.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayColor theme setting
Select a color theme.
pWhile selecting a color theme, you can check the selected color theme on the
display.
<Image Quality>
Setting Quality of Display
+m-8-6
<Color Theme Setting>
Setting Color Combination for Display
Information
pYou cannot change the color for icons and images displayed in multiple colors, the
DOCOMO pictograms, and the Internet websites (sites) supporting i-mode.
114
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can change the icons and the background images of Main Menu.
1ml( )Select a pattern.
pSee page 35 for Simple Menu.
2When you select “Customize” in step 1, select a menu
icon or background image to be changed
Select a folderSelect an image.
Repeat step 2 and set menu icons and a background image.
pWhile selecting a menu icon or background image, press l( ) to confirm
the currently set image.
pTo reset the menu icon and background image set to “Customize” to “スタンダー
ド (Standard)” in the “Pre-installed” folder, press i( ) and select “Reset”
or “All reset”, then select “YES”.
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
+m-5-7
<Menu Icon Setting>
Setting Displays for Main Menu
Information
pThe image you can set for “Customize” is a JPEG or GIF image whose size is
Stand-by (480 x 854) or smaller and up to 500 Kbytes. Perform “Change size” or “Trim
away” for other images.
pWhen the image you set “Customize” is deleted, “スタンダード (Standard)” in the
“Pre-installed” folder returns.
pWhen you activate Personal Data Lock while “Customize” is set, the default image is
displayed. However, when “Display setting” is set to “Accept” for “Customize” of
Personal Data Lock, the image set for this function is displayed.
pWhen you set “Customize”, the main menu icons do not switch even if you switch
“Select language”.
You can use Kisekae Tool to change the ring tone, Stand-by display,
menu icons and others at a time.
pSee page 204 for details on how to download Kisekae Tool files.
pSee page 359 for the operation from Data Box.
■Functions that can be set with Kisekae Tool
pFunctions that can be set differ depending on the Kisekae Tool file.
pThe changes of functions you can respectively set according to the mode of 2in1 are
reflected to A Mode only, regardless of the mode at changing. The other changes of
functions are applied to the all modes of 2in1.
1mSet./ServiceKisekae
Highlight a Kisekae Tool file and press l( )
YES
p“★” is added to the Kisekae Tool file collectively set at the moment.
pDepending on the selected Kisekae Tool file, the confirmation display might
appear asking whether to change the font size. When you select “NO”, you might
not be able to set the Kisekae Tool file correctly.
<Kisekae Tool>
Using Kisekae Tool
・Select ring tone
・Display setting
・Color theme setting
・Menu icon setting
・Font
・Disp. call/receive No.
・Ticker font size set.
・Ticker color set.
・Ticker scroll speed
・i-αppli call sound
・Positioning ring tone
・Tone
Information
pFor the functions set by Kisekae Tool, each setting display is shown with “Follow
Kisekae Tool” highlighted. You can separately change each setting, however, if you
want to reset to the setting by Kisekae Tool, you need to perform collective settings
again. You cannot select “Follow Kisekae Tool”.
pIf you use Kisekae Tool to change the design of the Menu display, some menu
configurations change according to the usage frequency depending on the type of the
menu. Further, some menu numbers that are assigned to the menu items do not
apply.
115
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can reset the functions changed by Kisekae Tool.
1mi( )Reset
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item
YES
Reset disp. /sound . . . .Resets all of “■Functions that can be set with Kisekae
Tool” to the default.
Reset menu screen . . . .Resets Main Menu to the default. You can reset also by
pressing and holding r for at least one second from
the Stand-by display and selecting “YES”.
Reset menu log . . . . . . .Resets the operation records of Main Menu to the
default.
Function Menu of Main Menu
Change launcher You can manually replace the items on Main Menu.
Select a destination to save toYES
Disp. default MENU You can temporarily show Main Menu of “Normal”.
pOnce you close Main Menu of “Normal”, the currently set Main
Menu returns.
Reset See page 115.
Reset Changed Design
Information
pEven if you perform “Reset disp. /sound” or “Reset menu screen”, you cannot reset
“Font size setting”.
pEven if you execute “Reset menu screen”, the Main Menu items you have manually
replaced by “Change launcher” are not reset.
When Machi-chara is set, a Machi-chara image appears on the Stand-by
display to tell you missed calls, new mail messages, new i-concier
information and others.
pSee page 204 for downloading Machi-chara images.
pSee page 355 for the operations from Data Box.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayMachi-chara
Set to Machi-chara
pTo release Machi-chara, select “Release Machi-chara”.
2Highlight a Machi-chara image and press l( ).
p“★” is added to the currently set Machi-chara image.
1mSet./ServiceIllumination
Do the following operations.
<Set to Machi-chara>
Setting Machi-chara Image
Information
pThe Machi-chara image is not displayed in the following cases:
・During Lock All ・During Personal Data Lock ・During Omakase Lock
・While an icon or another is selected on the Stand-by display
However, when “Display setting” is set to “Accept” for “Customize” of Personal Data
Lock, Machi-chara images are displayed even during Personal Data Lock.
pSome Machi-chara images change their appearance according to the elapsed time,
total calls duration, and number of mail messages sent/received after setting. If you
move these Machi-chara images to the microSD card or execute “Reset all info”, they
return to the default state.
<Illumination>
Setting Color and Others of Call/Charging
Indicator
All illum. setting You can set all illumination items at one time.
Select a pattern.
116
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
Incoming
illumination
See page 117.
Illumination in talk You can set the illumination for during a call.
Select an item.
pWhile selecting an item, you can check the flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator.
p
It flickers in the same color while Record Message is working,
during answer-hold (On Hold), or while a call is on hold (Holding).
Missed/unread
illum.
The Call/Charging indicator flickers at about 5-second interval for
missed calls, new mail messages, new chat mail messages, new
Messages R/F, i-αppli calls you did not reply to, or new i-concier
information.
Select an item.
OFF when checked . . The Call/Charging indicator flickers until
you check missed calls or others.
OFF after 24hours . . . Even if you do not check missed calls or
others, the Call/Charging indicator
automatically goes off after it flickers for
24 hours.
OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Call/Charging indicator does not
flicker.
pIt does not flicker in Public mode (Drive mode), during Lock All,
and during Omakase Lock. Flickering does not resume even
after Public mode (Drive mode) or each lock is released except
when new i-concier information is found.
Music&Video Ch
illum.
The Call/Charging indicator flickers at about 5-second interval for
about 30 minutes when obtaining Music&Video Channel
programs is completed.
ON or OFF
Slide illumination You can set the illumination for when you open (Slide open) and
close (Slide close) the FOMA terminal.
Slide open or Slide closeSelect an item.
pWhile selecting an item, you can check the flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator.
Hourly illumination You can be notified of the specified time (every hour at 0 minutes)
by the tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator.
Select a pattern.
OFF . . . . . . . The Call/Charging indicator does not light.
Pattern 1. . . A fixed tone sounds and the Call/Charging indicator
lights in the fixed color.
Pattern 2. . . The tone and light of the Call/Charging indicator
change by time.
pWhile selecting a pattern, you can check the lighting of the Call/
Charging indicator and the time tone.
p“Hourly illumination” does not work while a display other than
the Stand-by display is shown, or Lock All or Omakase Lock is
activated.
pTime tone sounds at the volume set for “Phone” of “Ring
volume”. It sounds at Level 2 when “Step” is set.
MUSIC illumination The Call/Charging indicator flickers when you start playback by
MUSIC Player.
ON or OFF
Bluetooth
illumination
The Call/Charging indicator flickers during connecting to
Bluetooth devices.
ON or OFF
pIt flickers at about 5-second interval for about 5 minutes when
the connection is completed.
IC card illumination The Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers when you place the
FOMA terminal over an IC card scanning device or during iC
communication.
ON or OFF
pIt does not light/flicker during IC Card Lock.
PushTalk
illumination
The Call/Charging indicator lights/flickers when you try to get the
PushTalk talker’s right, or when a member’s state changes to
“Connected”.
ON or OFF
Speed selector
illum.
You can set the illumination for when you rotate the speed
selector.
Select an item.
pWhile selecting an item, you can check the flickering of the Call/
Charging indicator.
Check settings You can check the setting contents for “Incoming illumination”,
“Illumination in talk”, “Slide illumination”, “Hourly illumination” and
“Speed selector illum.”.
117
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
You can set an illumination for each incoming type.
1mSet./ServiceIlluminationIncoming illumination
Do the following operations.
+m-8-9
Incoming Illumination
Select color Select an incoming typeSelect an item.
pTo make the indicator light in colors “Color 1” to “Color 12” in
order, select “Gradation”.
pWhile selecting an item, you can check the lighting/flickering
of the Call/Charging indicator.
Set pattern You can set the lighting pattern of the Incoming Illumination.
Select a pattern.
Standard . . . . . . . . . Lights in the same pattern repeatedly.
Melody linkage. . . . Lights with the ring tone.
Color setting
Edit color name Select a colorEnter a name.
pYou can edit “Color 1” through “Color 12” only.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Adjust color tone Select a colorAdjust the color tone.
pYou can adjust the color tone of “Color 1” through “Color 12”
only.
pUse Bo to select a color and use No to change the color
tone.
Information
<Select color>
pThe priority order of incoming illumination is; “Setting for Phonebook entry” → “Group
setting” → “Select color”.
<Set pattern>
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights in specified pattern for each illumination when
“Select color” is set to other than “Color 1” through “Color 12” and “Gradation”.
pThe Call/Charging indicator lights by “Standard” when an i-motion file or melody with
no flickering pattern is set for the ring tone.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayFont
Font 1, Font 2, or Font 3
You can set the font and color of names stored in the Phonebook and
phone numbers displayed on the following displays:
■Font of dial number
・Dialing/Call Receiving display ・Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Detailed Redial display
・Detailed Sent Chaku-moji message
■Font color
・Dialing/Call Receiving/Talking display ・Dialed Calls/Received Calls/Redial
・Detailed Sent Chaku-moji message ・Sent/Received Address list
pWhen you use 2in1, the setting here applies to Number A. To specify for Number B,
operate “Disp. call/receive No.” of “2in1 setting”.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callDisp. call/receive No.
Do the following operations.
+m-6-6
<Font>
Changing Character Font
Information
pSome characters are displayed in “Font 1” regardless of the setting of this function.
pYou cannot change the font of a phone number entry or clock display.
Set Character Font and Color of Phone Numbers
Font of dial number Select a pattern.
Font color Select a color.
pYou can switch between 16 color and 256 color by pressing
c( ).
pYou can reset the set color by pressing i( ).
Information
pIf you change the background color by “Color theme setting” or “Kisekae Tool”, the
font color automatically changes as well.
118
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
1mSet./ServiceDisplayFont size setting
Do the following operations.
pYou cannot change the color of pictograms.
<Font Size Setting>
Changing Font Size
Information
Set at one time You can set all the changeable items such as font size at a time.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
pThe confirmation display might appear asking whether to
change the font size of the menu as well. When you select
“YES”, the menu icons are changed to “Enlarge menu” while
“Extra large” or “Large” is set, and they are changed to “Normal”
while “Standard” or “Small” is set.
pWhen “Extra large” is set, “Phonebook” and “Dialed/recv. calls”
are set to “Large”.
pWhen “Small” is set, “Phonebook” and “Dialed/recv. calls” are
set to “Standard”.
Mail You can set the font size for the detailed mail display, detailed
Message R/F display and for “Mail settings”.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
pWhile the detailed mail display is shown, press i( ) to
select “Display” and then select “Font size set.”. You can
change the font size also by pressing 3, or pressing and
holding No for at least one second.
However, another mail message is displayed when you press
and hold Vo for at least one second while “Extra large” is set,
or you press and hold Co for at least one second while “Small”
is set.
pYou cannot change the font size of the Decome-Anime text or
Deco-mail pictograms.
i-mode You can set the font size for sites and “i-mode settings”.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
You can set the display pattern and others of the clock on the Stand-by
display.
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay settingClock
Stand-by clock Do the following operations.
pDuring operation or when you press l( ) while “Stand-by clock” is
highlighted, you can check the clock actually displayed. However, it might differ
from the actual one depending on the setting of each function.
Phonebook You can set the font size for the Phonebook and “Phonebook
settings”.
Large or Standard
pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Font size settingPhonebook.
Dialed/recv. calls You can set the font size for the Redial, Dialed Calls, Received
Calls, Sent Address and Received Address.
Large or Standard
pYou can set also by mPhonebookPhonebook settings
Font size settingDialed/recv. calls.
Character input You can set the font size for the character entry display, Message
Composition display, or SMS Composition display.
Extra large, Large, Standard, or Small
Information
pDepending on the function, characters might not be displayed in the set size.
pWhen “Extra large” or “Large” is set, some items displayed for each operating
procedure differ from the ones displayed for when “Standard” or “Small” is set.
+m-5-6
Setting Clock Display
Set Stand-by Clock Display
+l( )
Position
You can set the clock position.
Select a pattern.
+i( )
Pattern
You can set the display pattern of the clock.
Select a pattern.
119
Sound/Screen/Light Settings
2Press Oo( ).
pThe setting of this function might not be reflected depending on the settings of
other functions or the condition of the FOMA terminal.
You can set a display pattern of Icon Clock at the upper right of the
display (lower right of the horizontal display).
1mSet./ServiceDisplayDisplay settingClock
Icon clockSelect a pattern.
+m( )
Display size
Largest, Large, or Small
pYou cannot change the clock size of World Time Watch and the
sub clock.
+c( )
Day of week
When “Select language” is set to “日本語 (Japanese)”, you can
select “日本語 (Japanese)” or “英語 (English)”.
pIf you set to “英語 (English)”, the region names of World Time
Watch are displayed in English as well.
Set Icon Clock Display
120
121
Security Settings
Security Code
Security Codes Used for FOMA Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Changing Terminal Security Code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Change Security Code> 123
Setting PIN Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<UIM Setting> 123
Releasing PIN Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Restricting Operations and Functions on Mobile Phone
Restricting Others from Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Lock All> 124
Using Omakase Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Omakase Lock> 125
Using Self Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Self Mode> 126
Hiding Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Personal Data Lock> 126
Setting a Variety of Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Lock Setting> 128
Using Face Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Face Reader Setting> 129
Locking Keypad Dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Keypad Dial Lock> 131
Restricting Key Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Key Lock> 132
Restricting Outgoing/Incoming Calls or Messages
Setting not to Display Redial/Received Calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Record Display Set> 132
Protecting Phonebook Entries and Schedule Events from
Prying Eyes . . . . . . . . . . . <Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only> 133
Applying Secret for Mail in Mailbox . . . .<Secret Mail Display> 133
Setting not to Display Mail in Mailbox without Permission
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail Security> 134
Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries . . .<Restrictions> 134
Setting Response to Incoming Calls without Caller ID
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Call Setting without ID> 135
Delaying Start of Ringing Operation . . . . . . . . . . <Ring Time> 136
Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone Numbers which are not
Stored in Phonebooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reject Unknown> 136
Using Data Security Service . . . . . . . .<Data Security Service> 137
Resetting Function Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reset Settings> 138
Deleting Saved Data All at Once. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Initialize> 139
Resetting Data by Remote Control. . . . . . . . . <Remote Reset> 139
Other Security Settings
Other Security Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
122
Security Settings
For some functions of the FOMA terminal, you need to enter your
security code. In addition to the Terminal Security Code for operating
respective mobile phone functions, the Network Security Code to use
network services, and i-mode password are available. These security
codes help you utilize your FOMA terminal.
The Terminal Security Code is set to “0000” at purchase but you can
change it by yourself. (See page 123)
When the display for entering the Terminal Security Code appears, enter
your four- to eight-digit code and press Oo( ).
pWhen you enter your Terminal Security Code, the entered
numbers are indicated by “_” and not displayed.
pIf you have entered wrong numbers or nothing for about 15
seconds, a warning tone sounds and a warning message is
displayed; then the display prior to entering the Terminal
Security Code returns. Check the correct code and retry entering numbers.
Security Codes Used for FOMA Terminal
■Cautions on security codes
pYou should avoid using the numbers for security codes such as denoting your birth
date, part of your phone number, local address number, room number, “1111” or
“1234” that is easily decoded by a third party. Also make sure that you take a note of
the security codes you have selected just in case you forget them.
pTake care not to let others know your security codes. Even if your security codes are
known and used by a third party, we at DOCOMO take no responsibility in any event
for the resultant loss.
pIf you do not remember your respective security codes, you need to bring an
identification card such as your driver’s license, the FOMA terminal and UIM to the
handling counter of a docomo shop.
For details contact “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this manual.
Terminal Security Code
This is a four-digit number required for your identification to give orders/
apply at a docomo shop, docomo Information Center, or “お客様サポート
(User support)” site, or when you use respective network services. This
is determined at the time of contract but can be changed by yourself.
If you have “docomo ID/Password” for “My docomo”, the overall support
site for personal computers, you can use a personal computer to take
proceedings of changing your Network Security Code to new one.
Further, you can change it by yourself from “各種設定（確認・変更・利
用） [Respective settings (Confirmation/Change/Use)]” of “お客様サポー
ト (User support)” from i-mode.
※For “My docomo” and “お客様サポート (User support)”, see the inside of the
back page of this manual.
The four-digit “i-mode password” is required to register/delete My Menu,
apply for/cancel Message Services or i-mode pay services, etc. (Some
information providers may provide you with their specific password.)
The i-mode password is “0000” at the time of your contract, but you can
change it by yourself. (See page 192)
From i-mode, you can change the i-mode password by following
operation:
“iMenu” → “English” → “Options” → “Change i-mode Password”
For the UIM, you can set two security codes, namely the PIN1 code and
PIN2 code. These security codes are “0000” at the time of your contract,
but you can change them by yourself. (See page 124)
The PIN1 code is a four- to eight-digit number for checking the user each
time the UIM is inserted into the FOMA terminal or each time the FOMA
terminal is turned on, to prevent the unauthorized use by the third party.
By entering your PIN1 code, you can make or answer calls, or use
functions in the FOMA terminal.
The PIN2 code is a four- to eight-digit number for executing Reset Total
Cost, using the user certificate or applying for the issue of it, etc.
Network Security Code
i-mode Password
PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code
123
Security Settings
pIf you purchase a new FOMA terminal and use the existing UIM with the new FOMA
terminal, use the PIN1 code and PIN2 code you have set previously.
When the PIN1 Code/PIN2 Code Entry display appears, enter your four- to
eight-digit PIN1 code/PIN2 code and press Oo( ).
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
pIf you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in
succession, it is locked and the FOMA terminal cannot be
used. (The remaining number of times you can enter appears
on the display.)
When you enter the correct PIN1 code/PIN2 code, the
remaining number of times you can enter will return to three
times.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even from
the PIN1/PIN2 Code Entry display.
The PUK (PIN unblock code) is the eight-digit number for releasing the
PIN1 code and PIN2 code lock state. You cannot change this code by
yourself.
pIf you enter a wrong PUK (PIN unblock code) 10 times in succession, the UIM is
locked.
PUK (PIN Unblock Code)
For PIN1 code
Wrong entry 3 times in succession
Entry OK Wrong entry 10 times
in succession
Security when the power turns on
Set new PIN code Consult the handling
counter of a docomo shop
Enter PUK (PIN unblock code)
Enter PIN1 code Enter PIN2 code
Operation of user certificate
Connecting to FirstPass sites
Change the default for the Terminal Security Code required for operating
functions to your own four- to eight-digit code so that you can make full
use of the FOMA terminal. Make sure you take a note of the security code
you have changed just in case you forget it.
1mSet./ServiceLock/Security
Change security code
Enter the current Terminal Security Code.
pIf you enter the code for the first time, enter “0000”.
2Enter a new Terminal Security Code (four to eight digits)
YES
You can set the FOMA terminal not to work unless you enter your PIN1
code when turning on the power.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
PIN1 code entry setON or OFF
Enter the PIN1 code.
pSee page 122 for the PIN1 code.
+m-2-9
<Change Security Code>
Changing Terminal Security Code
<UIM Setting>
Setting PIN Code
PIN1 Code Entry Set
124
Security Settings
You need to have set “PIN1 code entry set” to “ON” to change the PIN1
code.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityUIM setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Change PIN1 code or Change PIN2 code
Enter the current PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
pSee page 122 for the PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
2Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits).
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
3Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again.
If you enter a wrong PIN1 code/PIN2 code three times in succession on
the display requiring its entry, it is locked and the FOMA terminal cannot
be used. In this case, release the PIN1 code/PIN2 code lock and set a new
PIN1 code/PIN2 code.
1Enter the PUK (PIN unblock code)
(eight digits).
pThe entered unblock code is displayed as “_”.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even
from the PUK Entry display.
2Enter a new PIN1 code/PIN2 code (four to eight digits).
pThe entered PIN1 code/PIN2 code is displayed as “_”.
Change PIN1 Code/Change PIN2 Code
Releasing PIN Lock
3Enter the new PIN1 code/PIN2 code again.
If you set Lock All, you can do no operations other than answering calls
and turning on/off the power.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock all
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
“ ” and “Lock all” appear and Lock All is set.
pTo release Lock All, enter your Terminal Security Code from the Stand-by
display. Even if you turn off the power, Lock All will not be released.
<Lock All>
Restricting Others from Using
Information
pYou cannot make calls during Lock All. However, you can make emergency calls at
110/119/118. Select “YES” from the confirmation display for dialing.
pYou can receive calls, but the callers’ data such as their names and images stored in
the Phonebook are not displayed except for their phone numbers. Further, the default
ring tone sounds.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Lock All.
pIf you fail to release Lock All five times in succession, the power to the FOMA terminal
turns off. However, you can turn it on again.
pYou can receive mail messages or Messages R/F during Lock All; however, the
Receiving or Reception Result display for incoming mail messages and Messages R/
F does not appear. The icons such as “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appear after Lock All is
released.
pDuring Lock All, the notification icons, desktop icons, and schedule events are not
displayed on the desktop except “ ”, “ ”, and “ ”. When Lock All is
released, they are displayed.
pThe tickers of i-Channel are not displayed during Lock All.
pThe default Wake-up display appears during Lock All even when an i-motion file has
been set for the Wake-up display.
pEven if you set Lock All, IC Card Lock is not activated.
125
Security Settings
When you have lost your FOMA terminal or in other cases, you can lock
your personal data (such as Phonebook entries) and the IC Card function
of Osaifu-Keitai by contacting DOCOMO. Omakase Lock protects your
important privacy and Osaifu-Keitai. Also, if Omakase Lock cannot be set
at subscription but the communication to your FOMA terminal becomes
available within one year, the lock will be automatically set. However, if
you cancel or halt the line contract, change your phone number, or have
your new UIM issued (only when you specify a phone number to lock it)
at the loss of the UIM, etc., the lock will not be automatically set even
within one year.
To release the lock, contact DOCOMO by phone, etc.
※If you are a member of the DOCOMO Premium Club, you can use this service as
often as you need without handling charge. If you are not, the service is available on
chargeable basis. (However, you are not charged if you apply for this service at the
same time as applying for the suspension of the line or during suspension.) Further, if
you have signed up for Keitai Anshin Pack (Mobile Phone Security Package), you can
use Omakase Lock within the flat-rate fee of Keitai Anshin Pack (Mobile Phone
Security Package).
※Even during Omakase Lock, your FOMA terminal corresponds to the location
provision request of GPS function if “Location request set.” is set for permission.
pFor details on Omakase Lock, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
<Omakase Lock>
Using Omakase Lock
■Setting/Releasing Omakase Lock
0120-524-360 Business hours: 24 hours
※You can set/release also from My docomo site via a personal computer or other
devices.
“Omakase lock” is displayed on the Stand-by display.
pDuring Omakase Lock, all the key operations are locked and respective functions
(including IC card functions) are disabled, except for answering voice calls/videophone
calls, putting them on answer-hold (On Hold), turning on/off the power, adjusting the
earpiece volume and adjusting the ring volume.
pYou can receive voice calls and videophone calls (except PushTalk calls), but the
callers’ data such as names and images stored in the Phonebook are not displayed
except for their phone numbers. In addition, the ring image and ring tone are reset to
the default. When you release Omakase Lock, the former settings return.
pMail messages received during Omakase Lock are held at the i-mode Center.
pYou can turn on/off the power, however, Omakase Lock is not released by turning off
the power.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Omakase Lock.
pNote that neither the UIM nor the microSD card is locked.
When Omakase Lock is set
Information
pEven while another function is working, Omakase Lock applies after finishing that
function.
pOmakase Lock can be set even when another lock function is set. However, if you
have set Public mode (Drive mode) before setting Omakase Lock, you cannot receive
voice calls and videophone calls.
pOmakase Lock cannot be set/released when the FOMA terminal is out of the service
area, turned off, or used overseas. Besides Omakase Lock might not be set
depending on your use, etc.
pWhen you have signed up for Dual Network Service and are using the mova service,
Omakase Lock cannot be set.
pEven when the contractor and the user of the FOMA terminal differ, the FOMA
terminal will be locked if the contractor offers to DOCOMO.
pYou can release Omakase Lock only when the UIM of the same phone number at
locking is inserted in your FOMA terminal. If you cannot release it, contact “docomo
Information Center” on the back page of this manual.
126
Security Settings
You can disable all phone calls and communication functions.
During Self Mode, the caller hears the guidance to the effect that radio
waves do not reach or the power is turned off. If you use DOCOMO Voice
Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service, you can use these services in
the same way as when the FOMA terminal is turned off.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecuritySelf modeYES
OK
“ ” appears and Self Mode is set.
pTo release Self Mode, perform the same operation.
<Self Mode>
Using Self Mode
Information
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even during Self Mode. In this case,
Self Mode is released.
pYou cannot receive mail messages, Area Mail messages, or Messages R/F during
Self Mode.
pEven if a call comes in during Self Mode, the icons notifying you of “Missed call” or
presence of Voice Mail messages do not appear after releasing Self Mode.
Including the functions which use personal information, you can set the
following functions not to be used.
<Personal Data Lock>
Hiding Phonebook Entries and Schedule
Events
・Desktop
・Record message
・Play/Erase msg.
・Select image
・Remote monitoring
・PushTalk phonebook
・Add to phonebook
・Group setting
・Search phonebook
・No. of phonebook
・Phonebook settings
・Voice dial
・Voice announce
・Kisekae Tool
・Machi-chara
・
Feel
＊
Mail image playback
・Restrictions
・Reject unknown
・Reset settings
・Initialize
・Mail
・Mail group
・Chat group
・i-mode
・Full Browser
・Bookmark
・i-Channel
・i-concier
・Camera
・Bar code reader
・1Seg
・Music&Video Channel
・MUSIC
・MUSIC player
・i-αppli
・i-Widget
・IC card content
・ToruCa
・GPS function
・Still image
・i-motion file
・Movie file
・Video
・Chara-den
・Melody
・microSD card
・Infrared communication
・iC communication
・Voice recorder
・PDF viewer
・Document viewer
・Alarm
・Schedule
・ToDo
・Alarm setting
・Own number
・Voice memo
・Movie memo
・Text memo
・UIM operation
・“Number setting” and
“Select ring tone” of Multi
number
・Data transfer
127
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityPersonal data lock
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Activate/Deactivate
“ ” appears and Personal Data Lock is set.
pYou can set Personal Data Lock also by pressing 6 for at least one second
from the Stand-by display.
pTo release Personal Data Lock, perform the same operation. When Timer Lock
ON At Close is set and Lock OFF At Open is activated, the display for releasing
Personal Data Lock appears also by opening the FOMA terminal.
When you set “PIM/IC security mode” to “Face reader”, follow the operation of
“Use Face Reader to Release Lock” on page 131.
When you set to “Double security”, enter your Terminal Security Code after the
operation on the page 131.
When you select a function which cannot be used during Personal Data Lock, the
display for entering your Terminal Security Code appears depending on the function.
When you enter your Terminal Security Code, “ ” is cleared and you can temporarily
use the function.
pWhen you show the Stand-by display while no menu function is activated, Personal
Data Lock is set again.
Setting/releasing Personal Data Lock
To temporally release Personal Data Lock
Information
pDuring Personal Data Lock, some notification icons and desktop icons such as
“Record message”, “Phone number”, “URL” and “Mail address” do not appear,
however, they reappear when you release Personal Data Lock.
pDuring Personal Data Lock, the “Pre-installed” substitute image is sent to the other
party if you send the substitute image during a videophone call.
pIf you set “Lock all” during Personal Data Lock, “ ” is cleared and “ ” appears
instead.
pYou cannot set Personal Data Lock while “Reject unknown” is set.
Even during Personal Data Lock, you can release the lock for some
functions such as a notice of alarm and mail receiving.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityPersonal data lock
Enter your Terminal Security CodeCustomize
Do the following operations.
Setting Performance During Personal Data Lock
Alarm tone
Alarm Accept or Not accept
Schedule alarm Accept or Not accept
ToDo alarm Accept or Not accept
TV timer Accept or Not accept
Timer recording Accept or Not accept
Incoming call act
Mail receiving Accept or Not accept
Information
receiving
Accept or Not accept
Phonebook
available
You can set whether to refer to the Phonebook for an
incoming call.
Accept or Not accept
Display/Tone
Display setting You can set whether to activate the setting contents for
“Display setting”.
Accept or Not accept
Select ring tone You can set whether to activate the setting contents for
“Select ring tone”.
Accept or Not accept
i-Channel ticker Accept or Not accept
128
Security Settings
You can set “Timer lock ON at close” that automatically activates Key
Lock, Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock when the specified time
elapses after closing your FOMA terminal.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Timer lock ON at close
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Key Lock, Personal data lock or IC card lock
Select an elapse time.
If you set to other than “OFF”, “ ” appears and then Timer Lock ON At Close is
set. If you set “Personal data lock” or “IC card lock” to other than “OFF”, the display
asking whether to activate “Lock OFF at open” also appears.
Information
<Mail receiving>
pWhen “Not accept” is set, you can automatically receive Messages R/F, i-mode mail
messages, chat mail messages, and SMS messages during Personal Data Lock;
however, the Receiving or Reception Result display does not appear. Further, the
receiving operation such as ringing/vibration does not work, so you are not notified of
receiving. The icons such as “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appear after Personal Data Lock is
released.
<Display setting>
pWhether to validate/invalidate the setting contents for “Stand-by display” of “2in1
setting” is also set.
<Lock Setting>
Setting a Variety of Locks
Timer Lock ON At Close
Information
pWhen the Stand-by display is not shown, or when another function is working with the
Stand-by display shown, the Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock is not activated
even after the specified time elapses. However, when another function ends after
closing the FOMA terminal, the lock is activated after the specified time elapses.
pWhen “Reject unknown” is set, Personal Data Lock is not activated even after the
specified time elapses.
You can set to show the display for releasing each lock for when you
open the FOMA terminal after Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock is set
by “Timer lock ON at close”.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Lock OFF at openEnter your Terminal Security Code
Personal data lock or IC card lockON or OFF
You can set the way to release Personal Data Lock and IC Card Lock.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
PIM/IC security mode
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Select a security mode.
Security code. . . . . .Enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock. The
setting is completed.
Face reader . . . . . . .Use Face Reader authentication to release the lock.
Double security. . . .Enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock after
using Face Reader authentication. The setting is completed.
2YES
pWhen a call or mail message comes in after closing the FOMA terminal, or when you
open it, the elapsed time counter returns to 0 seconds.
pWhen this function is activated, the lock is temporarily released if you release each
lock. However, it is re-locked when the specified time elapses after closing the FOMA
terminal.
pIf Key Lock is set during Timer Lock ON At Close, “ ” is cleared and “ ” or
“ ” appears instead.
Lock OFF at open
Information
PIM/IC Security Mode
129
Security Settings
You can store your face data files in Face Reader and use it for
authentication when releasing IC Card Lock or Personal Data Lock. To
use Face Reader, you need to store three or more face data files and set
“PIM/IC security mode” to either “Face reader” or “Double security”.
■Notes on using Face Reader
pThe dirty camera might result in erroneous operation. Use this function after wiping it
with a soft cloth to clean the dirt off.
pIn environment where the face is exposed to strong light and the brightness
significantly differs depending on the region of the face, the face will not be recognized
easily. In this case, storing might become difficult or the recognition rate (the rate of
correct identification) might be lowered. Adjust so that the face is exposed to even light.
pThe face might not be recognized normally when its entire part is exposed to the light
and becomes white.
pStoring the face might become difficult or the recognition rate might be lowered when
the face conditions are as described below:
・When the features of the face (eyes, mouth, nose, and eyebrows, etc.) are hard to
see as they are covered by hair, glasses, or a mask
・When the brightness significantly differs depending on the region of the face such as
when you are under the light in a dark place
pThe recognition rate might rise by reacting in accordance with the face conditions such
as by raising the hair so that the eyes, nose, mouth, and eyebrows are clearly visible
(taking the glasses and mask off) or moving to a place where the face is exposed to
even light. The recognition rate rises also by storing the face data file additionally.
pThe face authentication technology does not completely guarantee that you are
recognized as yourself. Accordingly, we are not at all responsible for damages
resulting from the use of this product by a third party or when the damages are caused
by what you could not use the function because of wrong authentication by Face
Reader.
Information
pYou cannot change PIM/IC Security Mode when the face data files stored by Face
Reader Setting are fewer than three, or during Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock.
<Face Reader Setting>
Using Face Reader
To use Face Reader, store 3 or more face data files. You can store up to
10 face data files.
1mSet./Service
Lock/Security
Lock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal
Security CodeStore
OK
Face to the front, and locate the face
within the guide frame. You can
prevent the failure in authenticating
the face data file, which results from
the difference in the position of the
face at storing and authenticating the data.
When your face is recognized, the recognition frame for the eyes and mouth is
displayed and the guide frame becomes green. When the recognition frame is not
displayed or it comes off your eyes and mouth, place your face off the frame; then
change the facing direction of your face to correctly display the recognition frame.
pThe number of face data files is displayed by the bar on the Face Data Reading
display.
2Press Oo( ).
The face data file is shot.
3Press Oo( ).
The face data file you have shot is stored. Repeat step 2 through step 3 to store
three or more face data files.
pWhen the third face data file is stored, the message appears telling that Face
Reader can be more easily used by adding face data file.
pWhen you press r, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete
the face data file.
pIf you try to store the face data file in the same environment, you might not be
able to store it. Change the direction of the face or the place for shooting.
Store
Face Data Reading
display
Stored number bar
Guide frame
Recognition frame
130
Security Settings
You can reset all the face data files stored in Face Reader.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Delete stored imagesYES
Information
pAt shooting, the Call/Charging indicator flickers and the shutter tone sounds
regardless of the Manner Mode setting. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be
changed.
Function Menu of the Face Data Reading Display
Brightness You can adjust to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pYou can adjust brightness also by pressing 3 from the Face
Data Reading display.
Help You can check the cautions for shooting.
pYou can show Help also by pressing 0 from the Face Data
Reading display.
Delete Stored Images
At Face reader
start-up
±0
Information
pYou cannot reset the face data files during Personal Data Lock or IC Card Lock.
pWhen you reset the face data files, “PIM/IC security mode” is set to “Security code”.
The images not judged as yourself by Face Reader recognition operation
are saved. You can use these images to specify who tried to illegally
access your data.
The image is overwritten every time recognition-failed image is made.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Recog. failed imageSelect an image.
pTo delete the recognition-failed images, press i( ), select “Delete this”,
and then select “YES”.
You can set Face Reader to additionally recognize blinking of the eyes.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Face reader securityNormal or High
Normal . . .Does not recognize blinking of the eyes.
High. . . . . .Recognizes blinking of the eyes.
You can set a security code to be entered instead of the Face Reader
authentication for when “PIM/IC security mode” is set to “Face reader” or
“Double security”.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Face reader setting
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Change security code
Enter the current Face Reader Security Code.
pIf you enter the code for the first time, enter “0000”.
Recognition-failed Image
Face Reader Security
Change Security Code
131
Security Settings
2Enter a new Face Reader Security Code (four to eight
digits)YES
When “PIM/IC security mode” is set to “Face reader”, use Face Reader to
release the lock instead of using your Terminal Security Code.
When it is set to “Double security”, use Face Reader for authentication
and then enter your Terminal Security Code to release the lock.
1Display for releasing Personal Data Lock/IC Card Lock
Match the face to the guide frame and press
Oo( ).
Face to the front, and locate the face
within the guide frame. The
recognition frame for the eyes and
mouth is displayed, and the guide
frame becomes green. When the
recognition frame is not displayed or
it comes off, place your face off the
frame; then change the facing
direction of your face to correctly
display the recognition frame.
pPerform the operation for authentication with the same facial expression as when
you stored the face data file.
pPress l( ) and enter your Face Reader Security Code; then you can
operate to authenticate instead of using Face Reader.
For the Face Reader Security Code, see page 130.
When additional storing of the face data file is possible, select “OK” to show the
confirmation display asking whether to store additional face data file. Select “YES”, enter
your Terminal Security Code; then you can store additional face data file. When you
cannot store any more face data files, select “OK” to show the Face Data Reading
display. If the shot face is judged as another person, a shutter tone sounds and the
recognition-failed image is saved. Select “OK” to show the Face Data Reading display.
Try authentication using Face Reader again.
pWhen 10 face data files are stored and a new data file is added, the oldest data file is
overwritten.
Use Face Reader to Release Lock
Face Data Reading
display
Guide frame
Recognition frame
If you failed to be authenticated
After you are successfully authenticated by Face Reader, your eye blinking is checked.
Repeat blinking your eyes slowly.
When the detection of eye blinking fails, the authentication also fails.
pEven in the same environment as that for the authentication by Face Reader, the
detection of eye blinking may fail. Change the place or the direction of your face, and
then operate.
You can lock dialing from the numeric keys. When using the FOMA
terminal for business purposes, private use of the FOMA terminal can be
prevented.
■Unavailable operations
・Dialing from the numeric keys
・Initial setting
・Phonebook (storing, editing, deleting, copying from the microSD card,
backing up/restoring by the microSD card, sending/receiving using Infrared rays,
sending/receiving using iC communication, and sending/receiving using Bluetooth
communication)
・Phone To/AV Phone To function
・Mail To function
■Available operations
・Dialing from the Phonebook or Voice Dial
・Dialing from Redial, Dialed Calls, Received Calls, Sent Address, or Received Address
(Only phone numbers stored in the Phonebook)
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityKeypad dial lock
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
“ ” is displayed and Keypad Dial Lock is set.
pTo release Keypad Dial Lock, perform the same operation.
When “Face reader security” is set to “High”
<Keypad Dial Lock>
Locking Keypad Dial
Information
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 using numeric keys even during
Keypad Dial Lock.
132
Security Settings
You can disable the keys except h.
1Press and hold Oo for at least one second.
“ ” or “ ” appears and Key Lock is set to “ON”.
pTo set to “OFF”, perform the same operation.
pIf you set Keypad Dial Lock, you can send mail only when the address is called up
from the Phonebook and when the address stored in the Phonebook is called up from
Sent Address or Received Address.
<Key Lock>
Restricting Key Operation
Information
Information
pYou cannot turn off the FOMA terminal during Key Lock. You cannot switch display/
nondisplay of icons and other indications by pressing -h from the Stand-by display.
pWhen you close the FOMA terminal during Key Lock, the FOMA terminal switches to
Power Saver Mode regardless of the setting of “Backlight” on page 112. However, the
FOMA terminal might not switch to Power Saver Mode depending on the function in
use.
pEven during Key Lock, Quick Record Message works when you press and hold .> for
at least one second while a voice call or videophone call is arriving.
pEven during Key Lock, you can answer an incoming call by pressing -d and an
incoming PushTalk call by pressing .p. You can get the talker’s right by pressing .p
during the PushTalk communication.
pYou can operate an earphone/microphone (option) and Bluetooth devices regardless
of the setting of this function.
pGPS Location Provision is available even during Key Lock.
You can set whether to temporarily release Key Lock when you open the
FOMA terminal.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityLock setting
Key lock settingSelect an item.
Lock even slide open . . . . . Even when you open the FOMA terminal, Key Lock
is not released.
Unlock when slide open. . . When you open the FOMA terminal, Key Lock is
temporarily released. During temporary release,
“ ” is displayed.
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callRecord display set
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Received calls . . . . . . . . .Sets whether to display Received Calls and Received
Address.
Redial/Dialed calls. . . . . .Sets whether to display Redial, Dialed Calls and Sent
Address.
2ON or OFF
pWhen you set “Received calls” to “OFF”, you cannot play back record messages
of voice calls, either.
Key Lock Setting
Information
pIf you close the FOMA terminal during temporary release, Key Lock is set again.
<Record Display Set>
Setting not to Display Redial/Received
Calls
133
Security Settings
In ordinary mode, you cannot access/refer to Phonebook entries or
schedule events stored as secret data. In Secret Mode, you can select
whether to store the stored/edited Phonebook entries/schedule events as
secret data or as ordinary data. The Phonebook entries/schedule events
you have stored/edited in Secret Data Only are stored as secret data.
You can access/refer to all the data files in Secret Mode but can access/
refer to only the secret data files in Secret Data Only.
1mSet./ServiceLock/Security
Secret mode or Secret data only
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
When “Secret mode” is selected, “ ” appears and Secret Mode is activated.
When “Secret data only” is selected, “ ” blinks, the number of stored secret data
items is displayed, and then Secret Data Only is activated.
pSecret mode is activated also by pressing and holding 4 for at least one
second from the Stand-by display and entering your Terminal Security Code.
pIf you call up a Phonebook entry or schedule event in Secret Mode, “ ” stays lit
for ordinary data and “ ” blinks for secret data.
pTo deactivate Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, perform the same operation, or
press and hold 4(for at least one second) or press h from the Stand-by
display.
In Secret Mode or Secret Data Only, select “Release secret” from the Function menu of
the Phonebook entry or schedule event to be released.
<Secret Mode> <Secret Data Only>
Protecting Phonebook Entries and
Schedule Events from Prying Eyes
+m-4-0
Activate Secret Mode
+m-4-1
Activate Secret Data Only
To change secret data to an ordinary Phonebook entry or
schedule event
You can set whether to display the mail (secret mail) message from the
sender or to the destination address that matches secret data in the
Phonebook.
1lMail settingsSecret mail display
Enter your Terminal Security CodeON or OFF
Information
pOnly the Phonebook entries in the FOMA terminal can be stored as secret data.
pWhen you make a call to the party stored as secret data, his/her name is not
displayed but the phone number is displayed on the Dialing/Talking display.
pIf you call up a secret entry to make a call or send mail, the record is not stored in
“Redial”, “Dialed calls” or “Sent address”.
pIf you simultaneously activate “Lock all” and “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”,
deactivating “Lock all” deactivates “Secret mode” or “Secret data only”.
<Secret Mail Display>
Applying Secret for Mail in Mailbox
Information
pEven when “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, you can check secret mail in Secret
Mode or in Secret Data Only.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, and any secret address is included in
addresses of simultaneous mail, that mail message is not displayed.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, and any secret member is included in chat
members, chat mail messages of all chat members are not displayed.
pWhen “Secret mail display” is set to “OFF”, Area Mail messages are not displayed in
Secret Data Only.
134
Security Settings
You can set the security function for the Inbox, Outbox and Draft of the
Mail menu.
You need to enter your Terminal Security Code to display the mail
messages in security-activated boxes.
1lMail settingsMail security
Enter your Terminal Security Code
Put a check mark for boxes to be setl( )
pWhen security is set, “ ” is added to the set box in the Mail menu.
Restrict Dialing
You can disable making voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls to phone
numbers other than specified ones. When you use the FOMA terminal for business use,
this function is useful for preventing the private use. Call up the specified Phonebook
entry and press d or Oo( ) to make a voice call. (Press l( ) to make
a videophone call, and press p to make a PushTalk call.) You can specify up to 20
phone numbers.
Call Rejection
You can reject voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls from specified phone
numbers. You can set only the calls you do not want to receive to be rejected. The caller
hears a busy tone. You can specify up to 20 phone numbers.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is
advisable to activate “Caller ID request” and “Call setting w/o ID” simultaneously.
<Mail Security>
Setting not to Display Mail in Mailbox
without Permission
Information
pIf you set security for the Outbox and Inbox, mail addresses are not stored in Sent
Address and Received Address.
<Restrictions>
Setting Restrictions on Phonebook Entries
Call Acceptance
You can receive voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls only from specified
phone numbers. You can set only the calls you want to accept to be connected. You can
specify up to 20 phone numbers.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone number. It is
advisable to activate “Caller ID request” simultaneously.
1Detailed Phonebook displayi( )
Restrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Restrict dialing . . . You can dial the specified phone numbers only.
Call rejection . . . . . You can reject calls from the specified phone numbers.
Call acceptance. . . You can accept calls from the specified phone numbers only.
Call forwarding . . . See page 437.
Voice mail. . . . . . . . See page 434.
The set item is indicated by “★”.
pWhen a Phonebook entry contains multiple phone numbers, press Mo on the
detailed display to highlight the phone number you will set Restrictions for.
pTo set Restrict Dialing for multiple phone numbers, first set Restrict Dialing and
press r to return to the detailed Phonebook display; Mo to highlight the phone
number to be set for Restrict Dialing and continue the operation.
If you press h to return to the Stand-by display, additional settings cannot be
done. To do additional settings, release Restrict Dialing for the set phone number
and activate Restrict Dialing again, including the released phone number.
pTo release Restrictions, perform the same operation.
Restrict Dialing/Call Rejection/Call Acceptance
Information
pYou cannot set this function for Phonebook entries stored as secret data, and in the
UIM Phonebook.
pIf you activate “Personal data lock” while “Call rejection” or “Call acceptance” is set,
you can accept all incoming calls.
pYou cannot operate the following while “Restrict dialing” is set:
・Calling up/Referring to phone numbers other than specified
・Keypad dial (except for the calls to the specified phone numbers)
・Dialing from Received Calls (except for the calls from the specified phone numbers)
・Storing/Editing/Deleting Phonebook entries, copying Phonebook entries from the
microSD card, backing up/restoring by the microSD card, and copying Phonebook
entries to the UIM
135
Security Settings
1mPhonebookRestrictions
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
pThe set item is indicated by “★”.
pTo release all the Phonebook entries set with Restrictions, press i( ),
select “Release”, and then select “YES”.
2Select a Phonebook entry.
The phone number set with Restrictions is displayed.
pTo release “Restrictions” per phone number, select the phone number you want
to release and select “YES”.
pYou can make emergency calls at 110/119/118 even if you set “Restrict dialing”.
pWhen a call comes in from the phone number set with “Call rejection”, or from other
than the phone number set with “Call acceptance”, the call is stored in “Received
calls” as a missed call record and the “Missed call” icon appears on the Stand-by
display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or
Call Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail
Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played
back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of the setting of
“Call rejection” or “Call acceptance”.
Check/Release Restrictions on Phonebook Entries
Information
You can set whether to receive (accept) or not to receive (reject) a voice
call, videophone call, and PushTalk call according to the reason for no
caller ID. There are three reasons; “Unavailable”, “PublicPhone”, and
“User unset”.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityCall setting w/o ID
Enter your Terminal Security CodeSelect an item.
Unavailable . . . . . Calls from the other party who cannot notify his/her phone
number such as calls from overseas or from land-line phones
via call forwarding services.
(However, the caller ID might be notified depending on the
telephone companies the calls go through.)
PublicPhone . . . . Calls from public phones, etc.
User unset. . . . . . When the caller has set the caller ID not to be notified.
2Accept or Reject
pIf you select “Accept”, go to step 2 on page 102 to select a ring tone.
If you select “Same as ring tone”, the ring tone will be the one selected in “Phone”
of “Select ring tone”.
+m-1-0
<Call Setting without ID>
Setting Response to Incoming Calls
without Caller ID
Information
pIf you select “Reject”, the ring tone does not sound even if a call comes in, the call is
stored in “Received calls” as a missed call record and the “Missed call” icon appears
on the Stand-by display. Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice
Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time
for Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA
terminal is out of the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will
not be played back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pYou can receive SMS messages or i-mode mail messages regardless of this setting.
136
Security Settings
1mSet./ServiceIncoming callRing time
Do the following operations.
+m-9-0
<Ring Time>
Delaying Start of Ringing Operation
Ring start time You can set the FOMA terminal not to start ringing operation
immediately for when a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk
call comes in from the party whose phone number is not stored in
the Phonebook. This function is effective as a countermeasure for
blocking nuisance calls such as one ring phone scam (one-giri).
ON or OFFEnter a start time (seconds).
pEnter from “01” through “99” in two digits.
Missed calls display You can set whether to display the call disconnected within the
time specified for “Ring start time” in Received Calls.
Display or Not display
Information
pWhen a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored in the
Phonebook, the FOMA terminal starts ringing as soon as the call comes in even if
“186”/“184” is added to the phone number. However, during Personal Data Lock
(except for when you set “Phonebook available” to “Accept” for “Customize”), or for
the call from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, ringing starts
according to the setting for this function.
pIf the ring start time is longer than the ring time for Record Message Setting, the
ringing operations do not start, activating Record Message instead. To activate
Record Message after starting the ringing operations, set the longer ring time for
Record Message Setting than the ring start time. The same applies to the ring time for
Voice Mail Service, Call Forwarding Service, and Auto Answer Setting.
You can reject voice calls, videophone calls, and PushTalk calls from the
party whose phone number is not stored in the Phonebook.
This function is valid only when the other party notifies his/her phone
number. It is advisable to activate “Caller ID request” and “Call setting
w/o ID” simultaneously.
1mSet./ServiceLock/SecurityReject unknown
Enter your Terminal Security CodeAccept or Reject
<Reject Unknown>
Rejecting Incoming Calls from Phone
Numbers which are not Stored in
Phonebooks
Information
pIf a call comes in from the party whose phone number is stored as secret data, the call
is not rejected, regardless of this setting.
pIf you simultaneously activate “Reject unknown” and “Call acceptance” of
“Restrictions”, the latter has priority.
pWhen a call comes in from anyone whose phone number is not stored in the
Phonebook while you set this function to “Reject”, the call is stored in “Received calls”
as a missed call record, and the “Missed call” icon appears on the Stand-by display.
Also, the caller hears a busy tone even if you have set Voice Mail Service or Call
Forwarding Service to “Activate”. However, if you set the ring time for Voice Mail
Service or Call Forwarding Service to 0 seconds, when the FOMA terminal is out of
the service area, or when the power is turned off, the busy tone will not be played
back, activating Voice Mail Service or Call Forwarding Service.
pEven when this function is set to “Reject”, the FOMA terminal follows the setting of
“Call setting w/o ID” if each setting of “Call setting w/o ID” is set to “Accept”.
pYou can receive SMS and i-mode mail messages regardless of this setting.
pYou cannot set “Reject unknown” during Personal Data Lock.
pYou cannot set “Reject unknown” to “Reject” while “Ring start time” of “Ring time” is
set to “ON”.
137
Security Settings
This service enables you to save the Phonebook, images, mail
messages, ToruCa files, and schedule events (hereafter, “saved data
files”) in your FOMA terminal to the DOCOMO’s Data Storage Center and
to restore them when you unexpectedly lose your handset or change
models. Further, you can notify the concerned parties of your mail
address change at a time. You are not charged a packet communication
fee for sending the multi-address notice mail. If you have a personal
computer (My docomo), you can use this service more conveniently.
pFor details on Data Security Service, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
pData Security Service is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis (You
need to subscribe to i-mode to apply for Data Security Service).
1Display of the data file to be savedi( )
Move/copyConnect to Center or Store in Center
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pYou do not need to select “Move/copy” depending on the function.
pWhen you operate from the Inbox list, Outbox list, Draft list, or Still Image list, put
a check mark for the data files to be saved and press l( ).
You can select up to 10 data files.
<Data Security Service>
Using Data Security Service
Save to Data Storage Center
Information
pYou cannot save the data files stored on the UIM or microSD card.
pYou cannot save the files attached to mail.
pYou cannot save the following images:
・Images whose sizes exceed 100 Kbytes
・Images whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited
・Images other than in JPEG or GIF format
Note that if you delete Phonebook entries from your FOMA terminal and save
the Phonebook to the Data Storage Center, the Phonebook entries on the
Data Storage Center are also deleted. When you restore the Phonebook from
the Data Storage Center to your FOMA terminal, do the following operations.
1iEnglishMy Menu
電話帳お預かり (Data Security Service)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)
Enter your i-mode password.
pWhen you have subscribed to i-concier, operate iEnglishMy Menu
お預かり／ｉコンシェル (Data Storage/i-concier)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)Enter your i-mode password.
2
Select “
ケータイへダウンロード
(Download to mobile
phone)” from the Phonebook on the Data Storage Center
OK
pDownload starts in about 15 seconds. Wait for a while with the Stand-by display
shown.
On the site of the Data Storage Center, you can set so as to periodically
update and save the Phonebook entries in your FOMA terminal to the
Data Storage Center.
Restoring to your FOMA terminal
Information
pWhen the Phonebook entries saved to the Data Storage Center exceeds the number
of Phonebook entries storable in the FOMA terminal’s Phonebook, the excess entries
cannot be updated.
Auto-update of the Phonebook
Information
pThe data files are not automatically updated while another function is working at the
time of Auto-update.
pIf the data files cannot be updated, the notification icon of “ ” (Data Sec. Service
UD) appears on the desktop. Select “ ” to show the update display.
138
Security Settings
1mLifeKitData Security Service
Do the following operations.
You can configure settings for Data Security Service.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
自動お預かり／更新設定 (Automatic saving/Update
settings)Follow the instructions on the display.
You can check the data files at the Data Storage Center.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)
Follow the instructions on the display.
Setting Data Security Service
Connect to Center See page 137.
Exchanging history You can display the records of communication with the Data
Storage Center.
Select a record.
pSelect a communication completion time in the list to switch to
the detailed display.
PB image sending You can set whether to save images set for the Phonebook
entries to the Data Storage Center.
ON or OFF
Information
<Exchanging history>
pUp to 30 records are saved. When more than 30 records are saved, the older records
are overwritten.
<PB image sending>
pYou cannot save the images whose output from FOMA terminal is prohibited.
Using Data Security Service with i-concier
自動お預かり／更新設定
(Automatic saving/Update settings)
お預かりデータ確認 (Check saved data)
You can update the data files at the Data Storage Center and in the FOMA
terminal.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かりデータ更新 (Update stored data)
Put a check mark for data files to be updated
l( )Enter your Terminal Security Code
YES
You can show the records of communication with the Data Storage Center.
1mi-concierl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
お預かり通信履歴 (Communication records of saving)
Select a record.
p
Select a communication completion time from the list to show the detailed display.
You can reset the items indicated by of “Function List” to their
default. (See page 466)
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsReset settings
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
お預かりデータ更新 (Update stored data)
お預かり通信履歴 (Communication records of saving)
+m-2-3
<Reset Settings>
Resetting Function Settings
Information
pYou cannot execute “Reset settings” while a Bluetooth device is connected or on
standby for connection.
pYou cannot execute “Reset settings” during IC Card Lock while “PIM/IC security
mode” is set to “Face reader” or “Double security”.
pAfter you execute “Reset settings”, the i-Channel tickers are not displayed. Then,
when the information is automatically updated or you press *Zo to receive the latest
information, the tickers automatically flow.
139
Security Settings
You can delete the saved data and reset the setting contents of each
function to the default.
See “Function List” on page 466 for the setting at purchase.
pThe pre-installed data files are not deleted.
pAll the Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli programs except “iD 設定アプリ (iD appli)” are
deleted. However, they might not be deleted depending on your usage state.
pThe data files stored in the pre-installed i-αppli programs are deleted. However, the
data files stored in Osaifu-Keitai compatible i-αppli programs that have not been
deleted are not deleted.
pThe protected data files are also deleted.
pAll the stored data files are deleted regardless of the mode of 2in1.
pEven if you have deleted the pre-installed data files, they are restored when you
execute “Initialize”. However, if you delete the pre-installed i-αppli programs, they are
not restored.
pCharge the battery full before initializing the FOMA terminal. When the battery level is
not enough, you may not be able to initialize the FOMA terminal.
pDuring initialization, never turn off the power of the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot use other functions during initialization. Also, you cannot receive calls or
mail messages.
1mSet./ServiceOther settingsInitialize
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYESYES
When initializing ends, the power automatically turns off and then turns on and the
“Initial setting” display appears.
<Initialize>
Deleting Saved Data All at Once
Information
pYou cannot execute “Initialize” while a Bluetooth device is connected or on standby for
connection.
pYou cannot execute “Initialize” during IC Card Lock while “PIM/IC security mode” is
set to “Face reader” or “Double security”.
pYou cannot delete the data saved to, stored in, or set for the UIM or the microSD card.
pYou cannot delete the setting of data communication set by a personal computer.
If you contract with the service of this function (Business mopera anshin
manager), you can initialize the data files (memory within the handset/
microSD card/UIM) of the target FOMA terminal by the offer from you
(administrator).
The display appears telling that operation is disabled and the initialization starts.
pWhen Remote Reset launches, all the key operations are locked and you cannot
operate the functions except for answering voice calls and answer-hold (On Hold).
When the initialization starts, you cannot use all the functions.
pWhen Remote Reset launches while the phone is ringing or during a call, all the key
operations except for d and h are locked. When initialization starts, ringing or the
call automatically finishes.
pTo restore the i-αppli programs, download them from the “P-SQUARE” site. For
downloading, you are charged an additional communication fee.
pAfter you execute “Initialize”, the i-Channel tickers are not displayed. Then, when the
information is automatically updated or you press *Zo to receive the latest
information, the tickers automatically flow.
pAfter you initialize the FOMA terminal, you cannot automatically obtain Music&Video
Channel programs. Access the Setting Confirmation display from the Music&Video
Channel menu to reflect the program setting.
pInitialization may take a while if the data to be deleted is bulky.
<Remote Reset>
Resetting Data by Remote Control
Information
■Inquiries
docomo Business Online
From personal computers http://www.docomo.biz (in Japanese only)
※You may not be able to access due to system maintenance, etc.
When Remote Reset launches
Information
p“Set time” is not initialized.
pThe microSD card might not be initialized when the FOMA terminal is connected to a
personal computer.
140
Security Settings
Besides introduced in this chapter, the following functions/services for
the Security Settings are available:
Other Security Settings
Functions/Service name Purposes
Reference
page
IC Card Lock To protect the IC card function from
being used illegally 312
Nuisance Call Blocking Service To prevent crank calls or vicious sales
calls from incoming 437
Caller ID Request To prevent the incoming call that does
not notify a caller ID 438
FirstPass To ensure safe and reliable data
communication by using electronic
authentication services
※Limited to FirstPass sites
213
Software Update To update software programs in the
FOMA terminal when necessary 515
Scanning Function To protect the FOMA terminal from
data liable to cause trouble 520
Receive Option To receive necessary mail only from
among the large volume of incoming
mail
155
i-mode Disaster Message Board
Service
Refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”
Change Mail Address
Spam Mail Prevention
(Reject Mail with URL)
(Reject/Receive Mail Settings)
(Kantan Mail Settings)
(Reject Mass i-mode Mail Senders)
(SMS Rejection Settings)
(Reject Unsolicited Ad Mail)
(Confirm Settings)
Suspend/reactivate Mail
Limit Mail Size
Keitai-Osagashi Service
imadoco kantan search
Functions/Service name Purposes
Reference
page
Information
pThe priority order of functions simultaneously set to prevent nuisance calls is as
follows: “Nuisance Call Blocking Service” → “Call rejection” → “Reject unknown/Call
setting w/o ID” → “Ring time”.
141
Mail
i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Composing i-mode Mail/Deco-mail
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Compose Message> 142
Creating and Sending Deco-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Creating and Sending Decome-Anime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Using a Template to Create Deco-mail/ Decome-Anime
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Template> 150
Attaching a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Attachments> 152
Receiving and Operating i-mode Mail
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically . . . .<Mail Auto-receive> 154
Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively . . . . . . . <Receive Option> 155
Checking New i-mode Mail . . . . . . . . <Check New Messages> 155
Replying to Received i-mode Mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Reply> <Reply with Quote> 156
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Forward> 156
When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/Pasted is Received . . . 157
Operating Mailbox
Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox/Draft
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft> 158
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and Detailed Display . . . . 160
Managing Mail Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Using Mail History
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Sent Address> <Received Address> 169
Configuring Mail Settings
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder . . . . . . <Auto-sort> 171
Creating Mail Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Mail Group> 173
Setting Mail and Messages R/F . . . . . . . . . . . . <Mail Settings> 174
Using Message Services
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Receive Message R/F> 176
Reading Received Messages R/F . . . . <Display Message R/F> 177
Using Early Warning “Area Mail”
Early Warning “Area Mail” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Receiving Early Warning “Area Mail” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setting Early Warning “Area Mail”
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Early Warning “Area Mail” Settings> 180
Using Chat Mail
Using Chat Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chat Mail> 181
Creating Chat Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Chat Group> 184
Using SMS
Composing and Sending SMS . . . . . . . . . . . <Compose SMS> 185
Receiving SMS Automatically. . . . . . . . . . . . . .<Receive SMS> 186
Checking New SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Check New SMS> 187
Setting SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <SMS Settings> 187
142
Mail
Once you subscribe to i-mode, you can exchange e-mails over the
Internet as well as among i-mode phones.
You can attach files (photos, moving picture files, etc.) within 2 Mbytes in
total (up to 10 files) besides mail text. The i-mode mail also supports
Deco-mail, so you can change the font color, font size, and background
color of mail text. You can use the Deco-mail pictograms, so you can
easily send expressive messages.
Further, it supports Decome-Anime of Flash movies with messages and
images inserted.
pFor details on i-mode mail, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
You can compose and send i-mode mail messages.
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages to the Outbox.
See page 145 for creating a Deco-mail message.
1ll( )
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can
select your sender’s address by
“ChangeFromAddr A/B” (see
page 444). “ ” instead of “ ”
is displayed when no sender’s
address is set, and “ ” instead
of “ ” is displayed when the
sender’s address is set for
Address B.
i-mode Mail
<Compose Message>
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail
Message
Composition display
Address field
Subject field
Attachment field
Text field
(When you enter
text, the number of
bytes is displayed.)
2Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number or
mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press
Oo( ).
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address and press
Oo( ).
Mail group . . . . . . . . . Select a mail group.
Enter address . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pIf the destination is an i-mode phone, you can send mail also by entering only the
part preceding the “@” mark of a mail address.
pSee page 143 for sending to multiple destination addresses.
pSee page 144 for deleting an added address.
3Select the subject fieldEnter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
4Select the attachment fieldSelect an item.
pSee page 152 for how to select an attachment.
5Select the text fieldEnter text.
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pSee page 144 for pasting a header or signature.
pSee page 424 for the Function menu while entering
(editing) characters.
6Press l( ).
The animation display during transmission appears and the mail message is sent.
pTo cancel sending midway, press Oo( ) or press and hold r(for at least
one second). However, the mail message might be sent depending on the timing.
Message Entry
display
143
Mail
7OK
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be displayed
correctly at the destination.
pIf you send an i-mode mail message with a pictogram entered to another carrier’s
mobile phone, the pictogram is automatically converted into a similar pictogram at the
receiving end. Depending on the model or function of the receiving end’s mobile
phone, however, the pictogram might not be correctly displayed or be converted into a
character or “=” when no corresponding pictogram is found.
pWhen the sent mail messages stored in the FOMA terminal exceed the maximum
number/size of storage, they are deleted from the oldest one. However, protected
sent mail messages are not deleted.
pYou cannot compose an i-mode mail message when sent mail messages in the
Outbox are saved to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are
protected, when 20 draft mail messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages,
and then operate again.
pWhen you select “Compose message” from the Function menu such as when
entering a phone number, the mail address is entered as a destination address if the
phone number and mail address are stored in a Phonebook entry. When multiple mail
addresses are stored in the Phonebook entry, the first mail address is entered.
pIf you try to send the mail whose address is a phone number headed by “184”/“186”,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send
the mail.
pWhen a destination phone number or mail address is stored in a Phonebook entry,
the name stored in the Phonebook entry is displayed in the address field.
pYou cannot send mail to the addresses that include a comma (,).
pYou can enter an address in the To, Cc and Bcc fields.
pIf a Phonebook entry with a secret code is set as a destination address, the secret
code will be automatically added at sending. Even if a secret code is set for the
Phonebook entry, however, it will not be added and the i-mode mail message will be
sent as ordinary one unless the destination address is a phone number or “phone
number@docomo.ne.jp”.
p
If you store the secret code and send mail to a mail address other than that of DOCOMO
mobile phones, you might not receive the error message for unknown address.
pThe recipients might not be able to receive the full length of the subject depending on
their phones.
pYou can send up to 2,000 full-pitch characters in text to the i-mode phone of the mova
service.
pEach line feed is counted as one full-pitch character, and a space is counted as one
full-pitch or half-pitch character.
pThe mail message you entered a Deco-mail pictogram becomes a Deco-mail
message.
Function Menu of the Message Composition Display
Information
Send You can send the mail message.
Go to step 7 on page 143.
Preview Check the address, subject, text and attachments before
sending.
pYou can send the mail message by pressing l( ).
Save When composing or editing the mail, you can save it to the
Draft.
Operate receiver
Add receiver You can add multiple addresses in the address field to send
the same i-mode mail to multiple recipients simultaneously.
You can send the same mail to up to five addresses at the
same time.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Sent address. . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Enter address . . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone
number.
pTo consecutively add addresses, select <Not entered> and
repeat the above operations.
pPress i( ) and select “Delete receiver” to delete
the selected mail address. Select “YES”.
pPress i( ) and select “Change rcv. type” to change
the type of mail. (See page 144)
pSelect an entered mail address on the Mail Composition
display to show the Address list.
l( )
144
Mail
Delete receiver You can delete the selected address when there are multiple
addresses.
YES
Change rcv. type Select a receiving type.
To . . . . . This is the direct destination address. “To” recipients
are displayed at the receiving ends.※
Cc . . . . . Specify to let parties know the mail contents in
addition to the direct recipients. “Cc” recipients are
displayed at the receiving ends.※
Bcc . . . . Specify to hide the recipients from others. “Bcc”
recipients are not displayed at the receiving ends.
※They might not be displayed depending on the mobile
phone, device, or mail software of the receiving end.
Operate att. file
Activate camera You can shoot a still image or moving picture to attach to mail.
Select a shooting mode.
pSee page 230 and page 233 for how to shoot.
Attach file See page 152.
Delete att. file See page 153.
Template
Load template You can read in a Deco-mail template and create a Deco-mail
message.
pWhen the text has already been entered, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to delete the text.
Select a template.
The contents of the template are entered into the text.
pWhile selecting a template, press l( ) to check the
contents of the template.
pSee page 145 for creating a Deco-mail message.
Save template You can save the Deco-mail message you are creating as a
template.
YES
pSee page 206 when templates are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 150 for how to check the stored template.
Add header/sig. You can paste a header/signature at the beginning or ending
of the text of the i-mode mail message.
Add header or Add signature
pYou need to store the header/signature beforehand. (See
page 175)
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, you can select a signature to be
pasted from “Address A” or “Address B”.
ChangeFromAddr A/B In Dual Mode of 2in1, you can select a sender’s address. (See
page 444)
Information
<Operate receiver>
pYou cannot add any addresses if the address field for “To”, “Cc”, and “Bcc” already
contains five addresses in total or contains no addresses.
pYou cannot send i-mode mail if the “To” field is blank.
<Save template>
pThe subject of i-mode mail you are composing will be the title of the template. If no
subject is entered, the title takes the name of “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”.
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
<Add header/sig.>
pYou cannot paste a header/signature if the text, including the header/signature, would
exceed 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf the decoration such as font color or font size is set for the top or end of text, the
header or signature will be decorated as well.
145
Mail
When editing an i-mode mail message, you can change the size of the
font and the color of the background as well as inserting images, thus
composing your own original mail.
You can create Deco-mail also using the templates (patterns).
(See page 150)
1Perform the operations in step 1 through step 4 on
page 142.
2Select the text fieldDecorate the text using Palette.
pSee page 146 for how to use Palette.
dSelect one of decorationsEnter text.
Enter textd(Select area)
Go to “Select area” on page 147.
pYou can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters. (The number of
characters you can enter decreases depending on the decoration.)
pOnce you decorate the mail text, “ ” appears.
pYou can preview the contents of the text by pressing p.
Press i( ) to finish previewing and return to the former display.
Creating and Sending Deco-mail
Entering characters
Activated
decoration
Preview
Font color
Font size
Swing
Moving
font effect
Word
alignment
Deco-mail
pictogram
Ticker
Blink
Background
color
Insert line
Insert image
To enter text after selecting decorations
To set decorations after entering text
3Press Oo( ).
The Message Composition display is displayed.
Go to step 6 on page 142.
You can decorate the text of i-mode mail using Palette.
You can set multiple decorations for one point.
pYou cannot combine Word Alignment, Ticker, and Swing for one point.
pLines are inserted by Line Insert with the color specified by Font Color.
pIf Word Alignment, Ticker, or Swing is specified, the images and moving font effects
are inserted with the specified state.
pYou can enter Deco-mail pictograms using “Insert image”, and by “Pictograms” on the
Function menu as well.
Information
pEven if you delete the decorated characters, only the decoration data remain and the
number of characters you can enter might decrease. Clear the decoration and then
delete the characters. If you delete the characters by pressing and holding -r for at
least one second, the characters as well as the decoration data are deleted.
pWhen you reply with quote to a received Deco-mail message or you forward it, the
decorations and inserted images are entered in text as they are.
pIf you use a template containing an image unable to attach to mail for sending, the
image is deleted.
pWhen you send a Deco-mail message in excess of 10,000 bytes, the mail message
with the URL for browsing is received at some destination i-mode phones. However,
only the mail text without the URL for browsing might be received at some models.
pDecorations might not be correctly displayed if you send/receive Deco-mail messages
to/from the devices such as personal computers.
pThe movement of Ticker/Swing, blink and animation playback stop when a certain
period has passed.
Decorations
146
Mail
■How to use Palette
Press d from the Message Entry display to display Palette.
pWhen the cursor is over the decorated character, the Palette
appears with the icon for the set decoration depressed.
Highlight the depressed icon and press Oo( ); then
you can change, complete or cancel the decoration. You can
release the area selection also by pressing r while the
area is selected.
pPress i( ) to close Palette. You can close Palette
also by pressing r while you are operating on it.
Switch operations
You can switch between the operation of Palette and the
operation of entering text, each time you press d. You can
move the cursor and enter text with Palette displayed.
pAfter you enter text, the text entry operation returns.
When you use Palette in succession, press d and operate it.
■How to operate Decoration
Palette operation
Insert image
Font effect You can convert characters to a mark and insert it into the
text. The mark animates in various ways and conveys your
feelings to the other party.
Select a moving font effectEnter text.
pTo delete the moving font effect, move the cursor to the
moving font effect and press r.
My picture You can insert the image stored in “My picture” into the text of
mail.
Select a folderSelect an image.
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and
press r.
Camera You can insert the image shot by the camera on the spot into
the text of mail.
Shoot a still image.
pThe image size of the camera is Sub-QCIF (96 x 128), QCIF
(144 x 176) or QVGA (240 x 320).
pTo delete the image, move the cursor to the image and
press r.
pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 230 for how to shoot.
Font color You can change the color of characters and lines to be
entered.
Select a colorEnter text.
pYou can switch between “20 Color” and “256 Color” by
pressing l( ).
pIn the font color changing mode, “ ” is displayed at the
upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
Background color
You can change the background color of the mail text.
Select a color.
pYou can switch between “19 Color” and “256 Color” by
pressing l( ).
Insert line You can insert a horizontal line into the mail text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and the line is inserted.
pTo delete the line, move the cursor to the line and press r.
Undo You can return to the former status of the set decoration. You
can do it up to twice.
pYou can undo the operation also by pressing and holding
d for at least one second.
Reset all decor. You can release all the decorations.
YES
pIf you have inserted an image, the message “In-line image is
deleted” is displayed.
147
Mail
Select area You can set Font Color, Blink, Font Size, Word Alignment,
Ticker and Swing over the selected text you have entered.
You can also change the set decoration, add another
decoration, or cancel Blink, Ticker or Swing.
Select a start point.
pYou can select all text by pressing i( ) and
selecting “YES”.
Select an end point.
Set, change, add or cancel each decoration.
p“ ” is displayed at the upper right of the display
during selecting decoration area.
<Set, change, or add decoration>
Select an icon and set, change, or add decorations.
pSelect another icon in succession to change the multiple
decorations or add decorations.
pWhen Blink, Ticker, or Swing has been set, reselect each
icon and complete decorations.
<Release Blink, Ticker, or Swing>
Select the icon for Blink, Ticker, or Swing
Select the same icon again.
Font size You can change the size of characters to be entered.
Select a font sizeEnter text.
pIn the font size changing mode, “ ” or “ ” is displayed at
the upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
Select blink You can make characters to be entered blink.
Enter text.
The set characters are blinking.
pIn the blink setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper right
of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset blink)
Select ticker You can make characters to be entered and images to be
inserted flow (moving from right to left).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed
before and after the cursor.
pIn the ticker setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper
right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset ticker)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
Select swing You can make characters to be entered and images to be
inserted swing (moving to left and right back).
Enter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically and “ ” is displayed
before and after the cursor.
pIn the swing setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the upper
right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
d (Reset swing)
The line feed is inserted automatically.
Word alignment You can change the position of characters to be entered and
images to be inserted.
Select a word alignmentEnter text.
The line feed is inserted automatically, and the alignment is
set.
pIn the word alignment setting mode, “ ” is displayed at the
upper right of the display.
pYou can set other decorations in succession.
pWhen you have selected the area, you do not need to enter
text.
148
Mail
Information
<Insert image>
pYou can insert up to 20 types of images within 90 Kbytes in total. However, you can
insert up to 2 types of Flash movies. Even if the inserted images are 20 types or
fewer, the number of inserted images reaches maximum depending on the operation
and the confirmation display for re-editing appears.
pIf multiple same images are inserted, they are counted as a single type of file. If you
copy/paste the image already inserted, that image is regarded as the same image
and handled as a single type of file. However, if you insert the same Flash movie, it is
handled as the second type of files.
pYou can apply Blink, Ticker, Swing, and Word Alignment to the inserted images,
however, you cannot apply them to Flash movies.
<Font color>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which another color is set, the setting
changes to that color.
pThe color for pictograms is also subjected to the specified font color. To restore the
color to ordinary one, select “指定なし/Default”.
pYou cannot change the color of Deco-mail pictograms.
<Background color>
pYou cannot change the background color when editing the header or signature.
<Font size>
pIf you move the cursor to the character for which a different font size is set, the font
size is changed to that size of the character.
pYou cannot change the size of the Deco-mail pictogram.
<Select blink>
pYou cannot make Deco-mail pictograms blink.
Decome-Anime is a mail service which enables you to create expressive
mail messages which have Flash movies with messages and images,
using Decome-Anime templates.
You can create them using templates pre-installed or purchased on the
IPs (Information Providers) site.
1lCreate new Decome-Anime
2Perform the operations in step 2 through step 4 on
page 142.
Creating and Sending Decome-Anime
Edit Decome-Anime
display
Preview
Create Decome-Anime
display
149
Mail
3Select the text fieldPhone or microSDHighlight a
Decome-Anime template and press l ( ).
pWhen a Decome-Anime template is already selected, the Edit Decome-Anime
display appears. Go to step 4.
pYou can show the preview of the Decome-Anime template by selecting it.
pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you cannot edit contents.
pWhen you send the contents of the Decome-Anime template as they are, go to
step 5.
pYou cannot edit the Decome-Anime text when you re-edit it from the Draft or
Outbox or when you forward it from the Inbox.
4Select the contents field to be edited.
Select the character entry fieldEdit characters.
Select the image entry field
Select a folder, and select the image to be changed.
pYou can show the preview by pressing m( ) from the Edit
Decome-Anime display or selecting “ Preview” from the character entry
field.
pWhen you enter characters, you cannot set decoration for them and cannot enter
Deco-mail pictograms. In addition, you cannot paste header or signature.
pWhen you insert a line feed in the middle of a line, the number of characters you
can enter decreases.
pWhen the total size of Decome-Anime template, characters, and images exceeds
90 Kbytes, you can no longer enter characters and images.
pDepending on the Decome-Anime template, you might not be able to insert
images even if the total size is 90 Kbytes or less.
pAs the fonts and display position of images and characters are fixed, you cannot
edit them.
pDepending on the character entry field, 」 (red) which shows the line feed position
or (orange) which shows the nonenterable area may appear on the Character
Entry (Edit) display.
5l( )
The editing of the Decome-Anime message is completed.
Go to step 6 on page 142.
To edit characters
To change images
Information
pYou cannot create a Decome-Anime message when sent mail messages in the
Outbox are saved to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are
protected, when 20 draft mail messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
pThe images you can insert into Decome-Anime messages are GIF files (including
animation GIF), JPEG files, and SWF files.
pWhen animation GIF files or SWF files are inserted, the volume overflow for sending
might occur.
pEven when sending fails, you cannot re-edit it.
pIn the character entry field of some Decome-Anime templates, the text such as “使い
方 (how to use)” is pre-entered. Delete it before sending.
pWhen you send a Decome-Anime message, the mail message with the URL for
browsing is received at some destination i-mode phones. However, only the
Decome-Anime text without the URL for browsing might be received at some models.
pYou cannot use the received Decome-Anime message as a template.
Function Menu of the Create Decome-Anime Display
Send You can send the Decome-Anime message.
Go to step 7 on page 143.
Preview You can check the playback of Decome-Anime message before
sending.
pSee page 151 for how the Decome-Anime messages are
played back.
pPress i( ) to return to the Create Decome-Anime
display.
Save You can save the Decome-Anime message you are creating to
the Draft. After saving, you cannot re-edit the text of the
Decome-Anime message.
YES
pWhen you save it before selecting a Decome-Anime template, it
is saved as an i-mode mail message.
Operate receiver See page 143.
Operate att. file See page 144.
150
Mail
The template is the form data in which text and images are inserted.
Deco-mail templates and Decome-Anime templates are available.
Besides pre-installed templates, you can download templates from sites
(see page 204). You can save the sent/received/created Deco-mail
messages as the Deco-mail templates (see page 144 and page 168). You
can edit the saved Deco-mail templates using Palette. You cannot edit the
Decome-Anime templates.
pYou can delete the pre-installed templates. You can re-download them from the
“P-SQUARE” site (see page 205). When you use a UIM other than the one used for
downloading, the UIM security function (see page 38) is set for them.
Template You can read in a Decome-Anime template to create a
Decome-Anime message.
Phone or microSDHighlight a Decome-Anime template
and press l( ).
Go to step 4 on page 149.
pIf any Decome-Anime template is selected, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to discard the current contents
to read in the new one.
Function Menu of the Edit Decome-Anime Display
Template See page 150.
Preview See page 149.
Delete You can delete the entered image. The image entry field
becomes blank.
Quit editing You can end the editing of the Decome-Anime message.
Go to step 6 on page 142.
<Template>
Using a Template to Create Deco-mail/
Decome-Anime
1lTemplateDeco-mailSelect a template.
pPress l( ) to
create a Deco-mail
message using the
contents of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
pEven if you set “Header/
signature” to automatically
paste the header or
signature, you cannot paste
it.
pSee page 205 when you
select “Search by i-mode”.
Deco-mail Template
Deco-mail Template
list
Detailed Deco-mail
Template display
© SOCKETS
Function Menu of the Deco-mail Template List
Compose message You can create a Deco-mail message using the contents of
the template.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
Sort You can change the order of displayed templates.
Select an order.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters.
Info You can display the file size, saved date and time of the
template, and whether it contains images.
No. of templates You can display the number of saved templates.
Delete
Delete this YES
151
Mail
1lTemplateDecome-AnimePhone or microSD
pSee page 205 when you select “Search by i-mode”.
Delete selected Put a check mark for templates to be deleted
l( )YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Function Menu of the Detailed Deco-mail Template Display
Compose message You can create a Deco-mail message using the contents of the
template.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
Edit You can edit the contents of the template and save it.
Edit the textOo( )YES or NO
YES . . . Overwrites and saves.
NO . . . . Saves as a separate file.
pSee step 2 and step 3 on page 145 for how to edit the text.
pSee page 206 when the templates are stored to the maximum.
Save insert image You can save images inserted into the template or Deco-mail
text, and set them as the Stand-by display and Wake-up display.
Select an imageYESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 204.
pSee page 206 when images are stored to the maximum.
Information
<Edit>
pThe title name when saved as a separate file takes “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”
(Y: Year, M: Month, D: Date, h: hour, m: minute).
<Save insert image>
pDeco-mail pictograms are saved to the “お気に入り (Favorite)” folder in the
“Deco-mail pictograms” folder.
Decome-Anime Template
2Select a template.
The preview of the template
is displayed.
pPress l( ) to
create the Decome-Anime
message with the template
contents. Go to step 2 on
page 148.
The animation is played back automatically. The effect tones may sound and the FOMA
terminal may vibrate for some Decome-Anime messages. Further, you can operate from
the playback display or preview of some Decome-Anime messages by using Bo, Oo,
0 through 9, s, or a.
pPress m( ) to pause the animation and effect tone during playback. Press
m( ) again to resume the animation playback.
pThe effect tone sounds following the setting of “Auto-start attachment”. Each time you
show the preview from the Decome-Anime Template list, the effect tone sounds
regardless of the setting.
pThe effect tone does not sound during Play Background.
pThe FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of the setting of “Vibrator” or “Manner mode
set”.
p
Some Decome-Anime messages refer to the phone information in your FOMA terminal.
To permit the use of the information in your FOMA terminal, set “Phone info use setting”
in “i-mode Browser set.” of “i-mode settings” to “Valid”. (“Valid” is set at purchase.)
pThe FLV file contained in a Flash movie is not played back.
Decome-Anime
Template list
Preview
When you show the Decome-Anime Playback display or
preview
Function Menu of the Decome-Anime Template List
Create Deco-Anime You can create a Decome-Anime message using the contents
of the template.
Go to step 2 on page 148.
152
Mail
You can send an i-mode mail message with files attached.
You can attach following files:
・Still image ・Melody ・i-motion file ・ToruCa file
・PDF file ・Phonebook entry ・Schedule event ・ToDo item
・Bookmark ・Word ・Excel ・PowerPoint ・SD other files
You can attach up to 10 files within 2 Mbytes in total.
pYou cannot attach files prohibited from being attached to mail or being output from the
FOMA terminal.
pRegardless of the “File restriction” setting, you can attach the still images/moving
pictures shot with your FOMA terminal or the files received via infrared rays.
pWhen you attach a file, another attachment field appears on the Message Composition
display.
Preview You can display the preview of the Decome-Anime template.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Copy to microSD See page 362.
Copy to phone See page 363.
Info You can display the title, file name, format, and whether it set
with file restriction.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 377.
Send all Ir data See page 378.
transmission See page 379.
Delete
Delete this See page 150.
Delete selected See page 151.
Delete all See page 151.
<Attachments>
Attaching a File
pDepending on the destination i-mode phone, only the compatible files are received
within the memory space of that phone.
pIt might take a time to send the i-mode mail depending on the size of attached files.
1Message Composition display
Select the attachment field
Do the following operations.
Picture Select a folderSelect an image.
pSelect an attached image to display it. Press r to return to the
former display.
Melody Select a folderSelect a melody.
pSelect an attached melody to play it back. Press any key to stop
the playback.
imotion Select a folderSelect an i-motion file.
pSelect the attached i-motion file to play it back. Press r
during playback or stop the playback to return to the former
display.
ToruCa When the ToruCa file is a ToruCa file (details), it is attached as a
ToruCa file (details).
Select a folderSelect a ToruCa file.
pSelect the attached ToruCa file to preview it. Press r to return
to the former display.
PDF Select a folderSelect a PDF file.
pSelect an attached PDF file to display it. Press r to return to
the former display.
Phonebook Select a search methodSelect a Phonebook entry
Oo( )
pWhen you specified a search method last time, the Phonebook
entry is searched by that method.
pSelect the attached Phonebook entry to display the details.
Press i( ) or r to return to the former display.
Schedule Select a dateSelect a schedule eventOo( )
pSelect the attached schedule event to display the details. Press
r to return to the former display.
153
Mail
2Go to step 2 on page 142.
pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to attach the file, select
“YES”. If you select “YES (default)”, the same confirmation display does not
appear afterward. If you select “NO”, the attached files of 100 Kbytes or larger are
deleted.
ToDo Select a ToDo itemOo( )
pSelect the attached ToDo item to display the details. Press r
to return to the former display.
Bookmark Select a bookmark.
pSelect the attached bookmark to display the title, address, and
others of the bookmark. Press i( ) or r to return to
the former display.
Document file You can attach a file of Word, Excel, and PowerPoint.
Select a folderSelect a file.
Other You can attach a file stored in “SD other files”.
Select a folderSelect a file.
Information
<Picture>
pThe images are not sent as the attachments to i-mode terminals of the mova service;
they are sent in the form of URLs for browsing images and automatically attached with
expiry dates, and can be obtained by selecting URLs. The mail text that can be sent to
an i-mode terminal of the mova service is up to 184 full-pitch characters (369 bytes).
(When the acceptable number of characters for the mova terminal at the receiving
end is “250 full-pitch characters”)
When multiple files are attached, the files are deleted and just the mail text is sent.
pThe i-mode phone of the mova service cannot receive GIF images.
pYou can attach a Flash movie as well.
pWhen the file is a JPEG image whose size is larger than 2 Mbytes (except
Progressive type files), it is converted to 2 Mbytes or less.
pThe still image might not be received correctly or not be displayed or coarsely
displayed depending on the model at the receiving end.
You can delete a selected attached file or all attached files.
1Message Composition display i( )
Operate att. fileDelete att. file
Delete this or Delete allYES
pTo delete a single file, highlight a file to be deleted.
<Melody>
pMelodies stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the melodies to the
FOMA terminal. (See page 365)
pIf the receiving end is other than P-08A, the sent melody might not be played back
correctly or the attachment might be deleted.
pYou cannot receive the attached melody on the i-mode phone of the mova service.
<imotion>
pSome i-motion files cannot be attached to mail or their file sizes may become larger or
smaller.
pi-motion files stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy them to the
FOMA terminal. (See page 365)
pDepending on the mobile phone of the receiving end, i-motion files cannot be correctly
received/displayed, might become coarse, or might be converted into consecutive still
images.
When sending a moving picture to other than the 2 Mbytes compatible model, it is
advisable to shoot with the following settings:
File size setting: Mail restrict’n (S)
Image quality: Normal
<ToruCa>
pToruCa files stored on the microSD card cannot be attached. Copy the ToruCa files to
the FOMA terminal. (See page 315)
Delete Attached File
Information
154
Mail
When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, i-mode mail, SMS
messages and SMS reports automatically arrive. (See page 155 for
receiving i-mode mail after selecting it.)
When a mail message arrives, “ (pink)” appears at the top of the
display.
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
1When i-mode mail arrives, “ (pink)”
blinks and the message telling its
arrival appears.
When receiving is completed, the display shows the
number of received i-mode mail messages and
Messages R/F.
pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.
pTo cancel receiving midway, select “Cancel” or press and hold r for at least
one second while “Mail Receiving...” is displayed. However, the mail message
might be received depending on the timing.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 29) appears on
the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.
<Mail Auto-receive>
Receiving i-mode Mail Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pYou can automatically receive up to 100 Kbytes of an i-mode mail message including
attached files. You can manually obtain the attached files in excess of 100 Kbytes
from the i-mode Center. (See page 157)
pWhen the received mail messages exceed the maximum number/size of storage,
they are deleted in order of mail in the “Trash box” folder and older received mail.
However, unread or protected mail messages are not deleted.
1Reception Result displayMail
Select an i-mode mail message to be
displayed.
pFor a Decome-Anime message, the Decome-Anime
Playback display appears. Press i( ) to show
the detailed display.
pPress and hold No for at least one second from the
detailed i-mode mail display to change the size of
characters. (See “Mail” on page 118.)
pWhen the unread or protected mail messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum
number/size of storage, no new mail can be received and “ (dark blue)” is displayed.
To receive i-mode mail, delete received mail or read unread mail or release protection
of mail until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new messages”.
pYou can receive i-mode mail with melodies, still images, or other files attached. You
can receive incompatible attached files but you cannot display them.
pWhen you receive mail from a device that can set To, Cc and Bcc, you can check
whether the message was sent to you as To, Cc or Bcc.
pMail Messages received in the following cases are held at the i-mode Center:
・When the power is off ・During a videophone call
・During Self Mode ・When you are out of the service area
・During infrared communication ・While connecting to the FirstPass center
・During PushTalk communication ・During Omakase Lock
・During iC communication ・While copying to the microSD card
・While connecting to the Data Storage Center
・When the space of the Inbox is full with protected or unread messages
pWhen i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, “ (pink)” appears, and
when they are held to the maximum, “ (dark blue)” appears.
Display Newly Received i-mode Mail
Information
Information
pUndisplayable characters are replaced by spaces, etc.
155
Mail
You can check the titles of i-mode mail messages held at the i-mode
Center and select them to receive, or delete them at the Center before
receiving.
To use this function, set “Receive option setting” to “ON” beforehand.
When “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot receive i-mode
mail messages automatically. When a mail message comes in the i-mode
Center, “ ” is displayed.
You can set whether to select and receive necessary i-mode mail only.
1lMail settingsReceive option settingON or OFF
1lReceive optionOperate following the procedure
described in “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “OFF”, the display to the effect that it will
be set to “ON” appears.
Press Oo( ) to set “Receive option setting”.
pYou can show the Receive Option display also by i
メニューリスト (Menu List)メール選択受信 (Receive Option).
pWhen the number of characters in the text of received i-mode mail exceeds the
maximum, “/” or “//” is inserted at the end of the text and the excess part is deleted
automatically.
pThe still image automatically displayed at opening might not be correctly displayed.
When the image is larger than the screen size, it is displayed shrunk with a
proportional ratio retained.
pSome decorations inserted into the decorated mail (HTML mail) sent from a personal
computer might not be displayed correctly.
<Receive Option>
Receiving i-mode Mail Selectively
Receive Option Setting
Information
Select and Receive Mail Messages
i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F arriving at the i-mode Center
are automatically sent to your FOMA terminal. However, the messages
will be held at the i-mode Center if your FOMA terminal cannot receive
mail because it is turned off or out of the service area, or when Receive
Option Setting is set to “ON”.
When “ (pink)” is displayed, receive mail by checking the i-mode Center.
See “Receive option” when “ ” is displayed.
1Press and hold l for at least one second.
“ (pink)” and “ (yellow)/ (yellow)” blink, the message “Checking...” is
displayed, and then you receive i-mode mail messages and Messages R/F.
As the checking results, the number of newly received i-mode mail messages and
Messages R/F is shown.
pYou can also execute “Check new msg.” during a voice call by pressing
i( ).
pTo cancel receiving midway, press and hold r for at least one second.
However, the mail message might be received depending on the timing.
Information
pEven when Receive Option Setting is set to “ON”, you will still receive all mail
messages if you execute “Check new messages”. If you do not want to receive all
mail messages, remove a check mark from “Mail”. (See page 174)
pWhen you show the Receive Option display, the “ ” icon goes off. Also, the “ ” icon
goes off if you turn the power off or show the mail display.
pYou cannot select SMS messages for receiving.
<Check New Messages>
Checking New i-mode Mail
Information
pWhen icons such as “ (dark blue)”, “ (dark blue)/ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)”
are displayed, the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more i-mode mail messages or
Messages R/F. Delete unnecessary mail and messages, read unread mail and
messages, or release protection. (Read and unprotected mail and messages are
automatically deleted from the oldest one.)
156
Mail
By “Rep.w/ i-mode mail”, you can reply with a normal i-mode mail
message, and by “Rep. w/ Deco-Anime”, you can reply with a
Decome-Anime message. By “Reply with quote”, you can quote the text
of your received i-mode mail to reply. You cannot use “Reply with quote”
for Decome-Anime messages and SMS messages.
1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi( )
Reply/forwardRep.w/ i-mode mail,
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime or Reply with quote
pPress l( ) to reply by i-mode mail.
pIf other recipients of the simultaneous mail are found, you can choose whether to
reply to the sender only or to all addresses.
Select “To sender” or “To all”.
pJust one quotation mark (see page 176) is added to the beginning of the text in
the i-mode mail to be replied with quote.
2Enter a subject and text, and then send.
When you have selected i-mode mail, go to step 3 on page 142.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 3 on page 185.
After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.
pEven when i-mode mail messages are held at the i-mode Center, the “ (pink)” icon to
that effect, or the “ (dark blue)” icon telling that messages are held to the maximum
at the i-mode Center might not appear. (This happens if mail arrives at the Center
when, for instance, your FOMA terminal is off.)
pYou can select items to be checked by “Set check new messages”.
pYou cannot use this function to receive SMS messages. Use “Check new SMS” to
receive them.
<Reply> <Reply with Quote>
Replying to Received i-mode Mail
Information
Information
pFor the sender’s address that cannot be replied to (such as when the mail address
exceeds 50 half-pitch characters), “ ” is displayed.
You can forward the i-mode mail or SMS messages to others.
1Inbox list/Detailed Received Mail displayi( )
Reply/forwardForward
pYou can forward also by pressing m( ) from the Inbox list.
2Enter a subject and address, and send the mail.
When you have selected an i-mode mail message or a Decome-Anime message,
go to step 2 on page 142.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 185.
After you send mail, “ ” changes to “ ”.
p“Re:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be replied or replied with a
quotation. When the subject exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess is deleted.
(When “Re:” has already been prefixed, it changes to “Re2:” and will be counted up to
“Re99:”.)
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your reply.
Also, you cannot quote it when using the DOCOMO keitai datalink or infrared
communication function. See page 161 for pasted data.
pIf the Deco-mail text contains images prohibited from being attached to mail or being
output from the FOMA terminal, such images will be deleted when you reply.
<Forward>
Forwarding Received i-mode Mail
Information
Information
p“Fw:” is prefixed to the subject of the mail message to be forwarded. When the subject
exceeds 100 full-pitch characters, the excess is deleted. (When “Fw:” has already
been prefixed, it changes to “Fw2:” and will be counted up to “Fw99:”.)
pWhen you forward an i-mode mail message with a file you have not obtained yet, the
file information is deleted.
pEven if the i-mode mail text contains pasted data, you cannot quote it in your
forwarding mail. Also, you cannot quote it when using the DOCOMO keitai datalink or
infrared communication function. See page 161 for pasted data.
157
Mail
You can receive up to 2 Mbytes of the attached files on your FOMA
terminal. However, if attached files exceed 100 Kbytes, only information
of all or part of attached files is received. You need to obtain attached
files again from the i-mode Center.
The FOMA terminal supports following files:
・Still image ・Melody ・i-motion file ・Movie file
・ToruCa file ・PDF file ・Phonebook entry ・Schedule event
・ToDo item ・Bookmark ・Word ・Excel ・PowerPoint
You cannot play back or display the files other than above. You can save
them to any folder in “SD other files”, or use the i-mode mail to forward
them.
You can use “Attachment preference” to select the files to be received.
pWhen multiple data items are pasted, they might not be displayed.
pWhen a mail message is forwarded and a ToruCa file (details) that contains data
whose output from the FOMA terminal is prohibited is attached to the mail message,
the attached file returns to a ToruCa file before receiving details.
pWhen a mail message on the microSD card is forwarded, the attached file is deleted.
pWhen you “Forward” an SMS message received to Number B in Dual Mode of 2in1,
the sent SMS message is retained in the Outbox or Draft, even if you switch to A
Mode.
When i-mode Mail with Files Attached/
Pasted is Received
Information
You can obtain the receive option attached files held at the i-mode
Center.
1Detailed Received Mail display
Select an attached file which has not
been obtained.
After obtaining is completed, files are played back/
displayed.
You can play back or display the attached/pasted files already obtained.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
displaySelect an attached file.
The file is played back or displayed.
pFor a movie file or document file, the confirmation display appears telling that you
cannot play it back/display it. Play it back/display it after saving it to the microSD
card.
pFor the files which are not supported by the FOMA terminal, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to save them.
pYou can display only the first item when a file of Phonebook entries, schedule
events, ToDo items or bookmarks is attached.
Obtain Receive Option Attached Files
Information
pYou cannot obtain the attached files when the unused memory space in the Inbox is
smaller than the files.
Play Back/Display Attached or Pasted Files
Information
pWhen the sender’s device is other than P-08A, the received melodies might not be
played back correctly.
158
Mail
You can save the attached or pasted files that you have obtained. You
can set some files for a ring tone, or an image on the Stand-by display,
Wake-up display, or other displays.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
display/Detailed Message R/F display
Highlight an attached file and press i( )
Operate fileSave attached fileYES
pMovie files are saved to the destination folder in “SD movie” folder of “Movie”.
pDocument files are saved to the destination folder in “Document viewer”.
pThe files not supported by the FOMA terminal are saved to the destination folder
in “SD other files”.
pEven if the files are supported by the FOMA terminal, some of them cannot be
saved to the FOMA terminal depending on the file such as an invalid data file or
whose size is too large. In that case, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to save it to the microSD card. When you save it, it is saved to a
destination folder in “SD other files”.
pThe confirmation display might appear telling that a part of the file cannot be
saved depending on the attached file.
pWhen the first attached file is an obtained still image, that still image only is
automatically displayed when the mail message is opened. The size of a still image
displayed automatically is up to 8M (2448 x 3264).
pWhen the image size is larger than the screen, it is displayed shrunk.
pYou cannot play back a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes.
pYou cannot play back a Flash movie in excess of 100 Kbytes.
pThe FLV file contained in a Flash movie is not played back.
pYou cannot display a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in
excess of 100 Kbytes.
Save Attached or Pasted Files
Information
2Select a destination or folder to save to.
For melodies, go to step 3 on page 205.
For still images, go to step 3 on page 204.
pBookmarks are saved according to each information of i-mode or Full Browser.
pIf the maximum number of files has already been saved to the microSD card or
there is no usable memory space when you save SD other files, movie files, or
document files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete
unnecessary files to save new files. Select “YES”, and select unnecessary files
from the displayed list in Data Box to delete them. See page 206 when files other
than SD other files, movie files, or document files are stored to the maximum.
You can save up to 2,500 received i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
You can save up to 30 Area Mail messages separately from i-mode mail
messages and SMS messages.
You can check the received i-mode mail messages, SMS messages, and
Area Mail messages.
pWelcome mail messages have been saved by default.
1lInboxSelect a folder.
pSee page 177 for displaying Messages R/F.
Information
pYou cannot save a melody in excess of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot save a Flash movie in excess of 500 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
pYou cannot save a ToruCa file in excess of 1 Kbyte and ToruCa file (details) in excess
of 100 Kbytes to the FOMA terminal.
<Inbox> <Outbox> <Draft>
Displaying Mail in Inbox/Outbox/Draft
Display Mail from Inbox
Inbox Folder list
159
Mail
2Select a mail message.
pWhen you select an unread
mail message, “ (pink)”
changes to “ ”.
pFor a Decome-Anime
message, the
Decome-Anime Playback
display appears. Some
Decome-Anime messages
are played back repeatedly.
Press i( ) to
show the detailed Received
Mail display. See page 151
for how the Decome-Anime
messages are played back.
pUse No to check other
mail messages. When you press No to show the Decome-Anime message
from the detailed Received Mail display, the Decome-Anime Playback display
does not appear.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Further, you
can press m( )/c( ) or </> to scroll page by page. You
cannot scroll the Decome-Anime messages.
Inbox list Detailed Received
Mail display
Information
pYou are not charged a communication fee for welcome mail messages.
pYou cannot reply to welcome mail messages.
pThe attached melody, effect tone of the Flash movie in mail text, and effect tone of
Decome-Anime text sound following the setting of “Auto-start attachment”. However,
when a mail message with an attached melody includes the effect tone of the Flash
movie in mail text or effect tone of Decome-Anime text, the melody is preferentially
played back. The effect tone does not sound.
pThe melody and effect tone do not sound during Play Background.
pThe FLV file contained in a Flash movie is not played back.
You can save up to 1,000 sent i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
You can check the sent i-mode mail messages and SMS messages.
1lOutboxSelect a folder.
2Select a mail message.
pFor a Decome-Anime
message, the
Decome-Anime Playback
display appears. Press
i( ) to show the
detailed Sent Mail display.
See page 151 for how the
Decome-Anime messages
are played back.
pUse No to check other
mail messages. When you
press No to show the
Decome-Anime message
from the detailed Sent
Mail display, the
Decome-Anime Playback display does not appear.
pWhen the mail text is long, use Bo to scroll the display to check it. Further, you
can press m( )/c( ) or </> to scroll page by page. You
cannot scroll the Decome-Anime messages.
Display Mail from Outbox
Outbox Folder list
Outbox list Detailed Sent Mail
display
Information
pThe attached melody, effect tone of the Flash movie in mail text, and effect tone of
Decome-Anime text sound following the setting of “Auto-start attachment”. However,
when a mail message with an attached melody includes the effect tone of the Flash
movie in mail text or effect tone of Decome-Anime text, the melody is preferentially
played back. The effect tone does not sound.
pThe melody and effect tone do not sound during Play Background.
160
Mail
You can edit and send i-mode mail messages and SMS messages in the
Draft. You can save up to 20 i-mode mail messages including SMS
messages.
1lDraft
2Select a mail message.
When you select an i-mode mail message, go to step 2 on page 142. When you
select a Decome-Anime message, press l( ) and go to step 2 on
page 148. When you select an SMS message, go to step 2 on page 185.
Display Mail from Draft
Draft list
Information
pWhen you select the i-αppli mail folder, the mail-linked i-αppli that supports the folder
starts.
■Mail menu
Inbox, Outbox, and Draft might have the following marks:
■Inbox Folder list
Folder status
“ ” appears when unread messages are found,
and “ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.
Folder name
How to See Inbox/Outbox/Draft List and
Detailed Display
Unread mail messages or messages are
stored in the Inbox.
Failed-to-send mail messages are stored in the
Outbox.
Draft mail messages are stored in the Draft.
“Mail security” is activated.
(displayed also for chat mail)
Ordinary folder
i-αppli mail folder
Message R folder
Message F folder
Trash box folder
161
Mail
■Inbox list and detailed Received Mail display
Mail status and type
“ ” appears when protection is set.
Received date and time
The Inbox list shows the time for the mail received today, and shows the date for the
mail received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail
was received. The Japanese date and time the mail was received from the Center is
displayed.
Phone number or mail address of the sender or of another recipient of simultaneous mail
(pink) Unread mail
Read mail
Forwarded mail
Replied mail
Type of the received mail (Detailed display only)
Sender’s mail address (Detailed display only)
Sender’s mail address that cannot be replied to (Detailed display only)
Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail (Detailed display only)
Recipient’s mail addresses of simultaneous mail that cannot be
replied to (Detailed display only)
Inbox list
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
 
Inbox list
For “Date+subject”
Detailed Received
Mail display
Subject
The number of characters you can display on the list varies depending on the setting
of “Mail list display”, and “Mail” of “Font size setting”. When a file is attached, it is
decreases by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages or Area Mail messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
(“SMS” or “Area Mail” is displayed on the detailed display.)
Attached or pasted data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Inbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Received Mail display>
“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).
(blue) SMS messages in the
FOMA terminal
SMS messages on the UIM
Area Mail
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file (List only)
i-motion file
Movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
Attached file before obtaining
(Detailed display only)
Attached file suspended to be
obtained (Detailed display only)
Attached file failed to be
obtained (Detailed display only)
i-αppli start information
(List only)
i-αppli mail (List only)
Multiple files (List only)
Multiple pasted files
File with the UIM security
162
Mail
<For Inbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Feel＊Mail icon
When you press c( ) from the Inbox list, the Feel＊Mail image is played
back. See page 176 for Feel＊Mail.
Text of mail
■Outbox Folder list
Folder status
“ ” appears when Mail Security is activated.
Folder name
Ordinary folder
i-αppli mail folder
Attached file
i-αppli mail
File with the UIM security
■Outbox list and detailed Sent Mail display
Mail status
“ ” appears when protection is set.
Sent date and time
The Outbox list shows the time for the mail sent today, and shows the date for the mail
sent until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and time the mail was sent.
“ ” appears when the date/time is corrected.
Recipient’s phone number or mail address
(pink) Mail successfully sent
Mail failed to be sent
Simultaneous mail successfully sent to all addresses
(gray) Simultaneous mail sent to some addresses
(pink) Simultaneous mail failed to be sent to all addresses
Mail address successfully sent (Detailed display only)
Mail address failed to be sent (Detailed display only)
Outbox list
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
 
Outbox list
For “Date+subject”
Detailed Sent Mail
display
163
Mail
Subject
The number of characters you can display on the list varies depending on the setting
of “Mail list display”, and “Mail” of “Font size setting”. When a file is attached, it is
decreases by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed. (“SMS” is displayed on the
detailed display.)
Attached data
The detailed display shows the data volume as well.
<For Outbox list (Date+sender/receiver subject) and detailed Sent Mail display>
“ ” is added to each icon when you execute “Delete att. file” (Detailed display only).
<For Outbox list (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Text of mail
(blue) SMS messages in the
FOMA terminal
SMS messages on the
UIM
SMS report received [List
(Date+sender/receiver
subject) and detailed
display only]
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file (List only)
i-motion file
Movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
i-αppli mail (List only)
Multiple files (List only)
File with the UIM security
Attached file
i-αppli mail
File with the UIM security
■Draft list
Mail status
Saved date and time
The Draft list shows the
time for the mail saved
today, and shows the date
for the mail saved until
yesterday. “ ” appears
when the date/time is
corrected.
Recipient’s phone
number or mail address
Subject
The number of characters you can display on the list varies depending on the setting
of “Mail list display”, and “Mail” of “Font size setting”. When a file is attached, it is
decreases by 1 full-pitch/2 half-pitch character/s as the icon is added at the top.
For SMS messages, the beginning of the text is displayed.
Attached data
<For Date+sender/receiver subject>
(pink)
Ordinary mail
Simultaneous
mail
(blue) SMS messages
For “Date+sender/
receiver subject”
 
For “Date+subject”
Melody file
Image file
Inserted image file
i-motion file
Movie file
ToruCa file
PDF file
Document file
Phonebook entry file
Schedule event or ToDo item
file
Bookmark file
Other files
Multiple files (List only)
File with the UIM security
164
Mail
<For (Date+subject) (Date+sender/receiver)>
Text of mail
Attached file
File with the UIM security
Information
pSee “Mail list display” on page 174 to change a method to display the Inbox/Outbox/
Draft list.
pWhen “Name in phonebook” of “Mail list display” is checked, the name stored in the
Phonebook is displayed as sender or recipient. However, when the sender’s mail
address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, the name is not displayed even when
“phone number@docomo.ne.jp” is stored in the mail address field in a Phonebook
entry. Store the phone number part only to display the name. When a sender’s/
recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a Phonebook entry stored as
secret data, the name is not displayed. It is displayed in Secret Mode or Secret Data
Only.
Even when a sender’s/recipient’s phone number or mail address matches a
Phonebook entry not stored as secret data, the name is not displayed in Secret Data
Only. Switch to Secret Mode or release Secret Data Only to display the name.
pWhen “Message” of “Mail list display” is not checked, the text does not appear on the
Inbox/Outbox/Draft list.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, “ ” is displayed at the end of the subject or sender’s/
receiver’s address on the list for received mail messages to Address B/Number B, or
sent/draft mail messages from Address B.
pIn Dual Mode of 2in1, “ ” instead of “ ” is displayed at the upper left of the
detailed display for the mail messages received to/sent from Address B of 2in1.
Managing Mail Messages
Function Menu of the Inbox Folder List/Outbox Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder You can add a new folder. You can add up to 22 folders to
each of “Inbox” and “Outbox”.
Enter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Edit folder name You can edit the names of the added folders only.
Edit the folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Sort folder You can sort folders. You can sort the added folders,
Message R/F folder, and the i-αppli mail folders.
Use Bo to sort the orderOo( )
Delete folder All the mail messages including secret mail in the folder will be
deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Open folder You can display the mail messages in the i-αppli mail folder
without running mail-linked i-αppli.
Read all
[Inbox Folder only]
You can change unread mail in the folder to already-read mail.
YES
Sort
Re-sort in this You can re-sort mail messages in the folder following the
sorting conditions specified by “Auto-sort”.
YES
pWhen the folder is applied with Mail security (see page 165),
you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
165
Mail
Re-sort in all You can re-sort mail messages in all Inbox/Outbox folders
following the sorting conditions specified by “Auto-sort”.
YES
pWhen the folder applied with Mail security (see page 165) is
found, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Auto-sort See page 171.
Mail security You can set the folder to open only when you enter your
Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
pTo release it, perform the same operation.
Ir/ transmission
Send all Ir data See page 378.
All transmission See page 379.
No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail
messages, Messages R/F, and sent mail messages.
Delete
DEL all read mails
[Inbox Folder only]
You can delete all the read mail messages including secret
mail in all Inbox folders. All the read SMS messages on the
UIM are deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all recv. mails
[Inbox Folder only]
You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in
all Inbox folders. All the received SMS messages on the UIM
are deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all sent mails
[Outbox Folder only]
You can delete all the mail messages including secret mail in
all Outbox folders. All sent SMS messages on the UIM are
deleted as well.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Delete folder>
pYou cannot delete an i-αppli mail folder if corresponding mail-linked i-αppli exists.
If the software program does not exist, you can delete the i-αppli mail folder, but this
will delete both folders created in the Outbox Folder list and Inbox Folder list.
<Re-sort in this> <Re-sort in all>
pYou cannot re-sort the mail messages in the “Chat” folder and “Trash box” folder.
pMail messages which do not apply to the sorting conditions are sorted into the “Inbox”
or “Outbox” folder.
<Mail security>
pYou can neither delete the Mail-Security-activated folder nor edit its name.
Function Menu of the Inbox List/Outbox List/Draft List
Reply/forward
Rep.w/ i-mode mail
[Inbox only]
See page 156.
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime
[Inbox only]
See page 156.
Reply with quote
[Inbox only]
See page 156.
Forward
[Inbox only]
See page 156.
Edit
[Outbox only]
You can re-edit the sent mail message and send it again.
When you have selected an i-mode mail message, go to
step 2 on page 142.
When you have selected a Decome-Anime message, go
to step 2 on page 148.
When you have selected an SMS message, go to step 2
on page 185.
pYou can re-edit also by pressing l( ).
166
Mail
Protect
Protect ON/OFF
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can protect the mail message so that it is not
overwritten and deleted. You can protect all the received
and sent messages. (2,500 received messages, 1,000
sent messages)
The protected one is indicated by “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
pYou can switch between protected and unprotected also
by pressing 1 from the detailed Received Mail display
or detailed Sent Mail display.
ProtectSLCT. ON/OFF
[Inbox/Outbox]
Put/Remove a check mark for mail messages to be
protected/unprotectedl( )
pA check mark is placed to the mail already protected.
Move/copy
Move
[Inbox/Outbox]
Select a destination folder
Put a check mark for mail messages to be moved
l( )YES
Move to trash
[Inbox only]
You can move mail messages to the “Trash box” folder.
The mail messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are
preferentially overwritten (deleted).
Put a check mark for mail messages to be moved to
the trash boxl( )YES
UIM operation
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can copy or move the mail message to the UIM or
FOMA terminal. (See page 410)
Copy to microSD See page 362.
Store in Center See page 137.
Search/sort
Search mail
Search sender/
Search receiver
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a mail address or
phone number of a sender or recipient.
“Search sender” for received mail and “Search receiver” for
sent mail are displayed respectively.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . .Call up a Phonebook entry and
select a phone number or mail
address.
Received address . . .Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Sent address . . . . . . .Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Enter address. . . . . . .Enter the mail address or phone
number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
Search subject
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject.
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch
characters.
Search
subject+msg
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can retrieve mail messages with a subject or text.
Enter a part of a subject or text.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch
characters.
Sort
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can change the order of displayed mail messages.
Select an order.
Filter
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can display the mail messages only that satisfy the
condition.
Select a type.
Display all
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can re-display all mail messages in “By date↑” order
after using Search Mail, or the Sort or Filter function.
167
Mail
Mail history
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can display the history of sent/received mail from the
sender or to the recipient being selected or displayed. Up
to 1,000 histories are displayed in the chronological order
from the most recent one.
Select a sender’s or destination address.
The target sent/received mail histories are displayed.
. . . . Sent mail
. . . . Received mail
pSelect a history to show the detailed Received Mail
display or detailed Sent Mail display. Press r to return
to the former display.
pYou can display also by pressing 7 on the detailed
Received Mail display or detailed Sent Mail display.
Color label
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can color the characters on the Inbox list and Outbox
list for classifying mail. Select “Default” to set ordinary font
color.
Select a color.
List setting You can select the item to be displayed on the list. You can
also switch between the name stored in the Phonebook
and the mail address/phone number for the display in the
sender’s/destination address field.
You can set to list the mail messages by subject
depending on the setting of “Mail list display”.
Select an item to be displayed.
pYou can switch each time you press c( ) from
the Outbox list and Draft list.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 377.
Send all Ir data
[Draft only]
See page 378.
transmission See page 379.
All transmission
[Draft only]
See page 379.
No. of messages You can display the number of stored received mail
messages, sent mail messages and draft mail messages.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for mail messages to be deleted
l( )YES
Delete read mails
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the read mail messages in the folder.
YES
Delete all SMS-R
[Inbox only]
You can delete all the SMS reports. While SMS reports are
displayed by the Search Mail function or Filter function,
only the displayed SMS reports are deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
DEL all frm folder
[Inbox/Outbox]
You can delete all mail messages in the folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Delete all
[Draft only]
You can delete all the draft mail messages.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Edit>
pTo use “Mail group” for destination addresses, delete all the entered addresses, press
+l( ) to complete the deletion, and then re-select the address field.
<Protect>
pYou cannot protect mail messages in the “Trash box” folder.
pYou cannot compose an i-mode mail message when sent mail messages are saved
to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are protected.
<Move to trash>
pIf you move unread mail to the Trash box, it changes to read mail.
<Search subject> <Search subject+msg>
pEven if you set “No title”, you cannot search for the i-mode mail whose subject is not
entered and displayed as “No title”.
168
Mail
<Color label>
pColor Label applied to the mail messages is released when they are copied to the
microSD card, copied/moved to the UIM, copied/moved from the UIM or sent via
infrared rays or iC transmission.
pColor Label applied to the SMS messages on the UIM is released when the UIM is
dismounted and then mounted.
Function Menu of the Detailed Received Mail Display/
Detailed Sent Mail Display
Information
Reply/forward
Rep.w/ i-mode mail
[Received Mail only]
See page 156.
Rep. w/ Deco-Anime
[Received Mail only]
See page 156.
Reply with quote
[Received Mail only]
See page 156.
Forward
[Received Mail only]
See page 156.
Edit
[Sent Mail only]
See page 165.
Resend
[Sent Mail only]
You can re-send the sent mail message.
YES
Protect ON/OFF See page 166.
Move/copy
Copy Select an item to be copied.
pSee page 428 for how to copy.
pWhen the addresses of the sender and another recipient
of simultaneous mail are found or the multiple destination
addresses are found, select a mail address or phone
number to be copied.
Read map You can display a map by selecting a postal address or
others in the mail text.
Select a start pointSelect an end point.
GPS compatible i-αppli program starts via the selected
character string. (See page 208)
Move Select a destination folder.
Move to trash
[Received Mail only]
You can move the mail to the “Trash box” folder. The mail
messages moved to the “Trash box” folder are
preferentially overwritten (deleted).
YES
UIM operation You can copy or move the mail to the UIM or FOMA
terminal. (See page 410)
Copy to microSD See page 362.
Store in Center See page 137.
Operate file
Save attached file See page 158.
Save insert image See page 151.
Save D-pictograms
[Received Mail only]
You can save Deco-mail pictograms in the mail text at
once. You can save up to 20 of them.
YES
pSee page 206 when the Deco-mail pictograms are
stored to the maximum.
pSee page 334 for how to check the stored Deco-mail
pictograms.
Save as template You can save the sent/received Deco-mail message as a
template.
YES
pSee page 206 when the templates are stored to the
maximum.
pSee page 150 for how to check the stored template.
169
Mail
Property You can display the file name and file size of the image
inserted into the text.
Select an image.
Delete att. file YES
Store
Store address See page 92.
Add to phonebook See page 92.
Auto-sort You can store a sender or subject as a sort condition.
(See page 171)
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
Mail history See page 167.
Color label See page 167.
Display
Name/address You can display the sender’s/destination address by the
name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address/
phone number.
pYou can switch also by pressing 5.
Scroll See page 174.
Font size set. See “Mail” on page 118.
Display SMS report
[Sent Mail only]
You can check the result of the SMS message you sent, or
the date and time it arrived at the destination. To receive
the SMS report, set “SMS report request” to “ON”.
Ir/ transmission
Send Ir data See page 377.
transmission See page 379.
Delete YES
pYou can delete the mail message also by pressing 0.
Sent and received i-mode mail messages and SMS messages are stored
in Sent Address and Received Address, up to 30 messages each. You
can check the list for the mail addresses and phone numbers. When you
exchange mail messages with the same mail address or phone number,
the older one is deleted.
pWhen you use 2in1, up to 30 records for Address A (Number A) and up to 30 records
for Address B (Number B) are stored respectively regardless of the mode.
1Press and hold Vo for at least one
second.
: i-mode mail successfully sent
: SMS message successfully sent
: i-mode mail failed to be sent
: SMS message failed to be sent
: Time-difference corrected time
pPress m( ) from the Sent Address list to display Redial. When the Sent
Address list is displayed from Dialed Calls, you can press m( ) to display
Dialed Calls.
Information
<Resend>
pIf you re-send a failed-to-send mail message, it is saved as the sent mail message. If
you re-send the failed-to-send simultaneous message to all addresses, it is saved as
the sent mail message.
<Save as template>
pYou cannot execute this function while a mail message is shown in the multiwindow.
<Sent Address> <Received Address>
Displaying Sent/Received Mail Record
When Using Sent Address
Sent Address list
170
Mail
Press and hold Co for at least one
second.
: i-mode mail
: SMS message
: Time-difference corrected time
: i-mode mail message/SMS received to Address B/
Number B (only in Dual Mode of 2in1)
pPress m( ) from the Received Address list to display Received Calls.
2Select a record to be displayed.
The detailed display of the Address list is displayed.
pWith an SMS message for which the other party’s phone number is not notified,
the reason for no caller ID is displayed.
pTo send i-mode mail to the displayed address, press Oo( ) and go to
step 3 on page 142. To send an SMS message to the displayed phone number,
press Oo( ) and go to step 3 on page 185.
pTo store in the Phonebook, press m( ). Go to step 2 on page 92.
When Using Received Address
Received Address
list
Function Menu while Sent/Received Address is Displayed
Add to phonebook See page 92.
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message. The mail address
is entered in the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 142.
Compose SMS You can compose an SMS message. The phone number is
entered into the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 185.
Dialing When the mail address is stored in a Phonebook entry, you
can make a voice call, videophone call or PushTalk call to the
phone number stored in the Phonebook.
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to be sent
to the other party during a videophone call. To cancel the
setting, select “Release”.
pWhen multiple phone numbers are stored in a Phonebook
entry, you can dial the first phone number.
Dial
pThe set item is indicated by “★”.
pTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”, select
an international call access code, and follow the procedure
above after selecting “Dialing” from the Function menu. (See
page 59)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See
step 2 of “Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call” on
page 56)
Feel＊Mail
[Received Address only]
The Feel＊Mail image is played back. See page 176 for Feel
＊Mail.
pYou can play back the Feel＊mail image also by pressing
c( ).
Change font size You can switch the font sizes for Redial, Dialed Calls,
Received Calls, Sent Address, and Received Address. (See
“Dialed/recv. calls” on page 118)
Redial/Dialed calls
[Sent Address only]
You can display the Redial list or the Dialed Call list.
Received calls
[Received Address only]
You can display the Received Call list. All received calls (all
calls) are displayed.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
Delete
171
Mail
You can automatically save the mail messages that satisfy the set
conditions to the specified folder. This function applies to only the added
folders and i-αppli mail folders.
1Inbox Folder list/Outbox Folder listi( )Sort
Auto-sort
Follow the operation of the Function menu list on page 172 to set “Auto-sort”.
If you select a folder for which Auto-sort conditions have been set, the Auto-sort
Setting display appears.
You can specify a sort condition and folder from the detailed Sent/
Received Mail display.
1Detailed Sent Mail display/Detailed Received Mail
displayi( )StoreAuto-sort
Do the following operations.
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for records to be deleted
l( )YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Auto-sort>
Sorting Mail Automatically to Each Folder
Auto-sort Storing
Address sort You can set the displayed sender’s/recipient’s address for a
sorting condition.
Select a folder.
pWhen multiple addresses are found, select an address.
Subject sort You can edit the displayed subject and set it for a sorting
condition.
Edit the subjectSelect a folder.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition or to overwrite
it. Select “YES” to release the set condition and set the new one.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to change the condition. Select “YES”
to release the condition set for another folder and to set it for the selected folder.
pYou cannot change the setting for a Mail-Security-activated folder.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to add the address.
To change the condition
When the same condition is set for another folder
When storing another address for the folder set for “Address
sort”
Information
pYou can store a total of 700 addresses in all folders.
pWhen multiple conditions match, sorting is done in the priority below.
iαppli mail sort
Subject sort
Reply impossible/Send impossible
Address sort (Look-up address/Enter address)
Address sort (Look-up mail group)
Address sort (Look-up group)
Sort all
pMail messages sent simultaneously to multiple members cannot be sorted by
“Address sort” or “Send impossible”.
pArea Mail messages are not sorted by “Address sort”.
172
Mail
Function Menu of the Auto-sort Setting Display
Address sort
Look-up address You can look up a mail address or phone number in the
Phonebook or Received/Sent Address and set it to the folder
for sorting.
Select an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Look-up group You can set a group to be sorted into the folder.
Select a group.
Look-up mail group You can set a mail group to be sorted into the folder.
Select a mail group.
Enter address You can directly enter a mail address or phone number to be
sorted into the folder.
Enter a mail address or phone number.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”,
enter the phone number only. You can sort SMS messages
as well if you enter the phone number only.
Subject sort You can enter the subject of i-mode mail messages to be
sorted into the folder. One subject can be set per folder.
Enter a subject.
pYou can enter up to 100 full-pitch/200 half-pitch characters.
Reply impossible You can set reply-disabled mail messages to be sorted. You
can set for only one folder.
Send impossible You can set failed-to-send mail messages to be sorted. You
can set for only one folder.
Sort all You can set all mail messages to be sorted.
iαppli mail sort You can set to sort all mail messages into the i-αppli mail
folder. You can set this for only one i-αppli mail folder each in
the Inbox and Outbox. When “iαppli mail sort” is set, other
sort settings are disabled.
YES
Edit addr/subj You can edit and store the mail address, phone number, and
subject set for the folder.
Edit the mail address, phone number or subject.
List setting You can switch whether to display the destinations by the
name stored in the Phonebook or by the mail address or
phone number.
Name or Address
pYou can switch also by pressing c( ).
Release
Release this You can release the sort condition. (The item is deleted from
the Auto-sort Setting display.)
YES
Release selected You can select mail addresses or phone numbers, and
release the sort condition for them. (The items are deleted
from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
Put a check mark for mail addresses or phone numbers
to be releasedl( )YES
Release all You can release all sort conditions. (The items are deleted
from the Auto-sort Setting display.)
YES
Information
<Look-up group>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the name.
pYou cannot set groups on the UIM.
pThe secret mail messages received in ordinary mode (not in “Secret mode” or “Secret
data only”) are not sorted into the folder.
<Look-up mail group>
pOn the Auto-sort Setting display, “ ” is added to the top of the mail group name.
173
Mail
You can set sort conditions with a combination of ordinary sort conditions and sort
conditions by Address A/Address B of 2in1 (2in1 sort setting). You can set/check the
2in1 sort in Dual Mode. The sort conditions you set are valid in all modes of 2in1.
When you newly specify sort conditions and select an item from the Function menu list
on page 172, the display for specifying Address A/Address B appears. You can set the
2in1 sort also from the Auto-sort Setting display.
Default. . . . . . Does not specify sorts by Address A/Address B.
Address A . . . Specifies sorts by messages received to/sent from Address A.
Address B . . . Specifies sorts by messages received to/sent from Address B.
pYou can set only one type of the 2in1 sort to a folder.
pYou can set the same sort conditions to “Address A” and “Address B”. However, the
sort conditions you have set to Address B are automatically cancelled when you
deactivate “2in1setting”.
pThe 2in1 sort setting is set to “Default” when you newly specify a sort condition in A
Mode/B Mode of 2in1.
pYou can show only the sort conditions of “Address A” and “Default” in A Mode, and
those of “Address B” and “Default” in B Mode of 2in1. Even if you edit the sort
conditions, the 2in1 sort setting is not changed.
pWhen you execute “Auto-sort” from the detailed mail display, you cannot select a folder
to which you have set a 2in1 mail address which differs from that of the displayed mail
message, as a sorting destination.
pThe 2in1 sort setting is set to “Default” when you newly specify a sort condition by
“Auto-sort” from the detailed mail display.
<Subject sort>
pWhen the subject matches sort conditions for multiple folders, it is sorted to the folder
nearest to the “Inbox” folder or “Outbox” folder.
pEven if you set “No title”, the i-mode mail titled with “No title” because of no entry
cannot be sorted.
pSMS messages cannot be sorted by subject.
<Sort all>
pYou cannot sort SMS reports or SMS messages that have been directly received on
the UIM.
While you are using 2in1
Information
You can store mail addresses by group. You can send mail to regular
destinations.
You can store up to five addresses per group, and up to 20 groups.
1mPhonebook
Phonebook settingsMail group
Select a Mail group to be stored.
pWhen mail addresses are stored in a Mail group,
“ ” appears at the lower left of the display. Press l( ) to compose
i-mode mail to a selected Mail group set as the destination address.
Go to step 3 on page 142.
2Highlight <Not stored> and press
l( ).
pIf you select a stored mail address, the Mail Group
Address Confirmation display appears.
3Enter a mail address.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.
+m-2-6
<Mail Group>
Creating Mail Group
Mail Group list
Detailed Mail Group
display
Function Menu of the Mail Group List
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to the Mail group.
Go to step 3 on page 142.
Edit group name Enter a name of the Mail group.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Reset group name You can reset the name of Mail group to the default.
YES
174
Mail
1lMail settingsDo the following operations.
Function Menu of the Detailed Mail Group Display/Mail
Group Address Confirmation Display
Edit address Go to step 3 on page 173.
pYou can edit the address also by pressing l( ).
Look-up address You can call up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo( ).
Received address. . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo( ).
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Mail Settings>
Setting Mail and Messages R/F
Scroll You can set the number of lines that are scrolled at a time for
when you press Bo from the detailed mail display, detailed
Message R/F display, Message Composition display and preview
display.
Select the number of lines.
Font size setting See “Mail” on page 118.
Mail list display You can set items to be displayed on the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list
by using radio buttons or check boxes.
Select a display formatl( )
Message display You can set whether to display received mail in standard display
(from the top) or from the text.
Standard or From message
Mail security See page 134.
Secret mail display See page 133.
Auto color label You can specify the text color of the sender, received date/time
and others on the Inbox list by mail address. You can store up to
10 items.
<Not stored>Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo( ).
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo( ).
Enter address . . . . . . Enter a mail address or phone number.
pTo change the set color, press i( ) and select “Select
color”.
pTo delete the set item, press i( ) and select “Delete”
→ “Delete this” or “Delete all” and select “YES”. If you select
“Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
Select a color.
Pred. conv. at reply You can set whether to preferentially display the words contained
in the subject and text of the received mail message as
conversion candidates when you reply to, reply with quote to, or
forward it.
ON or OFF
Header/signature See page 175.
Set check new
messages
You can select items to be checked from among i-mode mail,
Message R and Message F, for when you perform “Check new
messages”.
Put a check mark for the items to be checked
l( )
Auto-display See page 177.
175
Mail
Receiving display You can set whether to display the Message Receiving and
Reception Result displays, even during operation of another
function.
Alarm preferred or Operation preferred
Alarm preferred
. . . Prioritizes the Message Receiving and Reception Result
displays when you have new mail.
Operation preferred
. . . Prioritizes the display of the current operation when you have
new mail.
Receive option
setting
See page 155.
Attachment
preference
You can set whether to receive the attached file with an i-mode
mail message. The attached files for which you remove a check
mark are held at the i-mode Center. (Even when you put a check
mark, if attached files exceed 100 Kbytes, all or part of attached
files are held at the i-mode Center.)
Put a check mark for items to be receivedl( )
pPut a check mark for “Tool data” to receive Phonebook entries,
schedule events, ToDo items, and bookmarks.
pPut a check mark for “Other” to receive movie files, document
files, and files unsupported by the FOMA terminal.
Auto-start
attachment
You can set whether to play back the attached or pasted
melodies or sound effect automatically for when you display the
text of mail, or message R/F.
ON or OFF
Feel＊Mail See page 176.
Chat setting See page 184.
Check settings You can check each of “Mail settings”.
Information
<Message display>
pEven if “From message” is set, the message might not be displayed from the text
depending on the number of characters in the text.
<Auto color label>
pEven when you set this function, the text color of the mail message already received
does not change.
You can store a header, signature and quotation mark. Also, you can set
whether to automatically paste the header or signature.
1lMail settingsHeader/signature
Do the following operations.
<Set check new messages>
p If you do not want to receive Messages R and Messages F by “Check new
messages”, change these settings to “ ”.
<Auto-start attachment>
pYou cannot play back attached or pasted melodies or sound effect during Play
Background regardless of the setting of “Auto-start attachment”.
Header/Signature
Information
Header The header is the sentence such as greeting at the beginning of
the text.
Select the header fieldEnter a headerl( )
p
You can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not want the header to be pasted automatically, select
“Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 144 for adding a
header by mail message.
Signature The signature is your name and other information, placed at the
end of the text.
Select the signature fieldEnter a signature
l( )
p
You can enter up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not want the signature to be pasted automatically,
select “Insert” to change “ ” to “ ”. See page 144 for
adding a signature by mail message.
pYou can set respective signatures for Address A and Address B
of 2in1. In Dual Mode of 2in1, select a signature to be set from
“Address A” or “Address B”.
pIf you put a check mark for “Insert”, the signature for Address A
or Address B is automatically pasted according to the mode of
2in1. In Dual Mode, the corresponding signature is
automatically pasted when sender’s address is set. Even if you
switch sender’s addresses, the pasted signature is not
automatically switched.
176
Mail
Feel＊Mail reproduces the atmosphere of a mail message by actions of
45 types of animated characters. Once you activate Feel＊Mail, a
Feel＊Mail image is played back after you receive an i-mode mail/SMS
message.
pTo end the playback, press h or r.
1lMail settingsFeel＊Mail
Do the following operations.
Quotation marks The quotation mark is the symbol indicating a quotation from
received mail for when you reply to mail.
Enter a quotation mark.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Information
pYou can set decorations in a header and signature.
pEven if you have put a check mark for “Insert”, the header and signature cannot be
pasted when you compose i-mode mail from a template or i-αppli.
pYou cannot paste the header, signature, and quotation marks to Decome-Anime
messages and SMS messages.
Feel＊Mail
Disp. /play new one A Feel＊Mail image is played back after you receive an i-mode
mail/SMS message.
ON or OFF
pWhen this function is set to “OFF”, a Feel＊Mail icon does not
appear on the Received Address list/detailed Received Address
display, the Inbox list, and the detailed Received Mail display
even while “Disp. /play in history” is set to “ON”.
Message services automatically deliver information you want to your
FOMA terminal.
When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, Messages R/F
automatically arrive from the i-mode Center.
When a Message R/F arrives, “ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” appears at the
top of the display.
You can save up to 100 each of received Messages R/F.
1When a Message R/F arrives,
“ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” blinks and
the message telling its arrival appears.
After the message is received, the number of received
mail messages and Messages R/F is displayed.
pYou can display the Message R/F list by selecting
“MessageR” or “MessageF”.
pIf “Auto-display” is set to other than “OFF”, the contents of received Message R/F
are automatically displayed. They are displayed for about 15 seconds.
pIf no keys are pressed for the specified duration, “ ” or “ ” (see page 29)
appears on the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies
depending on the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ” or “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the
Message R/F list.
Disp. /play in
history
A Feel＊Mail icon appears on the Received Address list/detailed
Received Address display, the Inbox list, or the detailed Received
Mail display.
ON or OFF
<Receive Message R/F>
Receiving Messages R/F Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pReceived Messages R/F are not automatically displayed while a display other than
the Stand-by display is shown, while an i-αppli program is running, during Public
mode (Drive mode), during Lock All, or during Personal Data Lock.
177
Mail
You can set how to automatically display Messages R/F received during
standby or a voice call.
1lMail settingsAuto-display
Select an option for automatic display.
pWhen the Messages R/F exceed the maximum number/size of storage, they are
deleted from the oldest one. However, unread or protected Messages R/F are not
deleted.
pWhen the FOMA terminal cannot receive any more Messages R/F, “ (dark blue)” or
“ (dark blue)” is displayed. Delete unnecessary Messages R/F, read unread
Messages R/F or release protection.
pWhen the icon “ (yellow)” or “ (yellow)” is displayed, the i-mode Center holds
Messages R/F. When the icon “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)” is displayed, the
i-mode Center can hold no more Messages R/F. Perform “Check new messages” to
receive them.
pEven after Messages R/F are displayed automatically, they are still displayed as
unread ones in the Message R/F list. However, if you scroll through the messages
during automatic display, they will be indicated as read ones.
pMessages R/F received in the following cases are held at the i-mode Center:
・When the power is off ・During a videophone call
・During Self Mode ・When you are out of the service area
・During infrared communication ・While connecting to the FirstPass Center
・During PushTalk communication ・During Omakase Lock
・During iC communication ・During copy to microSD
・While connecting to the Data Storage Center
・When the space for Messages R/F is full with protected or unread messages
Auto-display
Information
Information
pWhen you receive Messages R/F during a voice call, the message is displayed
automatically after the call ends.
pThe Messages R/F are not displayed automatically when “Mail security” is set for
“Inbox”, or when “Mail security” is set for “MessageR” folder or “MessageF” folder.
1lInboxMessageR or MessageF
Select a Message R/F to be displayed.
pWhen you select an unread
Message R/F, “ (pink)”
changes to “ ”.
pUse No to check other
Messages R/F.
pWhen the text of Message
R/F is long, use Bo to
scroll the display to check
it. Also, you can press
m( )/c( )
or </> to scroll page by
page.
■Message R/F list and detailed Message R/F display
Status of Message R/F
“ ” appears when protection is set.
<Display Message R/F>
Reading Received Messages R/F
Detailed Message R/F
display
Message R/F list
(pink) Unread Message R/F
Read Message R/F
Detailed Message
R/F display
Message R/F list
178
Mail
Received date and time
The list shows the time for the Message R/F received today, and shows the date for
the Message R/F received until yesterday. The detailed display shows the date and
time the Message R/F was received.
Subject
The data attached or pasted
The detailed display shows the data volume.
Text of message
The phone number stored in the Phonebook is displayed by the name stored in the
Phonebook.
Valid melody file
Valid image file
Valid ToruCa file
Multiple attached files
Multiple pasted files
File with the UIM security
Function Menu of the Message R/F List
Protect
Protect ON/OFF You can protect a Message R/F not to be overwritten or
deleted.
You can protect up to 50 messages (Message R and
Message F each).
Protected messages are indicated by “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
Unprotect all YES
Search/sort
Sort You can rearrange the displaying order.
Select a displaying order.
Filter You can display only Messages R/F that satisfy the condition.
Select a displaying type.
Display all After you execute “Sort” or “Filter”, you can reset it and list all
Messages R/F by “By date ↑”.
No. of messages You can display the total number of Messages R/F stored in
the FOMA terminal, as well as the number of unread
messages and protected messages.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for Messages R/F to be deleted
l( )YES
Delete read mails You can delete all read Messages R/F.
YES
DEL all frm folder You can delete all Messages R/F.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Search/sort>
pTo return to the former status, execute “Display all”.
pIf you close the list and re-open it, you can return to the list of all items.
Function Menu of the Detailed Message R/F Display
Protect ON/OFF See page 178.
Operate file
Save attached file You can save attached or pasted files. (See page 158)
Save insert image You can save the attached image and set it as the Stand-by
display, Wake-up display, or another display. (See page 151)
Save BG image YESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 204.
Save D-pictograms You can save the all Deco-mail pictograms inserted into the
text. (See page 168)
179
Mail
This service enables you to receive reports such as emergency
earthquake alerts distributed from the Japan Meteorological Agency.
pYou can receive Area Mail messages without i-mode contract.
pYou cannot receive Area Mail messages in the following cases※1:
・During Omakase Lock
・During Self Mode
・During international roaming
・During a voice call
・During a videophone call
・While copying data files between FOMA terminal and the microSD card
・During infrared communication
・During iC communication
・When you are out of the service area
・When the power is off
pYou might not be able to receive Area Mail messages in the following cases※1※2:
・During i-mode communication
・During data communication
・During PushTalk communication
・While accessing the Data Storage Center
・While updating software program
・While updating the pattern data
※1 You cannot receive the message once you failed to receive it.
※2 Even when you could receive it, the contents are not automatically displayed.
pThe contents are not automatically displayed when you receive them in the following
cases:
・During Public mode (Drive mode)
(When “Manner/Public mode set” is set to “Follow each mode set.”.)
・While operating the microSD card
・During streaming playback of i-motion file or movie file
Add to phonebook See page 92.
Delete YES
Early Warning “Area Mail”
When an Area Mail message arrives, the ring tone for Area Mail sounds.
“Ring volume”, “Ring time”, and “Vibrator” follows the settings of “Mail”.
When an emergency earthquake alert arrives, a dedicated buzzer (alert)
sounds, and the vibrator works to notify you. Further, the contents are
automatically displayed. “Ring volume” is fixed to “Level 4”, and
“Vibrator” is fixed to “Melody linkage”, so you cannot change their
settings. You can use “Area mail settings” to set “Beep time”.
Up to 30 Area Mail messages are saved separately from i-mode mail
messages and SMS messages in the Inbox.
pJust after purchase, the buzzer sounds and the vibrator works regardless of the setting
of Manner Mode or Public mode (Drive mode) because “Manner/Public mode set” is
set to “Ring”.
1When an Area Mail message arrives,
“ ” lights, the message telling its
arrival appears, and the Call/Charging
indicator flickers.
pIf you press any key, the former display returns.
pThe contents of some Area Mail messages might be automatically displayed
when you receive them. To clear it, press Oo, r, or h.
pSee page 158 for displaying Area Mail messages.
Receiving Early Warning “Area Mail”
Reception Result
display
Information
pWhen a new Area Mail message comes in with 30 Area Mail messages saved, they
are deleted from the read oldest one. When all 30 messages are not read, they are
deleted from the oldest one.
pWhether the details of a received Area Mail message are displayed or not depends on
the setting by the Area Mail message provider.
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, you may not be able to receive Area Mail
messages.
180
Mail
1lArea mail settingsDo the following operations.
<Early Warning “Area Mail” Settings>
Setting Early Warning “Area Mail”
Receive setting You can set whether to use Area Mail.
Yes or No
Beep time You can set the duration the beep sounds.
Enter a beep time (seconds).
pEnter it in two digit, from “01” through “30”.
Manner/Public mode
set
You can set an operation for when an Area Mail message is
received in Manner Mode or Public mode (Drive mode).
Select an item.
Ring. . . . The buzzer or ring tone sounds, and the vibrator
works regardless of the setting of Manner Mode or
Public mode (Drive mode).
Follow each mode set.
. . . . . . . . Follows the setting of Manner Mode or Public mode
(Drive mode).
Check ring tone You can check how the buzzer, ring tone, vibrator, and Call/
Charging indicator work for when “Quake Early Warning” or
“Disaster/Evacuation” is received.
Quake Early Warning or Disaster/Evacuation
Other menu
Receive entry You can register Message IDs for receiving information other
than Quake Early Warning and Disaster/Evacuation. You can
register up to 20 IDs.
pYou do not need to operate “Receive entry” for receiving
only Quake Early Warning and Disaster/Evacuation.
<New>Enter your Terminal Security Code
Enter a registration nameEnter a Message ID.
pTo edit a registered Message ID, highlight it, press
l( ), and then enter your Terminal Security Code.
pYou can enter up to 15 full-pitch/30 half-pitch characters for
an arbitrary registration name. For a Message ID, enter 4
half-pitch characters specified by the service provider.
pYou can edit it also by selecting “Edit” from the Function
menu. Select “Delete this” or “Delete all” and enter your
Terminal Security Code. Then you can delete one or all
Message IDs.
pYou cannot edit/delete “Quake Early Warning” and
“Disaster/Evacuation”.
Information
<Receive entry>
pThe buzzer does not sound when you receive a quake early warning when “Follow
each mode set.” is set with the manner setting by “Manner mode” or “Super silent”.
However, the buzzer sounds with “Original” set to sound any of the following tones.
When every setting is set to mute, the buzzer does not sound:
・Phone volume ・Mail volume ・Alarm volume
・Memo tone ・Keypad sound
pEven when “Follow each mode set.” is set and “Vibrator” of “Original” is set to “OFF”,
the vibrator works if you receive a quake early warning.
181
Mail
You can send or receive chat mail messages to and from multiple
persons on a single display. To use Chat Mail, you need to store chat
members. You can easily store them by creating chat groups.
You can store up to six chat members including the user (yourself).
1lChat maili( )
Chat member<Not recorded>
Enter a mail address.
pTo edit a stored member, select the member.
pWhen the mail address is “phone
number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone number only.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
<Chat Mail>
Using Chat Mail
Store Chat Members
Chat Member list
Information
pIf you edit the mail address of the stored member, the member’s name and image are
changed.
Function Menu of the Chat Member List
Edit You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 1 on page 181.
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Received Address, or Sent Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select
a phone number or mail address.
Sent address. . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail
address and press Oo( ).
Change member
Chat group You can store the members stored in a chat group as chat
members.
Group list or Member list
Group list . . . . . You can select members by chat group.
Member list . . . . You can select members from all the
members stored in chat groups.
pIf you select “Group list”, select a chat group.
The members from the selected group are stored.
pIf you select “Member list”, check the members you want to
store and press l( ).
pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to replace all the chat
members.
Mail group You can store the mail addresses stored in Mail group as chat
members.
Select a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored chat members, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to replace all the chat
members.
182
Mail
1lChat mail
2Oo( )Enter characters.
pYou can enter up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch
characters.
3Press l( ).
The chat mail message is sent.
The sent chat mail message is displayed at the top of the
Chat Mail display.
4The display for receiving chat mail
appears and a chat mail message is
received.
The received chat mail message is displayed at the top of
the Chat Mail display.
Repeat step 2 through step 4 to send and receive chat mail messages.
Display setting You can check the chat member’s name, image, background
color, and mail address.
pYou can press No to switch members.
pThe mail address of the user (yourself) is not displayed.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all YES
Exchange Chat Mail Messages
Chat Mail display
5rYES or NO
YES . . . . You can delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat” folder.
NO . . . . . You do not delete read and sent chat mail message from the “Chat”
folder.
Chat Mail ends.
pYou can end Chat Mail also by pressing h.
pWhen no sent and received chat mail messages are found, the confirmation
display does not appear.
■Chat Mail display
Image
The image you have stored in Chat Group is
displayed.
Member name
The chat member’s name store in the chat
group is displayed. Also, the name is displayed
with a specified background color.
pWhen the name is not stored in the chat
group, up to eight half-pitch characters from
the beginning of the mail address are
displayed. When the mail address is stored in
the Phonebook, up to four full-pitch/eight
half-pitch characters from the beginning of
the name are displayed.
Broadcast mark
Displayed when the chat mail message set with multiple addresses is received.
(blue): All addresses are stored in Chat Member.
(dark blue): Addresses that are not stored in Chat Member are found.
Sent/Received date and time
The date and time the chat mail message was sent/received are displayed. The time is
displayed for the chat mail messages sent/received today and the date for the chat mail
messages sent/received until yesterday.
Text
The text of chat mail message is displayed. The number of characters of the text to be
displayed is up to 250 full-pitch/500 half-pitch characters.
If the text exceeds four lines, is displayed and you can switch the pages by pressing
No.
pYou cannot switch the page of the text on the Chat Mail history.
pThe text of the chat mail message successfully sent is displayed in black. The text of
the chat mail message failed to be sent is displayed in gray.
Current
Chat mail
Chat Mail
history
 
183
Mail
Input box
Entered characters (characters to send) are displayed from the beginning by a factor of
one line.
When a chat mail message arrives during standby, “ ” appears on the
desktop.
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ); then Chat Mail starts
up.
Information
pThe communication fee for when you send chat mail messages to multiple chat
members is the same as for sending a chat mail message to one member. (However,
the information volume for the added address increases the communication fee.)
pWhen “Receive option setting” is set to “ON”, you cannot exchange chat mail
messages.
pWhen the Inbox is full of unread or protected mail messages, you cannot exchange
chat mail messages. Delete unnecessary mail messages or read unread mail
messages, or release the protection and then operate.
pAttached files or pasted data are not displayed.
pSent/Received chat mail messages are saved to the “Chat” folder.
pThe subject of a sent chat mail message is “チャットメール (chat mail)” (half-pitch
characters).
pEven when the chat mail text on the Chat Mail display contains the phone number,
mail address, or URL, the Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, and Web To functions are
not available. However, those functions will be available when Chat Mail is finished
and chat mail message is brought up from the “Inbox” or “Outbox”.
pDuring playing back a music file by MUSIC Player, a tone for the chat mail message
does not sound.
pIn B mode of 2in1, you cannot use Chat Mail.
If You Receive Chat Mail during Standby
Information
pMessages are recognized as chat mail messages in the following cases:
・When the sender’s address or destination address is stored in Chat Member or in a
chat group
・When the subject contains “チャットメール (chat mail)” (all full-pitch or all half-pitch
characters)
pEven when you receive a chat mail message from a member of a chat group other
than Chat Member while Chat Mail is running, “ ” appears.
If you start Chat Mail from a mail address or from a chat group that is not stored in Chat
Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete stored member and
start Chat Mail.
Select “YES”; then the current chat members are deleted and the sender’s mail address
or chat group members are stored in Chat Member.
If you start Chat Mail from the desktop
The sender’s mail address is stored in Chat Member. When the sender’s mail address
has been stored in a chat group, the members in that chat group are stored in Chat
Member. However, the mail address selected as the destination is only the mail address
of the sender.
If you start Chat Mail from Chat Group
The chat group members are stored in Chat Member. All members of the group are
selected as the destination.
If you start Chat Mail from the desktop or Chat Group
Function Menu of the Chat Mail Display
Send You can send the chat mail message.
Select receiver From among chat members, you can select destination
addresses to send the chat mail messages to.
Put a check mark for destination addresses to send the
messages tol( )
Chat member You can store chat members. (See page 181)
Broadcast address You can check the destination addresses you have
simultaneously sent a chat mail message to.
pWhen there are destination addresses that are not stored in
Chat Member, the confirmation display appears asking whether
to store them in Chat Member. If you store them in Chat
Member, select “YES” and put a check mark for the destination
addresses to be stored and press l( ).
Reload You can receive chat mail messages that you could not
automatically receive. If you receive a new chat mail message,
the Chat Mail display is updated.
View first line You can display the latest chat mail message.
View last line You can display the oldest chat mail message.
184
Mail
1lMail settingsChat setting
Do the following operations.
Delete read mails You can delete all the received read chat mail messages and
sent chat mail messages including secret mail and chat mail
messages failed to send.
YES
Information
<Broadcast address>
pYou can store up to six members (including yourself) in Chat Member.
Chat Setting
Sound setting You can set a tone for when you send/receive a chat mail
message on the Chat Mail display.
Select a folderSelect a tone.
pThe tone does not sound when a chat mail message comes in
from a member not stored in Chat Member.
Chat image You can set whether to display images on the Chat Mail display.
ON or OFF
User setting You can set the name and image of the user (yourself).
Select the name fieldEnter a user name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.
pIf you do not change the user name, go to the next step.
Select the image fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
You can store the mail addresses you want to exchange chat mail per
group.
By storing multiple members in a group, you can set them as chat
members at a time.
You can store up to five mail addresses per group. You can create up to
five groups.
1mPhonebook
Phonebook settingsChat group
Select a chat group to be stored.
pWhen the selected chat group has any member,
“ ” appears at the lower left of the display.
If you press l( ), Chat group members are stored in Chat Member and
Chat Mail starts. Go to step 2 on page 182.
2Highlight <Not stored> and press
l( ).
pIf you select a stored mail address, the Chat Group
Address Confirmation display appears.
3Enter a mail address.
pYou can enter up to 50 half-pitch characters.
pWhen the entered mail address is stored in the Phonebook, and the image is
stored in the Phonebook, the image is also set.
pWhen the mail address is “phone number@docomo.ne.jp”, store the phone
number only.
pWhen you store multiple mail addresses, repeat step 2 and step 3.
+m-2-6
<Chat Group>
Creating Chat Group
Chat Group list
Detailed Chat Group
display
Function Menu of the Chat Group List
Activate chat The members in the chat group are stored as chat members and
Chat Mail starts.
Go to step 2 on page 182.
185
Mail
Edit group name Enter a chat group name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Reset group name You can reset the name of the chat group to the default.
YES
Function Menu of the Detailed Chat Group Display/Chat
Group Address Confirmation Display
Edit You can edit the mail address.
Go to step 3 on page 184.
pYou can edit also by pressing l( ).
Refer address You can look up a phone number or mail address in the
Phonebook, Sent Address, or Received Address to enter it.
Select an item.
Phonebook. . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a
phone number or mail address.
Sent address . . . . . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo( ).
Received address . . . Select a phone number or mail address
and press Oo( ).
Change member You can store members from a Mail group in the chat group.
Mail groupSelect a Mail group.
pIf you have already stored members in the chat group, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to replace all the
members.
Member setting You can set the member’s name and image. You can switch
members by pressing No.
Select the member name fieldEnter a member’s name.
pYou can enter up to four full-pitch/eight half-pitch characters.
pNot to change the member’s name, go to the next step.
Select the picture fieldSelect a folderSelect an image.
Delete YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
You can compose and send SMS messages. You can save up to 1,000
sent SMS messages including i-mode mail messages to the Outbox.
pYou can send and receive SMS messages to and from subscribers of overseas
carriers other than DOCOMO. For the countries and overseas carriers available for the
service, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [International Services]” or the DOCOMO
Global Service website.
pYou can move/copy the sent SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 409)
1lCompose SMS
2Select the address fieldSelect an item.
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . Call up a Phonebook entry and select a phone number.
Sent address . . . . . . . . Select a phone number and press Oo( ).
Received address . . . . Select a phone number and press Oo( ).
Enter address. . . . . . . . Enter a phone number.
Only one address can be specified.
pYou can enter up to 21 digits (including “+”).
pWhen the address is that of overseas carriers other than DOCOMO, enter “+”
(press and hold 0 for at least one second), “country/area code”, and
“destination mobile phone number” in that order. When the mobile phone number
begins with “0”, enter the phone number except for the “0”. Also, you can enter
“010”, “country/area code”, and “destination mobile phone number” in that order
to send SMS messages. (When you reply to SMS messages received from
overseas, enter “010”.)
3Select the text fieldEnter text.
pThe number of characters you can enter differs depending on the “SMS input
character”.
4Press l( ).
The animation display during transmission appears and mail is sent.
<Compose SMS>
Composing and Sending SMS
SMS Composition
display
Address field
Text field
186
Mail
5OK
Information
pDepending on the radio wave conditions, the characters might not be sent
successfully to the destination.
pWhen the sent mail messages exceed the maximum number/size of storage, they are
deleted from the oldest one. However, protected sent mail messages are not deleted.
pYou cannot compose an SMS message when sent mail messages in the Outbox are
saved to the maximum number/size of storage and all of them are protected, when 20
draft mail messages are saved, or when the Draft is full.
Release the protection for sent mail messages, or send/delete draft mail messages,
and then operate again.
pEven if “Activate/Deactivate” of “Caller ID notification” is set to “Deactivate”, the caller
ID is notified to the other party you send an SMS message to. If you attempt to send
an SMS message to the phone number headed by “184”/“186”, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to delete prefix numbers and send the mail.
pIf you set “SMS report request” to “ON”, you cannot send SMS messages to the
i-mode phone of the mova service.
p“+” is valid only at the beginning of the address.
pYou cannot send the message to addresses that include any characters other than
numbers, “#”, “:” and “+”.
pYou cannot start a new line while editing the text.
pThe special symbols (see page 493) are replaced by half-pitch spaces.
pEach space is counted as a character.
pYou cannot reply to the SMS message whose sender is User unset/PublicPhone/
Unavailable.
pIn B Mode of 2in1, you cannot compose SMS messages.
Function Menu of the SMS Composition Display
Send You can send the SMS message.
Go to step 5 on page 186.
Preview Before sending, you can check the address and the text contents.
pPress l( ) to send the SMS message.
You can save up to 2,500 received SMS messages including i-mode mail
messages.
pYou can move/copy the received SMS messages to the UIM. (See page 409)
1When an SMS message arrives,
“ (pink)” lights and the message
telling its arrival appears.
When receiving ends, the display shows the number of
received SMS messages.
pYou can display the Inbox list by selecting “Mail”.
pIf no keys are pressed for about 15 seconds, “ ” (see page 29) appears on
the desktop and the former display returns. (The transit time varies depending on
the setting for “Mail/Msg. ring time”.)
Press Oo, highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the Inbox list.
Save You can save the SMS message you are composing or editing to
the Draft.
pYou cannot save the message when the address field and text
field are blank.
SMS report req. See page 187.
SMS valid. per. See page 187.
SMS input char. See page 188.
<Receive SMS>
Receiving SMS Automatically
Reception Result
display
Information
pWhen the unread or protected messages in the Inbox has reached the maximum
number/size of storage, no new messages can be received and “ (dark blue)” is
displayed. To receive SMS messages, delete mail in the Inbox or read unread mail or
release protection until “ (dark blue)” clears, and then perform “Check new SMS”.
pWhen you receive concatenated SMS messages, they are displayed on the Inbox list
in order of arrival at the FOMA terminal.
187
Mail
1Reception Result displayMail
Select an SMS message to be
displayed.
pPress and hold No for at least one second from the
detailed SMS display to change the size of characters.
(See “Mail” on page 118)
When SMS messages arrive at the SMS Center, they are automatically
sent to your FOMA terminal, but will be held at the SMS Center if your
FOMA terminal cannot receive messages such as when it is off or out of
the service area.
You can receive the messages by “Check new SMS”.
1lCheck new SMS
2Return
If the Center holds SMS messages, the FOMA terminal automatically receives
them.
Display Newly Received SMS Messages
Information
pDepending on the characters entered in the received SMS message, spaces might be
displayed.
pWhile the sender’s address (phone number) is highlighted in the displayed SMS
message, you can press *Oo( ) to make a voice call, videophone call, or
PushTalk call to the displayed number (the Phone To/AV Phone To function).
Further, if the sender’s phone number is stored in the Phonebook, the stored “name”
is highlighted. In this case, you can dial the phone number in the same way.
pA Short Mail message is received as an SMS message on the FOMA terminal. When
the sender does not notify you of the phone number, the reason is displayed in the
sender’s field.
<Check New SMS>
Checking New SMS
Information
pSome SMS messages are not delivered immediately after checking.
You can set whether to request an SMS report for when sending an SMS
message.
The SMS report lets you know that your SMS message was delivered to
the destination.
You can check received SMS reports in the “Inbox” folder.
1lSMS settingsSMS report requestON or OFF
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
You can set the period that the SMS Center holds an SMS message sent
but unsuccessfully delivered due to the out-of-service area, etc.
1lSMS settingsSMSvalidity period
Select a holding period.
pIf you select “None”, the stored SMS message is re-sent after a certain period of
time and deleted from the SMS Center.
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
pWhen “ (dark blue)” or “ (dark blue)”, etc. are displayed, you cannot receive any
more SMS messages. Delete unnecessary mail, read unread mail, or release
protection. (Read and unprotected messages are automatically deleted from the
oldest one.)
pYou cannot use this function to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F. Use “Check
new messages” to receive i-mode mail or Messages R/F.
<SMS Settings>
Setting SMS
SMS Report Request
Information
SMS Validity Period
188
Mail
You can set the characters you can enter into the text of SMS messages.
You can set to enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters and
half-pitch symbols.
1l
SMS settings
SMS input character
Select an item.
Japanese (70char.) . . . You can enter full-pitch and half-pitch characters. You
cannot enter pictograms except “ ” and “ ” (see
page 489). You can enter up to 70 characters for the text.
English (160char.). . . . You can enter only half-pitch alphanumeric characters
and half-pitch symbols. You can enter up to 160
characters for the text.
pWhen you operate from the Function menu of the SMS Composition display, the
setting is effective only for the SMS message you are composing.
You can set the address and “Type of number” for the SMS Center. This
setting is for getting any service other than SMS Service you currently use.
1lSMS settingsSMS center settingUser setting
Enter an addressInternational or Unknown
pYou can enter up to 20 half-pitch characters for the address. However, if “#” or
“:” is included, you cannot set it for “International”.
pYou can reset User Setting to “DOCOMO” by ResetEnter your Terminal
Security CodeYES.
SMS Input Character
SMS Center Setting
※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
189
i-mode/Full Browser
i-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Accessing Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <iMenu> 190
Using My Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <My Menu> 191
Changing i-mode Password . . . . <Change i-mode Password> 192
Full Browser
Displaying Websites Designed for PC . . . . . . . <Full Browser> 192
Displaying a Site
Viewing and Operating Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Displaying Site Viewed in the Past. . . . . . . . . . . . . <Last URL> 199
Displaying Internet Websites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Enter URL> 199
Saving Websites or Sites for Quick Access . . . . <Bookmark> 200
Saving Site Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Screen Memo> 201
Downloading Images, Melodies, etc. from Sites
Saving Images from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Save Image> 204
Downloading Data from Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Download> 204
Flash Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Uploading Images, Moving Pictures, etc. to Sites
Uploading Files to Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Useful Functions of i-mode
Operations from Highlighted Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Setting i-mode
Setting i-mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <i-mode Settings> 209
Using Certificates
Operating SSL/TLS Certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<SSL/TLS Certificate Setting> 213
Setting FirstPass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Operate Your Certificate> 213
Changing Hosts for Certificate Issue
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Center Host Setting> 215
190
i-mode/Full Browser
i-mode is a service that enables you, by using the display of the FOMA
terminal supporting i-mode (i-mode phone), to use online services such
as site access, Internet access, and i-mode mail.
pi-mode is a pay service that is available on a subscription basis.
pFor details on i-mode, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
You can use a variety of services offered by IPs (Information Providers).
From the display of the FOMA terminal, you can check your bank
balance, reserve tickets, and do similar tasks. (IPs offer different types of
services. Some of them need to be applied for separately.)
i-mode
■Before Using i-mode
pContents of sites and websites (Internet websites) are generally protected by
copyrights law. Data such as text and images that you obtained to the i-mode phone
from sites and Internet websites can be used for personal entertainment but cannot
be used in whole or in part, as it is or after modification, for commercial purposes or
redistributed, unless you have permission from the copyright holders.
pIf you replace the UIM with another one or turn on the power with the UIM not
inserted, you cannot display/play back files, depending on the model, such as still
images/moving pictures/melodies obtained from sites, attached files (still images/
moving pictures/melodies and other files) sent/received by mail, screen memos, or
Messages R/F.
pWhen the file whose display and/or playback is restricted by the UIM is set for the
Stand-by display or specified ring tone, the FOMA terminal works with the default
contents when you replace the existing UIM with new one or turn on the power with
the UIM not inserted.
<iMenu>
Accessing Sites
1Press i.
While you are online, “ ” blinks.
p“ ” blinks while you are using the i-mode service
(during i-mode standby).
pTo cancel while accessing a site other than iMenu,
select “Cancel”. To cancel while obtaining a page, press
l( ).
pTo end i-mode, press hand select “YES” while the
site is displayed. “ ” goes off and i-mode ends. It may
take longer to end i-mode.
pWhen you set “i-mode button setting” to “Display i-mode
menu” in “Common settings” of “i-mode settings”, the
i-mode menu is displayed after pressing i from the
Stand-by display.
2Select an item (link).
Repeat selecting items (links) to display the desired site.
pYou can select underscored items on the displayed site. When you select an
item, it is highlighted.
pIf there is a number at the head of the item showing the link, you can connect to
that link directly by pressing the numeric key corresponding to that number.
(Some sites cannot be connected.)
The display for establishing authentication appears. When obtaining is completed, the
SSL/TLS page appears and “ ” lights.
pTo cancel during authentication, select “Cancel”. To cancel obtaining the SSL/TLS
page after authentication, press l( ).
pYou can display SSL/TLS※-compatible pages via i-mode and Full Browser.
※SSL/TLS are the safer data communication systems using authentication/encryption
technology to protect your privacy. SSL/TLS pages prevent eavesdropping and
information alteration during communication by exchanging encrypted data files.
Further, server authentication prevents web spoofing, thus making your personal
information such as credit card number or postal address exchanged safer.
To obtain an SSL/TLS site (SSL/TLS page)
191
i-mode/Full Browser
The confirmation display appears asking whether to close the SSL/TLS page. Select
“YES” to display an ordinary site; “ ” goes off.
To return to a non-SSL/TLS site
Information
pDepending on the site, you may need to apply for the service in writing separately, or
to pay information fees to use it.
pThe maximum display size of the images on the site is 480 x 1324 dots. If an image is
larger than 480 x 1324 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio retained.
pDepending on the site, “ ” might be displayed when the image is not correctly
displayed.
pDepending on the site or data, you might not be able to download or save melodies,
PDF files, software programs, and others.
pWith some Internet websites (sites) supporting i-mode, the color setting might make
the text difficult or impossible to see.
pWhen the file size of the page you have received exceeds the maximum obtainable
size of a page, receiving is suspended. The data obtained so far might be displayable
by selecting “OK”. When you have accessed a page by i-mode, you might be able to
display the page in Full Browser by selecting “Switch to FB”.
pWhen you are asked from the site to send information about music you have played
back on the FOMA terminal, the confirmation display appears for about sending your
music information. Select “YES” to send the information (title names, artist names,
and played dates) of the music played back on the FOMA terminal. The sent music
information is used for the IP (information provider) to provide customized information
to you.
pWhen SSL/TLS communications automatically start, a confirmation display appears
asking whether to do communications. Select “YES” to communicate. Select “YES
(default)” not to show the same confirmation display afterward.
iMenu is available in English.
1iEnglish
English iMenu is displayed.
By registering your favorite sites in My Menu, you can access them easily
from the next time.
You can register up to 45 sites.
1Call up a page to be registeredRegister My Menu
pThe page configuration differs depending on the site.
2Select the i-mode password text box
Enter your i-mode password決定 (OK)
pThe entered i-mode password is displayed as “＊”.
pSee page 122 for the i-mode password.
Change to iMenu in English
Information
pEnglish iMenu differs from Japanese iMenu.
pSome items in Japanese iMenu are not available for English iMenu.
pGenerally, “What’s New” is updated every other Monday.
<My Menu>
Using My Menu
Register Sites in My Menu
Information
pSome sites cannot be registered in My Menu.
pWhen you subscribe to a pay site in the Menu list, it is automatically registered in My
Menu.
192
i-mode/Full Browser
1iEnglishMy MenuSelect a site to be accessed.
The i-mode password (four digits) is required to apply for/cancel
Message Services or i-mode pay services, and to configure i-mode mail
settings.
Pay careful attention to keep your i-mode password secret.
1iEnglishOptionsChange i-mode Password
Select the “Current Password” text box
Enter your i-mode password (four digits).
pWhen you enter your i-mode password for the first time, enter “0000” (four zeros)
which is set at a time of your contract.
pThe entered numeral is displayed as “＊”.
2Select the “New Password” text box
Enter a new i-mode password (four digits).
pEnter your own i-mode password.
3Select the “New Password (Confirmation)” text box
Enter your new i-mode password (four digits)Select
pEnter the same password that you entered in step 2.
Access Sites from My Menu
Information
pThe Dual Network Service user might not be able to use the FOMA terminal to view
My Menu registered by the mova terminal, and vice versa.
<Change i-mode Password>
Changing i-mode Password
You can browse Internet websites designed for PCs using the Full
Browser function. You can display even the Internet websites that cannot
be correctly displayed by i-mode. However, you cannot display or
correctly display some Internet websites.
pThe data such as Home URL or Bookmarks registered via Full Browser cannot be
used for i-mode. The contents set by Full Browser are invalid for i-mode.
pNote that you are charged a high communication fee for the massive data
communication such as browsing Internet websites having many images or
downloading data files. For details on the packet communication fee, refer to “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
1mi-modeFull Browser Home
The Internet website set as Home URL is displayed.
pWhen “FB usage setting” is set to “NO”, the confirmation display appears asking
whether to start Full Browser. Highlight “Yes” and select “OK” to switch settings of
“FB usage setting”, then Full Browser starts up.
Further, you can access a site for signing up a flat-rate service via i-mode by
selecting “To sign up a packet flat-rate service, click here”.
pTo end Full Browser, press h with an Internet website displayed and select
“YES”.
Information
pNote that if you do not remember the i-mode password, you need to bring an
identification card such as your driver’s license to the handling counter of a docomo
shop.
<Full Browser>
Displaying Websites Designed for PC
Information
pYou can display up to 1 Mbyte of data per page.
pIt may take long to display some Internet websites.
193
i-mode/Full Browser
Two modes, “Phone mode” and “PC layout mode”, are available for the
display of Full Browser.
1m
i-mode
i-mode settings
Full Browser set.
Display mode setting
PC layout mode or Phone mode
PC layout mode
. . . Displays an Internet website in the same format as when it is displayed on
your personal computer in 800 (width) x 1400 (height) dots. You can browse
Internet websites by scrolling upward, downward, and sideways.
Phone mode
. . . Displays an Internet website to fit in the display width of the FOMA terminal.
You do not need to scroll sideways; you can browse Internet websites only by
scrolling upward and downward.
pWhen you show an Internet website, you can switch the display modes each time
you select “Change disp. mode” of “Settings” from the Function menu.
Press l( ) from the display of Full Browser to switch to
“Operation mode”. The operation palette is displayed in Operation Mode,
and you can enlarge/reduce the display size and switch the windows.
Bo: Enlarges/reduces the display size.
No: Switch the windows.
pWhen you press i( ) in Operation Mode, the key
operation guide is displayed.
pTo scroll the display, press m( ) or c( ).
pYou cannot use the following functions in Full Browser:
・Phone To function ・i-αppli To function ・Media To function
Switch Display Mode
Information
Use Operation Mode
You can switch to Full Browser to show the Internet websites incorrectly
displayed by i-mode.
1While a page to be shown is displayed in Full Browser
i( )Full BrowserSwitch to FBYES
Basic operating methods while a site is displayed are explained.
…: Accessing via i-mode
: Accessing via Full Browser
…: Displaying a screen memo
: Displaying a captured image
…: Displaying in the multiwindow
…Window number/Number of windows
…: During communication in another window
: During communication in another frame
…: PC layout mode
: Phone mode
…: Displaying in an enlarged frame
…: Normal pointer : Selecting a link
: Obtaining or processing data : Drag mode
: Dragging an object : Selecting a text input field
: Selecting a Flash movie : Selecting an operable Flash movie
: Selecting a text-enterable Flash movie
Switch from i-mode to Full Browser
Information
pWith Full Browser, note that the billing system differs from that of i-mode.
pWhen you switch to Full Browser with multiple windows opened, the pages in other
windows are closed and you cannot return to those pages by -m( ).
pYou cannot correctly display some Internet websites.
Viewing and Operating Sites
About Site Viewing Display
 
194
i-mode/Full Browser
■Operations while a site is displayed
※For i-mode, each time of pressing l( ) switches between the page move
operation and display scroll operation.
Operation
Key operation
i-mode Full Browser
Phone mode PC layout mode
Return to previous
page
m( )※
Forward to next page c( )※
Scroll display Bo
(Mo while a pointer
is displayed.)
Bo
(Mo while a pointer
is displayed.) or </
>
Mo
Move highlighted Mo—
Switch to Drag mode
(Only while a pointer
is displayed)
—
Oo(for at least one
second)
Scroll the displays
page by page
</> or
m( )/
c( )※
pTo move to the
top/end of the
page, press and
hold the key for at
least one second.
a/s (For the horizontal display, the
operations for a and s are
reversed.)
pTo move to the top/end of the page,
press and hold the key for at least one
second.
Reload —0
Display Bookmark
Folder list —1
Information
pWhen you try to switch the key operation functions by pressing +l( ), a
confirmation display appears asking whether to switch them. Select “YES” to switch.
Select “YES (default)” not to show the same confirmation display afterward.
The FOMA terminal saves the files such as the displayed Internet
websites to a temporal storage area called a cache. By pressing
m( ) or c( ), you can show the page stored in the cache
without communicating.
You can move even between i-mode and Full Browser.
pThe FOMA terminal starts communication when you show a page that exceeds the
cache size of the FOMA terminal or that is configured (created) to always read its latest
information.
pWhen i-mode or Full Browser ends, the cache is cleared.
1Press m( ) to return to the previous page.
Press c( ) to go to the next page.
By pressing m( ) repeatedly, you can move back through the pages that you
have displayed so far. However, if you display a different page (“D”) from the previous
page (“B”), you cannot return to “C” from “D” even when you press m( ) twice.
Instead, the pages are displayed in the order of “D” → “B” → “A”.
Return to Obtained Previous Page/Go to Obtained Next Page
To turn pages
<When the page display sequence is
“A”→“B”→“C”→“B”→“D”>
…
Page display sequence
…
Sequence when you move back
from the display “D”
A B C
D
m m
m
Information
pWhen you display a screen memo on the way, you cannot move to pages shown
previous to the screen memo.
195
i-mode/Full Browser
You can open a new window and simultaneously open up to five sites.
(Multiwindow)
pYou can switch the simultaneously opened sites to show one by one.
1While a site is displayedi( )Window
Open new windowSelect an item.
Link . . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show a page of the highlighted link.
Bookmark . . . Opens a new window to show a site stored in Bookmark. (See
page 200)
Last URL . . . . Opens a new window to show the page displayed last.
iMenu Search
. . . . . . . . . . . . Shows “iMenu” via i-mode.
Full Browser Home
. . . . . . . . . . . . Shows an Internet website set as Home URL via Full Browser.
URL enter history
. . . . . . . . . . . . Opens a new window to show an Internet website by selecting from
URL History or entering a URL. (See page 199)
pSee page 197 for how to switch or close the window.
pWhen you display a page stored in cache, you cannot display text or settings you
entered when connected before.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the site behavior might differ from the one for
ordinary sites.
Displaying Multiple Sites
Information
Information
pSome sites have links configured to open in new windows. When you open such a
link, the new window opens even if you do not perform above operations.
When you set “Display pointer” of “Pointer/scroll” to “ON”, a pointer
appears on the display. Using this pointer, you can scroll displays, select
a content, etc. You can set “Pointer/scroll” for i-mode and Full Browser
separately.
You can switch to Drag mode by pressing and holding Oo for at least
one second while a pointer is displayed. By switching to Drag mode, you
can operate Drag-mode-compatible contents. In Drag mode, the pointer
is displayed as “ ”.
1Press and hold Oo for at least one second while a
pointer is displayed
Select the content to be operated and press Oo.
The pointer switch to “ ”.
2Use Mo to move the contentOo
You can release the content and the pointer returns to “ ”.
pPress and hold Oo for at least one second to release Drag mode.
Operate by the Pointer
Operate by Switching to Drag Mode
Information
pThe feasible operation differs depending on the content.
pIn Drag mode, you can operate the contents only. However, when you select an input
box or you upload a file, Drag mode is released and then you can operate them.
pWhile accessing via i-mode or in Phone mode of Full Browser, you cannot perform
drag operation.
196
i-mode/Full Browser
You can display sites composed of frames. You can select a frame, and
enlarge each selected frame for displaying.
1While a site with frames is displayed
Use Mo to highlight a frame and press Oo( ).
pTo return to the display for
all frames, press r, or
select “Others” from the
Function menu and then
select “All frames”.
In sites, you may use the displayed radio buttons, check boxes, text
boxes, and pull down menus.
Display a Site Supporting Frames
All frames Enlarged by frame
Information
pWhen a site has many divided frames, you might not be able to open all frames. “ ”
is added to the frames that you could not open.
Select/Enter Information on Sites
Name Display example Operation/Explanation
Radio
button
: Not selected
: Selected
Radio buttons are for selecting one from multiple
choices.
Check box : Not selected
: Selected
Check boxes are for selecting one or more items
from multiple choices.
When you select an item, the confirmation display might appear asking
whether to send the Phone/Terminal and UIM ID.
pThe “Phone/Terminal and UIM ID” to be sent is used by the IP (Information Providers)
for identifying the user, providing customized information, and judging if the contents
the IP (Information Provider) offers are available on the user’s mobile phone.
pThe “Phone/Terminal and UIM ID” is sent to the IP (Information Provider) over the
Internet, so could be deciphered by third parties. However, your phone number,
address, age, and gender are not notified to the IPs (Information Providers) or others,
by this operation.
Text box You can enter characters. Highlight a text box and
press Oo( ) to show the Character Entry
display.
Pull down
menu
You can select an item from the option list. Highlight
a pull-down menu and press Oo( ) to show
the option list.
pYou might be able to select multiple items from
pull-down menus. Each time you use Bo to
highlight an item and press Oo( ), you can
select/release items repeatedly. After selecting
items, press l( ).
Name Display example Operation/Explanation
Information
pDepending on the site, the display authenticating your user ID or password might
appear.
Enter your user ID and password, and then select “OK”.
Phone/Terminal and UIM ID
197
i-mode/Full Browser
Function Menu while Site is Displayed
Bookmark
Bookmark Go to step 1 of “Display Websites or Sites from a
Bookmark” on page 200.
Add bookmark See page 200.
Screen memo
Screen memo list Go to step 2 on page 202.
Add screen memo See page 201.
Last URL See page 199.
iMenu Search You can return to “iMenu”.
Full Browser Home You can open the Internet website set as Home URL via
Full Browser.
Full Browser
Full Browser Home You can open the Internet website set as Home URL via
Full Browser.
Switch to FB See page 193.
i-mode Browser
iMenu Search You can open “iMenu” by i-mode.
i-mode BRWSR Switch You can switch to i-mode to show the site being displayed
via Full Browser.
YES
Reload The site contents will be updated with the latest
information.
Enter URL/info
Enter URL You can enter a URL to display an Internet website.
Select the text box.
Go to step 2 on page 199.
pThe URL of the displayed site is entered beforehand.
URL enter history See page 199.
Display URL You can display the URL of the displayed site.
Window
Open new window See page 195.
Change window You can switch the windows while the sites are displayed
in the multiwindow.
Select a window.
Close window You can close the windows while the sites are displayed in
the multiwindow.
YES
Save image See page 204.
Select text area
Copy You can select characters displayed on the site and copy
them.
Select a start pointSelect an end point.
pSee page 428 for how to paste copied characters.
Read map You can select characters displayed on the site and
display the map.
Select a start pointSelect an end point.
Using the characters you selected, GPS compatible i-αppli
program starts. (See page 208)
Settings
Change disp. mode See page 193.
CHG wide scr. mode/
RLS wide scr. mode
You can switch vertical display and horizontal display.
Full display set. See page 210.
Zoom See page 210.
Image display set. See page 209.
Sound setting See page 209.
Script setting See page 209.
198
i-mode/Full Browser
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer See page 209.
Speed See page 209.
Focus while scroll See page 210.
Cookie
Cookie setting You can set whether to validate cookies.
Go to step 1 of “Cookie Setting” on page 212.
Delete Cookies You can delete cookies.
Go to step 1 of “Delete Cookies” on page 212.
Referer setting You can set whether to send a referer.
Go to step 1 of “Referer Setting” on page 212.
FB Home setting You can store the displayed Internet website as Home
URL.
YES
Others
All frames You can return to the display for all frames from the display
for the enlarged frame.
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the URL/
image of a displayed site/screen memo pasted or
attached.
Select an item.
Attach URL. . . . . . . .Pastes a URL to the text of an
i-mode mail message.
Attach image . . . . . .Select an image to attach it to an
i-mode mail message.
Insert Deco-mail. . . .Select an image to paste it to a
Deco-mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
pSee page 145 for Deco-mail.
Add to phonebook See page 92.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
Change CHR code When characters are not correctly displayed, you can
convert them to the correct ones.
pThis setting is valid only for the site and Internet website
being displayed.
Title You can display the title of the displayed site.
Certificate You can check the subject name, author, validity period
and serial number of the certificate used in SSL/TLS
communication. Up to five certificates are displayed.
Retry You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the
beginning.
pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display
area, the Flash movie might not be played back.
Key guide You can display the key operation guide for the Full
Browser displays.
Information
<Select text area>
pThe maximum number of characters you can select is 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000
half-pitch characters. With “Read map”, you might not be able to select a text area
even within 5,000 full-pitch or 10,000 half-pitch characters.
pDepending on the site, you might not be able to copy.
<Compose message>
pYou cannot paste the URL when it exceeds 256 half-pitch characters (512 half-pitch
characters for Full Browser).
pYou may not be able to attach or paste some images to i-mode mail.
<Change CHR code>
pWhen characters are not correctly displayed, repeat the operation. However, the
previous character is displayed if you repeat the operation four times.
pEven when you repeat this operation, the correct character might not appear.
pIf you change the character code when the correct characters are displayed, wrong
characters might appear instead.
<Title>
pUp to 128 half-pitch/64 full-pitch characters can be displayed for a title.
199
i-mode/Full Browser
Each time you display a site via i-mode or Full Browser, the URL of the
page is stored as “Last URL”. You can store up to 50 URLs for i-mode
and Full Browser in total.
By selecting “Last URL”, you can display the page list you viewed in the
past.
1mi-modeLast URL
Select the page to be displayed.
pAs a browse type icon, “ ” is displayed for the URL accessed via i-mode and
“ ” is displayed for the URL accessed via Full Browser.
pYou can display the URL by pressing i( ) and selecting “Display URL”.
pTo delete the Last URL, press i( ), select “Delete”,and then select
“Delete”, “Delete selected”, or “Delete all”.
1mi-modeEnter URL<NEW>
2Enter a URLi-mode Browser or Full Browser
pYou can enter up to 512 half-pitch alphanumeric characters and symbols.
pFor Full Browser, the confirmation display appears telling that the website might
not be displayed.
<Last URL>
Displaying Site Viewed in the Past
Display Last URL
Information
pDepending on the page, you might not be able to store the page as “Last URL”.
pWhen the stored URLs exceed 50 items, the Last URLs are overwritten automatically,
starting from the oldest one.
pWhen you display pages by the same URL, the URL for the page you displayed last is
stored. When you display the pages by different browsers, each URL is stored
separately.
<Enter URL>
Displaying Internet Websites
Up to 50 entered URLs can be stored in URL History.
1mi-modeEnter URL
Select a URL to be displayed
i-mode Browser or Full Browser
pAs a browse type icon, “ ” is displayed for the URL
accessed via i-mode and “ ” is displayed for the URL
accessed via Full Browser.
pExcluding “http://” and “https://”, up to 20 half-pitch characters can be displayed.
pYou can edit the URL by selecting the URL’s text box.
Information
pFor i-mode, Internet websites not supporting i-mode or some type of Internet websites
to be connected might not be displayed correctly.
Displaying Websites from URL History
URL History list
Information
pWhen the entered URLs exceed 50 items, the URL histories are overwritten
automatically, starting from the oldest one.
pWhen you newly enter a URL to access a site, that URL is stored as a different history
even if you access the same URL. However, if you switch browsers to access a site
without editing the URL, the URL is stored with the browser type icon switched.
Function Menu of the URL History List
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the
highlighted URL pasted to the text.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
pYou can compose it also by pressing l( ).
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
200
i-mode/Full Browser
Once you bookmark a frequently accessed site, you can display the page
directly. You can register up to 600 bookmarks for i-mode and Full
Browser in total.
1From the page to be registeredi( )
BookmarkAdd bookmarkYES
Select a destination folder.
FB Home setting You can store the site as Home URL of Full Browser.
YES
Delete
Delete YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for URL histories to be deleted
l( )YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
<Bookmark>
Saving Websites or Sites for Quick Access
Add Bookmark
Information
pWhen the number of characters used for a URL exceeds 256 half-pitch characters
(512 half-pitch characters for Full Browser), you cannot store it.
pWhen the title exceeds 12 full-pitch/24 half-pitch characters, the excess is deleted. If
no title exists, the URL excluding “http://” or “https://” is registered.
pEven when the URLs are the same, you can bookmark them separately if the browser
type is different.
pSome pages cannot be bookmarked.
1mi-modeBookmarkSelect a folder
Select a bookmark to be displayed.
p“ ” is displayed for
i-mode bookmarks and
“ ” is displayed for Full
Browser bookmarks, and
the site is accessed via the
browser corresponding to
the selected bookmark.
Display Websites or Sites from a Bookmark
Bookmark Folder list Bookmark list
Function Menu of the Bookmark Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder You can add a new folder. You can add up to 39 folders in
addition to “Bookmark” and “Screen memo” folders.
Enter a folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Edit folder name Edit the folder name.
pYou can enter up to 10 full-pitch/20 half-pitch characters.
Delete folder You can delete the folder and all bookmarks and screen
memos in the folder. You cannot delete the “Bookmark” folder/
“Screen memo” folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Ir/ transmission
Send all Ir data See page 378.
All transmission See page 379.
No. of bookmarks You can check the number of bookmarks stored in all folders
and the number of bookmarks each for i-mode and Full
Browser.
Delete all The folders are not deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
201
i-mode/Full Browser
Function Menu of the Bookmark List
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message with the
highlighted URL pasted to the text.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
pYou can compose it also by pressing l( ).
Attach to mail You can send an i-mode mail message with the bookmark
attached.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
Move You can move bookmarks or screen memos to another folder.
Select a destination folderPut a check mark for
bookmarks or screen memos to be movedl( )
YES
Edit title Edit the title.
pYou can edit the title also by pressing m( ) from the
list.
pYou can enter up to 12 full-pitch/24 half-pitch characters for
a bookmark. If you press Oo( ) with a blank, the URL
without “http://” or “https://” is registered.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters for
a screen memo. If you press Oo( ) with a blank, the
screen memo is registered as “No title”.
Copy
Copy URL You can copy the URL of the bookmark.
Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying.
pSee page 428 for how to paste copied characters.
Copy to microSD See page 362.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
Ir/ transmission
You can save a displayed page as a screen memo.
You can save up to 300 screen memos each for i-mode and Full Browser,
however, the number of screen memos you can save decreases
depending on the data volume.
1From a page to be savedi( )Screen memo
Add screen memoYESSelect a destination folder.
When you save a screen memo, the image for preview (captured image) is saved
as well.
pWhen you select “YES (capture only)”, you save captured image only.
pWhen screen memos are saved to the maximum and thus you can save captured
images only, a confirmation display appears asking whether to save the captured
images only. See page 206 for when captured images are also saved to the
maximum.
Send Ir data See page 377.
transmission See page 379.
No. of bookmarks You can display the number of bookmarks stored in the
displayed folder.
Delete
Delete YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for bookmarks or screen memos to
be deletedl( )YES
Delete all You can delete all bookmarks or screen memos stored in the
folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
FB Home setting You can store the site as Home URL of Full Browser.
YES
<Screen Memo>
Saving Site Contents
Save as a Screen Memo
202
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modeScreen memo
i-mode Browser or Full Browser
pEach time you press l from the Screen Memo Folder
list, you can switch between the screen memo folder of
i-mode and that of Full Browser.
Information
pWhen the title exceeds 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters, the excess is deleted.
pIf you save the data acquisition completion display, its data file is saved as well. (You
cannot save the data acquisition completion display for Chaku-uta Full® music files,
for i-motion files with playable deadline, or for the ToruCa files whose output from the
FOMA terminal is prohibited.) Some data acquisition completion displays cannot be
saved as screen memos. The display other than the data acquisition completion
display is saved with a URL of up to 2,048 half-pitch characters for that page.
pWhen you save SSL/TLS pages, their SSL/TLS certificates are saved as well.
pThe contents entered in the text box and the contents selected with the pull-down
menu, check box, or radio button are not saved to screen memos.
pYou can save up to 500 Kbytes for i-mode and up to 1,024 Kbytes for Full Browser per
page.
However, you can save up to 1,024 Kbytes for the schedule acquisition completion
display, up to 200 Kbytes for the Deco-mail Template acquisition completion display,
up to 100 Kbytes for the Melody/Chara-den image/Decome-Anime template/ToruCa
file (details) acquisition completion display, up to 20 Kbytes for the Download
Dictionary acquisition completion display, and up to 1 Kbyte for the ToruCa acquisition
completion display.
pDepending on the site, you might not be able to save a screen memo.
Display a Screen Memo
Screen Memo
Folder list
2Select a folderSelect a screen memo.
pWhen “FB usage setting”
of “Full Browser set.” of
“i-mode settings” is set to
“No” and you select a
screen memo of Full
Browser, the captured
image is displayed.
pPress m or c from the
detailed Screen Memo
display to check other
screen memos.
pWhen you select a link on a screen memo, the access automatically starts via
i-mode or Full Browser respectively.
Screen Memo list Detailed Screen
Memo display
Information
pThe page saved as a screen memo has the information at the time it was saved. This
might differ from the latest information on the site.
Function Menu of the Screen Memo Folder List
Operate folder
Add folder See page 200.
Edit folder name See page 200.
Delete folder See page 200.
Security ON/OFF You can set the folder to open only when you enter your
Terminal Security Code.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
The folder changes to “ ”.
pTo release it, perform the same operation.
No. of memos You can display the number of stored screen memos and
protected screen memos in all folders.
Delete all You can delete all screen memos. The folders will not be
deleted.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
203
i-mode/Full Browser
Function Menu of the Screen Memo List
Move See page 201.
Edit title See page 201.
Protect ON/OFF You can protect screen memos not to be deleted. You can
protect up to 150 screen memos, however, the number of
screen memos you can protect decreases depending on the
data volume.
Protected items are indicated by “ ” or “ ”.
pTo release protection, perform the same operation.
No. of memos You can display the number of stored screen memos and
protected screen memos in the displayed folder.
Delete
Delete See page 201.
Delete selected See page 201.
Delete all See page 201.
Function Menu of the Detailed Screen Memo Display/while
Captured Image is Displayed
Edit title See page 201.
Protect ON/OFF See page 203.
Display captured You can display the captured image.
Reload You can access the site saved as the screen memo from
the captured image.
Display URL You can display the URL of the screen memo.
Save image See page 204.
Select text area
Copy See page 197.
Read map See page 197.
Settings
Change disp. mode See page 193.
CHG wide scr. mode/
RLS wide scr. mode
You can switch vertical display and horizontal display.
Full display set. See page 210.
Zoom See page 210.
Sound setting See page 209.
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer See page 209.
Speed See page 209.
Focus while scroll See page 210.
Others
All frames See page 198.
Compose message See page 198.
Add to phonebook See page 92.
Certificate See page 198.
Retry You can play back the animation or Flash movie from the
beginning.
pWhen a part of the Flash movie is outside the display
area, the Flash movie might not be played back.
Compose message See page 198.
Delete YES
204
i-mode/Full Browser
You can save the image displayed on a site or screen memo, and then set
it for the Stand-by display, Wake-up display, or another display.
You can save images in SWF format, BMP format, and PNG format, etc.,
besides JPEG format and GIF format. You can save images, frames and
marks for Deco-mail as well.
You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing the memory space with
other data files, however, the number of files you can save decreases
depending on the data volume. (See page 526)
1From a site display/Detailed Screen Memo display
i( )Save imageSelect an item.
Save one image. . . . . . . You can save an image. Select an image to be saved.
Save some images . . . . You can save multiple images. Select multiple images to
be saved and press l( ).
Save all images. . . . . . . You can save storable images at a time from among the
ones displayed on a site.
Save BG image . . . . . . . You can save the image displayed as a background.
pYou cannot save multiple images via Full Browser. Select an image to be saved.
2YESSelect a destination folder.
pFor “Save some images” and “Save all images”, select “Phone” or “microSD”.
When you select “Phone”, Deco-mail pictograms are saved to the “Deco-mail
pictograms” folder, frames and marks are saved to the “Frame/Stamp” folder, and
others are save to the “i-mode” folder.
See page 373 for the storage location for when you select “microSD”.
pSee page 206 when images are stored to the maximum.
3When the confirmation display appears asking whether
to set it as a display, select “YES”.
Go to “Set display” on page 335.
<Save Image>
Saving Images from Sites
Information
pUp to 36 half-pitch characters are saved for a file name. When the file name is not
specified, a part of the downloaded URL or “imageXXX” (XXX denotes numerals) is
saved as the file name.
You can download data files from sites and save them to the FOMA
terminal. You can save some files directly to the microSD card.
You can save melodies, PDF files, Chara-den images, Machi-chara
images, Kisekae Tool files, ToruCa files, templates, dictionaries,
schedule events and others.
■The maximum downloadable size
※1 The memory space is shared with other data files, and the number of files you can
save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 526)
※2 The number of files you can save decreases depending on the data volume.
pEven when an image is displayed on the site, it might not be displayed on the Picture
viewer after saving it to the FOMA terminal.
pThe image satisfying the following conditions is saved as a Deco-mail pictogram:
・GIF or JPEG image ・Image of 20 x 20 dots
・Image without file restrictions ・Image of 6 Kbytes or less
pThe transparent GIF (except animation GIF) image whose extension is “ifm” is saved
as a frame or stamp.
pYou can save up to 500 Kbytes per image for i-mode, and up to 1 Mbyte per image for
Full Browser.
pWhen you save multiple images or all images at one time, the background image
cannot be saved.
pYou might not be able to save some images. You can save images in BMP format
and PNG format only to the microSD card.
<Download>
Downloading Data from Sites
Information
Categories Maximum size Maximum number of storable
Melody 100 Kbytes 3,500 max.※1
PDF file 2 Mbytes 3,500 max.※1
Chara-den image 100 Kbytes 3
Machi-chara image 2 Mbytes 3,500 max.※1
Kisekae Tool file 2 Mbytes 3,500 max.※1
ToruCa file 100 Kbytes 495 max.※1
Template (Deco-mail) 200 Kbytes 100 max.※2
Template (Decome-Anime) 100 Kbytes 100 max.※2
Dictionary 20 Kbytes 10
Schedule event 1 Mbyte 2,500
205
i-mode/Full Browser
1Call up a data downloadable siteSelect a data file.
Downloading of the data file starts. When downloading is completed, the data
acquisition completion display appears.
pFor a PDF file, the PDF file is displayed when downloading is completed.
pFor the PDF file that cannot be displayed unless you download all pages, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to download all pages. Select “YES”
to select the destination folder.
pFor the PDF file of which you have not downloaded all the pages, you can
additionally download the remaining pages by “Download remain”.
pSee page 384 for how to save the displayed PDF file to the FOMA terminal. You
can save the PDF file containing pages that have not been downloaded or the
PDF file of which download was suspended midway as well.
pThe password entry display might be displayed depending on the PDF file. Enter
the password, and then select “OK”.
pSee page 381 for operations while PDF file is displayed.
2SaveYESSelect a destination folder.
Chara-den images, templates (Deco-mail), and schedule events are saved to the
FOMA terminal.
Select “Phone” or “microSD” for Machi-chara images, Kisekae Tool files, and
templates (Decome-Anime).
For dictionaries, select “<Not stored>”.
pSelect “Property” to display the information.
pSee page 373 for the storage location for when you select “microSD”.
pSee page 206 when data files are stored to the maximum.
pSee page 201 to save a screen memo.
3Select “YES” to set the downloaded data file to each
function.
pSelect an incoming type when you set a melody as a ring tone.
pSee page 145 or page 148 for using a template to create Deco-mail or
Decome-Anime messages.
Information
pSome downloaded melodies might not be played back successfully.
When you press l( ) to suspend downloading or when downloading is
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
resume downloading.
Select “YES” to resume downloading the remaining part. Select “NO” to show the data
acquisition completion display. You can save the downloaded part by selecting “Save
pt.” from the data acquisition completion display. When you select “Save pt.”, you can
save it only to “Phone”. You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from
“Kisekae Tool” or “Machi-chara” in “Data box”.
You can look for your favorite files on the site and download them. The
number of files you can save differs depending on the file you download.
You cannot change the site.
1Each selection displaySearch by i-modeYES
Select a file.
pThe way of downloading differs depending on the file.
pSelect “To i-schedule list” on the i-schedule list.
You can download the pre-installed Chara-den images, Machi-chara
images, Kisekae Tool files, templates, dictionaries, and Deco-mail
pictograms from the “P-SQUARE” site (in Japanese only).
iMenu → メニューリスト (Menu List) → ケータイ電話メーカー
(Mobile Phone Maker) → P-SQUARE
When downloading a Kisekae Tool file or Machi-chara image
is suspended
Search by i-mode
Information
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee.
About “P-SQUARE”
QR code for
accessing the site
206
i-mode/Full Browser
If the maximum number of data files is stored or there is not enough memory when you
try to save the data files, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete the
unnecessary file and save new one.
pPerform this operation to save the following data:
・Images ・i-motion files ・Movie files ・Melodies
・Chara-den images ・Programs ・Chaku-uta Full® music files
・Machi-chara images ・PDF files ・i-αppli programs ・ToruCa files
・Templates ・Screen memos ・Kisekae Tool files ・Schedule events
1. YESPut a check mark for data files to be deletedl( )YES
As the data files except Chara-den images, templates, screen memos, and schedule
events are stored in the same storage area, you can select other files when deleting files.
Select a folder and put a check mark for the files to be deleted. “＊” appears on the folder
which contains the checked files.
“ ” appears when you put it for the files whose amount of data is equal to memory
shortage.
pYou can put or clear check marks at a time by pressing i( ) and selecting
“Select all in page/Release in page”.
pEach time you press d or i( ), or each time you press i( ) and
select “Change disp. mode”, you can switch display/nondisplay of the folder volume
and data volume.
pWhen selecting a file in “MUSIC”, you can show the lower level folders by pressing
l( ).
pEach time you press r, the upper level folder returns.
pWhen you select a Chaku-uta Full® music file or a movie file, you can check the
contents by pressing i( ) and selecting “Play”.
pFor programs, you need to delete many files when deleting other files because the data
volume per program is large.
pIf the maximum number of programs are stored when you execute “Move program” or
try to save an i-αppli program or ToruCa file, you need to delete at least one file which
belongs to the same type.
pIf there is a security-applied folder for screen memos, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to enable you to select screen memos in that security-applied folder.
When you select “YES”, you need to enter your Terminal Security Code.
pThe file set for another function is indicated by “★”.
pSee page 291 for deleting mail-linked i-αppli.
pIf you operate this when moving an i-αppli program from the microSD card to the
FOMA terminal, you cannot delete the i-αppli program with its data file on the IC card.
When the data files are stored to the maximum
Flash is an animation technology that treats pictures and sound. Flash
movies make the sites more attractive. You can download Flash movies
to your FOMA terminal and play them back or set them for the Stand-by
display.
■Flash® Video
Flash® Video (FLV) denotes images that can be played back by Adobe Flash Player.
They can be played back via i-mode, Full Browser, as screen memos, and from Data
Box. They can be played back also by setting for the Stand-by display. However, only
the embedded type of FLV files can be saved as screen memos or into Data Box and
can be set for the Stand-by display.
pThe playable FLV files are the following two types:
pDepending on the site, you might not be able to play back the files.
pAs the playback of up to 10 Mbytes of files is supported for progressive type FLV, you
might receive a bulky size of files. Note that you are charged a high packet
communication fee for receiving bulky files.
pYou cannot save the progressive type FLV files in Data Box nor can save them as
screen memos.
■Specifications for FLV playback
pEven when the file format is supported, you might not be able to obtain or playback
some files.
Flash Function
Categories Description
Progressive type playback With this type, the video files that are created
separately from Flash movies are played back while
being downloaded from a delivery server.
Embedded type playback With this type, video files are embedded into Flash
movies as one of source files.
Codec Video Sorenson Spark/On2VP6
Audio MP3
Bit rate Video 400 kbps
Audio 96 kbps
Video size Files of QVGA (320×240) or smaller
Frame rate 15 fps
207
i-mode/Full Browser
You can upload JPEG or GIF images and i-motion files stored in the
FOMA terminal to a site.
1Call up a file uploadable site参照 (Reference)
Picture or imotionSelect a file to be uploaded.
pProcedure for uploading files differs depending on the site.
Information
pThe maximum display size of a Flash movie on the site is 480 x 662 dots. If a Flash
movie is larger than 480 x 662 dots, it is displayed shrunk with a proportional ratio
retained.
pSome Flash movies refer to the phone information in your FOMA terminal. To permit
the use of the information in your FOMA terminal, set “Phone info use setting” to
“Valid”. (“Valid” is set at purchase.)
pYou might be able to operate a pointer for some Flash movies.
pThe effect tone sounds for some Flash movies. To mute it, set “Sound setting” to
“Level 0”.
pThe effect tone and vibrator for the Flash movie set for the Stand-by display do not
work.
pThe effect tone for Flash movies does not sound during Play Background.
pThe FOMA terminal might vibrate for some Flash movies while they are being played
back. The FOMA terminal vibrates regardless of the setting of “Vibrator”.
pWhen you play back a Flash movie after saving to Data Box, microSD card, or Screen
Memo, it might look different depending on the storage location.
pWhen you display a Flash movie via Full Browser, you cannot save it.
pSome Flash movies might not work correctly.
pYou cannot save the Flash movie if an error occurs during playback.
pYou can operate some Flash movies by *Mo or *Oo. Even when “ ” is not
displayed, you can operate some Flash movies. When a Flash movie is displayed via
Full Browser, you can operate it only while a pointer is displayed.
pWhen Flash movies are displayed, the behavior might differ from ordinary sites.
Uploading Files to Sites
You can easily make a call, send mail, display Internet websites, start
1Seg, set TV Timer/Timer Recording using highlighted information
(phone numbers, mail addresses, URLs, melodies, images, and so on)
displayed on sites and in mail.
pThe Web To, Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, i-αppli To, Media To and Address Link
functions might not be available depending on the mail sent from a personal computer
or the site.
pYou might be able to use the Web To, Phone To/AV Phone To, Mail To, or i-αppli To
function using highlighted information other than a phone number, mail address or
URL.
pThe information is not highlighted in the Decome-Anime.
You can make voice calls, videophone calls or PushTalk calls by using
phone numbers or similar information displayed on sites and in mail.
pThe Phone To function to make a videophone call is called the AV Phone To function.
1Select a phone number or similar information
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to be sent to other party during
a videophone call.
pSelect “SMS” to compose an SMS message to send to the phone number set as
the destination address. Go to step 3 on page 185.
pThe choices for dialing types may not be displayed when the phone number is
prefixed by “tel:” or “tel-av:”. Go to step 2.
Information
pYou can upload up to 2 Mbytes in total.
pYou cannot upload files that are prohibited from output from the FOMA terminal to
other devices.
Operations from Highlighted Information
Phone To/AV Phone To Function
208
i-mode/Full Browser
2Dial
pTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”. (See page 59)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See step 2 of “Set Caller ID
Notification when Making a Call” on page 56)
You can send mail by using mail addresses or similar information
displayed on sites and in mail.
1Select a mail address or similar information.
The destination mail address is already entered in the address field.
Go to step 3 on page 142.
You can access Internet websites, via i-mode or Full Browser, from URL
or similar information displayed on sites or in mail.
1Select a URL or similar information
i-mode Browser or Full BrowserYES
pWhen the URL or similar one contains the information of i-mode or Full Browser,
you are connected via the function which corresponds to the information.
pTo cancel during connection, select “Cancel”. To cancel while obtaining a page,
press l( ).
You can start i-αppli programs from URLs (links) displayed on sites and
in mail.
1Select i-αppli informationYES
i-αppli starts.
Mail To Function
Web To Function
i-αppli To Function
You can start 1Seg or set TV Timer/Timer Recording from the information
(links) displayed on sites and in mail.
1Select 1Seg informationYES
1Seg or TV Timer/Timer Recording starts.
pWhen the timer function starts, press l( ) to set TV Timer/Timer
Recording.
To change contents you want to set, go to step 1 of “TV Timer List” on page 257
or step 1 on page 258.
You can display a map from the postal address shown on a site or others
or can use the location information on the GPS compatible i-αppli
program. You can send the location information by i-mode mail as well.
1Select the location information such as postal address
Select an item.
Read map . . . . . . . Starts a GPS compatible i-αppli program set by “Select map”
of “GPS settings” and sends the location information.
Map/GPS αppli. . . Selects and starts a GPS compatible i-αppli program.
Paste to mail . . . . Converts the location information into a URL and composes an
i-mode mail message with the URL pasted to the text.
Check loc. info. . . Displays the details of the selected location information.
Information
pEven if i-mode mail text contains a link to start an i-αppli program, you cannot quote
the link when forwarding or replying to. Also, you cannot quote it when using
DOCOMO keitai datalink or infrared communication function.
Media To Function
Information
pYou may not be able to use the Media To function even if information is highlighted.
Address Link Function
209
i-mode/Full Browser
You can configure settings for i-mode and Full Browser, and settings
common between them. You can configure i-mode settings and Full
Browser settings respectively, and the settings are not shared. However,
only “Sound setting” is shared.
pAmong items changeable from the Function menu while a site is displayed, you can
change “i-mode Browser set.” during i-mode access and “Full Browser set.” during Full
Browser access.
pSelect each setting and press l( ). Then the function explanatory display
appears.
1mi-modei-mode settingsi-mode Browser set.
Do the following operations.
<i-mode Settings>
Setting i-mode
i-mode Browser Settings
Font size setting See “i-mode” on page 118.
Image display setting You can set whether to display images or Flash movies
included on sites or in screen memos.
ON or OFF
Sound setting You can set whether to make an effect tone sound for when
you display a Flash movie while a site or screen memo is
displayed.
Select a sound volume level.
Movie auto play set. See page 220.
Movie in page DL set. You can set whether to obtain moving pictures when you
display Flash® Video on a site.
Select an item.
ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . .The confirmation display does not
appear. You obtain files automatically.
Confirm always . . . The confirmation display appears each
time you display Flash® Video.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . You do not obtain files.
Script setting You can set whether to validate JavaScript. JavaScript is a
simple program language that runs on Internet websites. It is
widely used to create Internet websites with movements.
When “Valid” is set, you can use the JavaScript function to
browse Internet websites.
Valid or Invalid
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer You can set whether to display the pointer.
ON or OFF
Speed You can set scroll speed.
High speed, Medium speed, or Low speed
Phone info use setting To display a Flash movie while a site or screen memo is
displayed, the information in the FOMA terminal may be used.
You can set whether to validate the information to be used for
that case.
Valid or Invalid
Cookie setting See page 212.
Delete Cookies See page 212.
Referer setting See page 212.
Window auto-open set. You can set whether to prevent a new window from opening
automatically by JavaScript.
ON or OFF
Information
<Image display setting>
pEven when “ON” is set, images might not be displayed correctly. In this case, “ ” is
displayed.
pWhen “OFF” is set, “ ” is displayed and the data file is not received.
pIf you change “Image display setting” of “i-mode Browser set.”, “Image display setting”
of “User settings” of “1Seg” is also changed.
<Sound setting>
pEven when you set to sound the effect tone, it may not sound depending on Flash
movies.
210
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modei-mode settingsFull Browser set.
Do the following operations.
<Script setting>
pSome Internet websites may not be displayed correctly unless “Valid” is set.
pEven when “Valid” is set, it might not work depending on JavaScript.
<Display pointer>
pFor Full Browser, when “OFF” is set, you cannot operate Flash movies.
<Phone info use setting>
pThe available information is as follows:
・Date and time set by “Set time”
・Reception level of radio waves
・Battery level
・Sound volume set by “Phone” of “Ring volume”
・Language selected by “Select language”
・Model name and serial number of FOMA terminal
Full Browser settings
Information
Display mode setting See page 193.
Full display setting You can set whether to display the display of Full Browser in
full display.
ON or OFF
Zoom You can set the display size of the Internet website.
From the Function menu while a site is displayed, you can
enlarge/reduce the display size by each page.
Select a display size.
pIn PC layout mode, you can select a display area by “Select
disp. area” from the Function menu while a site is displayed.
Image display setting See page 209.
Sound setting See page 209.
Movie auto play set. See page 220.
Movie in page DL set. See page 209.
Script setting See page 209.
Pointer/scroll
Display pointer See page 209.
Speed See page 209.
Focus while scroll You can set whether to highlight links while scrolling.
ON or OFF
Phone info use setting See page 209.
Cookie setting See page 212.
Delete Cookies See page 212.
Referer setting See page 212.
Window auto-open set. See page 209.
Full Browser Home set. You can set Home URL.
Select the URL fieldEnter a URLOK
FB permission display When you start Full Browser, you can set whether to show the
confirmation display asking whether to access.
Select an item.
Display always. . . The confirmation display appears asking
whether to access each time you start Full
Browser.
Not display . . . . . . The confirmation display does not appear.
pEven if “Display always” is set, the setting switches to “Not
display” when you select “YES (default)” on the confirmation
display.
FB usage setting You can set whether to use Full Browser.
Yes. . . . Uses Full Browser.
No . . . . Displays the cautions at the start of Full Browser.
Check the cautions, highlight “Yes” and then select
“OK”, then the setting switches to “Yes”, and Full
Browser becomes available.
211
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Do the following operations.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCheck settings
Select an item.
i-mode Browser set. . . . You can check the setting contents of i-mode Browser
settings.
Full Browser set. . . . . . . You can check the setting contents of Full Browser
settings.
Common settings . . . . . You can check the setting contents of Common settings.
Information
<FB usage setting>
pIf you replace the UIM with a new one when “Yes” is set, the setting switches to “No”.
Common Settings
Certificate setting See page 213.
Secure Trans. serv.
Operate your cert. See page 214.
Center host setting See page 215.
Access point setting See page 211.
i-mode arrival act See page 86.
i-mode button setting You can set an operation for when you press i.
Select an item.
Display iMenu/Search
. . . You can access “iMenu”.
Display i-mode menu
. . . You can display the i-mode menu.
Information
<i-mode button setting>
pRegardless of the setting, the i-mode menu appears overseas.
Check Settings
You can set the host (APN) to use for receiving services other than
i-mode (DOCOMO).
If you change this setting, you will not be able to use i-mode.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Access point setting
Highlight <Not recorded>and press l( )
Enter your Terminal Security Code.
pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to the selected one.
pTo delete the stored host, press i( ), select “Delete”, enter your
Terminal Security Code, and then select “YES”.
2Do the following operations.
3Press l( ).
+m+8+1
Changing a Host from i-mode
(ISP Connection Communication)
※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
Host name Enter a host name.
pYou can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Host number Enter a host number.
pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Host address Enter a host address.
pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Host address 2 Enter a host address 2.
pYou can enter up to 30 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
212
i-mode/Full Browser
By using cookies, you can effectively access the Internet websites you
have accessed once.
A cookie is the system to temporarily save personal information such as
the date/time or number of times you accessed an Internet website. The
information from the server is written into the FOMA terminal, temporarily
saved, and used for content services.
pIf a cookie is sent, the information such as the date/time or number of times you
accessed an Internet website is sent to the website. Note that even if your information
is detected by a third party by sending a cookie, we cannot be held responsible for that.
However, you may not be able to correctly display or use some Internet websites or
content services unless the cookie setting is valid.
You can set whether to validate cookies. You can set it for i-mode and
Full Browser respectively.
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Cookie settingSelect an item.
Valid . . . . Always validates cookies. The confirmation display does not appear
before a cookie is sent or received.
Confirm always (Sending)
. . . . . . . . . Validates cookie’s sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears
each time a cookie is sent.
Confirm always (Receiving)
. . . . . . . . . Validates cookie’s sending/receiving. The confirmation display appears
each time a cookie is received.
Confirm always (Sending/receiving)
. . . . . . . . . The confirmation display appears asking whether to permit a cookie to
be sent or received each time a cookie is sent or received.
Invalid. . . Always invalidates cookies.
pWhen you replace your UIM with another one, “Invalid” is set. If you change the
setting with another UIM inserted, the display for entering your Terminal Security
Code might appear.
Setting Cookie
Cookie Setting
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Delete CookiesEnter your Terminal Security Code
YES
The referer denotes the link source information. When a referer is sent,
the information about which page you have accessed from it is sent to
the site.
Note that even if your information is detected by a third party by sending
a referer, we cannot be held responsible for that.
You can set whether to send a referer while an Internet website is open.
You can set it for i-mode and Full Browser respectively.
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Referer settingSelect an item.
Valid . . . . . .Sends a referer.
Invalid . . . . .Does not send a referer.
Information
pWhen “Sending”, “Receiving”, or “Sending/receiving” is set, the confirmation display
might consecutively appear asking whether to send/receive (update) cookies
depending on the Internet website.
Delete Cookies
Setting Referer
Referer Setting
213
i-mode/Full Browser
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Certificate setting
Highlight a certificate and press i( )
Do the following operations.
Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . Certificates issued by the authenticating company and stored
in the FOMA terminal at purchase.
DOCOMO Certificate . . . Certificates required for connecting to the FirstPass Center or
FirstPass sites; they are stored on the UIM (green/white).
User Certificate . . . . . . . . Certificates downloaded from the FirstPass Center by
selecting “Operate your cert.” from “Secure trans. serv.” of
“Common settings” of “i-mode settings”; they are stored on the
UIM (green/white).
<SSL/TLS Certificate Setting>
Operating SSL/TLS Certificates
Certificate info The subject name, author, validity period, and serial number of
the certificate are displayed.
pYou can check the certificate also by pressing Oo( )
instead of i( ).
Valid/Invalid The selected item is invalidated; then “ ” changes to “ ”.
pWhen you select an invalid certificate, it will be validated.
pIf you set a certificate to invalid, you cannot display the sites with
that SSL/TLS certificate.
pYou cannot set “DOCOMO Cert 2” to “Invalid”.
Certificates used for SSL/TLS communication
User certificates verify that you have subscribed to the FOMA service.
Downloaded user certificates are stored on the UIM for the use on
FirstPass sites.
When you cannot display a FirstPass site because the user certificate on
the UIM has expired or the required user certificate is not stored on the
UIM, you can request the issue and download the user certificate from
the FirstPass Center.
pYou can request and download user certificates from the FirstPass Center.
pThis function is not available with the blue UIM.
pThe display and operating method displayed in the FirstPass Center site are subject to
change.
pTo show FirstPass sites, you can use Full Browser as well.
pYou cannot send/receive mail or receive Messages R/F while connected to the
FirstPass Center.
pSet the date and time using “Set time” beforehand to connect to the FirstPass Center.
pThis function is not available overseas.
pWith the FOMA terminal, server authentication and client authentication are performed
for safer data exchange. The site and your FOMA terminal exchange certificates,
check the other party’s certificate and verify each other for safer communication
service. By getting client authentication, you can enjoy more secure communication
services.
pClient authentication is available via the Internet communication from the FOMA
terminal or via the Internet communication with the FOMA terminal connected to a
personal computer. To use the personal computer for the client authentication, you
need to install the FirstPass PC software from the provided CD-ROM.
For details, refer to “FirstPassManual” (PDF format) in the “FirstPassPCsoft” folder on
the CD-ROM. Adobe® Reader® (version 6.0 or higher is recommended) is required to
see “FirstPassManual” (PDF format). If it is not installed in your personal computer,
install Adobe® Reader® from the provided CD-ROM to see it.
For details such as how to use it, refer to “Adobe Reader Help”.
<Operate Your Certificate>
Setting FirstPass
Client Authentication
214
i-mode/Full Browser
You can perform user certificate operations on the site of the FirstPass
Center site.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Secure trans. serv.Operate your cert.English
You need to request the issue of the user certificate before you download
it. When requesting the issue of your user certificate is completed,
download the user certificate. After the downloading is completed, it is
saved on the UIM and the FirstPass sites will be displayable.
1Site display for the FirstPass Center
Request your certificateContinue
pFor an update, the message “Updating user certificate”
is displayed.
pWhen you have already requested the issue of the user
certificate, select “Download your certificate” from the
site display for the FirstPass Center, go to step 3.
Access FirstPass Center
Site display for
the FirstPass Center
Information
pBefore using the FirstPass Center, select “The usage regulation (Japanese only)” and
carefully read the regulation.
pYou are not charged a packet communication fee for connecting to the FirstPass
Center.
Request Issue of User Certificate for Download
2Enter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the
code is not entered within 60 seconds, the connection is
cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 122 for PIN2 code.
3DownloadContinue
pIf you do not download the user certificate immediately, select “Menu”. From the
confirmation display asking whether to close the SSL/TLS page, select “YES”to
return to the site display for the FirstPass Center.
You can connect to FirstPass sites with your user certificate.
1Call up a FirstPass siteSelect an itemYES
2Enter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the code is not entered within 60
seconds, the connection is cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 122 for PIN2 code.
Information
pBefore downloading a new or an updated certificate, be sure to request the user
certificate to be issued. User certificates cannot be downloaded until the request for
issue has been made.
Access Sites with User Certificate
Information
pIf you try to connect to the FirstPass site without the user certificate or when its
available period is expired, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
continue connecting to the site. Select “NO”to return to the previous page. Download
or update the user certificate from the FirstPass Center site and then access the site
again.
pThe packet communication fee for accessing the FirstPass site is included in
Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full or Pake-hodai double.
215
i-mode/Full Browser
You can revoke the downloaded user certificate.
1Site display of the FirstPass CenterOther settings
Revoke your certificateYESEnter your PIN2 code.
pEnter your PIN2 code within 60 seconds. When the code is not entered within 60
seconds, the connection is cut off as an error entry.
pSee page 122 for PIN2 code.
2ContinueContinueContinue
You can set the host for downloading the user certificate.
1mi-modei-mode settingsCommon settings
Secure trans. serv.Center host setting
Highlight <Not recorded> and press l( ).
pIf you select a stored host, the setting is changed to that host.
pTo delete the stored host, press i( ), select “Delete”, enter your
Terminal Security Code, and then select “YES”.
Request Revocation of User Certificate
Information
pTo use FirstPass after revoking a certificate, you need to apply again for your user
certificate to be issued and then download it.
pSee page 213 for how to view the download user certificate.
<Center Host Setting>
Changing Hosts for Certificate Issue
※Normally, you do not need to change this setting.
2Enter your Terminal Security Code
Do the following operations.
3Press l( ).
Default URL Enter a default URL.
pYou can enter up to 100 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
Host address Enter a host address.
pYou can enter up to 99 half-pitch alphanumeric characters.
■Before Using FirstPass
pFirstPass is DOCOMO’s electronic authentication service. By using FirstPass, client
authentication is enabled, whereby the site and your FOMA terminal exchange
certificates, check the other party’s certificate and perform mutual authentication.
pWhen requesting issue of a user certificate, carefully read “The usage regulation
(Japanese only)” on the display, agree to this, and then make the request.
pYou need to enter the PIN2 code to use the user certificate. Once you have entered
your PIN2 code, all subsequent operations will be deemed to be done by you, so be
careful not to let anyone else use your UIM or PIN2 code.
pIf your UIM is lost or stolen, “docomo Information Center” on the back page of this
manual can revoke your user certificate.
pDOCOMO bears no obligation or responsibility with regard to the sites and
information provided by FirstPass sites. Please solve the problem between you and
FirstPass sites.
pDOCOMO and the CA do not guarantee security when you use FirstPass and SSL/
TLS, so you should use them on your own judgment and responsibility.
216
217
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
Using i-motion/Movie
i-motion/Movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Downloading i-motion/Movie from Sites
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Download i-motion/Movie> 219
Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion/Movie
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Movie Auto Play Setting> 220
Using i-Channel
i-Channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Using i-Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Setting How Ticker is Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Using i-concier
i-concier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Displaying i-concier Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Configuring i-concier Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
218
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
i-motion is a data file composed of video, sound and music, and you can
play it back after downloading from an i-motion compatible site into your
FOMA terminal. You can also set it for a ring tone.
Also, by using high speed communication, you can play back smooth
and high-quality movie files provided by portal sites, movie specialty
sites and other sites on the Internet.
Two types of i-motion files or movie files are available for each. The type
of the obtained i-motion file or movie file differs depending on the site or
file.
You can save up to 10 Mbytes per file. However, note that the file size for
playing back steaming type of movie files is not limited in Full Browser.
pMovie Player supports playback of Windows Media® Video and Windows Media®
Audio.
pWhen downloading or streaming an i-motion/movie file, you might receive a bulky file.
Note that you are charged a high packet communication fee for a bulky sent/received
file such as a movie file of streaming type whose size is not limited in Full Browser. For
the details of the packet communication fee and billing plan, refer to “Mobile Phone
User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
■Type of i-motion file
i-motion/Movie
Categories Description
Streaming type (cannot be saved) Plays back while obtaining an i-motion file. The
data is deleted after playback, so you cannot play
it back again or save it to the FOMA terminal.
Normal type (can be saved) Plays back after obtaining all the data of an
i-motion file.
Plays back while obtaining an i-motion file. After
obtaining, you can play it back in the same way
as “Plays back after obtaining”.
■Type of movie file
pThe distribution server for streaming type supports Windows Media Services 4.1 and
Windows Media Services 9. You cannot play back a streaming type of movie file
distributed from other than Windows Media Services 4.1 and Windows Media Services
9.
The live distribution that distributes files in real time and the on-demand distribution that
distributes previously prepared movie files are available as distribution systems.
pSome sites check the operating environment (browser type, OS type, etc.) and might
not enable to play back movie files.
pSee page 343 for the supported file format of movie files.
Categories Description
Streaming type (cannot be saved) Plays back while obtaining a movie file. The data
is deleted after playback, so you cannot play it
back again or save it.
Download type (can be saved) Plays back after obtaining all the data of a movie
file.
Plays back while obtaining a movie file. You can
play it back without re-connection by saving it on
the microSD card after download. Up to 10
Mbytes of a file can be downloaded.
To the microSD card, you can save not only data
files obtained by the FOMA terminal but also
movie files obtained or created on a personal
computer, and then play them back. You can
save a bulky file of up to the space size of
microSD card.
219
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
1Select an i-motion/movie file from an i-motion/movie
obtainable site
The data acquisition starts.
pFor a movie file, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back.
Select “YES”.
pIf it is an i-motion/movie file of streaming type, it is played back while being
obtained.
When “Movie auto play set.” is set to “Valid”, the i-motion file which is playable
while being obtained and the movie file of download type are also played back
while being obtained.
pWhen “Movie auto play set.” is set to “Valid”, the i-motion file which is playable
after obtaining all the data files is automatically played back after obtaining is
completed.
2
Select “Play” from a data acquisition completion display.
See page 342 for the operation during playback.
pSelect “Property” to display the i-motion/movie information. (See “imotion info”
on page 344 and “Contents info” on page 345)
pSee page 201 for saving a screen memo.
pAmong the movie files protected by the license, you can play back the streaming type
of movie files only. You cannot play back the download type of movie files protected by
the license.
pYou might not be able to play back movie files depending on the license setting of the
movie files.
pIf files are stored to the maximum when you try to obtain a license to save it to the
FOMA terminal, the confirmation display appears asking whether to delete currently
stored licenses to save a new one. Select “YES” to delete all the stored licenses to
save it. You need to obtain a license again to play back a movie file whose license is
deleted.
<Download i-motion/Movie>
Downloading i-motion/Movie from Sites
Play Back i-motion/Movie Files Obtained from a Site
About license (Windows Media DRM)
When you press l( ) to suspend downloading or when downloading is
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
resume downloading.
Select “YES” to resume downloading the remaining part. Select “NO” to show the data
acquisition completion display for a partially savable i-motion file. Select “Save pt.” to
save that file to any folder in “imotion” in “Data box”.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from “Data box”.
pThe file name of the partially saved i-motion file is “movie”.
pWhen the playable period or playable deadline of the partially saved i-motion file has
expired, you cannot download the remaining segments of the file. You can delete the
partially saved file when you try to download the file.
The operation differs depending on the type of movie file being obtained or the reason of
suspension.
Streaming type
After the suspension by an incoming call, alarm notification, or disconnection of
communication, the obtaining is in pause state. Press
Oo
( ) to resume playback
from the suspended point.
The display before playback returns when you suspend obtaining by pressing
r
or
h
.
Download type
When you cannot continue downloading after the suspension by an incoming call, alarm
notification, or disconnection of communication, the data acquisition completion display
appears. Select “Play” to play back the obtained segments of the file. Select “Save” to
save the obtained segments of the file. (See “Save i-motion/Movie Files” on page 220)
Select “ResumeDL” to resume obtaining from the suspended point.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to discard the data when you suspend
obtaining by pressing r or h.
pIn the case of download type of movie files, downloading continues even when a voice
call, mail message, or Message R/F comes in or alarm sounds.
pDepending on the accessed site or movie file, you cannot resume from the suspended
point also by pressing Oo( ) or selecting “ResumeDL”. In that case, the
obtaining resumes from the top of the file.
When downloading i-motion file is suspended
When obtaining a movie file is suspended
220
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
Information
pNote that there is no upper size limit for a streaming type of movie file when it is
obtained via Full Browser and you might exchange the unlimitedly bulky file. When
obtaining it, the confirmation display appears asking whether to play it back.
pDepending on the accessed site or i-motion/movie file, you might not be able to obtain
the data or play it back while obtaining, or play it back after obtaining. Also, you cannot
obtain an i-motion file in ASF format.
pSee page 343 for the file formats of playable i-motion files.
pIn case of normal type of i-motion files, obtaining files continues even when you stop
playback of the files being obtained. In case of download type of movie files, the data
acquisition completion display appears when you stop playback of the files being
obtained.
pEven if “Movie auto play set.” is set to “Valid”, the obtained file is not automatically
played back if it has been played back while being obtained.
pIf it is an i-motion file you can partially save or re-obtain from a partially saved file, you
cannot use other functions while obtaining the i-motion file, playing it back while
obtaining, or showing the acquisition completion display.
pFor an i-motion file that has restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable period,
or playable deadline, “ ” is displayed at the head of the title. An i-motion/movie file
with the playable period restricted cannot be played back before or after the restriction
period (including the case that playable period is expired during download). If you
remove the battery and keep it aside for a long time, the date/time information in your
FOMA terminal might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the i-motion/movie
file that has restrictions on the playable period and playable deadline. See “imotion
info” and “Contents info” for checking the playback restrictions.
pDepending on the line speed, line state, or radio wave conditions, the playback during
obtaining might be suspended or the images might be distorted. You can repeatedly
play back the normal type of i-motion files and the download type of movie files after
obtaining, but cannot play back the streaming type of i-motion/movie files.
pIf you try to play back a movie file with a low battery, the battery alert tone sounds
regardless of the setting of “Keypad sound”, and the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. When the battery becomes low during playback, the
playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to end the
playback.
You can save the obtained i-motion/movie files to your FOMA terminal or
microSD card. You can save up to 250 Mbytes of files in total sharing the
memory space with other data files. (See page 522)
1A data acquisition completion displaySaveYES
Select a destination folder.
pSee page 373 for the storage location for when you save the movie file or save
the i-motion file on the microSD card.
pSee page 206 when i-motion/movie files are stored to the maximum.
You can set whether to validate automatic playback of i-motion/movie
file, for when you have obtained a normal type of i-motion file or
download type of movie file from a site or have selected a screen memo
which contains a normal type of i-motion file or download type of movie
file. You can set it for i-mode and Full Browser respectively.
1mi-modei-mode settings
i-mode Browser set. or Full Browser set.
Movie auto play set.Valid or Invalid
Save i-motion/Movie Files
Information
pDepending on the i-motion/movie file, you might not be able to save the obtained data.
pYou cannot play back partially saved i-motion/movie files from Data Box.
<Movie Auto Play Setting>
Setting Automatic Replay of i-motion/Movie
Information
pNote that a streaming type of i-motion/movie file is played back automatically even if
this function is set to “Invalid”.
221
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
This service distributes information such as news and weather forecast
to i-Channel mobile phones. The automatically received latest
information flows on the Stand-by display by tickers. You can read it on
the i-Channel list by pressing the i-Channel key. (See page 221)
Further, two types of channels, “Basic channel” provided by DOCOMO
and “Favorite channel” provided by IPs (Information Providers) are
available. You are not charged a packet communication fee for
auto-updates of “Basic channel” information.
You are charged a packet communication fee for auto-updates of
“Favorite channel” information which is enabled by registering your
favorite channels. Note that you are separately charged a packet
communication fee for browsing detailed information for both “Basic
channel” and “Favorite channel”.
As for overseas use, you are charged a packet communication fee for
both auto-update and browsing detailed information. Further, the packet
communication fee for the overseas use differs from the one for the
domestic use.
pi-Channel is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis (You need to
subscribe to i-mode to apply for i-Channel).
pFor details on i-Channel, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
pThe i-Channel service is provided in Japanese only.
i-Channel
Information
pWhen the FOMA terminal is turned off or if radio wave conditions are bad such as
when it is out of the service area, you may not be able to receive information even if
you have contracted to the i-Channel service. In that case, select the channel for
unsigned subscribers that appears by pressing *Zo; then you can now receive
information, and tickers flow on the Stand-by display. If your FOMA terminal remains
in the default state, you may not be able to receive information. Press *Zo, and then
information is received and tickers flow on the Stand-by display.
pTo receive i-Channel information overseas, you are charged a communication fee by
channel.
pAfter you cancel the contract for the i-Channel service, the ticker setting is
automatically set to off.
pIf you cancel the contract for the i-mode service before you cancel the contract for the
i-Channel service, the ticker setting remains on.
When “Ticker ON/OFF” is set to “ON”, up to 10 ticker files for the latest
information flow repeatedly on the Stand-by display. If you want to know
more about the information, you can obtain the details from the Channel
list.
1Press Zo.
The Channel list appears regardless of the “Ticker ON/
OFF” setting.
p“ ” blinks during receiving information.
pYou can perform the operation of “Sound setting” (see
page 209) and “Retry” (see page 198) by pressing
i( ) from the Channel list.
2Select an item (link).
Using i-Channel
Channel list
Information
pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not work even when information
comes in. In addition, the Call/Charging indicator does not light or flicker.
pTickers are not displayed in the following cases:
When the information is automatically updated after that or when you press *Zo to
receive the latest information, tickers automatically flow.
･When the UIM is replaced. ･When “Access point setting” is changed.
･When “Reset i-Channel” is executed. ･When “Reset settings” is executed.
･When “Initialize” is executed.
However, the information might not be automatically updated when “Access point
setting” is changed. To receive the latest information, press *Zo to display the
Channel list.
pWhen “Access point setting” is changed, the i-Channel connecting end is also
changed. (In ordinary, you do not need to change the setting.)
pDepending on your usage state, you might receive information from i-Channel when
you display the Channel list.
pEven if you change “i-mode” of “Font size setting”, the font size for the Channel list
might not change instantly.
222
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
1mi-modei-ChannelDo the following operations.
Setting How Ticker is Displayed
Channel list You can display the Channel list.
Go to step 2 on page 221.
Ticker ON/OFF You can set whether to display tickers on the Stand-by display.
ON or OFF
Ticker font size set. You can set the font size of tickers.
Extra large, Large, or Standard
pYou can check the ticker by pressing l( ). Press r
to return to the former display.
Ticker color set. You can set the background color and font color of ticker.
Select a pattern.
pYou can check the ticker by pressing l( ). Press r
to return to the former display.
Ticker scroll speed You can set the ticker flowing speed.
Select a speed.
pYou can check the ticker by pressing l( ). Press r
to return to the former display.
Reset i-Channel You can initialize the ticker information and set “Ticker ON/OFF”
to “ON”.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
pYou can perform “Ticker ON/OFF”, “Ticker font size set.”, “Ticker color set.”, “Ticker
scroll speed”, and “Reset i-Channel” for each mode of 2in1. However, i-Channel
information is initialized for all modes. Further, when 2in1 is deactivated, they become
common to the settings in A Mode.
<Ticker ON/OFF>
pIn Public mode (Drive mode), or during Lock All, tickers are not displayed.
“i-concier” is a service that supports you in leading a happy life just as a
clerk or concierge does. The service holds a variety of your data (area
information about your neighborhood, Schedule, ToruCa, Phonebook,
etc.) and sends information with good timing to you according to your
living area or preference. Also this service automatically updates
schedule events or ToruCa files to the latest ones, and automatically adds
useful information such as about the opening period of various shops to
your Phonebook. i-concier information is notified by a Machi-chara image
(cartoon character that appears on the Stand-by display).
<Reset i-Channel>
pTickers are not displayed after you execute “Reset i-Channel”. When the information
is automatically updated after that or when you press *Zo to receive the latest
information, tickers automatically flow.
i-concier
Information
■Before Using i-concier
pi-concier is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis (You need to
subscribe to i-mode to apply for i-concier).
pIf you have not subscribed to Data Security Service (see page 137) but will newly
subscribe to i-concier, you will subscribe to Data Security Service as well as
i-concier.
pThere are two kinds of information; one is sponsored by DOCOMO and the other is
by IPs (Information Providers). You are not charged a packet communication fee for
DOCOMO-sponsored information. You are separately charged a packet
communication fee for IP-sponsored Information when receiving it.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for using detailed
information.
pAs for overseas use, you are charged a packet communication fee for both receiving
information and browsing detailed information. The packet communication fee for the
overseas use differs from the one for the domestic use. For details, refer to “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide [International Services]” or the DOCOMO Global Service
website.
pDepending on the contents (information, i-schedule, and others), you might be
separately charged an information fee besides the i-concier monthly fee.
pYou are separately charged a packet communication fee for auto-updates of
i-schedule, ToruCa, and Phonebook.
pFor details on i-concier, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA
version”.
223
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
When the FOMA terminal is in the service area, information automatically
arrives.
When information arrives, “ ” appears at the top of the display.
You can save up to 50 received information files. They are overwritten
from the oldest one in order.
1When information arrives, “ ” blinks and the contents
are displayed on the Stand-by display.
pWhen multiple information files are received at a time, the latest one is displayed
on the Stand-by display.
pWhen a display other than the Stand-by display is shown, the message appears
to tell the reception. Select “Confirm” to check the detailed information.
2Select a message.
The detailed information is displayed.
pTo clear the message, press h from the Stand-by display, or highlight the
message and then press r or h.
pHighlight a message and then press c( ) to switch to the display for
selecting a desktop icon. (See page 31)
Receive Information
1mi-concier
Select a piece of information.
pAn unread mark appears for unread information.
pSchedule event files or ToruCa files might be attached
to information, or links are embedded in it for visiting a
site of more detailed or related information. To check
the contents, select the information with an unread
mark.
1i-concier displayl(MENU)
Select an item.
スケジューラへ (To scheduler)
. . . Displays the Calendar display. (See page 398)
トルカへ (To ToruCa)
. . . Displays the ToruCa Folder list. (See page 314)
コンテンツ一覧へ (To the contents list)
. . . Displays respective contents supporting i-concier.
Displaying i-concier Screen
i-concier display
Display Schedule/ToruCa
224
i-motion/Movie/i-Channel/i-concier
1i-concier displayl(MENU)設定 (Settings)
Do the following operations.
You can set whether to show the received information on the Stand-by display.
1mSet./Servicei-concierInformation disp. set.
YES or NO
Configuring i-concier Settings
ｉコンシェルとは
(What is i-concier?)
You can display the explanation about i-concier.
インフォメーション
受信設定
(Information receive
settings)
You can set the contents of received information, etc.
自動お預かり／更新
設定
(Automatic saving/
Update settings)
See page 138.
その他共通設定
(Other common
settings)
You can change the profile or perform setting for overseas use,
etc.
お預かりデータ確認
(Check saved data)
See page 138.
お預かりデータ更新
(Update saved data)
See page 138.
お預かり通信履歴
(Communication
records of saving)
See page 138.
各種手続き（ｉコン
シェル解約）
[Various procedures
(i-concier
cancellation)]
You can cancel a contract of i-concier.
ｉコンシェルご利用
にあたって
(For using i-concier)
You can display the usage rules of i-concier.
Information Display Setting
225
Camera
Before Using Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Shooting Still Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Still Image Shoot> 230
Shooting Moving Pictures. . . . . . . . . <Moving Picture Shoot> 233
Changing Settings for Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Setting Image Size and Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Using Bar Code Reader. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Bar Code Reader> 241
■Copyrights and Portrait Rights
You have no right to copy, modify, or distribute the contents of which a third party holds the copyright such as text, image, music, or software
programs downloaded from websites on the Internet, or recorded using this product, without permission from the copyright holder except for
when the copy or quote is for personal use that is allowed by the copyright law.
Note that it may be prohibited to shoot or record live performances or exhibitions even for personal use.
Make sure that you refrain from shooting portraits of other persons and distributing such portraits over the Internet without consent, as this may
violate portrait rights.
pYou may be imposed punishment according to the law and rule (such as the nuisance prevention ordinance) if you use the FOMA terminal to give a remarkable
nuisance and misdeed to the public.
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when shooting and sending photos using camera-equipped mobile phones.
226
Camera
･Check the lens for any stain before shooting. If the lens is stained, clean
the lens with a soft cloth. If the lens is stained with fingerprints or
something oily, you will not be able to focus on a subject, or the stains
are reflected on still images/moving pictures you shoot.
･Make sure that you do not let fingers, hairs, or the strap overlap the lens
when shooting.
･Make sure that you hold the FOMA terminal securely with your hands so
that it does not move when shooting. Otherwise, the image may be
blurred, especially in a dark place.
･Do not leave the FOMA terminal with the lens pointing direct to the
sunlight. Pixels may be discolored or burns may result.
･If you shoot under a fluorescent lamp, mercury lamp, or sodium lamp
flickering at high speeds, “flicker symptom”, horizontal stripes flow
from top to bottom or left to right of the display, may result. The color
tone for the image may vary depending on a shooting timing.
･If you shoot a subject containing an area of an extremely high
brightness such as the reflection of sun light, the bright area might be
black-spotted but this is not a malfunction.
･Images shot by the cameras might differ from actual subjects in color
tone and brightness.
･When the battery level is low, you may not be able to save still images/
moving pictures you shoot.
･A slight time lag is found between when you press Oo( ) or
another key and when you actually shoot. Therefore, if you shoot a fast
moving subject, the subject might be shot with its position slightly away
from the one you see it when you press Oo( ) or another key.
･Do not remove the microSD card while saving files to it. The FOMA
terminal or microSD card could malfunction.
･If you turn off the power while saving a file, an incomplete file may be
saved.
Before Using Camera
Notes for when Shooting Images
･If the battery pack is removed off while saving a file to the FOMA
terminal or microSD card, that data becomes contingent.
･You need to obtain a microSD card separately to use the functions
related to the microSD card.
The microSD card is available at mass retailers for home electric
appliances, etc. (See page 360)
You can use the cameras to shoot
still images/moving pictures.
You can switch between the front
(inside camera) and the back
(outside camera).
The outside camera comes with the
focus function to automatically focus
on subjects. (See page 235) The
Image Stabilizer function enables
you to shoot images with less blur.
(See page 237)
You can easily operate the main
functions for shooting not only from
the Function menu but also by
operating the keys.
pYou can use the cameras on the vertical display with the FOMA terminal opened and
can use them on the horizontal display with the FOMA terminal closed. When you
open/close the FOMA terminal, the display automatically switches between the vertical
display and the horizontal display. However, it might not switch depending on the
activated function.
Use Cameras
Inside
camera
Outside
camera
227
Camera
■Operations for shooting
※1 You can operate by pressing i when the FOMA terminal is closed.
※2 You cannot operate when the FOMA terminal is closed.
※3 You can operate by pressing l when the FOMA terminal is closed.
※4 Each time of pressing switches in order of “Photo mode”→“Movie mode”→
“Continuous mode”.
※5 You can operate by pressing m when the FOMA terminal is closed.
※6 Each time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF”.
※7 Each time of pressing switches in order of “Auto”→“Forced ON”→“Always light ON”
→“Forced OFF” in Photo mode.
Each time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF” in Continuous/Movie
mode.
※8 Each time of pressing switches between “Phone” and “microSD”.
※9 Each time of pressing switches between the inside camera and outside camera.
Icon menu operation※1+l
Photo mode※1+l
(for at least
one second)
Function menu access※2+i
Folder jump※3+m
Shutter/Save *Oo, +0, .p
TELE *Vo
WIDE *Co
Settings for Focus
(when the outside camera
is used) *Zo
Focus function
(when the outside camera
is used)
*Xo, +a
.p(halfway)
Change camera-mode
※4※5+c
Icons※6.<
Flash setting/
Photo light set.※7
(when the outside camera
is used)
.>
Image size -1
Image quality -2
High sensitivity
(when the outside camera
is used) -3
Brightness -4
White balance -5
Photo mode
(When “Scene” is set) -6
Auto timer※6-7
Store in※8-9
Switch cameras※9-d
End camera
(in ordinary time)
Release focus lock
(when focus is locked)
-r
End camera -h
Information
pWhile the camera is activated, the photo light turns on or flickers. When “Movie type
set” is set to “Voice” in Movie mode or when you shoot with the inside camera, the
Call/Charging indicator flickers. You cannot turn off lighting/flickering.
pYou cannot change or mute the volume of the shutter sound. You cannot set a
downloaded melody for the shutter sound, either.
pIf no key operation is done on the Finder display, the camera is automatically
deactivated after about three minutes.
pWhen you shoot in a dark place, ensure to set “Photo mode” to “Night mode” of
“Scene”, or to set “High sensitiv.” to “ON”.
pYou can operate the following by the Icon menu: “Image size”, “Image quality”, “High
sensitiv.”, “Brightness”, “White balance”, “Photo mode” and “Focus”.
228
Camera
On the Finder display, the settings are indicated by bars and icons.
Camera Setting and Finder Display
  
   
  
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
Photo mode intelligent Auto
237
Portraits
Scenery
Night view
Night view+portraits
pAppears only when “Flash setting” is set
to “Auto”.
Close-up
Normal
Scene
Portrait
Sports
Food
Photo mode Scenery
237
Night mode
Backlight
Character
Snow
Sunset
Pet
Camera mode Photo mode 230
Movie mode 233
/ / Continuous mode (Auto, Manual, Auto
bracket) 230
Store in Phone 238
microSD
Number of
recordable
image
—
Number of remaining recordable still
images
pUp to 999 images are displayed.
—
Memory
capacity bar
Memory usage state (estimate) in Movie
mode
pDisplayed in red when the memory space
reaches maximum.
—
File size
setting
Mail restrict’n (S)
237Mail restrict’n (L)
Long time
Image
stabilizer
Auto 237
Shooting
status
During a moving picture shoot 233
Movie type set Records only the video. 238
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
229
Camera
Flash setting Auto
236
Forced ON
Always light ON
Forced OFF
Photo light
set.
ON
OFF
Recordable
time —Moving picture recordable time (estimate) —
Key guidance — Displays key guidance. —
Top icon Shows the vertical direction for shooting. —
Zoom bar Zooming status 234
Image size
(Photo mode/
Continuous
mode)
/
Outside camera photo
8M (2448 x 3264)
237
/6M Wide (1836 x 3264)
/5M (1944 x 2592)
/3M (1536 x 2048)
/2M Wide (1080 x 1920)
/2M (1200 x 1600)
/Stand-by (480 x 854)
/
Inside camera photo
Continuous shooting
VGA (480 x 640)
/QVGA (240 x 320)
/QCIF (144 x 176)
/Sub-QCIF (96 x 128)
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
Image size
(Movie mode)
VGA (640 x 480)
237
HVGA Wide (640 x 352)
QVGA (320 x 240)
QCIF (176 x 144)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96)
Image quality Normal
237
Fine
Super fine
Number of
frames for
continuous
shooting
/Number of frames at “Manual” shooting in
“Continuous mode”
pThis is displayed at when the FOMA
terminal is closed.
238
Auto timer ON 240
High sensitivity
ON 238
OFF
Brightness ∼ Brightness of shot image 237
White balance Auto
237
Fine
Cloudy
Light bulb
Fluorescent light
Focus Face detection
237
Auto
Close-up
Landscape
Icon/bar name Icon Description Page
230
Camera
pSee page 334 for how to display saved still images.
1Press c.
pThe Camera menu is displayed by mLifeKit
Camera. You can start also by selecting “Photo
mode” from the Camera menu.
pYou can paste the Camera menu to the desktop. (See
page 31)
2Press Oo( ), 0 or p.
A still image is shot. The Post View display for confirmation appears.
pIf “Focus” is set to “Face detection” or “Auto” when you shoot with the outside
camera, shooting starts after the focus operation.
pWhen you shoot with p by the outside camera, you can focus on a subject by
pressing p(halfway). (See page 235)
pThe image appears horizontally reversed (mirrored) when you shoot with the
inside camera; however the image is correctly displayed when played back.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, the still image is automatically saved.
<Still Image Shoot>
Shooting Still Images
Shoot a Still Image
Finder display
3Press Oo( ), 0 or p.
The still image you shot is saved to the “Camera” folder of
“My picture” in the FOMA terminal or to the microSD card.
pSee “Store in” and “Select storage” for selecting a
storage location.
pWhen you shot with the inside camera, you can save
the still image as an mirrored (horizontally reversed)
image, by pressing i( ) and selecting “Mirror
save”.
pPress r to cancel the shot still image and return to
the Finder display.
You can continuously shoot still images. You can set the number of
frames, and shooting interval for auto-shooting. (See page 238)
1cc( )c( )
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, operate
cmm.
pThe camera starts in the mode you used last time,
“Auto”, “Manual”, or “Auto bracket”. To change
Continuous Mode, see “Continuous mode” of “Cont.
shooting set.”.
Post View display
Continuous Shooting
Finder display
231
Camera
2Press Oo( ), 0 or p.
Continuous shooting starts.
When “Continuous mode” is set to “Manual”, press Oo( ), 0, or p the
number of times of shooting frames. The Post View display for confirmation
appears.
pIf “Focus” is set to “Auto” when you shoot with the outside camera, shooting starts
after the focus operation.
pWhen you shoot with the outside camera by p, you can focus on a subject by
pressing p(halfway). (See page 235)
pTo cancel shooting midway, press r. If you shoot in the “Auto” or “Auto
bracket” mode of “Continuous mode”, you can cancel also by pressing
l( ). You can cancel shooting also by closing the FOMA terminal.
pThe image appears horizontally reversed (mirrored) when you shoot with the
inside camera; however the image is correctly displayed when played back.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, the still images are automatically saved.
3
Select a still image and press c( )
Oo( ), 0 or p
pWhen the FOMA terminal is
closed, select a still image
and then operate
mOo or press p.
pPress No from the detailed
display to show the
previous or next still image.
pWhen you shot with the
inside camera, you can
save the still image as an
mirrored (horizontally
reversed) image, by
pressing i( ) from
the detailed display and
selecting “Mirror save”.
To select a still image and save it
Post View display Detailed display
c
Select still images to be saved and press Oo( ),
0, or pl( )
Save or Mirror save
p“ ” is added to the selected still images.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, put a check mark for still images to be saved
and press i.
l( )Save or Mirror save
The still images you shot are saved to the “Camera” folder of “My picture” in the
FOMA terminal or to the microSD card.
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, press i.
pSee “Store in” and “Select storage” for selecting a storage location.
pPress r from the Post View display to cancel the shot still images and return to
the Finder display.
To select multiple still images and save them
To save all still images
Information
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, all the still images are saved as normal (not
mirrored) images.
pThe image quality may be coarse depending on “Image size” or “Display size”.
pWhen you shoot, the tone selected for “Shutter sound” sounds regardless of the
settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for shutter tone cannot be
changed.
pEven when a mail message comes in while shooting, the shooting operation
continues. Though unread message icon is displayed, the Mail Receiving display is
not displayed.
pIf you end the camera function by using Multitask while shooting, unsaved still images
are deleted.
pWhen shooting, hold the FOMA terminal securely to avoid blurring images.
pWhen you shoot in Photo Mode, flash works in accordance with the setting of “Flash
setting”.
pThe photo light turns on at shooting in Continuous Mode with “Auto” or “Auto bracket”
set. It flickers in Continuous Mode with “Manual” set. However, it turns on even in
Continuous Mode with “Manual” set, when “Photo light set.” is set to “ON”.
232
Camera
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Photo Mode/
Detailed Display in Continuous Mode
Save See page 230 and page 231.
Mirror save See page 230 and page 231.
Attach to mail You can save the still image you shot and attach it to an i-mode
mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing
l( ). When the FOMA terminal is closed, you can
compose it by pressing i.
Attach loc. info Select an item.
By position loc.
. . . .Measures the current location (see page 322) and stores
the location information. After checking the location
information, press Oo( ).
From loc. history
. . . .Select a piece of location information from Location History
(see page 326) and store it.
Set display You can save the shot still image and paste it to the Stand-by
display and others for displaying.
Go to “Set display” on page 335.
pEven when “Store in” is set to “microSD”, the still image is saved
to the FOMA terminal.
Change frame You can replace the frame added to the shot still image with a
new one.
Select a frame.
pPress No to show the previous or next frame.
pTo reselect a frame, press l( ).
Oo( )
pYou cannot release the frame.
Store in See page 238.
Normal display/
Mirror display
You can switch between a correct image and a mirrored image
(horizontally reversed).
Display size See page 238.
File restriction See page 240.
Icon See page 238.
Cancel You do not save the shot still image.
Information
<Attach to mail>
pWhen the file size is larger than 2 Mbytes, the file is converted to 2 Mbytes or less. In
this case, the still images before and after conversion are saved to the “Camera”
folder of “My picture” in the FOMA terminal.
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Continuous Mode
Save See page 231.
Store all/animat’n You can save all the shot still images to store as an original
animation.
Save or Mirror save<New>
Store in See page 238.
Normal display/
Mirror display
You can switch between a correct image and a mirrored image
(horizontally reversed).
File restriction See page 240.
Cancel You do not save the shot still images.
Information
<Store all/animat’n>
pWhen “Store in” is set to “microSD”, this function is not available.
pIf you have shot a single still image only, this function is not available.
233
Camera
pSee page 342 for playing back the saved moving pictures.
1cc( )
pWhen the FOMA terminal is closed, operate cm.
pThe Camera menu is displayed by mLifeKit
Camera. You can start also by selecting “Movie
mode” from the Camera menu.
pYou can paste the Camera menu to the desktop. (See
page 31)
2Press Oo( ), 0, or p.
Recording starts.
pIf “Focus” is set to “Auto” when you shoot with the outside camera, shooting starts
after the focus operation. While shooting, the subject is automatically focused
regardless of the setting of “Focus”.
pWhen you shoot with the outside camera by p, you can focus on a subject by
pressing p(halfway). (See page 235)
pWhen you shoot with the inside camera, the horizontally reversed (mirrored)
image is displayed, but it is displayed normally when played back.
3Press Oo( ), 0, or p.
Recording ends. The Post View display for confirmation appears.
pRecording automatically ends when a call comes in, the low battery alarm
sounds, or the FOMA terminal is closed during recording.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, or “File size setting” is set to “Long time”, the
moving picture is automatically saved.
<Moving Picture Shoot>
Shooting Moving Pictures
Finder display
4Press Oo( ), 0, or p.
The shot moving picture is saved to the “Camera” folder
of “imotion” in the FOMA terminal or to the microSD
card.
pSee “Store in” and “Select storage” for selecting a
storage location.
pPress r to cancel the shot moving picture and return
to the Finder display.
When you use a microSD card that you repeatedly save/delete data files to/from, the
writing speed slows down, recording might end midway or the image quality might
deteriorate.
Do the following operations to improve such symptoms:
1. Copy all the data files from the microSD card onto your personal computer as
they are.
pWhen your personal computer is set so as to hide folders and files, change the
settings to display those folders and files, and then operate. For how to change the
settings, refer to the operating manual or Help on the personal computer you use.
pDo not change the names of folders and files copied to the personal computer.
2. Use the personal computer to delete all the data files on the microSD card.
pDo not format the microSD card. The data files might not be played back.
3. Copy the data files copied in step 1 back to the microSD card.
pBe sure to copy them back to the same microSD card. Even if you save the
copyrighted data files on another microSD card, you cannot play them back.
Post View display
If recording ends or the image quality deteriorates while
shooting
Information
pThe shutter tone set by “Shutter sound” sounds when shooting starts and ends
regardless of the settings such as Manner Mode. The sound volume for shutter tone
cannot be changed.
pIf you do key operations while recording, the operation sound may be picked up.
pThe photo light turns on/flickers while you are recording.
234
Camera
pWhen you switch the subject you are shooting to a subject with a difference in
perspective, it takes time to focus on the new subject.
pWhen you have difficulty focusing on a subject, switch to another subject. Then the
subject might come into focus.
pThe operating speed of focusing is slowed down in a dark place.
Function Menu of the Post View Display in Movie Mode
Information
Play See page 342.
Save See page 233.
Attach to mail You can save the shot moving picture and attach it to an i-mode
mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
pYou can compose an i-mode mail message also by pressing
l( ). When the FOMA terminal is closed, you can
compose it by pressing i.
Set as stand-by You can save the shot moving picture and set it for the Stand-by
display.
Store in See page 238.
Display size See page 238.
File restriction See page 240.
Icon See page 238.
Cancel You do not save the shot moving picture.
Information
<Set as stand-by>
pSome moving pictures might not be displayed correctly.
pSee page 109 for playback of the moving picture set for the Stand-by display.
You can set the camera when shooting images.
You can display the image through the camera in “WIDE” or “TELE”.
The maximum magnification for each size is as follows:
■Outside camera
Changing Settings for Shooting
Use Zoom
Camera mode Size Level of zoom
The maximum
magnifications
(Approx.)
Photo
8M (2448 x 3264) 21 levels 2.5 times
6M Wide (1836 x 3264) 21 levels 2.5 times
5M (1944 x 2592) 21 levels 2.5 times
3M (1536 x 2048) 21 levels 2.5 times
2M Wide (1080 x 1920) 21 levels 2.5 times
2M (1200 x 1600) 21 levels 2.5 times
Stand-by (480 x 854) 21 levels 2.5 times
VGA (480 x 640) 21 levels 2.5 times
QVGA (240 x 320) 31 levels 5.1 times
QCIF (144 x 176) 31 levels 8.5 times
Sub-QCIF (96 x 128) 31 levels 12.7 times
Continuous
VGA (480 x 640) 21 levels 2.5 times
QVGA (240 x 320) 31 levels 5.1 times
QCIF (144 x 176) 31 levels 8.5 times
Sub-QCIF (96 x 128) 31 levels 12.7 times
Movie
(Image stabilizer:
Auto)
VGA (640 x 480) 21 levels 1.9 times
HVGA Wide (640 x 352) 21 levels 1.9 times
QVGA (320 x 240) 21 levels 2.8 times
(3.8 times)
QCIF (176 x 144) 31 levels 5.2 times
(6.3 times)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 31 levels 7.1 times
(9.5 times)
235
Camera
pWhen the maximum magnification for the horizontal display (with the FOMA terminal
closed) differs from the one for the vertical display (with the FOMA terminal opened), it
is mentioned in ( ).
■Inside camera
pWhen the maximum magnification for the horizontal display (with the FOMA terminal
closed) differs from the one for the vertical display (with the FOMA terminal opened), it
is mentioned in ( ).
1Finder displayUse No to adjust the magnification.
Movie
(Image stabilizer:
OFF)
VGA (640 x 480) 21 levels 2.5 times
HVGA Wide (640 x 352) 21 levels 2.5 times
QVGA (320 x 240) 21 levels 3.8 times
(5.1 times)
QCIF (176 x 144) 31 levels 6.9 times
(8.5 times)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 31 levels 9.5 times
(12.7 times)
Camera mode Size Level of zoom
The maximum
magnifications
(Approx.)
Camera mode Size Level of zoom
The maximum
magnifications
(Approx.)
Photo/
Continuous
VGA (640 x 480) 1 level 1.0 time
QVGA (240 x 320) 1 level 1.0 time
QCIF (144 x 176) 6 levels 1.5 times
Sub-QCIF (96 x 128) 21 levels 2.1 times
Movie
VGA (640 x 480) 1 level 1.0 time
HVGA Wide (640 x 352) 1 level 1.0 time
QVGA (320 x 240) 1 level 1.0 time
QCIF (176 x 144) 6 levels 1.9 times
(1.5 times)
Sub-QCIF (128 x 96) 21 levels 2.8 times
(2.1 times)
Information
pThe image quality may slightly change when you select “WIDE” or “TELE”.
You can shoot with the outside camera which focuses on a subject.
pWhen “Focus” is set to “Face detection”, faces are detected in the first place. When a
face is detected, the yellow frame is shown. Up to five faces are detected, and the
image is shot with a single face of them automatically focused according to the face
size and position. When multiple faces of people are found, the frame for a face to be
focused becomes yellow. When the detection fails, the focus function works in “Auto”.
pThe focus function works when you shoot a subject about 10 cm or more away.
1Finder displayXo, a or p(halfway)
When a subject is focused, a focus lock tone sounds, the frame becomes green,
and the focus is locked.
When the subject is not focused, the frame becomes red.
pTo cancel the focus locked by pressing Xo or a, press r.
pWhen the focus is locked by pressing p(halfway), press p down for shooting.
Release p(halfway) to cancel the focus.
p“TELE” is released in the following cases:
・When you press -h to end the camera
・When a size is changed
・When camera mode is switched
Use Focus Function
Information
Information
pIf “Movie type set” is set to “Voice” in Movie Mode, you cannot use the focus function.
p“Face detection” is available only in Photo Mode.
pEven when “Focus” is set to “Face detection”, you might not be able to detect the face
in the following cases:
・When the face faces sideway or askew
・When the face is at a slant
・When part of the face is covered by glasses, a cap, or shadows
・When the face is extremely small, large, or dim when compared to overall screen
size
・When the face is placed at the edges of the display
pThe distance that faces can be detected by “Face detection” is within about 2.5 m.
236
Camera
You can set whether to light the flash/photo light as a spare light for
when you use the outside camera to shoot in a dark place.
1Finder displayi( )
2Flash setting
Select an operation of theflash/photo light to be set.
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . The flash automatically lights at intensity suitable for the
place.
Forced ON . . . . . . . The flash forcibly lights at the instant of shooting.
Always light ON . . The photo light turns on.
Forced OFF . . . . . . The flash/photo light does not turn on at shooting.
Photo light set.ON or OFF
pEven when “Flash setting” is set to “Always light ON” or “Photo light set.” is set to
“ON”, the photo light goes off when you show the Function menu or Post View
display.
Flash Setting/Photo Light Setting
At Camera start-up Photo light set.: OFF
In Photo Mode
In Continuous/Movie Mode
Information
pYou cannot set “Flash setting” to “Forced ON” when “Photo mode” is set to “intelligent
Auto”.
pWhen the battery is almost empty, “Flash setting” is set to “Forced OFF”, and “Photo
light set.” is set to “OFF”.
pWhen you terminate the camera session or you switch to the inside camera while
“Flash setting” is set to other than “Forced OFF”, “Flash setting” is set to “Auto” when
you start the camera next time or you switch back to the outside camera. When “Flash
setting” is set to “Forced OFF”, the setting is retained. However, if you set to “Forced
OFF” when the battery is almost empty, the setting is not retained.
pThe appropriate shooting distance when using flash is from about 40 to 100 cm.
pEven when “Forced OFF” is set, the photo light turns on or flickers while the camera
is activated or at shooting.
pYou cannot use the photo light when “Movie type set” is set to “Voice” in Movie Mode.
pIf you shoot from a close distance, a correct exposure may not be obtained, letting the
subject get white.
Setting Image Size and Image Quality
Function Menu of the Finder Display
Inside camera/
Outside camera
You can switch between the inside camera and outside
camera.
CHG camera-mode Select a mode.
pWhen you set to “Continuous mode”, the camera starts in
the mode you used last time; “Auto”, “Manual”, or “Auto
bracket”.
Folder jump
[Photo/Continuous
Mode]
You can show the inside of the storage location of the camera.
237
Camera
Photo mode You can set a photo mode suitable for the scene. When you
change this setting, “Brightness”, “White balance”, “Color
mode set”, and “Focus” of “Camera settings” are changed
according to the selected mode.
Select a photo mode.
intelligent Auto
. . . . . . . . . When you shoot in Photo Mode, the suitable
photo mode is automatically detected and
selected according to the subject and shooting
conditions. The icon animation notifies you of the
photo mode switching.
Normal. . . You can shoot in normal mode.
Scene. . . . You can select a mode suitable for the scenery
around.
pWhen you set to “intelligent Auto”, “Brightness”, “White
balance”, “Color mode set”, and “Focus” of “Camera
settings” are automatically set and you cannot change the
settings.
pWhen “intelligent Auto” is set, the photo mode of “Night view”
and “Night view+portraits” is detected at the use of the focus
function. (See page 235)
Image size Select an image size.
File size setting
[Movie Mode only]
Select an item.
Mail restrict’n (S) . . .You can shoot up to 500 Kbytes.
Mail restrict’n (L) . . .You can shoot up to 2 Mbytes.
Long time . . . . . . . . .You can shoot for a long time. The
moving picture is saved to the microSD
card.
Image quality You can set the image quality for saving.
Select an image quality.
Normal. . . . . . For shooting with standard image quality
Fine . . . . . . . . For shooting with fairly high image quality
Super fine . . . For shooting with high image quality
Camera settings
Brightness You can adjust to -3 (dark) through +3 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
White balance You can adjust the coloring of the image on the Finder display
to create a natural color tone.
Select an item.
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For adjusting white balance
automatically
Fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . For shooting outdoors in fine weather
Cloudy . . . . . . . . . . . . For shooting in cloudy weather or in
the shade
Light bulb . . . . . . . . . For shooting under incandescent light
Fluorescent light . . . For shooting under fluorescent light
Color mode set Select a color mode.
Normal. . . . . . . . . For shooting in normal color
Sepia . . . . . . . . . . For shooting in sepia color
Monochrome . . . For shooting in monochrome
Vivid . . . . . . . . . . . For shooting with the vivid contours and
raised color saturation
Natural . . . . . . . . .For shooting with the smooth contours and
lowered color saturation
Whitening . . . . . .For shooting faces in bright color
Suntan . . . . . . . . . For shooting faces in dark color
Focus You can set the focus of the outside camera.
Select an item.
Face detection . . .For focusing on a person’s face
Auto . . . . . . . . . . . .For focusing automatically before
shooting (See page 235)
Close-up . . . . . . . . For focusing on a subject in a short
distance
Landscape . . . . . . For focusing on a landscape in a long
distance
p“Face detection” is available only in Photo Mode.
Img. stabilizer
[Photo/Movie Mode]
You can correct camera shake for when shooting with the
outside camera.
Auto or OFF
At Camera
start-up
±0
At Camera
start-up
Auto
At Camera
start-up
Normal
At Camera
start-up
Photo Mode:
Face detection
Continuous/
Movie Mode:
Auto
238
Camera
Shoot with frame
[Photo Mode only]
You can shoot a still image with a frame.
ON or OFFSelect a frame.
Shutter sound You can set a shutter sound. You can set a shutter sound
each for Photo Mode (Continuous Mode) and Movie Mode.
Select a shutter sound.
pWhile selecting a shutter sound, you can check the selected
sound.
Flicker correction You can suppress flicker on the Finder display for shooting
with the outside camera.
Auto, Mode 1 (50Hz) or Mode 2 (60Hz)
Storage setting
Store in You can set the storage location for the still images/moving
pictures you shoot.
Phone or microSD
Auto save set You can set whether to automatically save the image after
shooting. When “Store in” is “Phone”, the image is saved to
the “Camera” folder. When “Store in” is “microSD”, the image
is saved to the folder set by “Select storage”.
ON or OFF
File restriction See page 240.
High sensitiv.
[Photo Mode only]
You can shoot with high-sensitivity when shooting with the
outside camera.
ON or OFF
Flash setting
[Photo Mode only]
See page 236.
Photo light set.
[Continuous/Movie
Mode]
See page 236.
Auto timer See page 240.
Cont. shooting set.
At Camera
start-up
OFF
At Camera start-up
OFF
Continuous mode
[Continuous Mode
only]
Select a mode.
Auto. . . . . . . . . . .Shoots automatically at an interval and with
the number of frames as specified by “Shot
interval” and “Shot number”.
Manual . . . . . . . .Shoots one by one manually with the
number of frames specified by “Shot
number”.
Auto bracket. . . . Shoots automatically nine still images at an
interval of about 0.3 second while changing
the brightness and color tone one by one.
pWhen you set to “Manual”, the number of frames for
continuous shooting is indicated on the display.
Shot interval
[Continuous Mode
only]
Select a shooting interval.
pYou can set this only in “Auto” of Continuous Mode.
Shot number
[Continuous Mode
only]
Enter the number of photos.
pWhen “Image size” is set to “VGA (480 x 640)”, you cannot
change “Shot number”.
pYou can set this only in “Auto” or ”Manual” of Continuous
Mode.
Movie type set
[Movie Mode only]
You can select whether to record both the video and voice, or
one of them when you shoot the moving picture.
Normal, Video, or Voice
Display size You can set whether to display a still image/moving picture in
the original size (Actual size) or to fit to the screen size on the
Finder display.
Actual size or Fit in display
Common replay mode
[Movie Mode only]
You can set a shooting size appropriate for attaching to
i-mode mail.
YES
pImage Size is set to “QCIF”, File Size Setting is set to “Mail
restrict’n (S)”, and Image Quality (Movie Mode) is set to
“Normal”.
Icon You can set whether to display icons.
ON or OFF
At Camera start-up
Normal
239
Camera
Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate)/number of
stored items.
Information
<Inside camera/Outside camera>
pWhen “Image size” is set to “Stand-by (480 x 854)” or larger and you switch to the
inside camera, the camera starts up in “VGA (640 x 480)”.
<Photo mode>
pEven when “intelligent Auto” is set, the photo mode is not switched after the focus
lock. Release the focus lock to detect the photo mode again.
p
Note that the image may blur in Night Mode because the exposure takes a longer time.
pWhen shooting at your intended scene, select a suitable photo mode for shooting.
<File size setting>
pWhen “Long time” is set, “Store in” is set to “microSD”. If you switch “File size setting”
to other than “Long time” without ending the camera, “Store in” returns to “Phone”.
<Img. stabilizer>
pImage Stabilizer function is only for decreasing the degree of camera shake, so its
effect differs depending on the subject or condition.
pImage Stabilizer might not work effectively in the following cases:
・When the camera shakes to a great extent
・When zooming is in use
・When shooting moving subjects
p“Img. stabilizer” becomes invalid when “Photo mode” of “Camera settings” is set to
“Sports”, “Night mode”, or “Pet” of “Scene” in Photo Mode.
pResidual images might remain in the area where the subject is moving, or noise might
be found in overall area. In that case, set this function to “OFF”.
pIn Movie Mode, the shooting range varies depending on the “Auto” or “OFF” setting
because peripheral pixels are used for the processing by Image Stabilizer.
pYou cannot use Image Stabilizer for the inside camera.
<Shoot with frame>
pWhen “Image size” is set to “2M (1200 x 1600)” or larger, you cannot shoot with a
frame.
pIf you shoot a still image with a frame using the inside camera and save it, the frame is
also horizontally reversed when the still image is automatically reversed as a correct
image.
pYou cannot save the still image shot with a frame as the mirrored image.
<Flicker correction>
pIf you set to “Auto”, it may take a while to automatically adjust the flicker. In this case,
switch to Mode 1 or Mode 2 according to the power frequency provided in the
shooting location.
<Storage setting>
pSee “Select storage” for how to set a storage location on the microSD card.
pIf you change “File size setting” to “Long time”, “Store in” is set to “microSD” and
“Storage setting” cannot be operated.
pWhen “Auto save set” is set to “ON”, the image is saved to the latest folder if “Select
storage” is not set or the folder set as a destination folder is deleted.
<High sensitiv.>
pWhen “ON” is set, you cannot set “Image size” to “2M Wide (1080 x 1920)” or larger.
pWhen you set “High sensitiv.” to “ON” while “Image size” is set to “2M Wide (1080 x
1920)” or larger, “Image size” is changed to “2M (1200 x 1600)”. If you switch “High
sensitiv.” to “OFF” without changing “Image size” and without ending the camera, it
returns to the image size before you set “High sensitiv.” to “ON”.
<Continuous mode>
pYou cannot set to “Auto bracket” for the inside camera. When you switch to the inside
camera while “Auto bracket” is set, “Auto” is set.
<Shot number>
pThe number of shots that can be set differs depending on the image size. The number
of shots that can be set is as follows:
VGA (480 x 640): 4
QVGA (240 x 320): 5 through 10
QCIF (144 x 176): 5 through 20
Sub-QCIF (96 x 128): 5 through 20
Information
240
Camera
You can set the file restrictions for when you save a still image/moving
picture you shoot. The recipient of the file (primary distribution) cannot
attach the received file to i-mode mail.
1Finder displayi( )Storage setting
File restriction
or
Post View display in Photo Mode, Movie Mode or
Continuous Mode/Detailed display in Continuous Mode
i( )File restriction
2File unrestricted or File restricted
pFrom the Post View display in Continuous Mode, you can change the file
restriction settings for the image you put a check mark on.
<Display size>
pWhen “Image size” is set to a size “HVGA Wide (640 x 352)” or larger, “Fit in display”
always applies.
pWhen “Image size” is set to “QCIF (144 x 176)” or “Sub-QCIF (96 x 128)”, the image is
enlarged two times at both lengthwise and sidewise when it is displayed in “Actual
size”.
pThe setting for the Finder display is reflected in the Post View display; however the
setting for the Post View display is not reflected in the Finder display.
<Common replay mode>
pYou cannot operate when you set “File size setting” to “Long time”.
File Restriction
Information
Information
pEven when you set “File restriction” to “File restricted”, the still images/moving pictures
can be output from the destination mobile phone by transmitting the images using
infrared communication or by copying them to the microSD card.
pAfter saving, you can use “File restriction” on page 336 to change the settings.
pWhen you set “File size setting” to “Long time” in Movie Mode, “File restriction”
becomes “File unrestricted”.
1Finder displayi( )Auto timerON or OFF
Enter a delay time (seconds).
pEnter from “01” through “15”, in two digits.
“ ” appears on the Finder display.
If you press Oo( ) or p, a confirmation tone sounds and “ ” blinks. When
“Flash setting” is set to other than “Always light ON”, the photo light flickers every about 1
second until about 5 seconds before shooting. From about 5 seconds before shooting,
the photo light flickers every about 0.5 second, and the confirmation tone sounds every
about 1 second. Shooting takes place after the set delay time has elapsed.
pTo cancel shooting, press l( ) or r while the photo light is flickering. When
the FOMA terminal is closed, press i or r to cancel shooting. Even if you cancel
shooting, “Auto timer” stays set to “ON”.
pYou can shoot immediately by pressing Oo( ) or p before the delay time has
elapsed.
pWhen you shoot, a confirmation tone sounds regardless of the settings such as
Manner Mode. You cannot change the sound volume for the confirmation tone.
Auto Timer
At Camera start-up OFF
When Auto Timer is set to “ON”
Information
pYou cannot use Auto timer in “Manual” of Continuous Mode.
pAuto timer is set to “OFF” when shooting ends.
241
Camera
You can use the outside camera to scan JAN codes and QR codes and
store them as data files. As to CODE 128, download a compatible i-αppli
program and then scan the code to save the data. (See page 289)
From the scanned data, you can make calls, compose i-mode mail
messages, access Internet websites, and so on.
■When scanning with Bar Code Reader
pTake the code as large as possible
within the guide frame.
pAutofocus works when you scan a
code about 10 cm or more away from
it. When you scan a code in the
out-of-focus state, the recognition
rate lowers.
pScan so that the camera is in parallel
with the code.
■JAN Code
JAN Code is a bar code that denotes numerals with
the vertical bars of a different width.
You can scan 8-digit (JAN8) and 13-digit (JAN13)
JAN codes.
p“4942857112597” is displayed when you scan this bar
code with the FOMA terminal.
■QR Code
QR Code is one of the 2-dimensional codes that denotes data in
the vertical and horizontal directions.
Kanji, katakana, alphanumeric characters, and pictograms are
displayed when you scan it. Some QR codes have image or
melody information.
p“株式会社NTTドコモ (NTT DOCOMO, INC.)” is displayed when
you scan this QR code with the FOMA terminal.
<Bar Code Reader>
Using Bar Code Reader
Scanning Code display
Guide frame
■CODE 128
CODE 128 is a bar code that denotes 128
characters of ASCII code (numerals,
alphabets, symbols, etc.) with the vertical
bars of different widths.
pDownload the i-αppli program which supports CODE 128, and then scan the above
code. “NTT DOCOMO” is displayed.
You can store up to 5 scanned codes.
You can scan up to 16 divided QR codes.
1mLifeKitBar code readerScan code
The Bar Code Reader menu is displayed.
pYou can paste the Bar Code Reader menu to the desktop, or can store it for Multi
Key Long Press Setting. (See page 31 and page 404)
2Fit a code to be scanned to the guide frame and press
Xo.
When the subject is focused, a focus lock tone sounds and the cross mark
becomes green.
pEach time of pressing m, you can turn on and off the Photo light.
pPress i( ) and select “Brightness”; then you can adjust brightness to -3
(dark) through +3 (bright).
pPress Co to show the reduced display, and press Vo to return to the former
display.
Scan a Code
At Bar Code Reader
start-up
Photo light: off
Brightness: ±0
Zoom: Magnified view
242
Camera
3Press Oo( ).
The code is scanned. (The shutter tone does not sound.)
pTo cancel scanning, press r or Oo( ).
pWhen scanning is completed, the scanning completion tone sounds and the Call/
Charging indicator lights. The sound level is fixed and cannot be changed.
However, the tone does not sound in Manner Mode or while “Phone” of “Ring
volume” is set to “Silent”.
p“ ” is displayed for melody files and “ ” or “ ” is displayed for incompatible
or damaged files.
pWhile you are entering (editing) characters, the Scanned Code Result display
does not appear; the Text Data Confirmation display of the scanned code
appears. To enter the scanned code, press Oo( ). To discard it, press
l( ) or r. The characters that cannot be displayed are replaced by
half-pitch spaces. When the code containing no text data has been scanned, the
code is not correctly displayed.
pIf scanning is not completed in a certain period, the scanning is suspended and
the Scanning Code display returns.
pWhen the scanned code is part of divided QR codes, select “OK” to repeat step 2
and step 3 for scanning the rest of codes.
4i( )Save resultOK
The scanned data is stored.
Scanned Code
Result display
Information
pYou cannot scan bar codes or 2-dimensional codes other than JAN codes, QR codes,
or CODE 128.
pScanning may take a long time. Hold the FOMA terminal securely with your hands
during scanning.
pYou may not be able to scan codes correctly depending on scratch, dirt, damage, the
quality of printed material, light reflection, or QR code version.
pYou cannot scan some codes depending on the type or size.
Function Menu of the Scanned Code Result Display
Save result See page 242.
Display list You can show the Bar Code Reader list when one or more files
are stored.
Go to location You can connect to the highlighted URL via i-mode or Full
Browser.
i-mode Browser or Full BrowserYES
pYou can connect to the URL also by highlighting the URL and
pressing Oo( ).
Compose message You can compose an i-mode mail message to send to the
highlighted mail address. Go to step 3 on page 142.
pYou can compose it also by highlighting the mail address and
pressing Oo( ).
pWhen you select “Compose message” from the Scanned Code
Result display, the data on the Scanned Code Result display is
entered into the address, subject, and text field.
Dialing You can make a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call to
the highlighted phone number.
Select a dialing type.
pWhen you select “Select image”, select an image to send to the
other party during the videophone call.
pWhen you select “Compose SMS”, you can compose an SMS
message to send to the phone number set as the destination
address. Go to step 3 on page 185.
pYou can make a call also by highlighting the phone number and
pressing Oo( ).
Dial
pTo make an international call, select “Int’l dial assist”. (See
page 59)
pTo set Caller ID Notification, select “Notify caller ID”. (See step 2
of “Set Caller ID Notification when Making a Call” on page 56)
Add to phonebook See page 92.
Add bookmark You can bookmark the site name and URL.
YES
pSelect “Page title” to edit the title.
OKSelect a destination folder.
243
Camera
Save image You can save the scanned image data to set to the Stand-by
display or other displays.
Select a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 204.
pSee page 206 when images are stored to the maximum.
Save melody You can save the scanned melody data to set it as a ring tone or
other tones.
YESSelect a destination folder.
Go to step 3 on page 205.
pSelect “ ” to play back the melody.
pSee page 206 when melodies are stored to the maximum.
Save ToruCa You can save the scanned ToruCa file.
Select a destination folder.
pSelect “ ” to display the ToruCa file.
pSee page 206 when ToruCa files are stored to the maximum.
Start iαppli You can start up i-αppli from the scanned data.
YES
Copy Select a start point for copying
Select an end point for copying.
pYou can copy codes of up to 5,000 full-pitch/10,000 half-pitch
characters.
pSee page 428 for pasting copied characters.
Information
<Go to location>
pURL can be displayed in up to 512 half-pitch characters.
<Compose message>
pIf the scanned data contains nonenterable characters, you cannot enter it as a mail
address, and those characters may become spaces in the text field.
<Dialing>
pYou cannot make emergency calls by scanning “110”, “119” or “118”.
<Add bookmark>
pYou can display up to 512 half-pitch characters for a URL and can store up to 256
characters from the beginning.
<Save image>
pThe file name and title for the saved image are “imageXXX” (XXX are numerals).
1mLifeKitBar code reader
Saved data
The titles for stored data are displayed from the latest
one.
pSelect a title to show the Scanned Code Result display.
<Save melody>
pThe file name for the saved melody is “melodyXXX” (XXX are numerals).
pFor the melody with no title, the file name is displayed as the title.
pWhen playing back the melody, it is played back at the sound volume set for “Phone”
of “Ring volume”.
Display the Saved Data List
Information
Bar Code Reader list
Information
pThe titles for the scanned data are as follows:
(Example) When the scanned data is saved at 10:00 on November 18, 2009;
Title name: 20091118_1000_0000
・If you store multiple data items for the same date and time, the lower
four-digit numbers increase up to “9999”.
Function Menu of the Bar Code Reader List
Edit title Enter a title.
You can enter up to 9 full-pitch/18 half-pitch characters.
Result You can show the Scanned Code Result display for stored
data.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
244
245
1Seg
1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Before Using 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Setting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Channel Setting> 248
Watching 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <Activate 1Seg> 249
Using i-αppli Program Guide. . . . . . . <i-αppli Program Guide> 254
Using Data Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . . . <Data Broadcasting> 254
Using TV Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .<TVlink> 255
Recording a 1Seg Program while Watching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Setting Timer for Watching or Recording 1Seg Programs
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <TV Timer> <Timer Recording> 257
Setting 1Seg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <User Settings> 262
246
1Seg
1Seg is the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service for mobile objects, and it
broadcasts data as well as video and audio. Further, by using i-mode, you can obtain the
detailed information, can participate in quiz programs or can have fun with TV shopping.
For details on the 1Seg service, browse the following websites:
The Association for Promotion of Digital Broadcasting
From personal computers: http://www.dpa.or.jp/english/
From i-mode: http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/ (In Japanese only)
■Using 1Seg
p1Seg is a service provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). You are
not charged a communication fee for receiving audio and video. For viewing fee of
NHK, contact NHK.
pThe information displayed in the data broadcasting area contains “Data broadcasting”
and “Data broadcasting site”.
“Data broadcasting” is displayed on airwaves together with video and audio, and “Data
broadcasting site” is displayed by connecting from the information of data broadcasting
to the sites provided by television entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). Also, it might
be connected to “i-mode site”, etc. When connecting to sites, you need to subscribe to
i-mode separately.
pYou are charged a packet communication fee for browsing “Data broadcasting site”
and “i-mode site”.
You might be charged an information fee for using some sites (i-mode pay sites).
pThe ToruCa files might be automatically saved while you are watching a 1Seg
program. When you receive detailed information from the saved ToruCa files, you are
charged a packet communication fee.
■Radio waves
1Seg is one of the broadcasting services receiving radio waves (broadcasting waves)
different from that used for the FOMA services. Accordingly, you cannot watch the
broadcasting when you are out of reach of the broadcasting waves, or when the
broadcasting is suspended regardless of whether you are in or out of the FOMA service
area.
Even when you are in the terrestrial digital TV broadcasting service area, reception
condition might be deteriorated or you might not be able to receive programs in the
following places:
・Where the radio tower that transmits broadcasting waves is far away
・Where the radio waves are blocked by geographical features such as mountains or
valleys of high-rise buildings
・Where the radio waves are weak or do not reach, such as in tunnels, underground, or
recesses of buildings
To improve reception conditions, fully extend the 1Seg antenna. Also the reception
conditions might be improved by changing the direction of the antenna, by moving your
FOMA terminal away from or close to you, or by moving yourself to another place.
1Seg ■Messages on the display when you use 1Seg for the first time
When you use 1Seg for the first time after purchase, the Exemption Clause Confirmation
display appears.
If you select “NO” from the confirmation display which appears after pressing
Oo( ), the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.
pThe Exemption Clause Confirmation display also appears when you replace the UIM
with another one or remove the UIM.
■What is broadcasting storage area?
The broadcasting storage area is a storage area inside the terminal that is exclusive for
1Seg. The information you input according to the instruction on the data broadcasting
program is saved to that broadcasting storage area following the settings of television
entrepreneurs (broadcasting stations). The information to be saved might contain
answers for quiz, and personal information such as membership number, gender, age,
or occupation.
The saved information might be displayed, or be sent to television entrepreneurs
(broadcasting stations) without your re-input when you browse to the data broadcasting
site.
pSee page 263 to erase information in the broadcasting storage area.
When you replace the UIM with another one or remove the UIM, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to reset the broadcasting storage area. Select “YES”,
and reset it. If you select “NO”, the services using the broadcasting storage area are
not available.
■Messages on the display when the information in the broadcasting storage area
is read out
When the information in the broadcasting storage area is used while you are watching a
program, the message “Use saved information? It may include information used by the
same broadcasting group” is displayed.
If you select “YES”, the confirmation display asking whether to read out the stored
information while watching the same program does not appear after that. Further if you
select “YES (default)”, the same confirmation display does not appear afterward.
<Example> When you watch a 1Seg program for the first time
Store the channel list for the area you use. (See page 248)
Before Using 1Seg
How to Watch a 1Seg Program
Channel Setting
1
247
1Seg
Extend the 1Seg antenna, and activate 1Seg. (See page 249)
■1Seg antenna
When you watch a 1Seg program, fully extend the 1Seg antenna.
pWhen you change the direction of the 1Seg antenna, do not force it.
■Battery level
If you try to start 1Seg or 1Seg starts automatically by TV Timer when the battery is low,
the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking whether to
start it. Also, when the battery becomes low while you are watching or recording a 1Seg
program, the battery alert tone sounds, and the confirmation display appears asking
whether to end 1Seg. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting of “Keypad
sound”.
pWhen you do nothing from the confirmation display for about one minute, 1Seg
automatically terminates.
pWhile “Rec. when low battery” is set to “ON”, the confirmation display does not appear
during recording. (See page 263)
pIf the battery level becomes low during recording and recording ends, the video
recorded up to that point is automatically saved.
pDuring Multitask, the battery alert tone sounds but the confirmation display does not
appear. Switch to the viewer display and then operate.
Activating 1Seg
2
Pull out the 1Seg
antenna as far as it
goes.
Change the direction
without applying
pressure.
Retract it straight
until it is held back.
■When a call etc. comes in while you are watching or recording a 1Seg program
When an event shown below occurs while watching or recording a 1Seg program, the
video and audio are suspended, and each function works. Recording is not suspended.
After you finish each function, you can resume watching a 1Seg program. See page 253
for receiving i-mode mail messages, SMS messages or Messages R/F.
pIncoming voice call, videophone call, PushTalk call
(To start recording when a call is received, refer to “Rec. program when call”.)
pNotification of Alarm, Schedule, ToDo, or TV Timer
(when “Alarm setting” is set to “Alarm preferred”)
pNotification of Timer Recording
(When the start date/time comes, the FOMA terminal works according to the setting of
“Priority”.)
Information
p1Seg is not available while “USB mode setting” is set to “microSD mode” or “MTP
mode” and the FOMA terminal is connected to a personal computer.
p1Seg might automatically start when you end a call by closing the FOMA terminal
during a call. In such a case, be careful not to use the FOMA terminal close to your
ear because audio is output at the sound volume for 1Seg.
pThe life of battery pack may shorten if you watch 1Seg programs for a long time
during charging.
p1Seg is not available overseas.
■Important
Note that we cannot be held responsible for loss or changes of the saved contents due
to a malfunction, repair, or other mishandling of the FOMA terminal. Furthermore, we
cannot move the saved information (such as still images, TV links, or information
saved to the broadcasting storage area) when you change your FOMA terminal or
have it repaired.
248
1Seg
To watch 1Seg programs, you need to execute Channel Setting and to
select a channel list in advance. You can store up to 10 channel lists.
pThe broadcasting stations you can receive differ depending on the local area. If you
store a channel list of the area for traveling or business trip, you can watch programs in
the area just by selecting the channel list.
pThe remote-control numbers you use with channel selections are previously set for
respective broadcasting stations.
pYou cannot execute Channel Setting during recording of a 1Seg program.
The broadcasting stations you can currently watch are automatically
searched and stored in a channel list.
pYou need to set this function with the 1Seg antenna extended in the terrestrial digital
TV broadcasting service area.
1m1SegChannel settingAuto channel setting
YES
Searching takes place.
pFrom the Channel list display, press i( ), select “Channel setting” →
“Auto channel set.”.
From the viewer display, press i( ), select “Disp.Ch. /operation” →
“Channel setting” → “Auto channel set.”.
2YESEnter a title.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters.
pWhen you press Oo( ) without entering a title, the title name takes the
name of “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”. (Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
pTo cancel searching midway, press l( ) or r; then select “YES”. You
can store the searched broadcasting stations in a channel list.
<Channel Setting>
Setting Channels
Auto Channel Setting You can store the broadcasting stations set by prefecture to a channel
list.
1m1SegChannel settingSelect area
Select an areaSelect a prefectureYES
pFrom the Channel list display, press i( ), select “Channel setting” →
“Select area”.
From the viewer display, press i( ), select “Disp.Ch. /operation” →
“Channel setting” → “Select area”.
Information
pWhen the multiple broadcasting stations which have the same remote-control number
are retrieved, the message to the effect that the remote-control number is doubled
appears. Select “OK” and select your area from the Local Area Selection display. The
channels in the area you select are preferentially assigned to remote-control numbers
1 to 12, and channels in the area you do not select are assigned to remote-control
numbers 13 onward.
pThe time to search channels requires for about 30 to 50 seconds. However, it differs
depending on the number of broadcasting stations or airwave conditions, and might
exceed 100 seconds.
Select Area
Information
pDepending on the area, you may not be able to correctly store the broadcasting
stations by “Select area”. In that case, search for the broadcasting stations by “Auto
channel setting”.
249
1Seg
You can select a channel list to set the broadcasting stations you receive.
Also, you can edit the channel list already stored.
1m1SegChannel listSelect a channel list.
The channel list you receive
is set, and the detailed
display appears.
pSelect a broadcasting
station to watch a 1Seg
program.
pWhen you select “Disp.Ch.
/operation” from the
Function menu of the
viewer display and select “Channel list”, the viewer display returns after you
select a channel list.
pYou can watch a 1Seg program also by pressing l( ) from the Channel
list display and selecting a broadcasting station.
Select Channel List
Channel list display Detailed Channel list
display
Remote-control number
Function Menu of the Channel List Display
Channel setting See page 248.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 11 full-pitch/22 half-pitch characters.
Delete YES
pYou cannot delete the channel list currently set.
Function Menu of the Detailed Channel List Display
Remote control No. You can change the broadcasting station set for the
remote-control number.
Select a broadcasting station you want to change
Select the remote-control number to be set.
pIf any broadcasting station has already been set for the
specified remote-control number, the broadcasting stations
switch positions. Repeat the operation to set a broadcasting
station for a remote-control number.
l( )YES
pWhen you use 1Seg for the first time, the Exemption Clause Confirmation display
appears. (See page 246)
pYou can start 1Seg also by using the channel information (links) displayed in the i-αppli
Program Guide, sites, or mail. (See “Media To Function” on page 208)
pBy connecting to the Stereo Earphone Set (option), you can play back the audio from
1Seg programs in stereo sound. Also, you can play back the audio wirelessly by using
a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 418)
1Press and hold c for at least one
second.
1Seg starts from the channel you watched last time.
“ ” is displayed while watching a 1Seg program.
pWhen you have not stored any channel list, the
confirmation display appears. Select “OK” and execute
Channel Setting. (See page 248)
pTo end watching, press h and select “End 1Seg”.
You can switch to play background by selecting
“Change to BGM”.
Delete YES
pWhen you delete all the broadcasting stations in the channel
list, the channel list itself is deleted.
pYou cannot delete the broadcasting station in the channel list
currently set.
<Activate 1Seg>
Watching 1Seg
Viewer display
250
1Seg
■About Viewer display
(When “Switch display” is “V. img+Caption+DBC”.)
Video
“ ” appears on the upper right of the display when the data broadcasting linked with
a 1Seg program is found while you are watching on the horizontal display or in the
multiwindow.
Caption
You can set display position of the caption on the horizontal display by “Caption posit.
in w-scr”.
Data Broadcasting
Operation Mode
Video Mode: Operates the video or audio. (See page 249)
Data Broadcasting Mode: Operates the data broadcasting. (See page 254)
Off Timer
“ ” appears while Off Timer is set.
ECO Mode
“ ” appears during ECO Mode.
Channel (Remote-control number)
pWhen a broadcasting station is broadcasting multiple services (programs), “Viewing
service number/Number of all services” is also displayed.
pIf you have searched a channel using Channel Search, the channel (Remote-control
number) might not be displayed.
Airwave Reception Level (estimate)
(strong) (weak)
“ ” appears out of the broadcasting area.
Guide display
Horizontal display
Vertical display
 
 
 
Reception of Caption
“ ” is displayed while caption information is being received.
Sound Volume
Program Information (outline)
The program name is displayed on the vertical display. The channel, start/end time,
and program name are displayed on the horizontal display.
Record Video
“ ” appears during video recording, and “ ” appears during video
recording by Timer Recording. “ ” appears during pause of recording.
Switch Display/Caption
Status of Video Image: ON/OFF/enlarged
Caption: ON/OFF
Icon/Caption
Icon: “ON/OFF” of “Icon”
Caption: Position ( : Lower, : Upper) and OFF
p, ,and are displayed when you operate keys.
pWhile “Icon” is set to “OFF”, the guide display appears on the horizontal display when
you operate keys.
■Channel switching operation (in Video Mode only)
Operation Key operation
Direct channel
selection
Remote control No.1~9. . . . . . 1~9
Remote control No.10. . . . . . . a
Remote control No.11. . . . . . . 0
Remote control No.12. . . . . . . s
Channel selection No
Channel search No(for at least one second)
pEach time of pressing switches channels by searching
receivable broadcasting stations in order of frequency.
pl( ) or r to suspend
251
1Seg
■Operations while watching a 1Seg program
※1 You cannot operate in Data Broadcasting Mode.
※2 You cannot operate from the horizontal display.
※3 This operation shows the program information (outline) when the horizontal display
is shown.
Operation Key operation
Sound volume
adjustment
Bo※1 or </>
Mute/Release mute r※1
Start i-αppli program
guide
l( )※2
Program info l(for at least one second)
Program info (outline)
d
Switch display d while displaying program information (outline)
pEach time of pressing from the horizontal display switches
the setting of “Icon” and “Caption posit. in w-scr”.
Switch display
directions/
Full display
c
pIn Video Mode, each time of pressing switches the display
directions.
pIn Data Broadcasting Mode, each time of pressing switches
between the normal display and the full display.
Record video Oo( )(for at least one second)※1 or p(for at least one
second)
pOo( )※1 or p to end
Record still image Oo( )※1 or p
Switch TV/data BC m( )※3
pEach time of pressing switches between Video Mode and
Data Broadcasting Mode.
Information
pEven when you switch displays by using Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg
program, the audio from the 1Seg program is output. (Play Background) The audio
might not be output, however, depending on the function or program. (See page 497)
pThe following might occur depending on the airwave conditions:
・The audio is interrupted. ・The data broadcasting is not operable.
・Block-shaped noise appears on the display or playing stops.
・The video or the data broadcasting is not displayed. (A dark screen appears.)
pThe caption might not be displayed depending on the program.
pThe data broadcasting cannot be displayed on the horizontal display.
pIf you move, the receivable airwaves or broadcasting stations might change being
affected by mountains or buildings. If reception on 1Seg goes bad after moving,
perform “Auto channel setting”; then reception might be improved via different
airwaves or you might be able to watch programs of other broadcasting stations.
pIf you use Channel Search to select channels after you move, etc., you might find the
channels you could not store by “Auto channel setting”. Execute “Add to ch. list” to
store the channels you found, and then you can watch the channel from the next time.
pWhen starting 1Seg or switching channels, it takes a while before you can watch a
1Seg program.
Function Menu of Viewer Display
Information
Program info You can display information of the program you are
watching.
Program guide See page 254.
Disp.Ch. /operation
Channel info You can display the detailed display of the selected
channel list. Select a broadcasting station to switch to it.
Channel list Go to step 1 of “Select Channel List” on page 249.
Channel setting See page 248.
Add to ch. list You can add the broadcasting station you are currently
watching to the channel list.
YES
pThe broadcasting station is stored in the lowest
number of an unoccupied remote-control number
from 13 onward.
Tune service You can select a program to watch when the same
broadcasting station is broadcasting multiple services
(programs).
Select a channel.
Data broadcasting
252
1Seg
Back to data BC You can stop browsing the data broadcasting site and
return to the data broadcasting.
Reload contents You can reload the data broadcasting site being
displayed.
pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to
re-send the data you entered, depending on the site.
Certificate See page 198.
Image display set. See page 209.
Sound setting See page 263.
ToruCa from dataBC See page 319.
Reset settings See page 263.
TVlink list You can display the TVlink list. (See page 255)
Compose message See page 253.
Settings
Display/operation
Switch display You can switch the contents of the viewer display.
Select an item.
pIf you set to “Enlarged V. img+DBC”, the video on the
vertical display is enlarged. However, the sides of the
video might be cut depending on the program.
pEven if you set to “Data broadcasting”, the audio from
1Seg programs is output.
pThe operation mode automatically switches to Data
Broadcasting Mode when you display data
broadcasting in full display. When you release full
display of data broadcasting, the operation mode
returns to the former mode.
Switch TV/data BC You can switch between Video Mode and Data
Broadcasting Mode while watching a 1Seg program on
the vertical display.
Icon See page 262.
At 1Seg start-up
When “Caption” is
set to “ON”:
V. img+Caption+
DBC
When “Caption” is
set to “OFF”:
Visual image+DBC
At 1Seg start-up
Video Mode
AV output See page 388.
Video
Brightness You can set the brightness of the display light to Level 1
(dark) through 5 (bright).
Select a brightness level.
pIf you set to “Auto setting”, it is adjusted automatically
in accordance with the ambient brightness sensed by
the light sensor.
pThe setting here is valid until you finish watching the
1Seg program. The setting at 1Seg start-up follows
the setting of “Brightness” of “Backlight” on page 112.
Mobile W-Speed See page 262.
Image quality See page 262.
LCD AI See page 113.
Sound
Sound effect
Auto volume See page 262.
Remaster See page 262.
Listening See page 263.
Equalizer See page 263.
Main/sub sound Main sound, Sub sound, or Main+sub sound
Switch audio data Sound 1 or Sound 2
pYou can switch only when audio that can be switched
is found.
ECO mode See page 263.
Off timer When the specified time elapses, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to end watching or
recording a program (except for Timer Recording).
Select a time.
At 1Seg start-up
Main sound
At 1Seg start-up
OFF
253
1Seg
You can compose and send i-mode mail messages while watching a
1Seg program. (Multiwindow)
When you send an i-mode mail message to the FOMA terminal
supporting the “Media To” function by “Recom. channel mail”, the
receiving end can start 1Seg by using the “Media To” function.
pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the Message Composition display is shown. You
cannot show the caption and data broadcasting, either.
pYou can compose SMS messages as well while watching a 1Seg program.
1Viewer displayi( )Compose message
Compose message or Recom. channel mail
Compose message
. . . You can compose a new i-mode
mail message.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
Recom. channel mail
. . . You can compose an i-mode mail
message whose text contains the
information of the channel you
are watching.
Go to step 2 on page 142.
pWhen the Message Composition
display is shown, you can switch
between the Message Composition
display and the viewer display (horizontal display) each time you press and hold
c for at least one second.
Key guide You can display the guide of key operation during
watching a 1Seg program.
Information
<Off timer>
pIn the following cases, the Off Timer confirmation display appears after each
operation finishes:
・In standby state for Timer Recording ・While being recorded by Timer Recording
・While a still image is being saved ・When an unsaved image is left
・During channel search by Auto Channel Setting
Send i-mode Mail while Watching
Message
Composition
display
Viewer display
The ticker on the viewer display notifies you of the receiving of an i-mode
mail message, SMS message, and Message R/F. You can show the
detailed Received Mail display while you are watching a 1Seg program.
(Multiwindow)
pYou cannot show tickers when “Mail ticker display” is set to “OFF” or during Public
mode (Drive mode).
pOnly the audio is output from a 1Seg program without showing the viewer display when
you show a mail message from the party whose mail address is not stored in the
Phonebook.
pYou cannot operate 1Seg while the detailed Received Mail display is shown. You
cannot show the caption and data broadcasting, either.
pYou can show an SMS messages as well while watching a 1Seg program.
1Receive i-mode mail while viewer display is shown
Press l( ) while the ticker is displayed.
pThe mail ring tone does not sound.
pWhen the detailed Received Mail display
is shown, you can switch between the
detailed Mail display and the viewer
display (horizontal display) each time you
press and hold c for at least one
second.
Information
pEven when you show the Message Composition display/detailed Sent Mail display by
Multitask while you are watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the
multiwindow.
pOnly the audio is output from a 1Seg program without showing the viewer display if
you select “Mail history” from the Function menu of the Inbox/Outbox/Draft list or a
detailed mail display by Multitask while watching a 1Seg program and show the
detailed Sent Mail display of a mail message sent to a person whose mail address is
not stored in the Phonebook.
pWhen “ ” appears, press and hold +c for at least one second to switch to the
viewer display and then operate.
Receive i-mode Mail while Watching
Detailed
Received
Mail display
Viewer
display
254
1Seg
By using the i-αppli Program Guide, you can select a program from the
program guide to start 1Seg or set TV Timer/Timer Recording. (See
page 293)
1m1SegProgram guide
pPress l( ) from the display of “Gガイド番組
表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote Control)” to
watch the program currently broadcast on the selected
channel.
pFor details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
[i-mode] FOMA version”.
Information
pEven if “Mail ticker display” is set to “Sender+subject”, the titles are not displayed for
Messages R/F, i-mode mail messages, and SMS messages received from the parties
not stored in the Phonebook.
pEven when you show the detailed Received Mail display by Multitask while you are
watching a 1Seg program, the display appears in the multiwindow.
pWhen “Mail ticker display” is set to “OFF”, “Receiving display” is set to “Alarm
preferred”, and you receive a mail message while watching a 1Seg program, the
Reception Result display appears and the mail ring tone sounds. The mail message is
shown in the multiwindow even when you show it from the Reception Result display.
However, the viewer display does not appear and the audio from a 1Seg program is
not output when you show a mail message from the party whose mail address is not
stored in the Phonebook.
pWhen “ ” appears, press and hold +c for at least one second to switch to the
viewer display and then operate.
<i-αppli Program Guide>
Using i-αppli Program Guide
Information
pYou can set the i-αppli Program Guide by “Program guide key” of “Software setting”.
pWhen you use “Gガイド番組表リモコン (G Guide Program List Remote Control)”
for the first time, you need to do initial settings.
1Seg enables you to use the data broadcasting in addition to the video
and audio. Various information including still images/moving pictures is
available from the site linked with TV programs.
pSee page 246 for data broadcasting and data broadcasting sites.
1Viewer display (Video Mode)
m( )
Video Mode switches to Data Broadcasting Mode and
“ ” appears.
pAudio from a 1Seg program is output even during Data
Broadcasting Mode.
pYou can display only data broadcasting when you press
c( ) in Data Broadcasting Mode. Press
c( ) to return to the former display.
2Select an item (link).
pThe confirmation display appears asking whether to connect to i-mode
depending on the data broadcasting and data broadcasting site.
pYou can scroll displays and move highlighted indications by pressing Bo while a
data broadcasting program or data broadcasting site is displayed.
pYou can go/return to the previous/next page by pressing No while a data
broadcasting site is displayed.
<Data Broadcasting>
Using Data Broadcasting
Information
pEach time you press +m( ), Video Mode and Data Broadcasting Mode are
switched.
pYou cannot display the data broadcasting on the horizontal display.
pYou cannot enter pictograms when you enter characters on data broadcasting or data
broadcasting site.
pDepending on the program, the audio might be output while the i-mode site is
displayed. However, the 1Seg video is not displayed.
pDepending on the program, a tone might be output when you display the data
broadcasting or data broadcasting site. In that case, the output of the 1Seg audio
temporarily stops, and the tone of the data broadcasting is preferentially output.
255
1Seg
You can use the highlighted information on the data broadcasting site to
easily use the functions such as making calls, or sending mail.
Select an item (link) and use the Phone To/AV Phone To or Mail To
function. (See page 207)
Some data broadcasting programs might contain TV links which lead to
the details of the programs or related information site.
From the TV links, you can store the site address information in the
TVlink list and can easily call them up for browsing later.
pWhile the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site is displayed, the confirmation
display might appear asking whether to send the contents you entered on the site or
whether to permit obtaining mobile phone information.
pWhen you select “YES (default)” from the confirmation display for data broadcasting,
the information on data broadcasting might be automatically updated, and you might
be charged a packet communication fee while watching a 1Seg program or playing
back a video. (See page 263)
pIf you move in a place where the airwave is unstable while watching a 1Seg program,
the video, data broadcasting, and data broadcasting site may be automatically
updated. In that case, the top page of the data broadcasting appears, and the
information you have entered into the connected data broadcasting or data
broadcasting site is cleared. Ensure that you watch the data broadcasting and data
broadcasting site in a place where the airwave is stable.
Use Highlighted Information for Various Operations
Information
Information
pDepending on the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site, the function of
composing i-mode mail or storing the Phonebook entries might be automatically used.
The confirmation display appears asking whether to use each function.
<TVlink>
Using TV Link
When you select the item (link) that can be stored in the TVlink list, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to store it in the TVlink list.
You can store up to 50 TV links.
1In Data Broadcasting Mode, select an item (link) that can
be stored in the TVlink listYES
pWhen you try to store the same URL or memo information, the confirmation
display appears asking whether to overwrite it.
pWhen the maximum number of TV links has already been stored in the TVlink list,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to store after deleting.
1m1SegTVlink
Select a TV link to be displayed.
pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether
to connect to i-mode, select “YES”.
pFor a link whose validity period is expired, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to delete it.
■Icons in the TVlink list
Store in TV Link
Information
pValidity period is set for some links.
pWhen a URL for a link contains more than 60 half-pitch characters, you cannot store
the link.
Call Up a Stored TV Link
TVlink list
Icon Format Description
Memo information Displays memo information.
Link communication
contents
Connects to the data broadcasting site.
(Video and caption are not displayed.)
i-mode contents Connects to the i-mode site.
Full Browser contents Connects via Full Browser.
256
1Seg
You can save the program you are watching as video or still images.
pThe copy control signals such as “Copy never”, “Copy once (copy for only one time)”,
and “Copy free” are incorporated in 1Seg. The copy control signals are determined by
each broadcasting station.
pYou cannot record the programs of “Copy never”. Further, when the copy control signal
is changed to “Copy never” during recording, the recording session is closed, and the
video recorded up to that point is saved.
The recorded video is saved to the microSD card (“Data box”→“1Seg”→
“Video”).
pSee page 350 for playing back the recorded video.
pYou cannot save the recorded video to the FOMA terminal.
1Viewer displayp(for at least one second)
The confirmation tone sounds, “ ” appears, and recording starts.
pYou can start recording also by pressing and holding Oo( ) for at least
one second in Video Mode.
pWhen the airwave reception level indicates “ ”, you cannot record video. Even
if “ ” is indicated, you might not be able to record it depending on the airwave
conditions.
pYou cannot change the channel during recording.
Function Menu of the TVlink List
Display detail Displays the title, URL, outline, content type, and validity
period of the TV link.
No. of TVlink Displays the number of the registered TV links.
Delete
Delete this YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for TV links to be deleted
l( )YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Recording a 1Seg Program while Watching
Record Video
2Press p.
The confirmation tone sounds and video is saved.
pYou can save the video also by pressing Oo( ) in Video Mode.
p
When the file size is larger than 2 Gbytes, or the storage location becomes full, the
recording automatically ends, and then the video recorded up to that point is saved.
■Estimate of the recordable time and the number of saved files
pThe maximum recordable time is estimation for 224 kbps of video, 48 kbps of audio,
and 52 kbps of data (including captions). The recordable time varies depending on the
broadcasting station or program.
pThe maximum file size for continuous recording is up to 2 Gbytes under SD-VIDEO
specifications.
pThe savable number of video files decreases depending on the data volume.
Capacity of the
card
The maximum recordable
time (total)
The maximum savable
number
2 Gbytes Approx. 640 minutes
99
4 Gbytes Approx. 1,280 minutes
8 Gbytes Approx. 2,560 minutes
16 Gbytes Approx. 5,120 minutes
Information
pThe playing time of the saved data might become shorter than the recording time
depending on the airwave conditions.
pThe recording is not suspended even when you switch displays by Multitask or when
a call comes in during recording.
pWhen the airwave conditions are changed to indicate “ ” during recording,
recording shifts to pause state, then “ ” and “ ” are displayed. Video and
audio during that period are not saved.
pIf you remove the battery pack or pull out the microSD card during recording, the
recorded data is saved to the microSD card as the file that cannot be played back.
pDepending on the broadcasting station or program, video and audio might be saved a
few seconds after your recording operation.
pYou cannot record when the video storage area is full. Also, you might not be able to
record when the unused space in the storage area is not enough. Delete unnecessary
video files and try again.
pSome programs cannot use the storage area fully.
257
1Seg
The recorded still images are saved to your FOMA terminal (“Data box”→
“1Seg”→“Image” folder). You can save up to 3,500 files in total sharing
the memory space with other data files, however, the number of files you
can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See page 526)
pSee page 335 for displaying the recorded still image files.
pYou cannot save still images to the microSD card.
1Viewer displayp
The confirmation tone sounds, and the still image is saved.
pYou can record still images also by pressing Oo( ) in Video Mode.
pWhen the airwave reception level indicates “ ”, you cannot record still images.
pThe file name and title name of the saved video are as follows:
File name: “PRGXXX”
Title name: “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”
(X: numerals, Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute)
pYou cannot set the recorded video for the Stand-by display, ring tone or Call
Receiving display.
pYou cannot record video during AV output.
Record Still Images
Information
Information
pThe file name and title name of the saved still image are as follows:
File name: “YYYYMMDDhhmmXXX”
Title name: “YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm”
(Y: year, M: month, D: date, h: hour, m: minute, X: numeral)
pYou cannot set the recorded still image for the Stand-by display or the Call Receiving
display.
pSee page 206 when images are stored to the maximum.
pData broadcasting and caption cannot be saved as still images.
pYou cannot record still images during AV output.
You can set TV Timer/Timer Recording of 1Seg programs. At the
specified date/time, an alarm sounds to notify you of the start of the
program.
pYou can set TV Timer/Timer Recording also by using the channel information (links)
displayed in the i-αppli Program Guide, sites, or mail. (See “Media To Function” on
page 208)
You can set TV Timer by setting the date/time, channel, and program
name. You can use “Act. TV w/ alarm” to automatically start 1Seg at the
set time. You can set TV Timer for up to 100 programs.
1m1SegTV Timer listl( )
Do the following operations.
pSelect a program you set TV Timer for to check the contents. You can edit them
by pressing l( ).
<TV Timer> <Timer Recording>
Setting Timer for Watching or Recording
1Seg Programs
TV Timer List
Channel Select a channel.
Edit title Enter a program name.
pYou can enter up to 60 full-pitch/120 half-pitch characters.
Start date
setting
Enter a date/time for starting watching.
Select an item.
Enter date . . . . . . Enter a date/time directly.
Choose date. . . . Select a date from the Calendar and enter a
time.
Repeat Select a type of repeat.
pIf you select “Select day”, put a check mark for days of the week
to be set and press l( ).
pThe item set with repetition is counted as one item.
258
1Seg
Alarm Select an alarm method.
ON. . . . . . . . . . . .Alerts you at the time set for the start date/time
comes. The setting for alarm notification is
completed.
ON/Set time . . . .Alerts you at the time set as the prenotification.
OFF. . . . . . . . . . .Does not alert. The setting for alarm notification
is completed. (You cannot watch the 1Seg
program.)
Select how many seconds (minutes) before the specified
time to be alerted.
pWhen you set “Auto power ON” to “ON”, you cannot set “15
seconds before”, “30 seconds before”, and “45 seconds before”
as the prenotification time.
Alarm tone Select a type of alarm toneSelect a folder
Select an alarm tone.
Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pIf you set to “Step”, the alarm tone is silent for about three
seconds, and then the volume steps up every about three
seconds, from Level 1 through Level 6.
Act. TV w/ alarm Select an item.
Auto ON . . . . . . .After the Timer Alarm Notification display
appears, 1Seg automatically starts.
Manual ON. . . . .You can manually activate 1Seg from the Timer
Alarm Notification display.
OFF. . . . . . . . . . .The timer alarm sounds only. You cannot
activate 1Seg from the Timer Alarm Notification
display.
Auto power ON You can set whether to turn on the power automatically to sound
the timer alarm when the alarm time comes during power off.
ON or OFF
1Seg volume You can set the sound volume of a 1Seg program when it is
activated by “Act. TV w/ alarm”.
Use Bo to adjust the volume.
Off timer You can set to end watching a 1Seg program for when the
specified time elapses after the 1Seg program automatically
starts by “Act. TV w/ alarm”.
Select a time.
2Press l( ).
You can set timer recordings by setting the date/time, channel, and
program name. You can set up to 100 timer recordings.
1m1SegTimer recording listl( )
Do the following operations.
pSelect a set timer recording to check the contents, and you can edit it by pressing
l( ).
pYou can display the used memory space (estimate) by pressing i( ).
Prefer manner
mode
You can set the sound volume of timer alarm for during Manner
Mode.
ON or OFF
ON. . . . Sounds at the same volume as set for “TV timer alarm”
on page 107.
OFF . . . Sounds at the volume set for this function.
Timer Recording List
Channel Select a channel.
Edit title Enter a program name.
pYou can enter up to 60 full-pitch/120 half-pitch characters.
Start date
setting
Enter a date/time for starting or ending recording. The timer alarm
sounds about one minute before the starting time.
Select an item.
Enter date. . . . . . . Enter a date/time directly.
Choose date . . . . Select a date from the Calendar and enter a
time.
End date setting
Repeat Select a type of repeat.
pIf you select “Select day”, put a check mark for days of the week
to be set and press l( ).
pThe item set with repetition is counted as one item.
259
1Seg
2Press l( ).
pWhen the confirmation display appears asking whether to set the timer recording,
select “YES”. If you select “YES (default)”, the same confirmation display does
not appear afterward.
Alarm You can set whether to sound alarm at the specified time of timer
alarm.
ON or OFF
Volume Use Bo to adjust the volume.
pYou cannot set the volume to “Step”.
Priority You can set a recording operation for when the start date/time
arrives while operating a function which cannot be started up
simultaneously.
Recording or Operation
Recording. . . . Suspends and terminates the function being
operated, and starts recording.
Operation . . . . The confirmation display appears asking
whether to start recording. Select “YES” to
suspend and terminate the function being
operated and start recording.
pFor while operating a function which can be started up
simultaneously, recording starts by the Multitask function.
pWhen the start time arrives during a call (including dialing and
ringing), recording starts after you end the call. When you are
using another function during a call, recording starts after you
end the call and the function.
Overwrite setting
When you set a recording to be repeated and set “Overwrite
setting” to “ON”, the program recorded last time is automatically
deleted and overwritten.
OFF or ON
Information
pYou can set TV Timer/Timer Recording also by using the program information
displayed in the i-αppli Program Guide, sites, or mail. In that case, the registration
display might appear with the start date/time, end date/time, channel, and program
name entered.
pWhen you set TV Timer for multiple programs and set the timer alarm to sound at the
same date/time, the alarm preferentially sounds for the program whose start date/time
is the earliest. When the start date/time of the programs is the same, the alarm
preferentially sounds for the program you set last.
pYou cannot set multiple timer recordings whose recording time overlaps. If you set two
timer recordings and the recording end time of one program is the same as the
recording start time of the other, recording of the first program ends about one minute
earlier.
pYou cannot set TV Timer/Timer Recording for the programs whose start date/time or
timer alarm date/time is past (about one minute before the start date/time for Timer
Recording), except for the timer setting to be repeated.
pThe setting of TV Timer/Timer Recording whose timer alarm date/time is past is
automatically deleted. However, the timer setting to be repeated and the TV Timer
setting for which “Alarm” is set to “OFF” are not deleted. Further, the settings are not
deleted when you are operating the TV Timer/Timer Recording function at the alarm
date/time.
pWhen no channel lists are set, you cannot set TV Timer/Timer Recording.
pTurn off the FOMA terminal after setting “Auto power ON” to “OFF” when you are near
electronic devices using high-precision control or weak signals, or where the use is
prohibited such as in airplanes and hospitals.
pWhen you have set “Priority” to “Operation” and the confirmation display is shown, the
recording does not start even at the recording start time and starts at the time you
select “YES”. However, the recording is not executed if the recording end time is over.
pWhen “Overwrite setting” is set to “ON”, the timer recording starts after erasing the
program previously recorded. Regardless of whether you have watched the recorded
program or not, or whether you have succeeded or failed timer recording, the
previously recorded program is erased. If it is not erased before the timer recording
starts, recording might not start on time.
pWhen you set “Overwrite setting” to “ON” for a recording, the file size of the recorded
video might become larger than that of the video recorded last time because the file
size varies depending on the recording (or watching) environment or programs. Note
that you might not be able to record correctly when the unused memory space in the
storage location is not enough.
pThe title of the recorded video file takes the program name booked for the timer
recording.
p“ ” appears on the viewer display during recording by Timer Recording.
pThe audio from a 1Seg program is not output during recording started by Timer
Recording. You can output the audio by pressing -r or adjusting the sound volume,
however.
Information
260
1Seg
The icon appears on the desktop.
“ ” . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for today (except the setting for past time).
“ ” . . . . Displayed when an alarm is set for tomorrow or onward only.
pIf you set TV Timer with “Alarm” set to “OFF”, the icons are not displayed.
Function Menu while the TV Timer List or the Timer
Recording List is Displayed
New Go to step 1 of “TV Timer List” on page 257 for TV Timer.
Go to step 1 on page 258 for Timer Recording.
Edit Go to step 1 of “TV Timer List” on page 257 for TV Timer.
Go to step 1 on page 258 for Timer Recording.
Sort You can change the display order.
Select an order.
Delete this YES
Delete past You can delete the setting of TV Timer/Timer Recording whose
start date/time or end date/time is set for the past date/time.
YES
Delete selected Put a check mark for the setting of TV Timer/Timer
Recording to be deletedl( )YES
Delete all Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Memory info
[Timer Recording list
only]
You can display the used memory space (estimate).
When you set an alarm for “TV Timer” or “Timer recording”
<TV Timer>
If you set “Act. TV w/ alarm” to other than “Auto ON”, the alarm sounds for about five
minutes, and illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for “Phone” of
“Vibrator”. The set start date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on
the display.
If you set “Alarm” to “ON” and “Act. TV w/ alarm” to “Auto ON”, 1Seg automatically starts
when the specified time comes. The alarm does not sound.
To end watching, press h and select “End 1Seg”.
If you set “Off timer”, the confirmation display appears asking whether to continue
watching when the specified time elapses. If you select “NO” or do nothing for about 15
seconds, 1Seg automatically terminates.
<Timer Recording>
About one minute before starting time, the alarm sounds for about two seconds, and
illumination lights. The vibrator works as the same setting for “Phone” of “Vibrator”. The
set start date/time, end date/time, channel, program name and an animation appear on
the display, then the viewer display appears. If you do nothing for about one minute after
the recording starts, the Stand-by display appears. You can show the viewer display by
pressing x and selecting “Activate 1Seg”.
To end recording started by Timer Recording to save video, press p from the viewer
display and select “YES”. In Video Mode, you can end recording to save video also by
pressing Oo( ) and selecting “YES”.
pDuring a call
The alarm sounds from the earpiece.
pDuring operations
<TV Timer>
When “Alarm setting” is set to “Operation preferred”, the timer alarm sounds only when
the Stand-by display is shown. When it is set to “Alarm preferred”, the timer alarm
sounds even while you are operating another function or during a call. (See page 403)
<Timer Recording>
Timer Recording works according to the setting of “Priority”. (See page 259) However,
Timer Recording might not work when you are reading to/writing from the microSD
card, or accessing the Data Storage Center.
When the time specified for “TV Timer” or “Timer recording”
comes
261
1Seg
pWhen the timer alarm is set to the same time of “Alarm”, “ToDo”, or “Schedule”
The alarm sounds in the priority order of “Alarm” → “Timer recording” → “ToDo”
→ “Schedule” → “TV timer”.
pWhen the power is turned off
The timer alarm does not sound except for the TV Timer setting with “Auto power ON”
set. For Timer Recording, you cannot record a 1Seg program unless the power is
turned on one minute before the start date/time.
The icon does not appear on the desktop even after turning on the power.
pIn Manner Mode
The vibrator, message display, and illumination light notify you. The alarm sounds at
the volume set for Manner Mode. (See page 107)
pDuring Lock All, Personal Data Lock or Omakase Lock
The timer alarm does not sound. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each lock
is released one minute before the start date/time.
However, when “TV timer” is set to “Accept” or “Timer recording” is set to “Accept” for
“Customize” of Personal Data Lock, the alarm sounds or the recording starts even
during Personal Data Lock. For TV Timer, you need to manually activate 1Seg even if
“Act. TV w/alarm” is set to “Auto ON”.
pWhile the microSD card is operated, during infrared communication or iC
communication, or while updating software program
The timer alarm does not sound. You cannot record a 1Seg program unless each
function is finished one minute before the start date/time.
Information
pWhen you set “Alarm setting” to “Alarm preferred” for the setting of TV Timer/Timer
Recording and the alarm time comes while you are dialing, the alarm sounds after you
call up the other party. When the alarm time comes while ringing, the alarm sounds
after you start talking.
pWhen you have set “PIN1 code entry set” to “ON” and set “Auto power ON” to
automatically turn on the power to sound TV timer alarm, the display for entering your
PIN1 code appears after the power is automatically turned on. The timer alarm does
not sound unless you enter your PIN1 code.
pWhen you set “Auto power ON” to automatically turn on the power to sound a TV
timer alarm, the alarm sounds after the wake-up image stops.
pYou might not be able to set some i-motion files/Chaku-uta Full® music files for TV
timer alarm.
The alarm tone stops by pressing any of the keys, but the animation/i-motion becomes a
still image, and the timer alarm message stays displayed. When “Act. TV w/ alarm” is set
to “OFF”, press any key again to clear it. When a call comes in, the alarm stops.
Press Oo( ) and select “YES” from the Timer Alarm Notification display; then
1Seg starts, and you can watch the program set for TV Timer. In the case that a program
is being recorded, the video recorded up to that point is saved.
The icon may appear on the desktop. You can check that icon for the contents of the
missed timer alarm (setting information) or recording result.
The setting information or recording result is the latest missed one.
pWhen “Act. TV w/ alarm” is set to other than “OFF”, you can start 1Seg also by
pressing Oo( ) and select “YES” from the display of setting Information.
pWhen recorded video is stored, you can play back the video also by pressing
Oo( ) from the display of recording result.
pDepending on the i-motion file you set for TV timer alarm, only the audio might be
output at the specified time.
pWhen a Chaku-uta Full® music file is set for TV timer alarm, only the audio is output at
the specified time. The illumination for when you play back a demo to select an alarm
tone differs from for when you are notified by an alarm.
pWhile Timer Recording is being performed during Personal Data Lock, the information
in the broadcasting storage area cannot be read out. Also, the functions such as
i-mode mail composition or Phonebook storage cannot be automatically used from
the data broadcasting or data broadcasting site. When 1Seg tries to use these
functions, a message appears telling that the function cannot be executed due to
Personal Data Lock.
To stop alarm tone/clear alarm message, animation, and
i-motion of TV timer alarm
When “Act. TV w/ alarm” of TV Timer is set to “Manual ON”
When “Timer Alarm Notification” is not executed or recording
is completed
Information
262
1Seg
You can display up to 20 recording results from the latest one.
1m1SegRecording result
Select a recording result.
pTo delete all recording results, press i( ),
enter your Terminal Security Code, and select “YES”.
1m1SegUser settings
Do the following operations.
Recording Result
<User Settings>
Setting 1Seg
Display
Caption You can set whether to display the caption for when watching
starts.
ON or OFF
Caption posit. in
w-scr
You can set the caption position on the horizontal display.
Upper or Lower
Icon You can set whether to always display guide (see page 250)
on the horizontal display.
ON or OFF
pEven if you set “Icon” to “OFF”, the icon such as “ ”, “ ”,
“ ” or “ ” appears during communication or when an
i-mode mail message or Message R/F comes in.
Mail ticker display For when you receive an i-mode mail message, SMS
message, or Message R/F while watching a 1Seg program,
you can set whether to notify you of the receiving by the ticker
on the viewer display.
Select an item.
Sender+subject . . . . . . Displays ticker of the sender and
title.
Receipt notification. . . Displays ticker of reception
notification only.
OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does not display ticker on the viewer
display.
pSee page 253 for details on ticker display.
Video
Mobile W-Speed The outlines of images are automatically corrected so that you
can watch more smooth videos of 1Seg programs.
ON or OFF
Image quality You can change the image quality.
Select an item.
Standard . . . .The average image quality
Sports . . . . . .The image quality suitable for sports programs
Cinema . . . . .The image quality suitable for films
Dynamic . . . .The dynamic image quality by accentuation
Display light You can set the duration of the display lights for when you
watch a 1Seg program.
Constant light or Lighting duration
Enter a lighting duration (minutes).
pEnter from “01” through “30” in two digits.
Sound effect
Auto volume You can set whether to turn up the sound volume so that it will
be more audible.
ON or OFF
Remaster You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth
device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch
range lost at data compression.
ON or OFF
263
1Seg
Listening You can set the effect of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Surround. . . Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.
Natur 1/2 . . . Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to
earphones and plays back natural sound.
Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.
OFF . . . . . . . Sets Listening to “OFF”.
Equalizer You can change the quality of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Normal. . . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.
H.BASS1 . . . Enhances bass sound.
H.BASS2 . . . Enhances bass sound more deeply than
H.BASS1.
Voice . . . . . . Makes conversation audible.
Train. . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound
leakage.
Recording
Rec. when low
battery
You can set whether to continue recording when the battery
runs short during recording.
ON or OFF
ON . . . .The confirmation display does not appear and
recording continues.
OFF . . . The confirmation display appears asking whether to
end recording.
Rec. program when
call
You can set whether to start recording automatically when a
call or PushTalk call comes in while watching a 1Seg
program.
ON or OFF
Data broadcasting
Image display
setting
You can set whether to display images of the data
broadcasting site. (See page 209)
Sound setting You can set whether to sound an effect tone of the data
broadcasting and the data broadcasting site.
ON or OFF
Reset settings If you select “YES (default)” from the confirmation display for
data broadcasting while watching a 1Seg program or playing
back video, the same confirmation display does not appear
afterward for both of them. The confirmation display resumes
after you execute Reset Settings.
YES
ECO mode You can set ECO Mode which fixes some settings and
reduces the battery consumption.
YES
pTo release ECO Mode, perform the same operation.
pOnce ECO Mode is set, the following settings are fixed and
cannot be changed. However, if you release ECO Mode,
settings return.
Mobile W-Speed: OFF
Image quality: Standard
Remaster: OFF
Listening: OFF
Equalizer: Normal
Reset channel setting You can delete all channel lists.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Reset storage area i( )DeleteDelete this or Delete all
Delete this. . . . Deletes only the information of the affiliated
broadcasting stations you selected, from the
broadcasting storage area.
Delete all . . . . . Deletes the information of all affiliated
broadcasting stations created in the
broadcasting storage area.
YES
pIf you select “Delete all”, you need to enter your Terminal
Security Code.
Reset TV settings You can reset each of “User settings” to the default.
See “Function List” on page 466 for the items to be reset.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Check TV settings You can check each of “User settings”.
264
1Seg
Information
<Icon>
pThe guide display might appear even if “Icon” is set to “OFF” when the airwave
conditions have got worse.
<Mobile W-Speed>
pWhen you set to “ON”, you might not be able to have enough effects of “Image
quality”.
pMobile W-Speed becomes invalid during ECO mode, displaying in the multiwindow,
or AV output.
pDepending on the broadcast state, you might not be able to have the effects of Mobile
W-Speed.
pEven when “Mobile W-Speed” is set to “ON” during recording or during timer
recording, it is invalid when you play back the recorded video.
<Display light>
pWhile a display is shown in Multiwindow, the setting of this function is invalid. The
lighting duration follows the setting of “Backlight” on page 112.
<Rec. program when call>
pIn the following cases, the recording cannot be started when a call comes in:
・During Play Background ・While being displayed in the multiwindow
・While being recorded ・While being recorded by Timer Recording
・In standby state for Timer Recording
<Image display setting>
pIf you change this setting, “Image display setting” of “i-mode Browser set.” of “i-mode
settings” is also changed.
<Reset settings>
pYou cannot reset the confirmation display at the start of 1Seg (see page 246) and at
the time of Timer Recording (see page 259).
265
Music
Music&Video Channel
Music&Video Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Setting Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Playing/Operating Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
MUSIC Player
Playing Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Saving Music Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Using MUSIC Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . <MUSIC Player> 274
Using Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
■Handling Music Files
You can use music files saved on the microSD card for personal use only. Before using, give enough consideration not to infringe on the third
party’s intellectual property rights or other rights such as copyright.
266
Music
Music&Video Channel is a service which automatically delivers up to
about one-hour programs at night by just setting your favorite music
programs in advance. Further, you can enjoy high-quality video program
of up to about 30 minutes. Programs are updated periodically and you
can enjoy the delivered programs at your convenient time such as on
commuting.
■Before using Music&Video Channel
pMusic&Video Channel is a pay service which is available on a subscription basis. (To
apply for Music&Video Channel, you need to subscribe to Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full
or Pake-hodai double besides i-mode.)
pBesides the service fee for using Music&Video Channel, you might be separately
charged an information fee depending on the program.
pIf you insert the UIM to the Music&Video Channel incompatible FOMA terminal after
you subscribe to Music&Video Channel, you cannot use Music&Video Channel
Service. Note that the service fee applies unless you cancel the Music&Video Channel
subscription.
pYou cannot set or obtain programs during international roaming.※ Take procedures to
halt the distribution of programs before going abroad. Then, after homecoming, resume
receiving distribution.
※When you try to set or obtain programs during international roaming, note that you
are charged a packet communication fee for the i-mode communication.
pYou can use mail functions, display i-mode sites, and so on, while listening to program
using Music&Video Channel (Play Background).
See page 497 for the combination patterns of simultaneously usable functions.
pFor the details on Music&Video Channel, refer to “Mobile Phone User's Guide [i-mode]
FOMA version”.
Music&Video Channel
If you previously set a program that you want to watch, the FOMA
terminal automatically downloads the program data at night.
1mMUSICMusic&Video Channel
2Set programFollow the instructions on the display to
set a program.
For details, refer to “Mobile Phone User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
pSee page 206 when data files are stored to the maximum.
“ ” appears on the Stand-by display 12 hours before the time
the program obtaining starts. However, it does not appear if
you have inserted a UIM which is different from the one you
used to set the program.
Programs are automatically obtained at night. The display for
obtaining programs does not appear but “ ” appears on the
desktop when they are successfully obtained. Press Oo,
highlight “ ”, and press Oo( ) to display the
Music&Video Channel display.
When obtaining fails, “ ” appears.
Setting Programs
When a program is set
Information
pWhen the communication is disconnected during obtaining a program, re-obtaining is
automatically tried up to five times by an interval of about three minutes. When a
display for obtaining a program is shown, however, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to re-obtain the program.
pThe ring tone does not sound and the vibrator does not work to notify that obtaining
programs starts or is completed. When you set “Music&Video Ch illum.” of
“Illumination” to “ON”, the Call/Charging indicator flickers when obtaining programs is
completed. (See page 115)
pYou can set up to two programs at once.
pNote that a newly obtained program overwrites a saved program and you can no
longer play back that saved program afterward. To avoid overwriting, perform “Move
program” to move the program to the “Saved program” folder.
267
Music
1Music&Video Channel displaySet program
Follow the instructions on the display.
You can check or cancel the set program. For details, refer to “Mobile Phone
User’s Guide [i-mode] FOMA version”.
pYou cannot copy or save the obtained program to the microSD card.
pTo set programs, you need to register the site which offers Music&Video Channel
programs to your My Menu. (See page 191)
pIf you have not subscribed to Music&Video Channel, select “About this service” to see
the Music&Video Channel introduction page.
pWhen the programs could not be obtained due to “power off” or “low battery” at the
start time of program obtaining, re-obtaining is performed at night of the following day.
pIt may take a time to obtain programs, so fully charge the battery and operate in the
good radio wave conditions.
pYou cannot perform the setting operation and automatic obtaining of the program
selected on the Music&Video Channel display or the program in use.
pWhen you cancel Music&Video Channel, the programs other than those moved by
“Move program” are deleted.
pIf you insert a UIM which is different from the one you used to set programs, programs
cannot be automatically obtained. Set the programs again from the Music&Video
Channel display.
pWhen you select a service menu for Music&Video Channel, the message “Confirm
set up information?” appears. If you select “YES”, the programs that have been
distributed might be deleted. However, they will not be deleted while the distribution is
set to be halted.
pIf you insert the UIM of the FOMA terminal that you have been set for programs into
another Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA terminal, the programs cannot be
obtained automatically. Select “Set program” again from the Music&Video Channel
display to automatically update the program setting on the FOMA terminal, then the
programs can be obtained automatically.
Check/Cancel the Set Program
Information
Information
pEven if the setting of a program is canceled, My Menu is not deleted.
“ ” appears on the desktop when the automatic program acquisition
fails or the program is not updated even after the program distribution
date. When the automatic acquisition fails, you can manually obtain the
program.
1Music&Video Channel displaySelect a programYES
pFor a partially obtained program, select “Play” to play it back.
pFor a program which has not been updated, select “Play” to play it back.
pSee page 206 when data files are stored to the maximum.
Obtain a Program Manually
Information
pWhen obtaining of a program is suspended, the part of the program obtained up to
that point is saved. To obtain remaining part, you can manually obtain it except in
some time zones. When a program has been updated or switched to another
program, obtaining starts not from the suspended point but from the beginning.
pYou cannot re-obtain the program whose playable deadline has expired. Such a
program cannot be updated until the next distribution date.
pYou may not be able to manually obtain programs depending on the time zone.
268
Music
pYou can enjoy playing back programs in stereo sound by connecting to the Stereo
Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy playing back programs wirelessly by using
a commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 418)
1mMUSICMusic&Video Channel
Select a program.
“ ” is displayed while Music&Video Channel is
activated, and “ ” is displayed when the program
shifts to pause state during Play Background.
pWhen a program is highlighted, the next distribution
date is displayed under the program name. It is not
displayed when the program distribution is suspended.
It might not be displayed when the automatic program
obtaining fails.
pWhen information of the previously played program
exists, playback starts from the position and/or in the
mode accordingly.
pHighlight a program and press l( ); then the
Chapter list is displayed.
pHighlight a program and press m( ) to connect to the URL of the
program URL information.
pThe images on the right are displayed
when you cannot display a preview
image:
pWhen you press and hold p for at least one second or press h during
playback or pause, playing back program ends.
Playing/Operating Programs
Music&Video
Channel display
Unplayable
image
No preview
images
Obtaining
program
You can play back programs also from Data Box. From Data Box, you can
play back currently distributed programs as well as the programs that
have been distributed in the past and moved to the “Saved program”.
1mData boxMusic&Video Channel
Downloaded program or Saved program
Select a program.
pYou can switch display
format each time you press
c( ) from the
Program list.
■About Music&Video Channel Playback display
…Program image or program video
(When no images are stored, an animation
appears.)
…Chapter number/Number of chapters
…Chapter name/Artist name
…Program name
…Playback state
…Playback time/Total playback time
…Play mode (No indication for “Normal”)
: Repeat
…Equalizer
: Normal : H.BASS1
: H.BASS2 : Train
…Stereo/Monaural
: Stereo : Monaural
Operate Music&Video Channel from Data Box
Program Folder list Program list
 
269
Music
…Listening (No indication for “OFF”)
: Surround : Natur1 : Natur2
…Remaster (No indication for “OFF”)
: ON
…Icon of Bluetooth connection (No indication for not connected)
: Being connected
…Sound volume
■Operation while playing back a Music&Video Channel program
Operation Key operation
Halt l( )
Pause Oo( ) or p
pOo( ) or p to play back
Sound volume
adjustment
Bo or </>
Replay next chapter
Vo or >(for at least one second)
Replay previous
chapter
Co or <(for at least one second)
pWhen playback time is over three seconds or no previous
chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file.
Search
(fast forward)※
Press and hold Vo.
Search
(fast rewind)※
Press and hold Co.
Connect to site m( )
Switch vertical
display/horizontal
display
c( )
pEach time of pressing switches in order of playback on the
vertical display → playback on the horizontal display fitted to
the display size → playback on the enlarged full display.
Display next image 3
Display previous image
1
Remaster 9
pEach time of pressing switches between “ON” and “OFF”.
Listening 8
pEach time of pressing switches in order of “OFF” → “Surround”
→ “Natur1” → “Natur2”.
※You cannot operate during pause.
From the Music&Video Channel Playback display, you can do the following
operations by using the switch of an earphone/microphone (option):
■Icons on the Music&Video Channel display/the Program list
The icons on the Music&Video Channel display indicate the download status.
p“ ” is added to the newly obtained program.
pSome programs have restrictions on the number of playbacks, playable deadline, or
playback period. “ ” is added to the icon of the program with playback restrictions and
“ ” is added to the icon of the program with restrictions expired. You can check the
playback restrictions for the program by “Program info”.
pSome programs have restrictions on operation. “ ” is added to the icon of the
program with operation restrictions.
pDepending on the program, its playable time zone is fixed. “ ” is added to the icon of
the program with time zone restrictions. The time follows the time information obtained
from the network.
pWhen obtaining a periodically-updated program fails, “ ” appears to tell the program
has not been updated. “ ” disappears when obtaining the program starts.
pThe file restriction is set to all the Music&Video Channel programs. See page 240 for
the file restrictions.
Equalizer 7
pEach time of pressing switches in order of “Normal” →
“H.BASS1” → “H.BASS2” → “Train”.
Operation Key operation
Operation Switch operation
Pause Press once.
pTo play back, press again.
Replay next
chapter
Press twice in succession.
Replay previous
chapter
Press three times in succession.
pWhen playback time is over three seconds or no previous
chapter is found, you go back to the beginning of the file.
Icon Description
Successfully obtained program
Broken program
Partially obtained program or unsuccessfully obtained program
270
Music
Information
pThe information of the previously played program is erased if you do the following
operations:
･When you turn on/off the FOMA terminal
･When you update the program
･When you delete or move the previously played program
pIf you try to play back a program with a low battery, the confirmation display appears
asking whether to play it back. The battery alert tone sounds regardless of the setting
of “Keypad sound”. When the battery becomes low during playback (including during
Play Background), the playback pauses, and the confirmation display appears asking
whether to end the playback.
pIn the following cases, playback pauses and resumes after you finish each operation:
･When you make/receive a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk call
･When you receive a mail message or Message R/F while “Receiving display” is set
to “Alarm preferred” or the Stand-by display is shown
･When an alarm of “Alarm”, “Schedule”, “ToDo”, “TV timer” or “Timer recording”
sounds
Depending on the function which occurred, the confirmation display might appear
asking whether to end the Music&Video Channel program.
pIf a black display appears after you play back a program with time zone restrictions,
playback starts at the next playable time zone.
pIf you playback a program in countries other than Japan, the playable deadline might
expire before or after the displayed deadline.
pOn the full display, you cannot play back the audio-only music programs and video
programs of QCIF (176 x 144) or smaller.
Function Menu of Music&Video Channel Display/Program
Folder List/Program List
Chapter list You can display the list of chapters set for the program. Select
a chapter to play back the selected chapter and afterward.
pPress i( ) and select “Chapter info” to display the
information about the chapter title, playback time, etc.
Play mode setting Normal or Repeat
Normal . . .Plays back the program once in the order of the
chapters.
Repeat. . . .Plays back the program repeatedly in the order of
the chapters.
Program info You can display the program title, distribution source,
playback restrictions, etc.
Move program Programs currently distributed are updated to new programs
on the next distribution date. You can save the current
programs by moving them to the “Saved program” folder
before the distributed program is updated. You can check
“Memory info” for unused memory space you can save to.
You can save up to 10 programs sharing the memory space
with other data files, however, the number of programs you
can save decreases depending on the data volume. (See
page 526)
YES
pSee page 206 when programs are stored to the maximum.
Set desktop/ key
Add desktop icon See page 31.
long press set. See page 404.
Edit title Enter a title.
pYou can enter up to 31 full-pitch/63 half-pitch characters.
Reset title You can reset the title to the default.
YES
Multiple-choice You can select and delete multiple programs stored in “Saved
program” folder.
Put a check mark for programs to be deleted
i( )DeleteYES
Connect to URL
You can access the URL when the program has the URL
information.
YES
Display image You can display the program images stored in the program.
pPress r to return to the list.
Memory info You can display the used memory space (estimate).
pYou can display them also by pressing c( ).
271
Music
Delete/Delete this You can delete the program.
YES
Delete all You can delete all the programs stored in the “Saved
program” folder.
Enter your Terminal Security CodeYES
Information
<Play mode setting>
pThe playable mode setting is invalid for the programs having the time zone
restrictions.
pEven if you set to “Repeat”, the program is not played back repeatedly if it has no time
zone restrictions but has restrictions on the number of playbacks.
<Move program>
pYou cannot move the program when its obtaining is not completed, or the move
restriction or time zone restriction is set for the program.
<Edit title>
pWhen the next program is delivered, the edited title is overwritten by the new title.
<Multiple-choice> <Delete/Delete this> <Delete all>
pEven when you delete the program, the program setting is not released.
Function Menu during Playback/Pause
Chapter list See page 270.
Play mode setting See page 270.
Sound effect
Remaster You can bring the sound from an earphone or Bluetooth
device to the original sound by complementing high-pitch
range lost at data compression.
ON or OFF
Listening You can set the effect of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Surround . . . .Makes the sound natural and stereophonic.
Natur 1/2 . . . .Complements the cooped-up feeling specific to
earphones and plays back natural sound.
Select 1 or 2 according to your taste.
OFF . . . . . . . .Sets Listening to “OFF”.
Equalizer You can change the quality of the sound from an earphone or
Bluetooth device.
Select an item.
Normal. . . . . Reproduces normal sound quality.
H.BASS1 . . . Enhances bass sound.
H.BASS2 . . . Enhances bass sound more deeply than
H.BASS1.
Train. . . . . . . Minimizes abnormal sound that causes sound
leakage.
Program info See page 270.
Chapter info You can display the title, play time, etc. of the chapter currently
played back.
Connect to URL See page 270.
Previous image You can display a previous image.
Next image You can display a next image.
Information
<Sound effect>
pEven if an earphone or Bluetooth device is not connected, the respective setting
contents are displayed on the display.
<Previous image> <Next image>
pYou can display up to three images, however, you may not be able to display them
depending on the program.
272
Music
You can play back music files on your FOMA terminal by using MUSIC
Player or i-motion player.
■MUSIC Player (See page 274)
By “MUSIC Player” of “MUSIC”, you can play back Chaku-uta Full® music files or music
files saved from music CDs to the microSD card via a personal computer.
pYou can display mail, i-mode sites, and so on, while listening to music by MUSIC
Player (Play Background).
See page 497 for the combination patterns that can be started.
■i-motion Player (See page 342)
From the “imotion” folder in “Data box”, you can play back the voice-only i-motion file
(including music data of AAC format) or AAC format files stored on the microSD card.
You can download Chaku-uta Full® music files from sites. You can save
up to 250 Mbytes of files including other data files. (See page 522)
1Call up a Chaku-uta Full® music file downloadable site
Select a Chaku-uta Full® music fileSaveYES
pSelect “Play” to play back the Chaku-uta Full® music file. See page 277 for
operations while a Chaku-uta Full® music file is being played back.
pSelect “Property” to display the Chaku-uta Full® music file information. (See
“Music info” on page 280)
pSee page 206 when Chaku-uta Full® music files are stored to the maximum.
2Select a destination folder.
pPress l( ) to display folders at the second-tier level or lower, if they
exist. Press r to return to the upper level.
Playing Music
Saving Music Files
Download Chaku-uta Full® Music Files
When you press l( ) to suspend downloading or when the downloading is
suspended by an incoming call, the confirmation display appears asking whether to
resume downloading. Select “YES” to resume downloading the remaining part. Select
“NO” to show the data acquisition completion display. Select “Save pt.” to save it to a
folder in “i-mode” folder in “MUSIC” in “Data box”.
You can re-download the rest of the partially saved file from “Data box”.
pThe title name of the partially saved Chaku-uta Full® music file takes the date and time
when it is downloaded.
pWhen the playable period or playable deadline of the partially saved Chaku-uta Full®
music file has expired, you cannot download the remaining segments of the file.
Further, the partially saved file is deleted when you save re-obtained data.
Uta-hodai files are the Chaku-uta Full® music files you can play back just for a period of
the contract with a content provider. The playable deadline is specified in the license
information that is downloaded together with the music file.
Even when the playable deadline has expired, you can play back the music file by
updating the license.
pWhen a music file (Chaku-uta Full® music file downloaded on the membership service
basis) whose playable deadline has expired is found at the start of MUSIC Player, the
confirmation display appears asking whether to update the playable deadline. Select
“YES” to update the file (Packet communication fee is charged). Select “NO” not to use
the music file. See page 275 for starting MUSIC Player.
pSome Uta-hodai music files are applied with surplus playable days even after the
playable deadline has passed. During this period, you can play back files without
updating the playable deadline information. When the surplus playable days are over,
you cannot play back the files. Also if you download a music file with playable period
not updated, you cannot play it back before it is saved.
pWhen the upper limit of the (membership) music services you can register is exceeded,
the confirmation display appears asking whether to overwrite them. Select “YES” to
overwrite a music service whose playable deadline is the oldest. You can no longer
play back the music files downloaded from the overwritten service.
pPacket communication fee for updating the playable deadline during international
roaming is not supported by Pake-hodai, Pake-hodai full, and Pake-hodai double.
When downloading Chaku-uta Full® music file is suspended
About Uta-hodai
273
Music
You can use Windows Media Player 10/11 to save Windows Media®
Audio (WMA) files from a personal computer to the microSD card.
You can save up to 1,000 WMA files.
pAs well as music files, you can save playlists, jacket images, and license keys.
First, prepare the devices required for saving WMA files.
pP-08A
pmicroSD card
pFOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
pPersonal computer with Windows Media Player 10 (10.00.00.3802 or later)/11 installed
･
When you use Windows Media Player 10/11 in Windows XP, use Windows XP
Service Pack 2 or later. When you use Windows Vista, use Windows Media Player 11.
pBefore connecting the FOMA terminal to a personal computer, you need to check the
version of Windows Media Player.
Set “USB mode setting” to “MTP mode”. (See page 369)
Information
pYou can save up to 5 Mbytes per Chaku-uta Full® music file.
pWhen the Uta-hodai music file set for the ring tone or alarm tone needs to be updated
because the playable deadline has expired, the default tone sounds when a call
comes in, or an alarm sounds/vibrates.
pFor a Chaku-uta Full® music file that has restrictions on the number of playbacks,
playable period, or playable deadline, “ ” is displayed at the head of the title. If you
remove the battery and keep it aside for a long time, the date/time information in the
FOMA terminal might be reset. In that case, you cannot play back the Chaku-uta Full®
music file that has restrictions on the playable period or playable deadline. See “Music
info” for checking the playback restrictions.
pPartially saved Chaku-uta Full® music files cannot be played back from Data Box.
Save WMA Files
Prepare devices required for saving WMA files
Use the FOMA terminal as reader/writer
1
2
Start Windows Media Player 10/11 and save WMA files to the microSD
card.
pYou cannot save WMA files to the FOMA terminal.
pFor how to operate Windows Media Player 10/11, refer to Help for Windows Media
Player 10/11.
pWhen you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
from the FOMA terminal.
When you remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02, remove it after
finishing the software in use.
You have the ability to save music files using the Napster® application.
pPlease download the Napster® application from the following website (in Japanese
only):
http://www.napster.jp/
pIf you have any questions about the Napster® application, refer to the following website
(in Japanese only):
http://www.napster.jp/support/
Save music files to the microSD card
About the Napster® Application
3
Information
pDo not remove the microSD card during saving a file. You may lose the file.
pMusic files and jacket images are saved to /PRIVATE/DOCOMO/MMFILE/WM/ on
the microSD card.
pThe WMA files saved to the microSD card using another FOMA terminal might not be
recognized by the P-08A. Further, the files might not be recognized by the P-08A
even when it is connected to the personal computer with “USB mode setting” set to
“MTP mode”.
In this case, delete “WM” folder and “WM_SYSTEM” folder on the microSD card by
using your personal computer, or format the microSD card (see page 368). Note that
not only music files but also all the other files are deleted when the microSD card is
formatted.
pWhen unused memory space on the microSD card becomes less than 300 Kbytes,
the card might not be recognized by a personal computer. Check the unused memory
space on the microSD card and delete unnecessary data files if unused memory
space is 300 Kbytes or less. Then connect to the personal computer after setting
“USB mode setting” to “MTP mode” again.
274
Music
By using SD-Jukebox (commercial item), you can save the music files on
the music CDs to the microSD card as AAC format data.
pBy using the microSD card adapter (option), you can save music files to the microSD
card directly from a personal computer as well.
※The following steps are an example for when the FOMA terminal is used as a
microSD reader/writer for saving music files.
You can purchase SD-Jukebox from the following website (in Japanese only):
http://club.panasonic.jp/mall/sense/
pFor details about operating environments, refer to the following website (in Japanese
only):
http://panasonic.jp/support/software/sdjb/
First, prepare the devices required for saving music files.
pP-08A
pmicroSD card
pFOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (option)
pPersonal computer (Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows Vista)
pSD-Jukebox (commercial item)
pMusic CD you want to save
Install SD-Jukebox on the personal computer.
Set “USB mode setting” to “microSD mode”. (See page 369)
Save Music Files by Using SD-Audio
About SD-Jukebox
Prepare devices required for saving music files
Install SD-Jukebox
Use the FOMA terminal as reader/writer
1
2
3
Start SD-Jukebox and set a music CD on the personal computer. Then
use SD-Jukebox to save music files to the microSD card.
pFor how to operate SD-Jukebox, refer to Help for SD-Jukebox.
pWhen you finish saving, remove the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
from the FOMA terminal.
You can play back Chaku-uta Full® music files obtained from sites or
music files saved to the microSD card.
To play back music files, select “MUSIC Player” from “MUSIC” on Main
Menu. Play Background is available so that you can use mail functions,
display sites, and so on, while listening to music.
To manage folders or data files, select “MUSIC” from “Data box” on Main
Menu.
pNote that battery consumption will be faster when you use MUSIC Player.
pYou can enjoy playing back music in stereo sound by connecting to the Stereo
Earphone Set (option). Also, you can enjoy listening to music wirelessly by using a
commercial Bluetooth device. (See page 418)
pIf the number of stored files increases, it may take long to start MUSIC Player.
pFor details on MUSIC Player, refer to the DOCOMO website.
Save music files to the microSD card
<MUSIC Player>
Using MUSIC Player
4
275
Music
1Press and hold p for at least one
second.
The Player Menu display appears.
pWhen the information of the previously played music file
remains, the playback starts at the position and in the
mode according to the information.
2Select an item.
All tracks. . . Displays all the music files saved on the FOMA terminal and
microSD card.
Artist . . . . . . Displays all the artist names.
Highlight the name of the artist you want to listen to and press
Oo( ), then all the album names of the selected artist are
displayed. (Go to Album)
Album . . . . . Displays all the albums.
Highlight the name of the album you want to listen to and press
Oo( ).
Genre. . . . . . Displays all the genres.
Highlight the genre you want to listen to and press Oo( ).
Playlist. . . . . Displays all the playlists created by the FOMA terminal and personal
computer.
See page 283 for the playback of playlists.
Play Back Music Files
Player Menu display
pThe “★” mark is added to the
playlist which is being played
back or was previously played
back.
pWhen you select “Artist”,
“Album”, or “Genre”, and press
l( ) from the Type list,
all the music files stored in the
selected item are played back.
pYou can switch display format
each time you press
c( ) from the Music
list.
pWhen “ ” is displayed on
the Type list or the Music list,
you can display the playback display of previously played back music file or
music file in-play by pressing m( ).
pYou might not be able to display all the stored music files depending on their file
size.
pThe images on the right are displayed
when you cannot display a preview
image:
3Select a music file.
Playback starts from the selected music file in the order listed on the Type list or
playlist. “ ” is displayed while MUSIC Player is activated, and “ ” is
displayed when the music shifts to pause state during Play Background.
pThe “★” mark is added to the music file which is currently played back or was
previously played back.
pPress and hold p for at least one second during playback, pause, or halt, or
press h to end MUSIC Player.
pWhen you press m( ) or r during playback, the former Music list is
displayed.
Type list
(For Artist)
Music list
Cannot be
displayed
Incomplete
download
No image,
etc.

Navigation menu